



1^;& ^H 


i 


K>i» 


l 









lass 



v&57 

run r<v i 



PRESENTED IJV 



copy 2, 



?/ 



GERMAN GRAMMAR 



L 






M&d 



PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 



GERMAN LANGUAGE 



Br CHARLES FOLLEN, 

PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 
IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 



THIRD EDITION. 



BOSTON: 

HILLIARD, GRAY, AND COMPANY 

1837. 



I 









Zj 



\ 



Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1832, 

by Hilliard, Gray, and Co. 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 

I 

Gift 
Judge and Mrs, Isaac R. H"rtt 
July 3, 1933 



CAMBRIDGE: 
CHARLES FOLSOM, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY. 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 



The language, of which this grammar contains the practical 
rules, is frequently designated by the name of the High Ger- 
man. This epithet was originally applied to the language in 
order to distinguish it from the Low German, which compre- 
hends all those dialects that are spoken in the level coun- 
tries of the north of Germany. But as the language which is 
called the High German, diners from the dialects of the south 
of Germany, as well as from those of the north, this name is 
now applied exclusively to that general language, which is 
spoken and written by all wellbred Germans. Accordingly 
it is more properly called the German language, without any 
other epithet. 

Among the various dialects which have existed and still 
exist in different parts of Germany, there is a characteristic 
difference between those of upper and of lower Germany. The 
dialects of the north of Germany are in general softer than 
those of the south, and the vowels are more protracted ; while 
the southern dialects are characterized by greater variety 
and energy. In all these various dialects we discover the 
distinct traces of one common and original language, of which 
each dialect may be considered a more or less perfect 
copy. But of the time when this original language may 
have been used as the common instrument of speech by the 
whole German race, we have as little knowledge, as of the 
primeval history of the nation itself. If we examine the his- 
tory of Germany, and particularly the remaining documents 
of its language from the fourth century to the fifteenth, we 
find that at different periods one of the various dialects was 
more than the other employed for literary productions. Such 



> 



VI PREFACE. 

a temporary ascendency was owing partly to the fact, that 
sometimes one of the German tribes happened to possess a 
greater number of superior minds, and partly to political 
circumstances. As Germany was an elective kingdom, its 
government sometimes devolved on men of different German 
tribes, who had it in their power to increase the influence of 
their native dialect, particularly if they promoted literature 
and science. Thus in the reign of the emperors from the 
house of Hohenstaufen, the Suahian dialect gained the ascen- 
dency, and became the classical language of the polite or, 
as it is commonly called, the romantic literature of Germany, 
in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries. 

In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, when the spirit 
of poetry died away, and writings in prose increased, the 
language also assumed a more prosaic character. This 
change was effected by various causes, as, by the language of 
the laws or customs, which were at that time committed to 
writing ; moreover by translations, and novels, and particu- 
larly by the writings of those religious philosophers, who are 
known by the name of mystics. Tauler, who lived in the 
fourteenth century, and whose works still belong to the most 
interesting documents of ancient German prose, is particular- 
ly celebrated among the German mystics. These thinkers 
in theology, although they were frequently led into error by 
their imperfect knowledge of natural objects and an aversion 
to the examination of facts, on the other hand distinguished 
themselves by their independence of established prejudices, 
and by intense thought, by which they strove to sound the 
essence of religion. Their merits in developing the German 
language cannot be doubted. Tiiey arose in different parts 
of Germany, and seem to have intentionally avoided such 
provincial expressions, as might have prevented their writings 
from being generally diffused ; and these writings could not 
but impress the minds of others with the difference between 
the general substance and the local ingredients of the Ian- 



PREFACE. Vll 

guage. Thus one writing corrected another, and the language 
gained in generality, as well as in philosophical and grammati- 
cal exactness ; while it lost by degrees its ancient poetical flow 
and richness. 

This prosaic language, thus formed, is essentially the same 
which prevailed at the time of the Reformation in the six- 
teenth century, and which at present, with few alterations, is 
spoken and written by all wellbred Germans. It is a false 
notion which was first spread by Adelung,* that Luther, in 
his writings, and particularly in his translation of the Bible, 
availed himself of his native dialect of the Electorate of Sax- 
ony, which by the signal success of his books became the 
general language of Germany. Luther cannot be considered 
as the father of the general language of his country ; no 
more than he can be regarded as the father of the Reforma- 
tion. He found them both already existing, and promoted 
and modified them according to his own views. With re- 
spect to the language, he says himself, " I have not a distinct, 
particular, and peculiar kind of German, but I use the com- 
mon German language, in order that the inhabitants of both 
the upper and lower countries may understand me." But 
even without these express words of Luther, the above 
statement would be sufficiently evident from a considerable 
number of books which were published before, and at the 
same time with those of Luther, in all of which we find 
essentially the same language used for various subjects; as, 
for example, by the painter Albreclit Diirer for laying down 
the principles of geometry, drawing, and fortification. But 
the merit of Luther consists in his having written the com- 
mon language with particular propriety and grammatical pre- 
cision, and in having extended it more than any other author 
among the people at large. 

* This error has lately been repeated by Noehden in the Preface 
to his Grammar. 



Vlll PREFACE. 

The poetic powers of this common language, which had 
been formed principally by prose writers, were developed 
by some eminent minds in the seventeenth century, among 
whom we mention particularly Frederic a Spee, and Martin 
Opitz, the founder of the Silesian school of poets. But in 
the course of the seventeenth and the beginning of the eigh- 
teenth century, the language was adulterated by French ex- 
pressions and modes of speaking. From this debasement 
the language, as well as the literature of Germany, was re- 
deemed by the great authors who have distinguished themselves 
during the last eighty years. They have shown its suffi- 
ciency for every branch of literature and science, and have 
restored to it that most precious of all its properties, the 
power of being developed and increased out of its own sub- 
stance. 

The works of these authors, the history and the genius of 
the language, and the manner in which it is used by wellbred 
people in different parts of Germany, are the true standards 
for speaking and writing, it correctly. There is no part of 
Germany where the whole population speak the language 
correctly. Neither the public of Dresden or Meissen, nor 
that of Hanover or Gottingen, can be looked to as filling the 
place of an academy of the classical German language. 
Slight shades of provincial dialects enter into the manner of 
speaking even of the best educated persons. Some faults in 
pronunciation, which are peculiar to different parts of Ger- 
many, may be mentioned here. Sometimes b is confound- 
ed with p, and d with t; a and 6 are pronounced like e, 
and u like i; g in the beginning of words is pronounced by 
some Germans like /:, and by others like j. Sometimes 5 
before t and p is pronounced like sh in English ; and sch 
w r hen it stands before a liquid consonant is sounded like s ; 
final syllables in e (with or without other letters) are 
pronounced too short, and sometimes with a nasal sound. 
A gross grammatical fault consists in using the accusative 



PREFACE. IX 

instead of the dative, and the dative instead of the accusa- 
tive case. 

After these observations on the history and actual state of 
the German language, I will add a few on German gram- 
mar. It is reported of Charlemagne, that among other plans 
for the advancement of knowledge he conceived also that of 
inducing the learned men of that age to compose a grammar 
of the German language. But this project remained unexe- 
cuted. Some German grammars were published in the six- 
teenth century ; but none of great eminence until the eigh- 
teenth. During the first half of the eighteenth century, 
Gotsched wrote his grammar, which held the highest rank 
till, in the last half of the same century, that of Adelung ap- 
peared. Although the bad taste of Gotsched did great injury 
to the literature of his country, yet his merit as a German 
grammarian cannot be denied. He was however far surpass- 
ed by Adelung, the author of the most complete dictionary 
of the German language in German. After that of Adelung- 
a great number of German grammars were published in 
Germany, of which I shall notice three, viz. the historical 
grammar by Grimm, the grammar by Harnisch, and that by 
Heinsius. The grammar of Grimm exhibits a profound 
grammatical inquiry into the gradual formation of the Ger- 
man language. The grammar of Harnisch is characterized by 
its metaphysical investigation of the German language ; it 
abounds in deep and ingenious remarks, but sometimes runs 
into a sort of philological mysticism. The grammar of 
Heinsius, although it contains many general observations on 
the philosophical importance of each part of speech, is chiefly 
of a practical nature, and has on this account been introduced 
as a guide into most German schools. 

With respect to German grammars written in foreign lan- 
guages, I shall mention only two which are commonly used 
in England, and which have been employed in composing 
this grammar. I mean the grammar of Noehden (the fifth 



X PREFACE. 

edition of which was published in 1827), and that of Rowbo- 
tham (printed in 1824). These grammars contain many 
valuable rules and useful directions, most of which are derived 
from German grammars, particularly that of Adelung. Noeh- 
den indeed not unfrequently pretends to originality ; but 
those passages of his grammar in which he speaks as the 
philosopher of the German language, and even those practi- 
cal parts which he most boasts of, as being of his own in- 
vention, are certainly the weakest in his book. While the 
rules are better expressed in the grammar of Noehden than 
in that of Rowbotham, the latter is more useful on account of 
the exercises which are joined to each rule. The principal 
defect of Rowbotham consists in particularizing too much ; 
of which method the natural consequence is, that many cases 
which belong together under the same general rule remain un- 
decided. 

In the Grammar which I now offer to the public, I have 
endeavoured to preserve all that is valuable in the two last 
mentioned grammars. I have altered wherever I thought it 
necessary, and will mention here some of the most impor- 
tant changes that have been made. 

1. In the third chapter of Part First, Book First, I have tried 
to arrange the sounds of the German language in their natural 
order. In this arrangement I was guided by the excellent 
treatise of Mr. Duponceau on Phonology* in which he has 
laid down general directions for analyzing the sounds of every 
language, and then applied them to the English. In a few in- 
stances I have ventured to differ from the opinion of my learned 
friend, particularly with respect to the distinction between 
palatals and linguals, and in regard to the consonants d and 
t, which I have not ranked with the lingua-dentals, or dentals 
(as the grammarians commonly do), but with the palatals. 

* Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, at Phila- 
delphia. Vol. I. New Series, No. xvn. 



PREFACE. XI 

I have thought it best to found the distinction between palatals 
and linguals on the simple fact that some consonants are 
formed by a particular part of the palate being touched by the 
tongue, while others are produced by the position of the 
tongue when brought near the palate without touching it. 
Accordingly I and n have been ranked with the palatals, and r 
with the linguals. In regard to d and t> it may be observed, 
that they are pronounced as well by persons who have lost 
their teeth, as by those who retain them. The tongue may in- 
deed touch the teeth in sounding these consonants, but if this 
circumstance had any influence upon their pronunciation, it 
would add a hissing sound to that of d and t, and consequently 
spoil the utterance of these letters. Accordingly I have 
ranked d and t among the palatal consonants. 

The limits of this grammar have not allowed me to give 
more than a general analysis of the sounds of the German lan- 
guage ; while a more minute investigation would have led to 
more satisfactory results.* 

2. In representing the German declensions (which have 
cost so much trouble to all German grammarians) I have been 
principally guided by Heinsius, whose arrangement I have en- 
deavoured to render more complete and systematic ; so that 
there should remain no exception to the principles laid down.t 



* English students of the German language, as well as German 
students of the English, may be surprised to find, that the only 
sound which Walker, in his Critical Pronouncing Dictionary, 
characterizes as a German sound (I mean the broad German a, as 
he calls it), does not exist in the German language ; that this 
sound is confined to some dialects, and is never heard from the 
mouth of a wellbred German. 

f There is no part of Noehden's Grammar of which the author 
boasts more than of his arrangement of the German declensions. 
To satisfy the reader in regard to the foundation of these preten- 
sions, it is sufficient to observe, that Noehden mentions only one 



XU PREFACE. 

I have added a raode of signifying by two letters tne manner 
in which each noun is declined ; which method I should 
think would be of still greater use to the student, if in the 
dictionary also every noun were marked in this manner. 

3. With respect to the German verb, I have thought it best 
to treat first of its original parts, i. e. of those which are form- 
ed by the addition of letters to the radical syllables ; and 
afterwards of those supplementary parts of the verb which are 
formed by means of auxiliary verbs. This distribution is 
evidently most congenial with the real nature of the German 
verb and its inflections ; but it presents the additional advan- 
tage, that the distinction between regular and irregular verbs 
can, according to this method, be placed at the head of this 
doctrine , instead of having the regular forms of the verb 
preceded by the irregular auxiliary verbs. Moreover this 
difference between regular and irregular verbs affects only 
the original parts of the verb, and has no influence upon 
those, which are formed by means of auxiliary verbs. But 
according to the common mode of mixing together the origi- 
nal and supplementary tenses (in order to make the German 
verb appear as complete as the Latin or Greek verb), the 
distinction between regular and irregular verbs is carried also 
through those parts of the verb which are not at all affected 
by this difference. 

4. As the German language in this country, as well as in 
England, is studied by many persons. particularly on account of 
the polite literature of Germany, I have wished to contribute 
to the enjoyment of lovers 'of poetry by giving (in the Third 
Book) as full an account of German versification as the limits 
of this elementary work would admit. I have availed myself 
of the opinions of Voss and Schlegel on German prosody, as 

characteristic of the fourth declension, viz. that it " comprehends 
all those masculines and neuters which are not included in the 
two foregoing declensions." 



PREFACE. Mil 

far as they coincided with those to which I was led in pursuing 
this study with particular and continued interest. 

To facilitate the pronunciation, I have marked the princi- 
pal accent on every word in this grammar; and experience 
has already convinced me of the eminent usefulness of this 
method. This idea was suggested to me by my friend, 
Mr. Folsom, to whose excellent judgment I am gratefully 
indebted for a great number of valuable suggestions in the 
definition of principles and choice of expressions. 

In regard to orthography, which in some points is a matter 
of dispute among German writers, I have in general followed 
the principle of writing the words as they are pronounced, — 
a principle, which is generally acknowledged as correct, 
though with more or fewer exceptions. I have not adopted 
any mode of spelling in which I am not supported by some 
distinguished modern author. With regard to the letter X) (y), 
and the compound f$ (sz), which some authors use more or less 
frequently, while others entirely reject them, I have made a 
few remarks on the former letter, on pages 6 and 8. As to 
%, it is to be observed, that whenever the £ (z) modifies the 
sound of the f (s), it is not pronounced as J, but as an addi- 
tional f, rendering the sound stronger and more acute. Ac- 
cordingly in this Grammar, whenever the } has no effect on the 
pronunciation of the f, the j is omitted ; but whenever it modi- 
fies the pronunciation of that letter, ft* is used instead of fi, 
except at the end of words, where § is retained instead of fg, 
m the same manner as g is used instead of f.* 

I will conclude this preface by adding a few observations 
on the manner in which I think this (or any other) grammar 
may be used to the greatest advantage by beginners. The 



* The £ seemed preferable to f#, which is used by Harnish, sim- 
ply because the latter has rather an unusual typographical appear- 
ance.— In those German writings which are printed in Roman 
type, ss is generally used instead of sz. 
b 



XIV PREFACE. 

pronunciation ought, of course, to be first attended to.* 
Then the beginner should acquaint himself thoroughly with 
all the ordinary inflections of articles, nouns, adjectives, pro- 
nouns, and verbs. I do not think it advisable to attend in 
this first study of the grammar to all the principles and minute 
observations which are contained in those chapters in which 
the grammatical forms are stated. It is sufficient, that the 
learner should be able to translate correctly and easily all the 
exercises which are added to illustrate those forms. — After 
having acquired this elementary knowledge, he ought to be- 
gin to translate some easy German book. For this purpose 
I published about two years ago a collection of extracts from 
the best modern German authors, under the title, " Deutsches 
Lesebuch fur Anfanger," German Reader for Beginners, 
Cambridge, University Press, 1826. This collection was 
made with the advice of my respected friend, Mr. Ticknor, 
who, being at the head of the department of modern langua- 
ges in Harvard College, has introduced and most effectually 
promoted the study of the German language and literature at 
this University. 

As the student is making progress in translating, he will 
himself feel the necessity of a more minute study of grammar. 
This study ought to consist, partly in the teacher's referring the 
learner to that particular passage in the grammar which will 
explain any difficulty he has met with in translating, — and 
partly in a gradual, thorough study of the grammar from the 
beginning to the end. During this study, the translating should 
be continued, and be accompanied with exercises in writing, 
in addition to those contained in the grammar. 

After having in this preface offered some views of the 
history and actual state of the German language and German 



* A correct pronunciation cannot be acquired by self-instruc- 
tion ; since all the means which are used to explain the sounds of 
one language by those of another, cannot effect more than an ap- 
proximation to the true pronunciation. 



PREFACE. XV 

grammar in general, and of the characteristics of this Gram- 
mar in particular, I present it to the public, with the assur- 
ance, that its severest critic cannot be more fully convinced 
of its imperfections, than 

THE AUTHOR. 
Harvard College, 10 May, 1828. 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



The increased number of students of the German language 
in this country has called for a new edition of this Grammar. 
In preparing it I have availed myself of the suggestions of 
others, as well as of those of my own experience in teaching, 
to improve the work, or at least to correct its defects. Every 
part of the Grammar in its present form will, I hope, bear 
witness to the earnest endeavour of the author to make it a 
more thorough, correct, and practical book. In the " Ele- 
ments," the German Verb in particular has been presented 
and explained in a somewhat different and, it is believed, more 
satisfactory manner. In the " Syntax," the combination of 
that part of it which treats of the agreement and government, 
with that which teaches the arrangement of words, will cer- 
tainly meet with the approbation of instructers. 

Before this edition of the Grammar could be prepared, a 
new edition of the "German Reader," was called for, and 
published, in German type, carefully revised and improved.* 
About the same time an excellent collection of German 
and English Phrases and Dialogues was published by 
Mr. F. Graeter.f This book has ably supplied a want which 
was equally felt by teachers and students. 

Some alterations in this edition have been suggested by a 
perusal of the German Grammar of C. F. Becker (published 



* German Reader for Beginners,— 2>?tttfcl)e$ kfebuct) fftr 
tfnfdnget*. Boston. Hilliard, Gray, Little, & Wilkins. 1831. 

f German and English Phrases and Dialogues, &c, collected by 
Francis Graeter. Boston. Hilliard, Gray, Little, & Wilkins. 1831 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. XV11 

in London, 1830), a work, which must be interesting and use- 
ful to those who, having acquired a competent knowledge of 
German, wish to extend their inquiries further, to the whole 
structure and philosophy of the language. 

C. FOLLEN. 
Cambridge, 10 Dec. 1831. 



b* 



PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 



In preparing the third edition of this Grammar, I have en- 
deavoured to render it more valuable by such improvements as 
could be derived from a constant philosophical investigation of 
the language, combined with daily experience in teaching, 
from a continual study of the wants of learners, and from the 
observations of other instructers. Those who may take the 
trouble to compare this with the previous edition, will find 
here a number of corrections, and additional rules and illustra- 
tions, which I trust will prove useful both to students and 
teachers. 

I am now preparing for the press the Gospel of St. John in 
German, with a literal interlinear translation for beginners, on 
a plan somewhat different from the Hamiltonian method. I 
hope that this book, together with the Grammar and Reader, 
will form a sufficient preparatory course to enable the faithful 
student to enter upon a thorough and extensive study of Ger- 
man literature. 

C. FOLLEN. 

Cambridge, July, 1834. 



CONTENTS 



BOOK I. ELEMENTS. 



PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 

Page 

CHAPTER I. THE ALPHABET ... 1 

CHAPTER II. USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. . 3 

CHAPTER III. GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION 4 

CHAPTER IV. THE SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE . 4 

§ 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS . . .4 

§ 2. CONSONANTS 7 



PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH. 

CHAPTER I. ARTICLE .11 

CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN . . 12 

§ 1. GENDER 12 

§ 2. DECLENSION ..... 13 

A. Declension of Common Nouns . 14 

B. Declension of Proper Nouns . 25 

CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES . . . . .34 

§ 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES . . 34 

§ 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES . . 44 



CONTENTS. 



CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS 


48 


I. 


Cardinal Numbers . 


48 


II 


. Ordinal Numbers .... 


50 


in. Numerals of Proportion 


52 


iv. Numerals of Distribution 


52 


V 


Collective Numbers . 


53 


CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS 


54 


§1. 


PERSONAL PRONOUNS . 


54 


§2. 


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 


56 


§3. 


DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 


59 


§4. 


RELATIVE PRONOUNS 


61 


$5. 


INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS . 


62 


§6. 


INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 


63 


§7. 


SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS 


65 


CHAPTER VI. VERBS ..... 


69 


General Remarks ..... 


69 


$»■ 


REGULAR VERBS .... 


72 


§2. 


IRREGULAR VERBS 


74 


§3. 


MIXED VERBS . . . 


75 


§4. 


REFLECTIVE VERBS . 


98 


§5. 


IMPERSONAL VERBS 


101 


§6. 


COMPOUND VERBS 


104 


§7. 


AUXILIARY VERBS .... 

A. Supplementary Tenses of Active and 


114 




Neuter Verbs .... 


127 




B. Supplementary Tenses of Reflective 






Verbs 


136 




C. Supplementary Tenses of Impersonal 






Verbs ..... 


137 




D. Supplementary Tenses of Compound 






Verbs 


138 



§ 8. PASSIVE VERBS 



139 



CONTENTS. 1X1 

CHAPTER VII. ADVERBS ..... 150 

§ 1. DIFFERENT KINDS OF ADVERBS . 151 
§ 2. FORMATION OF ADVERBS . . .156 

A. Adverbs derived from Nouns or 
Adjectives .... 156 

B. Compound Adverbs . . . 157 

§ 3. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS . . 159 

CHAPTER VIII. PREPOSITIONS . . . . 159 

CHAPTER IX. CONJUNCTIONS .... 160 

CHAPTER X. INTERJECTIONS .... 161 

CHAPTER XI. ON THE MODE OF FORMING NEW WORDS 161 

§ 1. MODES OF ENRICHING THE LANGUAGE 

FROM WITHIN ITSELF . . . 162 

§ 2. INTRODUCTION OF FOREIGN WORDS INTO 

THE LANGUAGE .... 170 



BOOK II. SYNTAX. 



CHAPTER I. THE ARTICLE .... 


174 


CHAPTER II. NOUNS 


. 180 


CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES .... 


195 


CHAPTER IV. PRONOUNS 


201 


CHAPTER V. VERBS ..... 


210 


§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT 


210 


A. Persons and Numbers 


210 


B. Tenses 


212 


C. Moods 


215 


D. The Passive Voice 


223 



XXII 



CONTENTS. 



E. The Auxiliaries 

F. The Verb governing Cases 

§ 2. ARRANGEMENT 

A. Indicative Mood 

B. Subjunctive Mood 

C. Imperative Mood . 

D. Infinitive Mood 

E. Participles 

F. Compound Verbs 

CHAPTER VI. ADVERBS 
CHAPTER VII. PREPOSITIONS . 
CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS 
CHAPTER IX. INTERJECTIONS 





224 


• 


. 225 




234 


". 


. 234 




237 


. 


. 238 




238 


. 


. 239 




241 


. 


. 242 




245 


. 


. 251 




259 



BOOK III. PROSODY. 



CHAPTER I. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES 
CHAPTER II. QUANTITY .... 

CHAPTER III. ACCENT 

CHAPTER IV. GERMAN VERSE 



§ 1. RHYTHM 

1. The Ancient Metres 

2. The German Rhythm 



%% 



CONSONANCE 

1. Rhyme 

2. Assonance 

3. Alliteration 



260 
261 
263 
266 

266 

266 

268 

273 

273 
274 

274 



CONTENTS. XX1U 



APPENDIX. 



i. acts ix. 1-28, (in the German version of 
VanEsz) . . . , f. 275 

II. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES .... 277 

III. GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS t , 282 



. 




Tn this Grammar, the principal accent in each word of 
several syllables has been marked by the sign (') ; as, 
SJerg'rocvf/ mine. In German books in general, no ac- 
cent is marked. 

In translating the English Exercises, the student should 
omit the accents in writing. 

In the Exercises, those words which, though expressed in 
English, are to be omitted in German, are printed in common 
type and enclosed in parentheses ; thus, (which). Those 
which are omitted in English, but expressed in German, are 
printed in Italics : thus, (which). In those cases in which a 
different form of expression is substituted in German, the 
German idiom in a literal translation, enclosed and italicized, 
is added to the English text. 

The figures over the English words indicate their position 
in German. Words without figures over them stand in the same 
place as in English ; they sometimes separate one series of 
figures from another, in the same sentence. Example : Had 
you been 2 patient 1 , you would have 4 known 3 the 1 truth 2 . The 
words in German are thus arranged, Had you patient been, 
you would the truth known have. 

In studying the Elements of the Adjective and the Numeral 
(before attempting to translate the exercises on pages 46, 47, 
and 53) the beginner should acquaint himself with the rules 
concerning the use of the declinable and indeclinable forms 
of them, contained in Book II. Ch III. § 1. Rules i, n, m, and 
iv. In the same manner, together with the Elements of the 
Pronoun, the rules concerning the use of the different relative 
and interrogative pronouns, should be studied, in Book II. 
Ch. IV. § I. Rule i. Obs. 6 and 7. 



GERMAN GRAMMAR 



BOOK I. 

ELEMENTS. 



PART I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNC 



TION. 





CHAPTER I. 






THE ALPHABET. 






Simple Letters. 




Letters. 


Usual Names. 


English. 


% a, . 


• . • ah, . . ; . . 


A, a. 


%, a, . , 


. . the French era, . 


. A, a. 


23, b, . 


. . . bay, .... 


B, b. 


e, c, . 


. . tsay, .... 


. C, c. 


&,*, . 


• • • d ay, 


D,d. 


«,e, . 


... a, . . . , 


, E, e. 


& f, . 


. . ef, ...... 


F, f. 


«,0, . 


• • • ghay, . . . . 


G,g. 


4 $, 


• • • hah, .... 


H, h. 


3, t, . 


• • • e, 


I, i. 


a j, . . 


. . yot, .... 


J> J- 


*, t . 


. . . kah, 

1 


K, k. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. [BOOK I. 

*/ ^ • • • el, L, i. 

?0l, ttt, ... era, M, m. 

^' «/ ' • • • en, N,n. 

£> 0, . . . . o, 0,0. 

£/ 0, ... the French eu, . O, 6. 

9>/ P/ ... pay, . . . . P, p 

&/<(/■ • • • koo, .... Q, q. 

9t/ V, . . . . err, R, r . 

@/ f (*)/ • • ess, .... s, s. 

% t, . . . . tay, T, t. 

U/ «/ ... 00, .... U, u. 

U/ ft/ .... the French w, . U, u. 

2*/ *>, ... . fow, .... V, v. 

3B/ Xt>, . . . way, W, w. 

3E, ^P .... iks, X, x. 

7)/ 9/ > . . ipsilon, ... Y, y. 

3/ fa .... tsett, Z, z. 

Compound Letters. 



Letters. 

4 

tf, 
ff, 
Vf. 

frt), 
fi. 



Usual Names. 



English. 



tsay-hah, ch. 

tsay-kah, .... ck. 

ef-ef, ...... ff. 

pay-ef, pf. 

pay-hah, ph. 



ess-tsay-hah, 
ess-ess, . 
ess-tay, 
ess-tsett, 
tay-hah, . , 
tay-tsett, 



sch. 

ss. 

St. 

sz . 

th. 

tz. 



Instead of H most, authors write tf ; and £, instead of jj. 

6 is used only at the end of words, either separate or in 
composition. 

§ is used in this Grammar only at the end of words, instead 
of f£. (For the reasons, see page 8.) 



PART 1. CH. 2.] USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 3 

The following letters, from the similarity of their form, may 
be easily mistaken for one another. 

Capitals. Small Letters. 

25 and 35, b and t), 

3D and 0, f and f, 

g and £, m and no, 

(S and @, t* and Jf, 

$', SI/ and Sft, D and p. 
9}? and OB, 
£) and £. 



CHAPTER II. 

USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 

With respect to the use of capital letters, it is to be 
observed : 

1. All substantives, as well as all words used substantively, 
begin with capitals, and also all sentences ; as, 

DCV Sag, the day. tit QQBodj'e, the week, 

fcer QODei'fe, the wise man. Me SDTei'nigen, my family. 

fc>a£ SDfai'ne, mine (my prop- M$ ie'fett, the reading. 

erty.) 
©obatfc' t)U t)0tt t)CU lie'fcftt As soon as you learn any 

SDRei'nigeit et'roag Sfteit'etf news about my dear 

erf&fyrjV, gieb mil* fogleid)' friends, send me word im- 

Sftadj'ricljt. mediately. 

2. The pronouns answering to you, your, &c. must begin 
with a capital, when they refer to the person whom we address; 
as, @te, you ; 3ft)r, Sfy'Vtge, your ; ©it, thou ; ©ettl, thine, 
&x. ; but the pronoun id), I, is never written with a capital but 
at the beginning of a sentence, or when it is used as a sub- 
stantive, as, t>a6 3d), one's self. 

The pronoun fie, when it answers to the pronoun they, or 
she, is written with a small letter, unless it begin a sentence. 

3. Every word begins with a capital, when a stress 
is laid upon it; as, the numeral eilt in the sentence, Qs6 
gtebt nut* gt'tteit ©fyaffpeave, There is but one Shakspeare * 

* Leaving a space between the letters answers the same 
purpose ; thus, e i 11 e n. 




OF PRONUNCIATION. [BOOK I. 



CHAPTER III. 

GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. 

§ 1. In the German language each letter is pronounced in 
every word. 

Some exceptions to this rule are mentioned in Chapter IV. 
Part I. ; particularly with respect to double vowels, t (c) after 
i (i), and t) (A) in some cases. 

§ 2. Each sound is constantly represented by the same 
letter, and each letter has only one sound. Thus the letter 
a (a), which has in English four different sounds, has in Ger- 
man only one, and this one sound is never represented by any 
other letter than a. 

A few exceptions are marked in Chapter IV. Part I., par- 
ticularly in regard to the letters g (g) f t (t), b (v), and t) (y), 
in words taken from foreign languages. 

§ 3. Words that belong to foreign languages preserve in 
German their original spelling and pronunciation. Thus the 
word Cambridge ((Tambvit>gc) is sounded in German as in 
English. 

The dead languages are pronounced according to the Ger- 
man idiom. The letters ft (v) and t (t) form exceptions ; for 
which see Chapter IV. Part. I. 



CHAPTER IV. 

THE SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 

§ 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 

A. Vowels. 

The vowels in German are either long or short; which 
distinction does not (as in English pronouncing dictionaries) 
imply a difference in the sound of the vowel, but merely 
determines its relative duration. 



PART I. CH. 4.] VOWELS. 5 

The vowels are 
a... an intermediate sound between a in father , and a in 
water ; it is 

long in ©ra$, grass : fyci'bett, to have ; 
short in Sffianit, man ; ^at'je, cat. 
&* . . . nearly like a in fat ; it is 

long in 23df, bear; ©Id'fer, Glasses ; 
s/tor£ in dl'ter, older ; ifpfcl, apples. 
C .. nearly like a in fate; yet closer, and without the sound ot 
an e which is slightly heard at the end of long a in 
English ; it is 

long in @ce, sea; ge'fyett, to go ; 
short in 25ctt, bed ; effen, to eat. 
This vowel is in some words frequently pronounced like 
short e in English. But elegant pronunciation in Germany 
seems to prefer in every instance the close and acute sound 
which is heard in @CC, and fen'&eit/ to send. 

The e after i in the same syllable is not sounded, bui 
merely protracts the sound of the i, as in kk'bz, love, 
i, t) . . . like e in bee ; it is 

long in mil*, to me ; Devlin', Berlin ; 
short in gifcl), fish ; $Jlit'U, middle. 
♦ . . like o in promote ; it is 

long in ©tvom, river ; SKo'fe, rose* 
short in SRofj, horse ; Op'fer, sacrifice. 
0* . . . like the French eu in peur, which has no corresponding 
sound in English ; it is 

long in fc(j6n, fine ; ^fco'ne, sounds ; 
short in ftop'fe, heads ; Off nung, aperture. 
U ... like oo in moon, and m in full ; it is 

/ong- in gilt, good ; SSIu'me, flower ; 

s^or* in @rf)u§, protection ; Wiut'Ut, mother. 






* That d, 6, and u, are simple sounds, and not diphthong 
composed of ae, oe, and ue, is evident ; for it is impossible 
to produce these three sounds, by any combination of other 
vowels, however rapidly pronounced. It is therefore better 
to write 2ipfc{, apples; Ot>C, solitude; itfcuncj, exercise; in- 
stead of 2tepfe(, Oet>e, Uelnmg: and (Sbttjc, instead of ©ectfye. 

Two dots on the top of a, o, u, viz. a, 0, ii, or a, 6, a, 
signify the same sounds as the small e on the top of the same 
letters, d, b, ft. 
1* 



6 DIPHTHONGS. [BOOK I. 

xY, X) . . . like the French u in vu, to which there is no corre- 
sponding sound in English ; it is 

long in %t)\\t, door ; miVfce, tired ; 
short in lUXXXl, thin ; Jpfit'te, cottage. 
Observation. The letter 9, which some German authors 
retain in more or less words, and others entirely reject, has no 
peculiar sound of its own. It has the force of i in all words 
that are originally German, as well when sounded by itself, 
ex. £U'(r;, Tilly, a proper name, as in the diphthongs, (see 
B.) ex. ftyxx, to be ; £D?at), May. In words derived from the 
Greek, in which t) represents the letter v, it is commonly 
sounded like ft, as in @i)|tem'/ which is pronounced as if 
written ©ujtem' ; and this mode of writing is also preferred 
by several modern scholars. — Some grammarians retain this 
letter wherever it serves to distinguish different words, which 
are spelled alike in every other respect, as ferjtt, to be ; and 
fein, his. But this reason seems insufficient, as the significa- 
tion of all such words is determined by the sense they have in 
the sentence in which they occur. Therefore, according to 
the general rules above stated, (Chap. III. § 1. and 2.) it seems 
proper to retain the X), only 

1. In proper names, particularly names of persons, where 
the mode of writing them has an importance of its own 
separate from that which consists in their sound, as in JpCi/ne, 

kx)'ttxi ; 

2. In words derived from foreign languages, where the X) 
has the sound of the foreign letter it represents ; for example, 
@r;wmt) / mit', pronounced @imomVmi£; Q)or£, pronounced 
%0ft (The sound of the consonant 3 is given, § 2. A. 4.) 

In all other cases the X) should be given up, and the simple i 
substituted, as in fein, to be ; SQfau;, May. 



B. Diphthongs 

All diphthongs are long. 
ei, (tX)) . . .like i in fine; ex. ftvti'tyit, freedom ; tttein, mine. 
a\, (<XX))... nearly the same sound as ei, only a little more 
open ; ex. JpatU, grove ; SJiai, May. 



* See note on preceding page. 



PART I. CH. 4.] SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 7 

Oi, (or;) . . . nearly as oi in moist ; it occurs only in a few words, 

particularly proper names, as, iporj'er. 
Hi, iiXVj) . . . nearly as we ; it very seldom occurs ; ex. pftti ! fy ! 
dU. . . nearly as on in mouth (as the Scotch pronounce it) ; ex. 

Q&\\$, house ; ^taitt, herb. 
eu. . . has no corresponding sound in any modern language ; it 

comes nearest to the sound of oi in voice, ex. ftlU'tt, fire ; 

greimfc, friend. 
du . . . nearly the same sound as CU, only a little more open ; ex. 

^pait'fer, houses; RxaWUV, herbs. 
There are no triphthongs in German. 



§ 2. CONSONANTS. 

A. Simple Consonants. 

There are in German five sorts of consonants, according to 
the different organs which are particularly employed in form- 
ing them. 



1. Labials. 

p...\ikep; ex. tyn'U, pearl; phtmp, clumsy. 

6 . . . generally like b ; as in SSut'tev, butter; but at the end of 

words like bp, as in Sattb, foliage. 
til . . . like m ; ex. SDIamt, man ; $amm, comb. 
U) ... nearly like w, (omitting the sound of oo with which w 
begins) ; ex. SBmfc, wind ; m't}m, to blow. 



2. Labio-dentals. 

f ' ^Ji^V 11 ^/' ex - § e ^/ rock; fletf, stiff; fcott, full; 

^tfojor^', philosopher. 

spt) is not originally German, but chiefly intended to 

represent the Greek <p, for which some modern authors 

SbTf 1 ^ ^ and aCCOrdingly write Sitofof/ instead of 



8 SIMPLE CONSONANTS. [BOOK I. 

"33 and f have in all genuine German words the same 
sound.* 

33 has the English sound of v only in words belonging to 
foreign languages, in which this letter is sounded as in 
English. 



3. Palatals. 

t...like t; ex. ^UV'teltaube, turtle-dove; matt, faint. 

t> . . . generally like d; as in SVfcelfarf, bagpipe ; but at the end 

of words it sounds like dt ; as in 23aD, bath. 
U . . . like n ; ex. item, no. — 9? becomes a nasal sound, when 

followed by g or t (as in English) : ex. ©efaug', song ; 

Saitf, thanks. 
[...like I; ex. ii'ixt, lily; Sail, ball. 



4. Linguals.i 

V . . . like the Irish r ; ex. rol'feit, to roll ; flfarr, motionless, 
f (g) . . . like s ; ex. ©ci'te, side ; §Kct^, rice. 

© is never pronounced like z, neither has it the sharp 
hissing sound of the English s, as this is commonly pro- 
nounced. 

The $ is sometimes used as an addition to the f (§), but 
then the J is never pronounced ; it is sounded in some in- 
stances like fS, as in Jpajj, hate, or like a simple f, as in Jpauf}, 
house. Some authors, therefore, never use f$, but substitute, 
according to its pronunciation, either f£, (55) as in <&af6; or 
S, as in J$ait$. 



* As f and fo have the same sound, they seem to require 
only one sign, and f has already taken the place of 1) in sev- 
eral words, as in fcejt, ©l*at>, which are now written fcjt, firm ; 
Q5vaf, count. But it seems as yet too bold a step, to dispense 
with the X> altogether. 

f The organic difference between Unguals and palatals 
consists in the latter being formed particularly by that part of 
the palate to which the tongue is applied, while the former are 
produced by the position of the tongue, brought near the roof 
of the mouth without touching it. 



PART I. CH. 4.] SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 9 

fc() . . . like sA ; ex. @cl)lt'(e, school; 23ltfd), bush. 

The soft sound zh is heard only in words taken from the 

French language ; as (SeuiC genius; ^Ptt'ge, page. 
d) ... when it is preceded by e, i, a ; 6/ U f or a consonant, is 

not a guttural, but a lingual, formed in the fore part of the 

mouth. There is no sound corresponding to it in English. 

Ex. 23&c()'e, rivulets; ibdyw, holes; 25lVct)er, books; 

SKec()r, right; id), I; 9Md), milk. 
| ... like y in year ; ex. ja, yes; 3<Xt)X, year. 



5. Guttural. 

$, <\, and in some instances, C, and d) . . . are pronounced like 
h; ex. ^avt, Charles; CtntVU, source. 

£ is pronounced like k. when it stands before a, 0, U, 
or a consonant, as in Sano'lUCUS, prebendary; Svet)if, 
credit. 

£f) also, is in some cases pronounced like f, as in (£l)a? 
vac'ter, character; (Efyyo'tttf, chronicle. 

Many German authors make use of f, instead of C and 
d), when these letters are sounded like f, particularly in 
those foreign words which are considered as naturalized in 
German. Accordingly they write ^vefcit, ^arcdtev. 

g ... in the beginning of words, like g hard ; as in ©ajt, guest ; 
at the end, and sometimes in the midst of a word, it has 
an intermediate sound between g hard and the lingual d) ; 
ex. ^ag, day ; Sfte'gcn, rain ; after n, at the close of a 
syllable, it sounds like g in singing ; ex. ftttg'ett, to sing. 

d) . . . when preceded by a, 0, or U, is formed in the throat, and 
sounded like ch in the Scotch word Loch ; ex. 23ad), rivu- 
let ; *od), hole ; 23ud), book. 

§ ... like h, when it begins a syllable, as in £6'fye, height ; after 
a vowel, in the midst or at the end of a syllable, the if is 
silent, and merely protracts the sound of the preceding 
vowel, as in 93?ofytt, poppy; fcoi), joyful; and it is silent 
and entirely lost, after t or V, as in (butt, to do ; SJibtin, 
the Rhine. 



10 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. [BOOK 



B. Compound Consonants. 

The most remarkable are 

X, f£, or tfS, and sometimes d)$ . . . like ks, (never like gz) ; ex. 
%Xt, ax; jtracr'g, straight on. (£(jg is sounded like t, 
when it belongs to a word in its simplest form, as in DCt* 
3)ach£, the badger. But when the final 6 is added merely 
by a change of termination, as in b<X$ 3)ad), the roof, 
genitive, t>e6 Qadtf, of the roof, the original sound of d) 
is preserved. 

I, §, t$, and in some instances C and t ... are pronounced like 
ts (not dz) ; ex. Jafylt, tooth; UvtitG', already. 

£ is pronounced like J (ts), when it precedes e, i, a, 0, 
ft, or t; ; ex. O'cean, ocean ; Cd'fav, Caesar. 

<£ is commonly pronounced like j, in words of Latin 
origin, when the t is followed by i and another vowel ; 
ex. Station', nation. 

Many authors write J, instead of C or t, when these let- 
ters are pronounced like J, particularly in words which are 
considered as naturalized in German ; as Stajton', O'jcan. 

f n • • • both letters are sounded ; as in Jtlta'oc, boy. 

git ... . both letters are sounded ; as in ©na'oe, mercy. 

pfl. . . the three letters are sounded ; as in spjfan'JC, plant. 

fcl)[...the two sounds of fd), and [ are pronounced, as in 
©d)lcu , 'fe / sluice. 

fd)ro ... the two sounds, fd), and m, are uttered ; as in @d)roal'= 
be, swallow. 

Observations. The doubling of vowels, when it does 
not create two syllables, protracts the sound, as in @ee, 
sea. 

The doubling of consonants renders the sound stronger 
and more acute, as in ©on'ncvroetter, thunderstorm. 

There is a slight difference in the manner in which cer- 
tain sounds which are essentially the same in both lan- 
guages, are pronounced in German and in English. Those 
German sounds which correspond to the English t, d, I, 
r, 5, sh, viz. t, 0, I, V, f, $d) f are formed in the forepart 
of the mouth, i. e. nearer the teeth than in English ; also 
g (3) hard and h (t) are not formed so deep in the throat 
as in English. 



PART II. CH. 1.] PARTS OF SPEECH. 11 



PART II. 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 

There are ten parts of speech, viz. Article, Substantive or 
Noun, Adjective, Numeral, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposi- 
tion, Conjunction, and Interjection. Several of them, viz. th« 
Article, the Substantive, the Adjective, some of the Numerals, 
the Pronoun, and the Verb, admit of inflection, that is, of a 
change of termination, indicating the principal relations of 
that which is expressed by the word inflected. The other 
parts of speech are not inflected. 

The inflection of Articles, Substantives, Adjectives, Nu- 
merals, and Pronouns, is called Declension, and that of Verbs, 
Conjugation. Declension comprehends two Numbers, the 
Singular and the Plural, and each number four Cases, or re- 
lations, which are indicated by certain changes of termina- 
tion. While in English the Accusative or Objective case is 
generally like the Nominative, and the Genitive and the 
Dative are commonly indicated by the Prepositions of and to, 
the German language expresses the same relations by chang- 
ing the termination of the Nominative case. 

That relation which in the Latin Grammar is denominated 
the Ablative case, is in German expressed by the Dative, and 
is generally preceded by the Preposition Don, from ; as, bolt 
fcnrt ^it'tCV, from the father. The Vocative is nothing else 
than the Nominative, as used in an address or exclamation ; 
ex. o ^a'ter ! O father ! 



CHAPTER I. 

ARTICLE. 

There are two articles, viz. the indefinite, tin, a or an, and 
the definite, fcer, the ; which are declined in three genders, 
masculine, feminine, and neuter. 



12 NOUN. GENDER. [BOOK I 





NOUN, 


! GENDER. 


b 




(£irt, a, is 


i thus declined 






Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Norn. 


tin, 


ti'nc, 


ein, a. 


Gen. 


mu$ f 


et'ner, 


ei'nen, of \ 


Bat. 


ei'ncm, 


ei'ner, 


ei'nero, to a 


Ace. 


ei'nen, 


ei'ne, 


tin, a. 




£)et*, £Ae, is thus declined 


1: 




Singular. 




Nom. 


t)Ct, 


Me, 


Da^, the. 


Gen. 


be^, 


fcer, 


t>e$, of the 


Bat. 


bent, 


fcer, 


t>em, to the. 


Ace. 


i>en, 


fcie, 


H$ f the. 




Plural, for 


a/Z £^e genders. 




Nom. 


tie, the. 






Gen. 


t>er, of the. 






Bat. 


i>en, to the. 






Ace. 


fcie, the. 





CHAPTER II. 

SUBSTANTIVE, or NOUN. 

§ ]. GENDER. 

All substantives, or nouns, are either masculine, or feminine, 
or neuter. 

The gender of most nouns is determined by the following 
rules. 

1. Of the masculine gender are 

The names of male animals, and most nouns which convey 
the idea of superior power and energy; as fcev CDfann, the 
man ; feet SJa'ter, the father ; t»ev $6'n>C, the lion ; feci* £5iUtm, 
the tree; fcet* Jpam'ttter, the hammer; t>Ct* -OCftutfy, courage. 

2. Of the feminine gender are 

a. Most of the names of female animals, and most nouns 
which express what is tender and delicate ; as, tie §vau, the 
lady, or wife ; fcie SDtut'tev, the mother; fcie ^au'be, the dove ; 



PART II. CH. 2.] GENDER. 13 

Die 23fu'mc, the flower; Die SZiVDef, the needle; Die ik'bt, 
love. 

6. All proper names of countries and places made by the 
affix ei ; as, Die Xuvh'i', Die QBalladjei' ; and the following, 
Die iau'fig, Die SPfalj, Die ©cijroeij. 

3. Of the neuter gender are 

a. The letters of the alphabet ; as, Dag IX, Dag 23. 

b. All dimiuutive nouns ending in d)tl\ or lein ; as, Dag 
spferD'eben, the little horse ; Dag SSuclyfetn, the little book. 

c. All infinitives used as substantives ; as Dag Sf'fen, the 
eating ; Dag ^vint'Ctt, the drinking. 

d. The proper names of countries and places, which are 
not comprehended under 2. &., and the gender of which is not 
otherwise determined by the following rule. 

4. The gender of compound substantives is determined by 
the last word which enters into the composition, expressing 
the general idea of the word ; as, Dag spia'ttnabergwevt, the 
platina mine; from Die ^>U'thh\,f. platina, Der 23erg, m. the 
mountain, and Dag '23Dcrf / n. the work ; — Die ^et'terfafyne,/. 
the weathercock ; from Dag QOBet'ta*, n. the weather, and Die 
Safy'ne, f. the banner ; — Dei* ©tcu'ermanu, m, the steersman ; 
from i>i\^ ©teil'er, n. the helm, and Der SOkun, m. the man. 
For the same reason all proper names compounded with SauD, 
n. land, and with SHeicl), n. kingdom, are neuter ; such as, 
3)eutfc()'(anD, Germany; Sng'lauD, England; gtranf'rctd), 
France; DfVreid), Austria. 

Some nouns vary their gender, according to their significa- 
tions ; as, 

Der 23anD, the volume, Dag %5anb, the ribbon ; 

Der SSunD, the alliance, Dag 25unD, the bundle ; 

Der ©r'bf , the heir, Dag ©r'fce, the inheritance ; 

Der ©ei'fel, the hostage, Die (Sei'fel, the scourge ; 

Die 90Uv?, the mark, boundary, Dag SCRarf, the marrow ; 

Der 5Keig, the rice, Dag SKeig, the twig ; 

Der @ee, the lake, Die ©ee, the sea ; 

Der XtfOV, the fool, t>^ %$&, the gate. 



§ 2. DECLENSION. 

In many cases, a, 0, and it are, in the plural number, 
changed into the corresponding vowels d, o, and u ; and the 
2 



14 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I, 

diphthong cut into the corresponding dlt ; as, ^fyctf, valley, 
plur. %t)a'in f valleys ; ©01)11, son, plur. ©ofy'ne, sons ; SSru's 
OCV, brother, plur. ^ril'ocr, brothers ; Jpau£, house, plur. 
J&du'fer, houses. 

The endings of the nominative singular are various, and 
cannot be brought under certain rules. 

The nominative, genitive, and accusative plural, have the 
same ending in all the declensions, and are distinguished only 
by the article ; as, t>te 23nV&er, the brothers, gen. t>er. S5vit'Der, 
of the brothers, ace. Die 35vu'Der, the brothers. 

The dative plural, in all the declensions of nouns and ad- 
jectives, as well as of the article, ends in it; ex. c £au'6e, dove, 
dat. plur. $au'bcn; SOlcnfd), man, dat. plur. SMen'fcfeen ; 
%$IW, animal, dat. plur. S^ie'ren. 

All those nouns, which make the nominative plural in n, 
or en, retain the same termination in all the other cases of the 
plural number, without an additional it in the dative plural ; 
as, ^cut'ben, doves ; ^na'ben, boys ; Iht'geit, eyes. 

The mode of declining common nouns is different from that 
of nouns proper. 



A. Declension of Common Nouns. 

The principal changes of termination in common nouns, 
are comprehended under three declensions. 

The characteristic of each declension is the genitive case 
singular. In this case some nouns retain the ending of the 
nominative, as, Die SSlu'tttC the flower, gen. t>et* iSlit'me, of the 
flower ; while other nouns receive an additional n, as t>Cir 
Stna'fce, the boy, gen. be$ ftmVben, of the boy ; and others take 
an additional g, as, MS U'U\l, the life, gen. t>eS ie'fccnS, of the 
life. 



First Declension. 

The first declension comprehends all those nouns which 
remain unchanged in the genitive singular. 

These noun3 retain the termination of the nominative 
through all the cases of the singular number ; but they differ 
in the nominative plural, where some of them keep the ending 
of the singular, as, t»ie WlUt'ttV, the mother, nom- plur. t)te 



PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 15 

SQiitt'tcr, the mothers ; while others add e, as, Die SScforg'ntg, 
the apprehension, nom. plur. Die SSfforg'nifle, the apprehen- 
sions ; others n, as, Die QSlu'ttK/ the flower, nom. plur. t)ie 
^Mtl'men, the flowers ; others en, as, Die §xait, the lady, nom. 
plur. Die $rau'cn, the ladies; others nen, as, Die gveun'&ht, the 
female friend, nom. plur. Die gi'CUU'Dinuen, the female friends. 

Accordingly the first declension contains only one form of 
the singular, but Ave forms of the plural number. 

All nouns of the first declension are feminin* ; and all femi- 
nine nouns belong to the first declension. 



Second Declension. 

The second declension comprehends all those nouns which 
form the genitive singular by adding to the nominative a final 
XI, either tvith or loithout another letter. 

If these nouns in the nominative singular terminate in i, 
they receive only an additional tt in the genitive, as, Det* 
^na'fce, the boy, gen. De6 ^na'ben, of the boy ; but if they end 
in any other letter, the genitive is formed by adding en to the 
nominative, as, Def §e(6, the rock, gen. De6 §et'fen, of the 
rock. 

With the exception of the nominative singular, all the cases 
of the singular and plural are like the genitive singular, and 
therefore always end in CJt. 

Accordingly, the second declension comprehends only one 
form of the plural, but two forms of the singular number : the 
genitive singular being formed by the addition sometimes of 
n, and sometimes of en. 

All nouns which belong to the second declension are mascu- 
line ; and all masculine nouns belong either to this or to the 
third declension. 



Third Declension. 

The third declension contains all those nouns which form 
the genitive singular by adding to the nominative a final $, 
either with or icithout others-letters. 

This declension comprehends four forms of the singular, 
and five of the plural number. 

Singular. Some nouns receive in the genitive case merely 



16 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 

an additional 6, as, fcer 3Ban't>cm*, the traveller, gen. bt$ 
SBcw'&crcrS, of the traveller ; others eg, as, &a£ $Pfer&, the 
horse, g-m. £>eS spfer'&CS, of the horse; others n$, as, fcet* 
©c&anf'c, the thought, g-gra. fceS (5c&anfr'en$, of the thought ; 
and one noun, Dag £cvj, the heart, makes the genitive in en6, 
U$ £or'jen$, of the heart. 

Plural. Some nouns retain the termination of the singular 
nominative, as, bet* ^Ban'fcercr, wow. plur. tic QOBan'fcem* ; 
other nouns add e, as, fcaS spfcvD, the horse, nom. plur. Die 
spferfce ; others n, as, Det* (SeDanf'e, the thought, nam. 
plur. tic ©cbanf'en ; others en, as, tcx @taat, the state, 
nom. plur. tie ©taa'ten ; and others er, as, fc>a£ §ett>, the field, 
nom. plur. Me ^el'fcer. 

-4Z/ neuter nouns are of the third declension. 

The following table exhibits the endings of nouns in each 
declension in all the cases except the nominative singular. 
The different declensions are marked by the figures, 1, 2, 3: 
the different forms of the singular by Roman letters, a, b, 
c, d, and those of the plural by German letters, a, b, C, t> e. 



TABLE 



DECLENSION OF GERMAN COMMON NOlLNS 



2* 



<B * t-> «-» J-» ~* 
M C* _J> ^» _«* «*■ 

o 
02 



«<$ «<2 «*3 *<* 



w 




S an 


o 




£1 


fc 




■5-3 ; 


o 




to 

03 


S 




Vs 


o 
o 


o 


sp.S 




GO 


r>8 




u 

P 


** a 




H 


t/J w ' 


O 


PS 

1— I 


^s«> 


£ 




to fc)/) 
c 8^ 



>>£> <3 <3 ri <£ 
I I I I 



HSHH 

I I I I 



vcci'XEi'-xci'jri 



„s£^ "♦"*• ti 'ti ti 



c* «-* -t-» ^» 



ss « ss s 



<35 CTj <X <5i 

**3: >tS *<3 <<S 

©$®® 

I I I I 



<^» <^ r ~* •;» 
"=5 IS "s5 v » 
<S <£ « <f5 

I I LJL 



^ ^«. <«► <-► 
g g g g 



l i I i 



i l l I 



^ 5 g = ^j 
<** •«> ^» '— 
I i i I 



£J -S -^ £ 



ill II 



*» *> ^JQ 



o u s «> 



£^gj^l fejgjgH 



o 
S3 

o 
w 
p 



•IS «*5 

8 c 

53 ta 
i-8 ?a 



^55 S3 « « 

,*", «^ «i* <s» ^» 

C$5 ^ ss si 

* — ' 

^> ** <* S ^* 



g 
QQ 



^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 



CD O O 

^3 A A 






a 



^ C 0) 
02 - C 



S ffj rt ^ ^ £ 



C? 



I l I I 



z 


j5 


ri 


w 


^* 


o 


►J 


5* 


ed 




Si 


a 


P 






ss 


•Si 


P 


.8 

is. 


•-&> 


o 


g 


8 


rj 


a 


a 


02 


ex 


5> 




<o 














c^ <—► "^ ^^ 
/a /i /=» /-> 



r^ o 



^^q^ ^^^^ 



»~8 

i 




S5 S5 » 



i^dcH 



j£ .0000 



U $» i-> >» 

<i> ~» t* «■* 

«0 wO '"O «0 



I I I I 



5* 52 S5 S5 

«> ^ 5? ^f 

V <* e ** 

















f— 


hJ 










g^ 




fc 


fe H 


H 










1— 1 
72 


"U> ^ 




£ 


2™ 




W 




J 


^ ctf 







*r s 




H 


■ ■ «a 




Q 


^> *S 




Q 








b v, 
*§ « 











Hi ^ 



CO -y> ^> S tf> 
<S o <-> <S 
jo >o ^> /^ 

^ *- *- 

co . zz si si si 

g o « <s « « 

^®®©® 
_ I I I I 

*» St 

^ I 3 5 3 

£ ?* £ £ ~ 
1 1 1 1 



• . « V. JJ> «> 
<c . ^ % c s 

cC «i> «>» $* «>* 





^' tf Q ^ 


t3 








« « « « 

<_► ft* c<> <-* 
*-to rto »-to ^>o 

C* «a. Crf t> 

I I I I 



i£j j iff |. i^tj. ^4. 

iCi /=> Jp -O 



AA A O 



I I I I 



CJ> ft* ft* ft* 

cr. «o «5 «i 

AA A A 

J ^ ^ ^" 

D^^ — 

£3'«* s *-» *■» F* *•* 

" >_^ ft* ft* J-* ** 



Xi « SS « « 

v ■ O ^» ft* ^> 



« « « 



« JS « « 



fc^'ci^ 



1^ 



t8 



O 2? 53 « 



Q X! «* 






rt cj 



^Cb'q^ 



^SS C « 5S 

•jz» ««* *> SS o 

tfl CO i« 

(I) (fl ctf 



20 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 



Observations on the first Declension. 

1. ft. — There are only two nouns which retain in the nomina- 
tive plural the termination of the singular, viz. SOTut'tCt*/ 
mother, and ^Dcl)'tcr, daughter. 

1. b. — The plural in C occurs particularly in those words 
which end in ft, jc, and ntJ3 ; as, Stvaft, power ; $tm|t, 
art; SScttftb'nig, sorrow. 

1. C. — The plural in \\ belongs to feminine nouns which end 
in e, cl, and cr; as, (gfy're, honor; *8i'bet, bible; ©Chef's 
tZX, sister ; plur. Qjty'ren, SM'Mtt, @d)n>cf'tmt. 

1. t>. — The plural in CU is to be found in most words which 
end in et (ci)), en&, tyeir, hit, fdjaft, Ultg, It, and vt; as, 
gifdjem', fishery ; iu'geub, virtue ; grei^cit, freedom ; 
©'TOigfeit, eternity; gvcttU&'fdjafit, friendship; 7Ldytmi$, 
esteem ; %Bdt, world ; lixt, manner ; &c. 

1. e. — -The plural form lieu is peculiar to those feminine 
nouns, which end in in, and have the accent not on their 
final syllable ; as, ©at'tin, wife ; So'roin, lioness. This 
form was originally no other than the preceding 1. ft., the 
nouns in in being formerly written with final tiff, as, 
(Bcit'timi, &c. But this practice of doubling the H in the 
singular, is retained by few modern authors. 

Some nouns of the first declension, as, §l*ait, lady ; 
©Olt'ne, sun ; ©ee'fc, soul ; (gr'&e, earth ; are, according 
to an old usage, still sometimes inflected in the genitive 
singular, as, gratt'en, ©ou'nen, ©ee'Ien, Qsr'&cn. 

EXERCISES. 

To the actions, ipanfc'hutg. 

Of the Grecian women, ©rie'djitt. 

The forks, ©a'bel. 

To the sciences, 3Biffcnfd)aft, 

The daughters, $oc()'tcr. 

Of the balls, Wgeu 

To the pens, ge'fcev. 



Observations on the Second Declension. 

% a , — The termination of the genitive in r* is common in 
masculine nouns which end in e ; as, ttt ib'W, the lion ; 



PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 21 

fcei* 33o'te, the messenger. The names of nations which 
end ine, are inflected in the same manner; as, t)CV (Sfie'cljC/ 
the Greek ; t>er ©ettt'fdjC/ the German. 
2. b. — The genitive in en is common in masculine nouns not 
ending in e; as, &ci* 2D?e.nfcl), man; fcev t&av, the bear. In 
some cases euphony demands the omission of the e ; as, 
fcCt' JpetT, the master, gen. fceS §CVV\l. 

In poetry the dative and accusative singular are some- 
times formed like the nominative ; as, Dem §tl$, and &cn 

Almost all the nouns of this declension signify living 
beings. Exception, Dei* §el$, 2. b. the rock. 



Observations on the Third Declension. 

3. a. & b. — It depends on euphony whether the genitive sin- 
gular ends in £ or e£. Nouns of more than one syllable, 
which end in one of the unaccented syllables ti, en, et, 
and (ein, take only an 6 ; as, ghVgel, wing ; SDtd&'cljen, 
girl ; 3Sa'ter, father ; SDfdnn'fein, little man. But all 
those nouns of the third declension which end in 6 or J, 
make their genitive singular in e6 ; as, SKof}, steed, gen. 
Sftof'ff.0, of a steed ; @a§, sentence, gen. ©a£'e£, of a 
sentence. Those nouns of one syllable which terminate 
in any other letter, make their genitive singular in the same 
manner, by adding eS ; but this is frequently contracted 
into g ; as, oer. 2Beg, the way, gen. t>e6 iBe'geS, or 3£eg6, 
of the way. 

These rules apply also to some proper nouns ; as, De- 
cember, 3. a. a. ; t>er £tl)etn, 3. b. b„ the Rhine. 

It depends on euphony whether the e which is added to 
nouns of the second form of the singular in order to form 
the dative case, be omitted or retained. Ex. fcem (SoI'De, 
or (Sofo, to the gold; fcem ©tuv'me, or ©turm, to the 
storm. The e is generally omitted when the noun, pre- 
ceded by a preposition, and without an article or adjective 
or pronoun before it, is used in a general and indefinite 
signification, in the place of an adjective or an adverb, to 
express either the material of which a thing consists or the 
manner in which something is performed. Ex. etn 9ting 
ton (So(t>, a ring of gold ; nxit ©tuvm ein'nefymen, to take 
by storm. But if the noun be rendered more definite by 



22 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 

an adjective or pronoun before it, the regular ending in e is 
used, unless euphony should require its omission, par- 
ticularly for the purpose of avoiding the monotonous re- 
currence of the same sound. Thus we say, ein SHing fcon 
fcic'fcm ©ol'fce or @o(t>, a ring of this gold ; in fccm er'ften 
©tur'me or @tunn, in the first storm. 

The accusative of those nouns which have £ or C6 in the 
genitive, is always like the nominative case. 
3. c. — The addition of n6 in the genitive is peculiar to those 
nouns, the nominative of which formerly ended in en, but is 
now commonly spelled without the final n, as, gvtc'fce 
(gxic'&eu), peace ; gfonf'e (gltnfen,) spark ; gttS'ftapfe 
(gus'jtapfcn), footstep; (Slau'bt (Otau'bcn), belief ; Jpan'fe 
(#au'fcn), heap ; Sfta'me (Stta'mcn), name ; ©aa'me 
(©aa'mcn), seed ; ©cfea'&C (©dja'&en), damage. But the 
old termination in en is not yet entirely out of use. 

Some nouns of the second declension are sometimes, 
though not properly, inflected according to the form 3. c. ; 
as, t)CV Rm'bt, the boy, gen. U$ KmVbcnS ; properly, fceg 

Stm'btn. 

If the genitive is formed by adding n£ to the nomina- 
tive, the dative and accusative singular always end in en. 
3. d. — The substantive <£>er$/ heart, is the only noun which 
forms its genitive by adding en6 to the nominative. 

The nominative formerly was tuiS <*5ev'je, which is still 
used in poetry. 

SBncrVjlab, letter, is declined either according to 3. b. &., 
or according to 3. c. C, and in this case the nominative is 
33ncv/|tabe. 
3. a. — The nominative plural is like the nominative singular 
in almost all those nouns masculine and neuter, which end 
in el, en, er, and (ein; as, Dcv ©cfeKtffef, the key; la* 
9QUt>'cl)en, the girl ; t)Ci: Ufyv'mcictjer, the watchmaker ; tuu? 
gfdn'letn, the young lady. 

The plural form, Mfc'djenS, gvaU'leittS, is incorrect, 
though sometimes used by good authors in derision of bad 
taste. 
3. b. — The addition of e to the nominative singular is the 
most common plural form of nouns of the third declension ; 
as, bag %t)m, the animal; t>cr 93aum, the tree; feet 
©tcin, the stone ; &c, 
3. c. — All those nouns which make their genitive singular m 



PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 23 

U6 (see p. 21, under 3. c), form their nominative plural by 
adding n to the nominative singular. 

3. D. — There are comparatively only a few nouns of this de- 
clension, which form their plural by adding Clt ; as, DaS 
£erj, the heart; Dei* <$$taat f the state; t>CV ©tvafyt, the 
ray ; DaS OtjV, the ear. 

3. e. — The singular of those nouns, which make their nom- 
inative plural by adding cr, is declined according to the 
second form of the singular, 3. b. ; as, Der. ^alD, the 
wood, gen. sing. De6 QOBat'DeS. In the same manner are 
declined, ^(eiD, dress ; (Be(D, money ; Uib, body ; (Setjt, 
spirit. 

The nominative plural cannot always be determined by 
the genitive singular. Ex. DaS 'JUt'ge, 3. a. C, the eye, 
gen. sing. DeS ftu'geS, nom. plur. Die Wgeil. 

EXERCISES. 

The travellers, c 2Bau / t>evcr. 

Of the footstep, guS'jtapfe. 
Of the swords, SVgen. 
Of the floweret, 33lfim'(citt. 
The horses, spfert). 
The sparks, gunf'e. 
Of the treasure, @c()tt§. 



Some nouns have no plural number ; for example, many 
infinitives which are used as substantives. This peculiarity 
is, in this Grammar, marked by omitting the German letter by 
which the form of the plural is indicated; as, Da£ Ucfy'cn, 3. 
a., the laughing ; Da6 QOBet'lten, 3. a., the weeping. 

Other nouns have no singular. This peculiarity is marked 
by omitting the Roman letter which indicates the form of the 

singular; as, fie Hl'tzxri, 3. c, the parents; Die ku'tt, 3. 6., 
people ; Die ©etuut'Der, 3. a., the brothers. 

Some nouns have two plural forms ; as, Dae? KxnD, 3. b. k & 
C., the land, nom. plur. Die Un'De and Die i&u'Dcr, the lands; 
Dag (SeroauD', 3. b. 6, & e., the dress, nom. plur. Die (Bewan'De 
and Die ©ewan'Deir, the dresses. 

The compounds of SCflailtt (man) change SOTailU into UWtt 
(people) in the plural; as, Dev SanD'mann, the countryman, 



' s 



24 



DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 



[BOOK I. 



plur. Me imWUvit?, country people ; In giifyv'manu, the wag- 
goner, plur. Me ^ubf'iciitc. So form the plural of IX C Hermann, 
husbandman; (£'J>elmaun, nobleman; JFjaupt'ttiaim, captain; 
^aufmanu, merchant. But the plural of t>et* Q^emann, the 
husband or married man, is tic Qs'fycm&mter, the husbands 
or married men ; (S'fyeleiitf, means married people. 

In some nouns the different formation of the plural, or the 
change of a, o, it, into a, b, and it, expresses a different signi- 
fication ; as, 



Singular. 

In 33ant>, the volume, or 

binding. 
t>aS 23anD, the ribbon. 
MS 23an&, the bond. 
Me SSauf, the bench, 
fie 23anf, the bank. 
In ZSau'n, the peasant. 
fcaS S3au''er, the cage. 
in 23o'gen, the sheet of paper. 
In SSo'gcn, the bow. 
MS ©ejtdjt', the vision. 
MS ©efidjt', the face. 
t>Ct* ia'fccn, the shutter. 
in ia'bcn, the shop. 
ICX @d)il&, the shield. 
MS @d)llt>, the sign. 
in ©trautf, the ostrich. 
In ©tratlS, the nosegay. 
ItX %tjOV, the fool. 



Plural. 

Me SSrtlt'&C/ the volumes. 

trie SSan'Dcr, the ribbons. 

Me S5an'Dc, the bonds. 

Me SSanf'e, the benches. 

Ik fdxat-tn, the banks. 

Me 23au'mi, the peasants. 

Me 25an'er, the cages. 

Me 230'gen, the sheets of paper. 

lie 256'gcn, the bows. 

Me @eftd)'te, the visions. 

Me (3ejiri)'tcr, the faces. 

Ik iWlen, the shutters, 

Me fca'fcett, the shops. 

Me ©clnl'De, the shields. 

Me ©cfttl'fcer, the signs. 

Me ©trait fen, the ostriches. 

Me ©rvdu'fe, the nosegays. 

Me. ^l)0'ven, the fools. 

Ik StljO'r*, the gates. 



MS %t)0V, the gate. 

With respect to those common nouns which are derived 
from foreign languages, the following particular rules are to 
be observed. 

These nouns either retain their original termination, as, 
gtpCUS, Sfyc'ma, 3)0'ft6; or take a German one This is 
done, either by retrenching their foreign ending, as in O'ccan 
(oceanus), ocean ; 2)ip(oin' (diploma); or by transforming it 
into another more idiomatic termination ; as, Me SHe'gef (reg- 
ula), rule ; Me @l)('be (syllaba), syllable. 

The rule is, — that all those foreign common nouns, the 
endings of which bear a similarity to German nouns, are de- 
clined like these, in the regular way. Thus : 



PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 25 

1. All foreign common nouns feminine belong to the first 
declension, and add in the nominative plural either n or en; 
as, ok 2Tnc, 1. C, the tune; Die gov'mef, 1. C, the formula; 
otc spocftc', 1. t>., the poetry; Die spcrfon', 1. o. ; bic SKqnt- 
biifr, 1. fc. ; bic ^rannei'/ I. 6., the tyranny. 

2. Most of those foreign nouns masculine which end in ant, 
tod}, i\t, it, it, and og, are of the second declension, 2. b. ; 
as, 2l0jntant', $>atviant/, 2ltwocat', spoct', Si-emit', $t)eolog'. 

3. Most of the foreign nouns neuter or masculine which end 
in cv, i[ f al, an, in, on, av, at, cm, am, amm, om, ov, belong 
to the third declension; as, SbaraCtcv, 3. a. l\; Sapt'tel, 
3. a. a., chapter; sportaC, 3. b. b. ; Sapellan', 3. b. l\, chap- 
lain; ftamm', 3. b. [\, chimney; spojHUcn', 3. a. b. ; <5]W1!? 
plat*', 3. b. L\, specimen ; SDfagijtraf, 3. b. b. ; SMa&cm', 3. b. 
b.; Sgal'fain, 3. b. l\ ; gptgvamm', 3. b. t\; XuplonV, 3. b. 6.; 
spi-ofcf for, 3. a. 0. 

B. Declension of Proper Nouns. 

Proper names terminating in one of the unaccented sylla- 
bles aS, c6, i&, OS, or nS, such as §taf'?a6, SEcr'ptf, (E'ttS, 
2f mo£, (Topcv'nicuS, do not change their termination in any 
case of the singular or plural. If the connexion in which 
they occur does not indicate the case or number in which they 
are used, the definite article, or a preposition is used to express 
the relation in which they stand. Ex. 3)a6 ©l)|tcm' PCS £o* 
per'nintt?, or Don SopCV'ntCU^, the system of Copernicus; MS 
CScfcMcibt' Oct* 35artaS (plur.), the family of (the) Barcas. 

Most proper nouns,* particularly names of persons and coun- 
tries, are declined either with or without the article ; and this 
circumstance has an influence upon the declension of the 
singular number. 

Singular. If the proper name is declined with the definite 
or indefinite article, the article alone is inflected, the noun 
itself remaining unaltered; as, Per @el)le'gel, gen. oetf @cl)[c's 
gd, &c. ; Die Itn'na, gen. Oct- Zn'xxa, &c. ; ciu £a'to, gen. 
et'uctf Sa'to. 

If proper nouns are declined without the article, they com- 
monly take, in the genitive singular, an additional £ or e& 

* Some proper nouns are declined like common nouns. 
Page 20, under 2. a. ; and page 21, under 3. a. & b. 
3 



26 DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. [BOOK L> 

In some nouns, particularly those which end in 6, §, £, j*cl), p, 
and feminines in c, the genitive singular is formed by adding 
en$ or u& to the nominative. In the dative and accusative^ 
they commonly remain unaltered, or take n or en. 

Singular. 

N. ©;t(o'a,ci Zw'-na icib'mg Sa'to 

G. ©cMc'c^fe lin'nxt tttb'nigen* £a'to$ 

( ©eb(?',q'fi or ) i Tln'm or ) f JcilVnifi or ) ff 

^ \ ©cblc'flcln / tZfu'iKH MMb^en f ^ at0 

. f ©fblc'gcl or \ i fth'naor ( ( ieib'nift or ) ff ,. 

-*• \ ©cilc/gcfo J iin'nni S\ ieib'ui§cn J eat0 

hti'fc and other nouns in e, are declined like tiib'nik, with- 
out an additional e ; as, hti'jV/ g"era. hti'fcn^, cfotf. & «cc. Ini'fc 
or htt'fcu. 

Even the geni.tive, dative, and accusative cases of those 
nouns which end in a are sometimes formed in enS, and en, 
the a being dropped ; as, SHa'na, gen. £)ia'na£ or 2Ha y Heu$/ 
dat. &l ace. SDia'na or 2)ia'nen. It seems better not to change 
the ending of the noun in the dative and accusative, except 
for the sake of distinctness. Thus we say, SOUl'i'C fa I) im'fe, 
Mary saw Louisa ; but if the order of the nouns be inverted, 
we say, hli'fen fat} SOfavt'e, Mary saw Louisa. 

Names of countries compounded with i<XX\X>, land, or EHetc(>, 
kingdom, are declined only in the genitive case, in which they 
take an additional S ; as, SDcutfdj'laiiW, of Germany; granite 
t*eirl)S, of France. 

Plural. In the plural number, proper names are generally 
declined like common nouns, whether they be preceded by 
the article or not ; sometimes they preserve their foreign ter- 
mination entirely or in part, as, 



N. 



Plural. 

(Eato'ne or 



Die eWe'grt lin'nen *Hfc'ni§c { l^nm" } 

Z>. ten ©cMe'gcln 2fo'ncu fci&'mfcen Sato'neu 
A. tit'&d&t'&l lln'mn Uib'ni^ {smVm™} 

Observations. I. The mode of declining proper nouns with 



PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 27 

the article, is the same, whether the noun stands alone, or is 
preceded by an adjective or pronoun. 

Accordingly we say, DaS S8er&ten|V SBaff/ingfC-nS, the merit 
of Washington ; but Da6 SBevDieujt' DeS ^Bafty'ington, or, DeS 
gro'fcn (of the great) 3Bafl)'ington: and Die XKtnFtnil'foit 
tpfari'aS, the gratitude of Mary; but Die ©anf'barfcit Det 
from'men (of the pious) SDtavi'a. 

If the name of a person is immediately preceded by a com- 
mon noun, expressing the office or character of that person, 
the proper noun alone is declined, if the common noun is not 
preceded by the definite article; as, Soc'tOt granHtnS (Si's 
fm'Dungen, the discoveries of Doctor Franklin ; fto'nig iuV* 
ttoigg c £oD, the death of King Louis ; but if the definite article 
precedes, the common noun is declined, and the proper noun 
remains unaltered; as, Der ^oD De6 St&'nigS hlD'roig ; Die (£t*s 
ftn'Dtmgcit Deg ©oc'tovS granHin. The same is true of 
names of places, towns, or countries, being used without the 
article and preceded by a common noun which serves to define 
the proper name or is defined by it ; as Die (Scfcfotcfo'te De£ 
Sf&'mgvcicfjS SRea'pcl, the history of the kingdom of Naples. 

If the name of a person is preceded by one or more chris- 
tian names, none of these is declined, if they have the definite 
article before them ; as, Die ©cforif ten DeS ^ofyann' %\'Hb 
SHoilffeait/ the works of John Jaques Rousseau : but when 
they are not preceded by the article, the family name of the 
person is declined, the christian names remaining unaltered ; 
■as. 3>ot)ann' Cfyvif'topf) 21'DeluugS ©pvaclylefyre, the Grammar 
of John Christopher Adelung. 

But there is an exception to this rule, when the family name 
is separated from the christian name (or names) by a prepo- 
sition, particularly by toon (being commonly the mark of noble 
descent) : in this case the christian names alone are inflected; 
as, Die (Se&icfytc Jpetn'vicftS toon OfterDingen, the poems of 
Henry of Ofterdingen ; Dei' Dp'fertOD liVltOiDS @tl*Utt'I)an$ 
toon 3Bin?'elrie&, the sacrifice of Arnold Strutthan of Winkel- 
ried. But even in this case, if the genitive precedes the sub- 
stantive by which it is governed, the family name alone is 
inflected ; as, Sofjan'neS toon SttnWcvtf < DDBcv / 0e, the works of 
John of Muller. 

II. It was formerly usual to decline nouns of Roman origin 
according to the rules of the Latin Grammar ; but this mode 
of declining has gone out of use, except in a few instances ; 
as, gtyrif'ti (Sebuvf, the birth of Christ. 



28 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



[book I. 



Promiscuous Exercises on the Declensions of Nouns. 

The following list of nouns possesses the advantage of having 
the gender and declension marked, the former by the let- 
ters, m.f. ?i., and the latter by the numbers, 1, 2, 3; with 
the different forms of the singular and the plural number, 
those of the singular being denoted by Roman, and those of 
the plural by German letters. .The asterisk (*) prefixed to 
a noun in the singular, signifies that a, 0, it, are in the plu- 
ral changed into a, C, u. If more than one of these letters, 
or any one of them more than once, should occur in the 
same noun, that one alone is changed which occurs last ; 
as, lllUw 1 , plur. 'Ztltd've : the diphthong an excepted, in 
which the a, and not the it, is changed, whenever an aster- 
isk is prefixed to the noun. 



Of the eels, 

The evening, (Ace.) 

To the abbots, 

Of the field or acre, 

Of the fields, 

The shoulders, 

Of the nobility, 

To the ape, 

To the apes, 

Of -the altars, 

To the age, 

Of the antiquities, 

To the blackbirds, 

The offices, 

The ants, 

The nurses, 

Of the devotion, 

The preparations, 

To the replies, 



2laf, m. 3. b. b. eel. 
2( / bent>, m. 3. b. b. evening. 
*lXkt, m. 3. b. b. abbot. 
*Ztc'f CV,| m. 3. a. a. field or acre. 

2lc()'fcf,/. 1. C. shoulder. 
li'td, m. 3. a. nobility. 

'Ztffc, m. 2. a. ape. 

*1£{U\t, m. 3. b. b. altar. 
lii'ttY, n. 3. a. a. age. 
*2tt'tcrtl)um, n. 3. b. C. antiquity. 
IXm'iii/f. 1. C. blackbird. 
*#tnt, n. 3. b. e. office. 
21'mdfe, /. 1. c. ant. 
Tinx'mcf. 1. c. nurse. 
Tin'tiidtt,/. 1. devotion. 
2fn'|ta(t, /. 1. t>. preparation. 
Tint 1 wort, f. 1. &. reply. 



f The beginner must not forget that the asterisk being pre- 
fixed to a noun signifies that a change of vowels takes place 
only when the noun is in the plural number, as, of the acres, 
feet* Scfer; but not when it is the singular number, as, of the 
acre, M8 itfevtf. 



PART II. Clt 2.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



29 



Of the labors, 

To the eyes, 

Of the oyster, 

The brooks, 

The path, 

Of the ball, 

To the ribbons, 

To the ideas, 

Of the mountain, 

To the bed, 

To the beds, 

Of the proofs, 

To the pictures, 

Of the pears, 

Of the flowers, 

To the letters, 

The breasts, 

To the books, 

The books, 

To the canals, 

To the cardinals, 

To the roofs, 

Of the badgers, 

The dikes, 

To the thumbs, 

Of the swords, 

To the poets, 

To the villages, 

To the heirs, 

The eggs, 

To the fables, 

Of the threads, 

Of the barrels, 

To the fists, 

Of the enemies, 

To the fields, 

Of the rocks,, 

To the fetters, 

Of the plains, 

To the rivers, 

The wives, 

Of the female friends, 

To the feet, 



Tlx'Uit,/. 1. t>. labor. 
Ztu'g'e, ft. 3. a. C. eye. 
Hu'jtcr, /.l.C. oyster. 
*23aet), m. 3. b. b. brook. 
23al)U,/. I- t>. path. 
*S3aK, m. 3. b. b. ball. 
*-33an&, ft. 3. b. e. ribbon. 
SBegrif , m. 3. b. b. idea. 
S5ci*g/ m. 3. b. b. mountain. 
S3ctt, ft. 3. b. t>. bed. 

35eroete'/ m. 3. b. b. proof. 
33U&, n. 3. b. e. picture. 
S5ini,/. 1. t>. pear. 
2Mu'me,/. I.e. flower. 
SSrief, m. 3. b. b. letter. 
*35ntft,/. 1. b. breast. 
*25uct), ft. 3. b. e. book. 

*£anaf, m. 3. b. b. canal. 
*£art>inat', m. 3. b. b. cardinal. 
'*2>AC&, n. 3. b. e. roof. 
*£>acl)S, m. o. b. b. badger. 
*3)amm, m. 3. b. b. dike. 
SVut'men, w. 3. a. a. thumb, 
©e'gen, m. 3. a. a. sword. 
SMciytcr, m. 3. a, a. poet. 
*3)orf, ft. 3. b. c. village. 
(Ev'be, m. 2. a. heir. 
Si, ft. 3. b. e. egg. 
$ti'bel,/. l.C. fable. 
*3\V&en, m. 3. a. rt. thread. 
*^af^ n. 3. b. e. barrel. 
*gatt|?,/. 1. b. fist. 
§Cint), m. 3. b. b. enemy, 
gelt), ?z. 3. b. c. field, 
gets, m. 2. b. rock. 
gef'fef,/. 1. C. fetter, 
glltl*,/. 1. t>. plain. 
*8Utf$, m. 3. b. b. river, 
gran,/. 1. b. wife, 
greun'tun,/*. I.e. (female)friend. 
*glt$, m. 3. b. b. foot. 



30 

The forks, 
The geese, 
To the guest, 
The prayers, 
Of the dangers, 
The countries, • 
The spirits, 
Of the money, 
The ghosts, 
To the conversation, 
To the limbs, 
The gods, 
The graves, 
Of the count, 
The property, 
The cocks, 
Of the hands, 
Of the skins, 
Of the heroes, 
Of the master, 
To the wood, 
To the fowl, 
Of the hats, 
Of the islands, 
To the year, 
Of the Jew, 
Of the boy, 
To the calves, 
To the children, 
Of the churches, 
To the coats, 
The cloisters, 
Of the buttons, 
To the heads, 
Of the salmon, 
To the countries, 
Of the burdens, 
To the holes, 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



[book I. 



(Sn'bd, f. 1. C. fork. 

*(BaiUv /. 1. b. goose. 

*<Si\]V, m. 3. b. b. guest. 

©ebct', n. 3. b. b. prayer. 

(gcfdt)V' f f. 1. D. danger. 

(5e'cjcn&, f. 1. t>. country. 

(geijl, m. 3. b. e. spirit. 

(ScJi), n. 3. b. c. money. 

©ffpenjV, n. 3. b. c. ghost. 

(Sefpr&d)', n. 3.b b. conversation. 

(SlicD, n. 3. b. e. limb. 

*<Bott, m. 3. b. e. God. 

*©l\ib, n. 3. b. c. grave. 

(&i\xf, m. 2. b. count. 

*($llt, n. 3. b. c. property. 

*^ai)\x, m. 3. b. b. cock. 

?$Ml>,'f. 1. b. hand. 

*J?auf, f. 1. i\ skin. 

£e(&, m. 2. b. hero. 

^Jcrr, m. 2. b master. 

*£'pfj, w. 3. b. e. wood. 

*£ufyn, n. 3. b. e. fowl. 

*J?Uf, m. 3. b. b. hat. 
Sll'fcf, /. 1. C. island. 
3^i/r/ ft. 3. b. b. year. 
Sfit'De/ /«. 2. a. Jew. 
Smtfl'e, m. 2. a. boy. 
*ft\Ub, w. 3. b. e. calf. 
£in&, ». 3. b. c. child. 
ikiX'tyi, f. 1. C. churcn. 
${etb, ?z. 3. b. e. coat. 
•jtfo'fitt? w. 3. a. a. cloister. 
*&nopf, m. 3. b. b. button. 
*£opf, m. 3. b. b. head. 
$ad)$, w. 3. b. b. salmon. 
^ail&i ft. 3. b. b. & C.f country. 
ia|l,/. 1. D. burden. 
*ioc(), w. 3. b. c. hole. 



f The a in Sanfc is changed into a, and the in Ott into 
£> (in the plural number), only when these nouns are declined 
according to 3. b. e. ; but they preserve their original vowels, 
when declined according to 3. b. b. 



PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OP NOUNS. 



31 



Of the maids, 

To the almonds, 

Of the mice, 

Of the mothers, 

To the nightingales, 

Of the fools, 

The nuts, 

Of the places, 

To the popes, 

Of the path, 

The plants, 

Of the jaw, 

The borders, 

Of the rank, 

The spaces, 

The riches, 

To the judge, 

To the juices, 

To the songstresses, 

The troops, 

Of the shadow, 

The treasures, 

To the ships, 

The shields, 

To the serpents, 

The castles, 

The debts, 

The swallows, 

Of the soldier, 

Of the looking-glass, 

The storks, 
The stockings, 
Of the actions, 
To the daughters, 
To the dreams, 
The cloths, 
Of the virtues, 
Of the watches, 
The nations, 
To the forests, 



*SD?a3t>, /. 1. k maid. 
SDfan'&el, /• 1. C, almond. 
♦SJtouS,/. 1. b. mouse. 
*23Utt'tev, /. 1. a. mother. 
SKacft'tigaK,/. 1. t>. nightingale. 
Sdarr, m. 2. b. fool. 
*SRug, /. 1. i\ nut. 
*0vt, m. 3. b. t\ & Ct place. 
*spap|t, m. 3. b. b. pope. 
spfaD, m. 3. b. b. path, 
spffau'je,/. 1. C. plant. 
SHvicl) en, m. 3. a. a. jaw. 
*5>tani) / m. 3. b. e. border. 
Stag, m. 3. b. rank. 
*SRaum, ™. 3. b. [\ space. 
^SHeicl) tfyttm, m. 3. b. e. riches, 
diidym, m. 3. a. a. judge. 
*@aft, m. 3. b. 6. juice, 
©dng'erin,/. 1. e. songstress. 
©cfjaar,/. 1. b. troop, 
©djat'teil, m. 3. a. a. shadow. 
*©(ta§, m. 3. b. 6. treasure. 
@djiff, n. 3. b. b. ship. 
@d.)ilb, m. 3. b. 6. shield. 
©cWiUtg'e,/. 1. C. serpent. 
*@d)iog, rc. 3. b. e. castle. 
©c()u(b,/. 1. D. debt. 
©cbmaCbe,/. 1. c. swallow, 
©olbat, m. 2. b. soldier, 
©picket, ct. 3. a. a. looking- 
glass. 
*©tOfcl), m. 3. b. 6. stork. 
*@trumpf, m. 3. b. b. stocking. 
%tjdt,f. 1. b. action. 
*ioc()'fer / /. 1. a. daughter. 
*^vaum, m. 3. b. b. dream. 
*$ttcl), n. 3. b. c. cloth. 
$u'gcn&,/. 1. b. virtue. 
111)1*,/. 1. b. watch. 
*2*0lt\ rc. 3. b. e. nation. 
*2Ba(b, m. 3. b. C. forest. 



f See note on preceding page. 



32 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



[BOOK I. 



Of the walls, 
Of the women, 
Of the worlds, 
Of the wind, 
The wishes, 
The worms, 
Of the numbers, 
To the tooth, 
To the times, 
To the tents, 
Of the circle, 
The tolls, 
The aims, 
Of the onion, 

Of Catherine, 

Of the Hague, 

Of Huss, 

Of the Indies, 

To the Netherlands, 

Of the Sibyl, 



*9GBant) / /. 1. b, wall. 
^zib, n. 3. b. e. woman. 
^dt,/. 1. b. world. 
SXBtnb, m. 3. b. b. wind. 
*3Bunfd,\ m. 3. b 6. wish. 
*3jBunn, m. 3. b. e. worm. 
$Z§[,f. 1. b. number. 
*£at)n, m. 3. b. b. tooth. 
$cit,f. 1. b. time. 
jMt, ?i, 3. b. [\ tent. 
3iv'r'c(, m. 3 a. a. circle. 
*3oH, m. 3. b. b. toll. 
^n?ccf, m. 3. b. b. aim. 
pwue'b.cl,/. 1. c. onion. 

^atfyati'na, Catherine. 

2)cv £aag, the Hague. 

J&iifi, Huss. 

3n'bien, ». India. 

2Mc 3ft ie'Der (ante, the Neth- 
erlands. 

©italic, Sibyl. 



Recapitulatory Exercises. 

SDtc 356'gtf flie'gen in bcr htft. 

SDte gifctye felntmn'mcn in bem Q&affcr. 

SDie S5ldt'tei- f&ufcfn in bem 'JBin'ie. 

S)ie ©ctnuct'tcvttngc fCaftern nm biz S5fu'men. 

3)ie 33ie'nw fam'meln Jpo'nig Don ben 951u'men nnb tra'gen 
ifyn nad) ben 93ie'nraf£rben fifcr i^'re jiWlen. 

2>te @per'ltngc le'fcn £afme auf nnb bau'en Sdcftev fuv 
tfy're 95rnt. 

£>te Su'genb ifl bte gvnfy'fingtfjeit be$ ie'bens. 



*33o'gcf, m. 3. a. a. bird, 
fiie'gcn, fly, 
in, in. (Dot.) 
**uft,/. 1. b. air. 
gifel), »?. 3. b. b. fish, 
fcbroim'men, swim. 
QBaf'fev, n. 3. a. a. water. 
*5»Utt, ». 3. b. e. leaf. 



fdn'fcfn, rustle. 
3Btnb, m. 3. b. b. wind. 
©djmet'tcrUng, m. 3. 

butterfly, 
flat'tcrn, flutter, 
nm, about. (Ace.) 
SSfimte,/. 1. C. flower. 
SSie'ne,/. 1. c. bee. 



b. b. 



PART II. CH. 2.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 33 

fctm'meln, Gollect. @pev ling, m. 3. b. b. sparrow. 

J^O'utg, m. 3. b. 6. honey. Ic'fett-auf, pickup. 

i)0U, from. (Dat.) £alm, m. 3. b. l\ straw. 

ttnD, and. bau'cn, build, 

tta'gen, carry. Sftcjt, n. 3. b. e. 

i^tt, it. 23ntt, /. 1. brood. 

nadj, to. (Dat.) Me Su'gent),/. 1. youth. 
•JSic'ncnfovb, w. 3. b. b. bee- iflt; is. 

hive. gvufy'finggjeit, /. 1. t>. spring- 
fftv, for. (Ace.) time. 

ity're, their. t>a£ k'kn, w. 3, a. a. life. 
izi'U,f. 1. C. cell. 



The hen sees the kite in the air, and gathers her chickens 
under her wings. 

Fire has its uses and its dangers ; we call it a good servant, 
but a cruel master. 

The Thebans, under the command of Pelopidas and Epami- 
nondas, freed themselves from the yoke of the Spartans. 

By a sloop we understand a boat with one mast, and four or 
five sails. 

Truth triumphs over superstition and skepticism, by means 
of investigation and reflection. 

The whole earth appears, to the philanthropist, as one fam- 
ily mansion. 

hen, ipen'nc,/. 1. c. we, roir. 

sees, fteln. call, nen'nen. 

kite, (Sci'ev, m. 3. a. a. it, e& 

in, in. (Dat.) good, gu'ten. 

air, *i\ift, f. 1. b. servant, SMe'ttCr, m. 3. a. 0. 

and, ttnt>. but, a'bn. 

gathers, kcvfam'mcit. cruel, gratt'famen. 

her, ify've. master, Jfrttt, m. % a. 

chickens, ffucb'fcin, n. 3. a^l. Theban, ^efca'nev, m. 3. a. 0. 

under, uil'tev. (Dat.) command, Ifnfufynmg, /. 1. 

her, ify'rett. of, def. art. sing. 

wing, ghVgcf, m. 3. a. a. freed, fcefvci'tCtt. 

fire, ta>S geu'er, n. -3. a. a. themselves, f(d). 

has, ^t from, fcon. (Dat.) 

lts ^ WW, yoke. %od), n. 3. b. b. 

use, SBor'tfjctf, m. 3. b. (\ Spartan, ©pavta'nev, m. 3. a. a. 

danger, (Sefatjr', /. 1. t>. by, un'tev. (Da*.; 



34 ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 

sloop, ©cMup'pe,/. 1. C. by means, mit t>et* Jpitl'fe. 

we understand, Derjte'^CU mx. of, feou. (Bat.) 

boat, gafn-'JOUg, ra. 3. b. b. investigation, Unterfu'djling, 

with, mit. (Da* J /. 1. t>. 

one, ci'ncm. reflection, Staclj'&enfcn, ». 3. a. 

mast, 93iajt, m. 3. b. b. whole, gan'je. 

four, bier, earth, (Ev'&e, / 1. C. 

or, o'&cr. appears, cvfdjeittt'. 

five, funf. to, (Dai.) 

sail, ©c'gcf, w. 3. a. a. philanthropist, 93ien'fcf)CU= 

truth, Die ^abv'fjcit,/. 1. i>. freuufc, w. 3. b. 6. 

triumphs, triumpfyivt'. as, ate. 

over, u'biT. (Ace.) one, Sin. 

superstition, ZCberglaube, 7?z. family mansion, *@tamm'» 

3. c. fyauS, n. 3. b. e. 
skepticism, ^ci'fHfucbt,/. 1. 



CHAPTER III. 
ADJECTIVES. 

The Adjective appears in its simple or adverbial form, when 
its termination is not affected by gender or declension ; as, 
3Die SMr'gcr, gut unt> fret, The citizens, good and free. 

§ 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives are declined by adding certain letters to their 
simple form. 

For the use of the simple and the declinable forms see Book 
II. Chapter 3. § 1. Rules i. u. and in. 

Every adjective is declined in three different forms. 

First Declension. 

Adjectives are inflected according to the first declension, 
when they are not preceded by an article or a pronoun. The 
form of this declension is nearly like that of the article, t>CV, 
tic, ta& The adjective gilt, good, for example, is thus 
declined : 



PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



35 



Singular. 
Masc. Fern. Neut. 

N. gu'tev, gu'te, gu'tes, good. 

G. gu'tes, or gu'ten'* gu'tev, gu'tes, or gu'ten,* of good. 

D. gu'tem, gu'tev, gu'tem, to good. 

A. gu'ten, gu'te, gu'tes, good. 

Plural for the three genders. 

gtl'te, good, 

gu'tev, of good. 

gu'ten, to good. 

gu'te, good. 

The following is an example of an adjective in the first de- 
clension, as joined to nouns of different genders : 

Singular. 

Masc. 

N. gu'tev 'IBein, good wine. 
G. gu'ten or gu'tcs? ^IBei'neS, of good wine. 

D. gu'tem 3Bei'ne, to good wine. 

A. gu'ten 2Betn, good wine. 

Fern. 

N. gu'te §Vltc()t, good fruit. 

G. gu'tev gvucbt, of good fruit. 

D, gu'tev gl*uct)t, to good fruit. 

A. gu'te §vucl)t, good fruit. 

Neut. 

N. gu'teg b 33vol>, good bread. 
G. gu'ten or gu'ten *23vo'fcc6, of good bread. 

D. gu'tem 23rot>e, to good bread. 

A. gu'te £ 25i'0&, good bread. 

Plural for the three genders. 
ZV. gu'te SIBet'ne, gniriyte, S5robf, good wines, fruits, 
G. gu'tev ^ei'ne, gvucly'te, SSro'De, ofgood,&-c. [loaves. 
D. gu'ten ^ei'nen, gnWteu, SBro'Den, to good, &c. 
A. gu'te ^ei'ne, gvuciyte, SJvo'De, good, &c. 

So decline gvo'fev *2D?ann, 3. b. e., great man ; roatyu (S^ 
fd)tc()'te, 1. C, true history ; iu'bt$ £inD, 3. b. e., dear child. 

* The use of the one or the other of these two forms 
(gu'tetf, gu'ten,) depends on euphony alone. 



36 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 

Second Declension. 

Adjectives are inflected according to the second declension, 
when they are preceded by the definite article, fcer, t>ie, fca£ ; 
or by a demonstrative or relative pronoun ; as, t>ic'fcv, this ; 
je'ner, that; i>er'jenige, that; fcerfeCbc, the same; voc('cl)er, 
who : or by the indefinite pronouns, je'fcer, jcg'lidKl*, jcfc'rccfcer, 
every, (the last three having no plural.) Ex. 

Singular. 
Masc. Fein. Neut. 

N. fcet 4 gu'te, t»ie gu'te, &as gu'te, the good. 

G. te$ gu'ten, fcer gu'ten, fccs gu'tcn, of the good. 

2>. bem gu'tcn, t>er gu'ten, t>cm gu'ten, to the good. 

A ben gu'ten, fcie gu'te, bas gu'te, the good. 

Plural, for the three genders. 
N. t>ie gu'ten, the good. 
G. t»er gu'ten, of the good. 
2). Den gu'ten, to the good. 
A. Die gu'ten, the good. 

!Det* gu'te, with a masculine noun, is thus declined : 

Singular. 
N. bet* gu'te 5D?ami, the good man. 

G. be6 gu'tcn SDtan'ncS, of the good man. 
D. tent gu'tcn COTan'ne, to the good man. 
A. t>en gu'ten SDTann, the good man. 

S)tC gu'te, with a feminine noun, is thus declined : 
Singular. 
gu'te g;r cut, the good woman, 

gu'tcn §rau, of the good woman, 
gu'tcn grau, to the good woman, 
gu'te fivau, the good woman. 

2)a£ gu'te, with a neuter noun, is thus declined : 
Singular. 
N. t><\$ gu'te ^Bcvf, the good work. 

G. be£ gu'ten ^Bey'feS, of the good work. 
D. tern gu'ten SOBcr'fc/ to the good work. 
A. i>n$ gu'te QOBerf, the good work. 



N. 


Me 


G. 


ber 


D. 


t>er 


A. 


tic 



PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 37 

Plural for the three genders. 

N. t>ie gn'ten Mlan'mx, gvan'en, QQDev'fe, 

the good men women, works. 

G. t>ev gn'ten SDTan'ner, gran'en, 'IBer'fr, of the good, &c. 
D. t>en gn'ten SCftan'nem, gvan'en, 'SBer'fen, to the good, &,c 
A. t>ie gn'tat Sftfai'wv, gran'en, ^er te, the good, &c. 

So decline, bet ftei'ne £na'6e, 2. a., the little boy ; bie Hn'ge 
grau, 1. &., the prudent woman ; t>a^ flet'ue S0Tat>'c()en, 3. a. 
a./ the little girl. 

Third Declension. ^ 

Adjectives are inflected according to the third declension, 
when they are preceded by the indefinite article, (ill, et'llC, CM ; 
or by a personal or a possessive pronoun, as, id), I ; bit, thou ; 
it, he, &,c. ; twin, mine ; t>ein, thine ; fein, his, &c, or the 
indefinite pronoun fein, none. This declension is like the 
first in the accusative and nominative singular, and like the 
second in the genitive and dative singular and in all the cases 
of the plural. 

The declension is as follows : 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

N. mein gn'tev, mei'ne gn'te, mein gn'teg, my good. 

G. mei'nes gn'ten, mei'tter gn'ten, mei'nes gn'ten, of my good. 

D. mei'nem gn'ten, mei'ner gn'ten, mei'nem gn'ten, to my good. 

A. mei'nen gn'ten, mei'ne gn'te, mmi$u'tt$, my good. 

Plural for the three genders. 

N. mei'ne gn'ten, my good, 

G. mei'ner gn'ten, of my good. ' 

D. mei'nen gn'ten, to my good. 

A. mei'ne gn'ten, my good. 

Winn gn'tetr, with a masculine noun, is thus declined : 
Singular. 

N. mem gn'ter SBru'ber, my good brother. 

G. mei'nee? gu'ten 23vn'bet% of my good brother. 

D. mei'nem gn'ten SSvu'ber, to my good brother. 

A. mei'nen gn'ten 23vn'ber, my good brother. 



38 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 

Sftd'ttC gu'te, with a feminine noun, is thus declined : 

Singular. 

N. mei'ne gu'te ©cforocf'tcr/ my good sister. 

G. mei'ner gu'ten ©djroef'ter, of my good sister. 

Z). met'nev gu'ten ©cfomef'tcr, to my good sister. 

^4. mei'ne gu'te @c()n)ef'ter, my good sister. 

SDTeht gU'teS/ with a neuter noun, is thus declined : 

N. mcill gtt'tetf ftinfc, my good child. 

6% met'nc6 gu'ten Hn'fceg, of my good child. 

Z>. met'nem gu'ten ftin'&e, to my good child. 

A. mein gu'ten ftinfc, my good child. 

Plural for the three genders. 

N. mei'ne gu'ten 35nVber, ©eljrcef'tern, ftin'&et, 
my good brothers, sisters, children. 

6r. mei'ner gu'ten SSnVfcer, @djn>ef tern, &in't>er, of my, &c. 
D. mei'nen gu'ten 23nV&crn, ©dmuftern, ^tn'fcern, tomy,&,c. 
-4. mei'ne gu ten SSnVfcer, ©cfjiref'tern, ^in'fcer, my, &c. 

So decline, ein rcei'fer *9Dtann, 3. b. e„ a wise man ; ei'ne 
fcl)6'ne grau, 1. t>., a fair lady ; etn tlet'ues £au$, 3. b. e., a 
small house ; fcet'ne tmt'e greun'tun, 1. e., thy faithful (female) 
friend. 

The following table exhibits the terminations of the adjec- 
tives, according to the three declensions. 



First Declension, like gtt'tev. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 




Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 




Norn. 


ev 


e 


e^ 


e 


Gen. 


eg or en 


er 


e^ or en 


it 


DatT 


em 


et* 


em 


en 


Ace. 


en 


e 


eg 


e 


Second Declension, like fcer gu'tC. 




SINGULAR. 


PLURAL 




Masc. 


i^m. iVew£. 




Norn. 


e 


e e 


en 


Gen. 


en 


en en 


en 
en 
en 


Bat. 


en 


en ; en 

i 


| Ace. 


en 


e j c 


Third Declension, like mem em'ter. 


. 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 




Norn. 


Cf 


e 


eg 


en 


Gen. 


en 


en 


en 


en 
en 
en 


Bat. 


en 


en 


en 


Ace. 


en 


e 


eg 



40 



DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 



[book 



Promiscuous Exercises on the Adjectives and Nouns. 



fd)6u. 



£inb, n. 3. b. e. 



Of the fine children. 

To a fine child. 

Of happy days. 

Of good men. 

The ignorant people. 

The liquid air. 

The industrious maid. 

An easy work. 

Of hard labor. 

My frugal meal. 

Tall firs. 

Of the hard oak. 

A shady elm. 

Of hard iron. 

The early lark. 

An unknown land. 

Of the Trojan hero. 

Of civilized Europe. 

Free America. 

To the fiery Hecla. 

Of the fair Helen. 

The chaste Diana. 

The geographical miles. 

Terrible thunder. 

The Olympic games. 

Of distant valleys. 

Of fine flowers. 

To my pious father. 

To fresh butter. 

To a red coat. 

Black bread. 



Observation I. When several adjectives are, one after 
another, joined to the same substantive, they are generally 
declined as each of them would be, if it stood alone, according 
to the above rules. Thus, in the example, mein gu'ter al'tn 
^TCUUb, my good old friend, both adjectives, gu'ta* and (iVtcV, 
are inflected according to the third declension ; in t»ie treu'e 
j&Vt'(iri)e Wlut'tCY, the faithful, tender mother, both adjectives 
are inflected according to the second declension ; only when 
adjectives are put together without being preceded by an 



gtftcf'lidj. 


$ag, m. 5. b. b. 


gut. 


*m;nn, m. s. b. e. 


wirtDiifenk 


kxi'te, m. 3 b. 


pfftg. 


*kuft, f. 1. b. 


tietftg. 


♦SHagD, /. 1. 6. 


lektjt. 


Zv'bcit, /. 1. t>. 


febroer. 
fpar'fam. 




m&witit, '/. i. k 


crfyiVbcn. 


gidvtc,/. I.e. 


tjiUt. 


(Si'cbe, f. I.e. 


$dHt'ti$. 


W'me, f. 1. c. 


t)AVt. 


©t'fen, n. 3. a. a. 


pi) 


Sev'dje, /. 1. c 


un'bcfrmnt. 


•ktit, n. 3. b. b. & e 


troja'nifd). 


Jfpclt), m. 2. b. 


geflt'tet. 


Ghivo'pa, n. 


fret. 


2fme'rita, n. 


fcu'eig. 


Jptf'U, m. 


fcfeSn. 


Helena,/. 


h y u\d). 


©ia'na, /. 


geogra'pr/tfel) 


attei'Ie,/. J. c 


fd)recr -/ li(l). 


©on'ner, m. 3. a. a. 


o It) m'p if d). 


©picl, n. 3. b. b. 


entfenit'. 


*$l)a(, n. 3. b. c. 


fc()6n. 


sglu'me, /.i.e. 


fro mm. 


*33a'tcr, wi. 3. a. a. 


fnfd). 


S5ut'tcv, /. 1. 


Vptt). 


ftleib, rc. 3. b. e. 


fd)roai> 


33vot>, w. 3. b. b. 



PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



41 



article or pronoun, as, gn'tCV VO'tytt < 2Bcin / good red wine ; 
gu'te vo'tfye gav'be, good red color ; gu'tes vo'tfyes ^ttct), 
good red cloth, the first adjective is inflected according 
to the first declension, while the subsequent adjectives may 
be inflected either according to the first or third; except 
the genitive case singular of the masculine and the neuter 
genders, in which the subsequent adjectives must be inflected 
after the third declension. The following examples exhibit 
these two modes of declining. 

Masculine. 

Singular. 



N. gu'tev vo'tl)ev 3£em, 

G. gn'tes or gu'ten* vo'ffyen ^ei'neS, 

D. gn'tem ro'tfyemor vo't^eit t 2Bci / nc, 

A. gu'tcn vo'tijen 3£eht, 

Feminine. 



good red wine, 
of good red wine, 
to good red wine, 
good red wine. 



Singular. 

N. gu'te ro'tfye gav'fcc, 

G. gu'tcr vo't^cr or ro'ttyen gar/be, 

D. gtt'tet ro'tfyer or vo'ttyen gav'be, 

-4. gu'te vo'tfye gat:' be, 

Neuter. 



JV. 

o. 

D. 

A. 



Singular. 

gu'tem ro'tt)e£ $uc(), 
gu'tem or gu'teu* vo'tfjen ^u'cftcs, 
gu'tem ro'tfyem or vo'tfyen ^u'cfye, 
gu'tes w'ttys ^vub, 



good red color, 
of good red color, 
to good red color, 
good red color. 



good red cloth, 
of good red cloth, 
to good red cloth, 
good red cloth. 



* The difference between C6 and en in the genitive singular 
of the first adjective masculine or neuter, has nothing to do 
with the two modes of declining here exhibited, but is a matter 
of euphony, as has been before observed, page 35. But the 
genitive of the subsequent adjectives never ends in e$, accord- 
ing to the first declension, but always in en, according to the 
third. Thus we cannot say, gtt'teS V 0' t f) t g QOBei'neS, but 

we must say, gu'tes (or gu'teu) "r o't t) en < 2Bei'ne& 

4* 



42 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [bOOK I. 

Plural for the three genders. 

N. gu'te vo'tfye or vo'tt)eu SOBei'ue, gavbrn, Su'djcr, 

good red wines, colors, cloths. 

G. gu'tetu'O'tfyetorvo'tfyeu'IBerite, garden, ^lt'cljcr, of, &c. 
D. gu'teu vo'ttjcn SBei'ueu, gm-'ben, Su'cbcnt, to, &c. 

-4. gu'te ro'tfye or ro'tijen ^ei'ne, gar'ben, ^u'efyev, fine, &c. 

In good writing and speaking, the choice between these 
two modes of declining an adjective when subsequent to an- 
other, though frequently depending on euphony, is sometimes 
determined by the degree of importance assigned to the sub- 
sequent adjective. Thus, in speaking of " good domestic 
cloths," we may design either to distinguish good domestic 
from good foreign cloths, or good domestic from bad domestic 
cloths. The first meaning is expressed in German by inflect- 
ing the subsequent like the preceding adjective, according to 
the first declension ; as, gu'ter ein'fycimifefeci* ^iVcbcr, of good 
domestic cloths ; but in order to express the last mentioned 
meaning we decline the subsequent adjective according to the 
third declension ; as, gu'tci* ein'fycimtfeljcn $iVci)cr, of good 
domestic cloths. 

The above observation concerning the declension of an 
adjective subsequent to another, applies also to adjectives pre- 
ceded by the indefinite pronouns, mttf'vcve, several ; ei'nigc, 
some; et'ttdjc, some: roel'ctjc, some*; man'ebe, some; roe's 
uige, few ; tw'U, many ; ai'ic, all. Thus to distinguish " all 
good men/' from all that are not so, we say, ttf'lc gu'te £Dten'= 
$d)Ci\; but in order to distinguish "all good men" from some 
good ones, we say, al'Ie gu'tcn 5D?eu'fd)eu. 

Observation II. When indeclinable words precede, wheth- 
er numerals, adjectives, or adverbs, they have no influence 
upon the adjective ; as, 

<£t'roa$ gu'ter 3Beiu, some good wine. 

93tcl frifclye SDtifcf), much fresh milk, 

< 2Bc / nicj hl'US 3£affcr, a little cold water, 

©efyt' gu'te SDten'feijeu, very good men. 



* This indefinite pronoun is not to be confounded with the 
relative, roel'erjer, roef'efye, roel'djeS, who, which. If the latter 
precedes an adjective, this is always inflected according to 
the second declension, as has been remarked, page 36. 



PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 43 

SBtet* fcact're %t)d'Ux, four dollars in cash, 

glinf tang'e S&tyVt, five long years. 

Start) %ct)\\ lang'Clt Safy'ren, after ten long years. 

But the adjective is declined according to the above rules 
concerning subsequent adjectives (Obs. I.), when it is pre- 
ceded by jroei or fcrei, as these two numerals may be declined 
in the genitive and dative. Examples : 

G. $m\'tx (ana/ev or fang'en ^a'ge, of two long days. 

G. ©rei'er bcui'vevor baa'rcu X^titix, of three dollars in cash. 

D. SDrei'en glt'tcn SDlen'fcfecn, to three good men. 

Observation III. If an adjective in its simple form is put 
before another adjective, the termination of which agrees with 
the following substantive, in gender, number, and case, the 
first adjective is not to be considered as denoting a quality 
of the substantive, but as an adverb, qualifying the adjective 
after it. The following examples will explain this difference. 

©in gan'jeS neu'eS £au$, a whole, new house, 

©in gcinj neu'es JF>au$, a house wholly or quite new. 

QEhx neu'eS ein'gebiut&ncs 23nc(), a new book, bound up. 

©in ncn etn/gcbnntmct? 23uct), a book newly bound, 

©in fyal'bes gcbra'teneS £ntyn, half a roasted chicken, 

©in fyalb gebt\Vtene£ Jpntyn, a chicken half roasted. 

Observation IV. In familiar language, and in poetry, the 
termination of an adjective, when it precedes a neuter noun, 
is sometimes dropped in the nominative and accusative case 
singular, and its simple form alone is retained ; as, fd)6u 
QOBet'ter, fine weather, instead of fcfcS'nes defter ; ctn fro I; 
©e'flcfjt, a cheerful face, instead of Ctn jro'tyctf ©efici)?. 

Observation V. When two adjectives of the same termina- 
tion come together, coupled by the conjunction nnt>, and, it is 
usual in familiar discourse, to drop the termination of the first ; 
as, eta voti): nnb roetffetf (Beftcvjt', a red and white face ; tin 
gemto> nnb ar'beitfamer SDfanfd), a contented and industrious 
man. 

Adjectives may be used as substantives, both in the singular 
and plural ; as, t>CV QBctf'e, the wise man ; t>te IBri'fc, the 
wise woman ; Die ^Bei'fcn, the sages ; fcctS ©vt)a'bcnc, the 
sublime ; fcer (StUtjX'te, the learned man ; Die @cl)6'nc, the- 
fair woman ; &cr SSefann'te, the male acquaintance ; Die 33e= 
f ann'te, the female acquaintance ; t(X ^txxOMt'U, the male 



44 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTiVE: 



BOOK I. 



relative ; tne SJcrttan&'tC, the female relative ; im'fcre 55c- 
tmn'tftl UHD 3$ew>an&'tCtt, our acquaintances and relations. 



§2. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



The degrees of comparison are the positive, the compara- 
tive, and the superlative. The comparative is formed by 
adding V or n, and the superlative by adding \\ or eft, to the 
end of the simple word, or positive ; as, 



Positive. 
$Ui\\, little ; 
SSeiffe, wise ; 
Smft, bold ; 



Comparative. 
Uri'MX, less ; 
VOU'fn, wiser ; 
fccei'jUr, bolder 

So form : 



fyofyl, hollow. 
V cutty, rough. 
bfau, blue. 
fd)(ec()t, bad. 
fanft, soft. 
imVfce, weary. 



Superlative. 
fleinft, least. 
tt>ci'j>|t/ wisest. 
&rct'|tcft,* boldest. 



lafym, lame, 
jtolj, proud, 
vol), raw. 
fefc, firm, 
jafym, tame, 
fit) [cult', slender. 



The preceding adjectives do not change their vowels in the 
comparative and superlative, but most adjectives change the 
vowels (I, 0, XX, into ct, 0, U, in the comparative and superla- 
tive : as. 



Positive. 
alt, old ; 
VOtf), red; 
fttVJ, short 



Comparative. 
(U'ter, older ; 
th'ttftv, redder ; 
turner, shorter; 

So form : 



*arm, poor. 
^bcutg'C, fearful. 
*&Utnm, stupid. 



Superlative. 
dl'tCjt, oldest. 
vb'tx)t\t, reddest. 
hU'^Cjl, shortest. 



Halt, cold. 
*0(u$ ; prudent. 
*na|3, wet. 



* The superlative degree is seldom used in its simple form, 
but is commonly made to agree, in gender, number, and case, 
with the noun to which it refers, by adding to the superlative 
such endings as the declension of adjectives requires (see pa<re 
39); ex. tlein'tU (Sa'fce, smallest gift; fcer ttei'fejU ^iiti) f the 
wisest counsel ; fan fcm'fkftei? llntcrnefy'mcn, his boldest 
enterprise. 



PART II. CH. 3.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 45 

*grol), coarse. *fct)n>ae(), weak. 

*grO$, great. *|larf, strong. 

Some adjectives form their comparison irregularly ; as, 
Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

gut, good ; bef'fer, better ; 6ejt, best. 

jjoc(), high ; i}b't)tV, higher ; t)cd)\\, highest. 

%l<x't)Cf near ; Jld^Cf, nearer ; nctd)jt, nearest. 

M>(, much ; tnefyr, more ; metjt, most. 

The comparative and superlative of adjectives are declined 
like the positive. 

The adjective vein, pure, comparative rei'lUV, superlative 
Veinft, is thus declined in its comparative degree : 

First Declension : 
Masc. Fern. Neut. 

rei'ncvev, reimeve, rei'nercs, purer, &c. 

Second Declension : 
fcer rei'nere, tie rei'nere, fca£ m'nm, the purer, &c. 

Third Declension : 
mem rei'nerer, mei'ne rei'nere, mein rei'nere^, my purer, &c. 

In the same manner is declined the superlative of vein ; viz. 

First Declension : 
mn'fler, rein'jle, rein'|te£, purest, &c. 

Second Declension : 
t>er reiu'fte, Die retn'jfe, M$ rein'lte, the purest, &c. 

Third Declension : 

mein remoter, met'ne retn'jte, mein retn'jtes, my purest, &c. 

Thus inflect through the three declensions : 

^tn ett'ferer *3Dtann, 3. b. e., a more noble man. 

Sifter greunfc, 3. b. b„ best friend. 

2Me TOdr'meve *luft, 1. b., warmer air. 

9C*?ein jftng'ereS ftinfc, 3. b. e., my younger child. 

2>a$ fvet'|U *Unt>, 3. b. e., the freest country. 



46 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



[book I. 



Observations on the Comparison of Adjectives. 

I. The e is often dropped in the comparative of adjectives 
ending in el, en, and ei* ; as, 



Positive. 
e'De(, noble ; 
fldj'ev, safe; 
fcoUtom'men, perfect ; 



Comparative. 
eD'tev, nobler, (for c'beter.) 
jldj'm*, safer, (for fidj'ever.) 
Votlfomm'net*, more perfect, 
(for voilfom'menev.) 

II. Most primitives change their vowels in the comparative 
and superlative ; as, jtavf, strong ; (tarter, stronger ; Dei* 
ftfa&ftt, the strongest ; hit*}, short ; ftVjfT, Dei: ftVjejte. But 
the following are exceptions, as well as some others previously 
noticed, (page 44) ■ falfd), false ; gei\VDe, straight ; ()olD, 
affectionate ; lo'fe, loose ; glatt, smooth ; matt, faint ; nacf t, 
naked ; nmD, round ; jtnmyf, dull ; ylatt, flat ; fatt, satiated ; 
fct)(aff, slack. Derivatives never change their vowels ; as, 
laf'tertyaft, vicious ; laf'terfyafter, more vicious; Dei* laf'tevfyafs 
tCjte, the most vicious. 

Recapitulatory Exercises on Adjectives. 

£>ie Statur' jetgt mt£ fdjfc'ncve ©CgenjUnDe aft? Die SCimjI. 

3Me berg'idjtcn ©e'genben futD an'genefymer ate t>ie e'benen. 

S)ie SBoWe Dev fddyftfd)cn ©djaa'fe itf fei'ncr ate Die SXBotTc 
Der eng'Ufd)en. 

2)ie SDfam'Defa fya'ben ei'ncn fci'netren (Sefdjmacf ate Die 
Sditffe. 

2)ie giguv' Dcs jjiv'fcte ift Die fcoftfom'menjft untev Den ge- 
ome'trifdjen gigu'ren. 

2>ie (Svie'cfeen roa'ren eiit gebil'Deteres SBolf ate Die SKS'mcr. 

2)ev trcfP (idje SDUnn fanD un'ter ^il'Den ei'ne (VctmD'licfceve 
2Utf nafyme ate in Dem gefit'teten QSuro'pa. 



Die SdatUV, nature, 
jetgt, exhibits. 
nnS, to us. 
fd)6n, fine. 
*©egen{tan&, object, 
ate, than. 
Die £un|t, art. 
6crgid)t, mountainous. 
©egenD, country. 



ffnD, are. 

anamefym, pleasant, 
cben, plain. 
c 2BoCle / wool. 
fdd)ftfd), Saxon. 
@d)aaf, sheep. 
ijl, is. 
fein, fine. 
engUfcl), English. 



PART n. CH. 3.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



47 



SDfanfcel, almond, 
fyaben, have, 
feefdjmact; taste. 
Slug, nut. 
giguv, figure. 
JivM, circle. 
i)0({fommcu, complete. 
Uttter, among. 
geotttetrtfd), geometrical, 
fcer (Sriecfoe, the Greek. 
tt?arcn, were. 



gefrU&Ct, cultivated. 
^3o(f, people. 
t>et* SKomer, the Roman, 
trcjflicl), excellent. 
SOTann, man. 
fant), found. 
\T>\ib, savage. 
freuuMicl), friendly. 
2Ulfnat)me, reception, 
geftttet, civilized. 



The English and the German are kindred languages. 

These little things are great to little men 

His style, though uncultivated, is the richest and boldest in 
{the) modern literature. 

The strange man gave the cloak to me, poor forsaken child. 

This gentleman possesses the choicest collection of ancient 
and modern historical works. 

You find in this public library a smaller number of volumes, 
but a larger number of excellent old manuscripts than in the 
other. 

To whom belongs the glory of this w r onderful discovery ; 
to Leibnitz, or to Newton? 



English, en'glifd). 

and, lint). 

German, fccutfdj. 

are, ftnl), 

kindred, fcevnxm&t'. 

language, ©pva'cfee,/. 

these, fcte'fc 

little, Hem. 

thing, Ding, n. 3. b. 6. 

are, [mo. 

great, grog. 

to, fur. (Ace.) 

man, SDUufcfe, m. 2. b. 

his, fei'ne. 

style, ©djreiS'art, /. 1. 1>. 

though, ttue'roofyl. 

uncultivated, un'gc6tf&et. 

is, iff. 

rich, reici). 



bold, fftfyn. 
in, in. (Dat.) 
modern, neu'et. 
literature, i\UX<Xt\XX' , f. I. t>. 
strange, fremt). 
1. C. man, *£Dtonn, m. 3. b. e. 
gave, gal). 

cloak, *93tan / tct / m. 3. a, rt. 
to me, mil*, 
poor, arm. 

forsaken, fcerfaf'fett. 

child, £iurj, n. 3. b. e. 

this, fcie'fcr. 

gentleman, Jperr. »&. 2. b. 

possesses, beft^t'. 

choice, aug'evlefen. 

collection, ©amm'mng, /. 1. &. 

of, (Gen.) 

ancient, aft. 



48 



NUMERALS. 



[book I. 



historical, gefcfeicfct'Iid). 

work, SBetf, n. 3. b. b. 

you, itjt* 

find, fm'bet. 

in, in. (Dat.) 

this, aie'fer. 

public, offentUcl). 

library, SibllO^',/. 1. b. 

small, gering'. 

number, Zhi'jafyl,/. 1. 

of, J) on. (Z>a£.) 

volume, *25an&, m. 3. b. b. 

but, a'betr. 

large, *gt06. 

excellent, trejflicfj. 



old, alt. 

manuscript, J^anb'fc&rift,/. 1. b. 

than, al$. 

in, in. (Dat.) 

other, an'ber. 

to whom, mm. 

belongs, gefyfat 7 . 

glory, SKufym, m. 3. b. 

of, (Gen.) 

this, fcie'fcr. 

wonderful, ronn'bevbar. 

discovery, ©ntbecf'ung,/. 1. b. 

to, (Dat.) 

or, o'OCV 



CHAPTER IV. 
NUMERALS. 



The numbers are divided into cardinal, ordinal, proportion- 
al, distributive, and collective. 

I. The cardinal numbers are as follows : 



(Sdllll or ge'VO, nothing.) 
(£in or etnS, one. 
3roci (or jroei;), two. 
£>m (or tret)), three. 
33iev, four, 
gfmf, five. 
®cd)$, six. 
@te'bcn, seven. 
%d)t, eight. 
SfiCMt, nine, 
jje'fyen or jcfytt, ten. 
©If (or etff), eleven. 
3^0 If, twelve. 
Svei'jefyn, thirteen. 
SBicr'jclJn, fourteen, 
g'unf jcfyn or fanf jetjn, fifteen. 
©edj'jcfyn, sixteen, 
©ic'benjetjtt or fteb'jefyn, sev- 
enteen. 



ftdjt'jefyn, eighteen. 
Steun'je^n, nineteen, 
jjnxui'jig, twenty. 
(tin nub jroan'jig, one and 

twenty. 
3roct unb jwan'jig, two and 

twenty, &c. 
©yet' jig, thirty. 
Sin nnb byet'ftg, thirty-one, 

&/C. 

3Skr'Jtg, forty, &c. 
gunf jig or guuf jig, fifty, &c. 
©edj'jig, sixty, &c. 
©ie'bcnjig or fteb'jig, seventy, 

&c. 
Zfdjt'jig, eighty, &c. 
Sfteun'jig, ninety, &c 
Jpnn'DCVt, a hundred* 



PART II. CM. 4.] NUMERALS. 



49 



Jpun'Dcvt VMS ettt or CMS, a $tt)\X trtU'fCttfc, ten thousand. 

hundred and one. QH'ne 20ti((ion', one million, 

^pun'fcert UUi) jroci, a hundred ^mi 93Ullio'nen, two millions. 

and two, &c. 2)vci ?D?tUtO'nen, three mil- 
$\VU tyun'&CVt, two hundred, lions, &c. 

&,c. ®in tait'fenfc acfet fmn'&evt nnfc 

Sau'fent), a thousand. eitt im& Dm'ftS, 1831. 

Some of the cardinal numbers are declinable. 

The numeral cm, one, when put before a substantive, is 
commonly declined like the article em, a ; but, when it stands 
by itself, it is inflected according to the three declensions of 
adjectives ; as, 

1. Qji'ner, ci'ne, ti'\u$ one; gen, ei'rie£, ei'ner, ei'nes, of 
one ; &c. 

2. SDcr ei'ne, t)ie ei'ne, t>a^ ei'ne, the one ; gen. t>c$ ei'nen, 
i>ci* ei'nen, Dei? ei'nen, of the one ; &c. 

3. $Jki\\ ei'nev, mci'ne ei'ne, mein ei'nes, my one ; gen. 
mei'nes ei'nen, mei'net* ei'nen, tnei'nes ei'nfn, of my one; &c. 
3wei* and t>rei make jroet'ev and fcvei'er in the genitive, jwei'en 
and t>vet'en in the dative (see page 43) ; most of the other 
numerals admit of declension in the dative only, by adding en, 
as, mc'i'en, fim'fen, &c 

Observations on the Cardinal Numbers. 

1. Qstn is joined to the noun ; as, cttt SOTftnn, one man ; ei'ne 
SlMil, one woman ; and in order to distinguish it from the 
article, it is pronounced with a stronger accent. (Si'nev is 
used when the noun is understood ; as, fyter ifl Cl'ncr, here is 
one, (that is, one man, or one thing, understood) &c. ; fytet* 
i|t ei'ne, here is one, (that is, one woman) &c. ©in'mal etnS 
i\\ einS, once one is one. Jpa'ben ^3te etn SOfaf'fer, have you 
a knife 1 t)iei* ijt ei'neS, here is one, (that is, one knife.) 

2. The cardinal numbers are converted into substantives, 
by the addition of er, and in ; as, em gimfjigcr, a man of 
fifty ; ei'ne £>m'ftgevtn, a woman of thirty. 

3. The ordinal numbers are formed by adding te to the 
cardinal ; except, t>er cr'jte, the first ; t>ev fcnt'te, the third ; but 
after the number nineteen, |te is added. 

* The cardinal number, JlKt, two, admits of three genders ; 
as, Masc. jroccn, Fern, ;$roo, Neut. jwei, two. But, in modern 
German, jwei is commonly used for all the genders. 
5 



50 NUMERALS. 

II. The ordinal numbers are as follows : 



[book I. 



2)ct* Cv'fU, the first. 

2)er jnxi'tc, the second. 

SDcr mVtC, the third. 

£>cv toin'te, the fourth. 

3)cr fiinf te, the fifth. 

S)er fecl/jte, the sixth. 

5)cr fk'bdtte, the seventh. 

2>iT acCj'te, the eight. 

jpcr ncuu'te, the ninth. 

Pet* jctyn'te, the tenth. 

2>cr clfte or e'tffte, the elev- 
enth. 

£>er J»Mf tf, the twelfth. 

3>Cl* fcm'jcfynte, the thirteenth. 

2)et totev'ji^nte, the four- 
teenth. 

£>cr funf jcf)utc or ffmfjefynte, 

the fifteenth. 

2)(r fcct)'$(fynt(, the sixteenth. 

2)cr jk'icnjeljnte or fteb^efynte, 
the seventeenth. 

2)er ad)t'$(fyttt(, the eigh- 
teenth. 

5)ei* ncnn'jCijnte, the nine- 
teenth. 

2>(l* jnxttt'jigjfy the twentieth. 

3)er tut unD jroan'jigiU, the 
one and twentieth. 



2)cf jt»(i unfc jwan'jtgjlc, the 
two and twentieth. 

S)a* Dm iut& jroan'jigfte, the 
three and twentieth. 

2)cv fcm'fuiftc, the thirtieth 

3)(v em un& Dvci'ftcijtc, the 
one and thirtieth, &c. 

2)er luev'jigfte, the fortieth. 

2)cr fuufjtgtte or fftnfjtgjfr, 
the fiftieth. 

2)(l* fecb'jigjte, the sixtieth. 

£>er fie'ben^igfte or ficb'jigjte, 
the seventieth. 

2)(V acbfjictjle, the eightieth. 

D(f n(UU'jtg|t(, the ninetieth. 

3)er tyun'&crtjtc, the hun- 
dredth. 

S)cr jwct fyun'fcCVtjlc, the two 
hundredth. 

£>(£ t>m Imn'DertjU, the three 
hundredth, &c. 

SDcr taii'fenfcfte, the thou- 
sandth. 

2)(t Jt»(i tau'fenfcjle, the two 
thousandth. 

S)(r Dvei tau'fdtDjte, the three 
thousandth, &c. 



In compound numbers the last only assumes the form of an 
ordinal ; as, txr Eou'fenft ac()t fyun'Derf nut) tner unt> &n>an'jig|te, 
the one thousand eight hundred and twenty-fourth. 

These adjectives may be declined in all three forms. 

1. Without the article : as, 



G. 



Masc. 
jnxi'tcr, 



Fern. 

ycotx'U, 



j jroei'te* I lwe i'tcr 



Ncut. 

jrcct'tcs, 

JTO(t't(S 

or jroei'tnt, 



second. 

of a second, 



PART II. CH. 4.] NUMERALS. 51 

2. With the definite article ; as, 

N. Der jroei'tc, W ywn'tt, bag jrori'tc, the second. 

G. t>$$ jwoci'ten, Der $»f i'tf it/ &c$ jroei'ten, of the second, &c. 

3)cr an'bCt'C, the other, is used as synonymous with fcer 
gunu'te, where there are only two persons or things spoken of. 

3. With the indefinite article ; as, 

N. (in jroei'ttt*, ci'ne jrofi'te, cin jwci'tee, a second. 
G. et'nes jwfi'ten, ei'ner jreei'ten, ei'nc^ jrofi'ttn, of a second, 

&c. 

The Germans always say, fin Ullt) jrMn'jigfre, one and 
twentieth ; jroci ttnb &rfi'fl9|U, two and thirtieth, and the like; 
bat never, as in English, jwan'jig cr'fiC/ twenty-first; brft'jlg 
y&il'U, thirty-second, &c. 

Observations. Partitive and fractional numbers are formed 
by a composition of ordinal and cardinal numbers, with various 
words or letters. 

1. With I) Alb (half), thus: 

ttn'fcertfyafb,* (for jroei'tffyaffc,) one and a half. 

SDrit'tcfyafb, two and a half. 

^icr'tefyfJb, three and a half. 

§unftc()vUb, four and a half. 

@ecb / ftfiKi((\ five and a half. 

@tf (n'ntffyalfc, or fefytttpxlb, six and a half. 

$(t}n'Ut)&lb, nine and a half, &c. 

Examples. 33 or an'bcrtfyalfc Jafy'tflt/ a year and a half 
ago; in Di'if'tcbalb ©tun'Dflt, in two hours and a half; but in 
speaking of the hour of the day, the Germans say, fyalb etn£, 
half past twelve ; baib jroei/ half past one, &c. 

2. With ttjcil (part), as : 

2)a$ Svit'tfycU, the third or third part. 
S)aS 33icr'tt)Cl(, the quarter or fourth part. 
£>ag gftllf t^cit, the fifth or fifth part. 
SDas 33ici-'tl)ei( J^un'Dcvt, or bag 33tev'te( ipun'DCtt, the 
quarter of a hundred, &c. 



* This mode of compounding seldom exceeds JlfcSfftffyaffc, 
eleven and a half 



52 NUMERALS. [BOOK I. 

In the above compound words, tfycif is frequently contracted 
into tel ; as, 

Sin Skitfttl, a third part, or one third. 

Silt *2$UV'ttt, a fourth part, or quarter. 

Sin ganf tei, a fifth, or one fifth. 

Sin ©ecb'fW, one sixth 

Sin $tt)\l'Ul, one tenth. 

Sin 3n>an'£tgfM, one twentieth, &c. 

So in the plural, as : 

tjjjttd SX'tt'tfl, two thirds. 
i , S)vei 5Bicr'tcl, three fourths. 

33tCl* ©ic'bcntcl, four sevenths, &c. 

These are regarded as substantives, and of the neuter gen- 
der; but ^tyctl, when used separately, is masculine. 

III. Numerals of proportion are : 

Sin'fad) or ein'fditu*, single. 

jSroct'fari) or jroei'faftig, double. 

Srci'fad) or brei'fiUtig, treble. 

3$ier'facfe or tncv'faltig, fourfold, &c. 

J^ltn'&evifacb or fytUl'-fcertfilltifl, centuple, or a hundredfold. 

SMu'fenfcfact) or tatl'fcnDfdltig, a thousand fold, &c. 

The above numerals, in fad), or f&I'tig, are regularly de- 
clined, like other adjectives. 

IV. Numbers of distribution are thus formed : 

Sr'ftcuS, or erft'Ud), firstly, or in the first place, 
jjroci'teus, or jum an'bcvn, secondly. 
Svit'tens, or jum brit'tcn, thirdly. 
SBicr'tcns, or jum fcicr'ten, fourthly. 
Sin'jclu, singly, or ein unb eiw, one by one. 
jjroet lint) jroet, two and two, or two by two. 
2)vci unb Met/ three and three, &c. 
spaar'roeife, in pairs, &c. 

To denote the same thing, or different sorts of things, txU'l 
is added to the cardinal numbers ; as, 
Si'ucvlet, of one sort, or the same, 
jjuoei'evlci, of two sorts, or two different things, &c. 
t$t CtnS, jf jwci, ie bvet, one, two, three, at a time. 



PART IT. CH. 4.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 53 

V. Collective numbers are : 

£>tcJ?a(fte, the half. 

Sin spcwt:, a pair, or couple, a few. 

Sin Sut'JfUt), a dozen. 

Sin baC'bcg (or balb) ©ut'jcttfc, half a dozen. 

(Si/ne Sftan'fccl, fifteen, &c. 

The English word, tame, or times, is expressed by the ter- 
mination rtul* ; as, 

Stn'maf, once. 93?anciyma(, many a time. 

gwei'mcrt, twice, &e. Dft'wui, oftentimes. 

Sin au'Cevmaf, another time, ^tel'mal, many times. 

S)te'ff 6mat, this time. < 2Die toicl'mal?how many times ? 

9Dkl is also used in multiplying ; as, jtDCt mat $wet flub Diet*, 
twice two are four (that is, literally, two times two are four) ; 
fcm mat bm f(nt> ncun, three times three are nine, &c. 

Recapitulatory Exercises on the Numerals, &c. 

One and one make two. 

Ten times ten make a hundred. 

A Roman legion consisted of six thousand six hundred and 
sixty-six soldiers. 

Germany was divided 4 into 1 ten 2 circles 3 . 

America was discovered by Christopher Columbus in the 
fifteenth century after the birth of Christ. 

Vienna, the capital of Austria, lies in the sixteenth degree 
of (the) longitude, and forty-eighth degree of (the) latitude. 

Your friends live seven miles and a half from this place. 

The meat weighs four pounds and three quarters. 

One half of this apple is mellow, but the other is still hard. 

He wore a treble coat of mail. 

I saw three kinds of roses on one bush. 

times, maf. consisted, kjtcutt)'. 

make, mact)t. of, au$. (Dat.) 

Roman, vo'mifd), soldier, ^ne'gcr, m. 3. a. a. 

legion, Region',/. 1. t>. Germany, 2)eutfd) / fon&. 



* The word mat, in old German, signifies time. 

5* 



54 



PRONOUNS. 



[book I. 



was, roar. 

into, in. (Ace.) 

circle, ^veiS, m. 3, b. b. 

divided, getfyetft'. 

America, limt'tih. 

was, nmr'fce. 

discovered, tntbedt', 

by, toon. 

Christopher Columbus, Cfyrif's 

topi) Sofam'httf. 
in, in. (Z>otf.) 

century, Safyrfyun'ttrt, ra.3.b.(\ 
%fter, nac(). 
Christ, efjriftus. 
birth, CSeburt',/. 1. D. (See 

page 27.) 
Vienna, ( 2Bicn. 
capital, $<myt'\Ui>t f f- l. to 
of, toon. „ 
Austria, 0\Vi'tid). 
lies, Ucgt. 
in, in. {Dot.) 
degree, (Srat), m. 3. b. 6. 
longitude, $ana/e,/. 1. C. 
latitude, SBrei'tc,/. 1. C. 
your, 3t)'re. 
friend, grettitb, m. 3. b. K 



live, itoo^'nen. 

mile, SDteWe,/. 1. C. 

from, toon. (Dat.) 

this, ote'fcm, 

place, *spia§, ra. 3. b. 6. 

meat, gffftfirt), ft. 3. b. 

weighs, roiegt. (Ace.) 

pounds, spfun&. 

of, (Gen.) 

this, frie'feS. 

apple, *2fy'fel, m. 3. a. a. 

is, i|t. 

mellow, ttetdj. 

but, a'fcer. 

other, an'fc-cr. 

is, ft; 

still, nod). 

hard, ()art. 

he, cr. 

wore, frug, 

coat of mail, spanker, m. 3. 

a. a, 
I, id). 
saw, fat). 

rose, Sfto'fe, /.l.C. 
on, an. (Dat ) 
bush, *S3ufcfc, 3. b. [\ 



CHAPTER V. 
PRONOUNS. 

There are seven kinds of pronouns, viz personal, possessive, 
demonstrative, relative, interrogative, indefinite, and substan- 
tive. 



§i. 



PERSONAL PROxNOUNS. 



In German, as in English there are five personal pronouns ; 
viz. id), I ; Dlt, thou ; ev, he ; fie, she ; e£, it ; with their 
plurals, roiv, we ; tyv, you ; fie, they. 

The personal pronouns are declined as follows : 



PART II. CH. 5.] 


PERSONAL 


PRONOUNS. 








First 


Person. 








Singular. 






Plural. 




N. 


id), 


I. 


N. 


tt>ir, 


we. 


G. 


mehtei* or mein, 


of me. 


G. 


un'fer, 


of us. 


D. 


mtv*/ 


to me. 


D. 


trntf/ 


to us. 


A. 


mid), 


me. 


A. 


uus, 


us. 






Second Person. 








Singular. 






Plural. 




N. 


t>U, 


thou. 


N. 


\$, 


you. 


G. 


Dei'nev or i>em, 


of thee. 


G. 


eu'er, 


of you. 


D. 


t>tv, 


to thee. 


D. 


end), 


to you. 


A. 


Did), 


thee. 
Third 


A. 
Person. 


nid), 


you. 



55 



Singular. 

Masc. Pem. , Neut. 

N. tx t he. fte, she. e£, it. 

G. fci'nei* or fein, of him. ityxw, of her. fet'ner or fein, of it. 

D. tt)m, to hirn. ifyr, to her. ifym, to it. 

A. ifjtt, him. fte, her. e$, it. 

Plural, for the three genders. 
N. fie, they. 

G. itj'ver, of them. 
D. il)'neH, to them. 
A. fte, them. 

The personal pronouns, in the genitive, dative, and accusa- 
tive cases, are used also as reflective pronouns, particularly 
with reflective verbs, as, id) Ik'bt mid), I love myself; In 
flei'fceft t>id), thou dressest thyself. The personal pronouns 
when used with reflective verbs, are declined in the same 
manner, except in the dative and accusative cases, singular 
and plural, of the third personal pronoun. In these cases the 
reflective pronoun ftd) takes the place of the datives, ifym, 
it)X, tfyttt, and tfy'uen, and of the accusatives, ifyn, fte, e$, 
and fte. Ex. et 4 , fte, or, e£ txfaubt' fid) (dat. sing.), he, she, 
or it permits himself, herself, or itself; fte etlau'fcen ftd), 
(dat. plur.) they permit themselves; ev, fte, or e£ Utbt ftd) 
(ace. sing.) he, she, or it loves himself, herself, or itself; fte 



56 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK I. 

ItC'bcn ftc() (ace. plur.) they love themselves. — In the plural 
number, reflective pronouns are also used to signify a recip- 
rocal relation. Thus, fte lie' ben ftd), may mean, they love 
themselves (reflective), or they love one another (reciprocal). 
But in order to prevent confusion of ideas, the adverb 
euwu'Dcr, one another, is frequently put instead of fid) ; as, 
fte lie'ben etnan'fcer, they love one another. 

Sometimes, to give a greater stress to the meaning of a 
personal pronoun, or noun, one of the indeclinable words, 
fe(bfl, or fel/ber, is added ; as, id) felbjl (or fel'ber), I myself; 
feftier fffbft, of himself ; n>iv felbfl, we ourselves; fid) felbjt, 
to himself, or, himself; to themselves, or, themselves, (as the 
sentence may require); Sd'far felbjt, Caesar himself. 



§ 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Possessive pronouns are either conjunctive, or absolute. 
Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 

The conjunctive possessive pronouns, which are formed 
from the personal pronouns in the genitive (ox possessive) case, 



Neut. 
mein, 
tm\ f 
fein, 

Up, 

un'i n, 
eu'ev, 
%, 

These pronouns are declined in the singular like the article 
fin, a, and in the plural like the adjective gut, good, in the 
first declension ; as, 

Singular. Plural 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 31. F. S? N. 

N. mem, mei'ne, mein, mei'ne, my. 

O. mei'nes, mei'ner, met'nes, mn'wv, of my. 

D. met'nem, met'uev, met'nem, mei'neu, to my. 

A. mei'neu, mei'ne, mein, mei'ne, my. 



are as 


follows : 




Singular. 


Masc. 


Fern,. 


mein, 


mei'ne, 


fcetn, 


fcet'ne, 


fein, 


fei'ne, 


Ht, 


ityn, 


un'fer, 


uu'feve or un'fre, 


eu'ev, 


eu'ere or eu've, 


i^> 


it)'ve, 



Plural. 




31. F. fy N. 




ntet'ne, 


my. 


fcct'ue, 


thy. 


fet'ne, 


his, : 


itj're, 


her. 


un'fer.e or ixn fre, 


our. 


eu'eve or eu've, 


your. 


U)'ve, 


their. 



PART II. CH. 5.] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



57 



These possessive pronouns are called conjunctive, because 
they are joined to substantives. The pronouns fcin, it)V, ett'ev, 
&c, agree in gender, respectively, with the possessor ; but the 
termination must agree in gender, number, and case, with the 
thing possessed. 

According to this rule, the following examples may be easily 
declined ; mctn SErtt'Dev, m. 3. a. a., my brother ; mtl'MZ 



<&d)\vt\' tcr, /. 1. c, my sister 



mctn 



33ucl), n. 3. b. e„ my 



book ; Dem ^et'tcv, m. 3. a. c, thy male cousin ; fei'nc SSa'fe, 
/. 1. C, his female cousin; it/V gvettuD, m. 3. b. b., her friend; 
IW'fer £ftef fe, m. 2. a., our nephew ; cu're $$lidytt,f. 1. C, your 
niece ; ifyv *ipauS, n. 3. b. c, their house. 



Absolute Possessive Pronouns. 

They are called absolute possessive pronouns, because they 
stand for some noun, which precedes them, expressed or 
understood, and with which they must agree in gender, num- 
ber, and case. They are inflected like adjectives. In most 
cases they are preceded by the definite article, and on this 
account inflected according to the second declension, like Dei* 
gu'tc, Die gu'te, Dag gu'te. So decline the following: 



Masc. 



Fein. 



Neut. 



Der mci'ntcif, 


i>ie mct'ntge, 


Dag met'ntge, 


mine, &c. 


Dev Dei'nigc, 


toe Dei'ntge, 


Dag Dei'nige, 


thine, &c. 


Dcr fct'nige, 


toe fei'nige, 


Da^ fei'nige, 


his, its, &c 


Der ify'rige, 


Die ify'rtge, 


Dag ify'rtge, 


hers, &c. 


Dev un'frige, 


toe un'frige, 


Dag un'frige, 


ours, &,c. 


Dei* eu'rige, 


Die eu'rige, 


Dag eu'rige, 


yours, &c. 


Der ty'tige, 


Die ify'rigc, 


Dag tfy'rige, 


theirs, &c. 




Plural 






Die met'uigen, 


mine, &c. 






toe Dci'nigen, 


thine, &c. 






toe fei'nigen, 


his, its, &c. 






toe iij'rigcu, 


hers, &c. 






Die un'frigcn, 


ours, &c. 






Die eu'vtgen, 


yours, &c. 






tit iiyrigen, 


theirs, &c. 





58 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



[book I. 



The substantive £nt, hat, with a conjunctive possessive pro- 
noun before it, and an absolute possessive pronoun after it, 
is thus declined : 



Singular. 

N. fetn %\\t nnb fcer mei'nige, 

G. fei'neg #n'teg nnb bt$ roentgen, 

D. fei'nem -fhi'te nnb bem mei'nigen, 

A. fei'nen $ut nnb ben mei'nigen, 

Plural. 

N. fei'ne Jpu'te utit> Me mei'nigen, 
G. fet'net £iVte nnb bet* mei'nigen, 
D. fei'nen ipft'ten tint) ben mei'nigen, 
j4. fei'ne Jpn'te nnt> bie mei'nigen, 

So decline : 

ntein gtennb nnb ber fet'nige, 
fei'ne gvenn'bin nnb bie mei'nige, 



his hat and mine, 
of his hat and mine, 
to his hat and mine, 
his hat and mine. 



his hats and mine, 
of his hats and mine, 
to his hats and mine, 
his hats and mine. 



my friend and his. 

his [female) friend and 

mine, 
their brother and thine, 
my brother and yours, 
my sister and his. 
his sister and hers. 
her mother and mine, 
my book and his. 
our country and theirs, 
their country and oars. 



itjx SSru'bcr nnb ber bei'mge, 
mctn 3h*u'ber nnb bet* en'tige, 
mei'ne ©cbrcef'tet* nnb bie fet'nige, 
fei'ne ©cbroef'tet unb bie i()'tige, 
ify've SOtut'tcr nnb bie mei'nige, . 
mein S5ucb nnb M$ fei'ntge, 
xtn'fcf.SBa'tcvlanb nnb bag ify'tige, 
itjv 2$a'tet(anb nnb bag nn'fvige, 

Instead of the pronouns, bet* mei'nige, tk mei'nige, bag mei'- 
nige, mine, the Germans make use, also, of the pronouns, bet* 
met'ne, tit met'ne, bag met'ne, as synonymous terms, declined 
in the same manner. In the same way the pronouns, bet* 
fcei'ne, bev fei'ne, bev ify'te, bet* nn'feve, bet* en'te, bet* ify'te, are 
used instead of the complete forms, bet* bei'nige, bet* fei'ntge, 
bet it)'nge, bet nn'ftige, bet en'ttge, bet ity'tige. 

There are also absolute possessive pronouns, not preceded 
by the article, and consequently inflected according to the first 
declension. Such are the following : 





Singular. 




Plural. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


M. F. <$• N. 




mei'net, 


mei'ne, 


mci'neg, 


mei'ne, 


mine. 


bei'net, 


bti'nt, 


bu'nts, 


bei'ne, 


thine. 



PART II. CH. 5.] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 59 

fet'tter, fei'nc, fti'nts, fei'ite, his, its. 

ityxit, ityn, tfy'vcg, tyre, hers. 

im'fem or ) un'fere or ) uii'ftre* or ) un'few or ) ourg 

im'fftr, J uu'fve, ] un'fves, ) un'fre, ) 

eu'em* or > cu'eve or ) eu'eres or ) eu'cre or ) rg 

il) y m, . ify're, ify'res, ityu, theirs. 

The absolute possessive pronouns are always used without 
a noun, the noun being understood or referred to ; as, That 
is ray hat, SDa$ ift mem Jpttt ; No, it is mine, Stein, t$ tjt 
mci'iicv, or, fcev mci'ne, or, tcv mei'nige. 

The pronouns, mci'lter, mine ; Dei'llCf, thine, &c, are de- 
clined like gu'ter, gu'te, gll'teg, according to the first declen- 
sion • and fcer tnei'ne , bet* fcet-'ne, &c. like feci* gu'te, &ie gu'te, 
i>a£ gu'tc, according to the second declension. 

Observation. In addressing a person, where in English the 
pronouns, you, your, and yours, are used, the Germans, in 
speaking to intimate friends, make use of tut, thou; Dcill, thy ; 
feet'ltef, thine; but in addressing others they employ the plural 
of the third person, @ie, which in this case does not mean 
they but. you. This alteration of the original meaning of the 
pronoun, is denoted by writing it with a capital letter (see p. 
3.) in all its cases; as, Nom. fy Ace. ©tc, you ; Gen. Sfy'ver, 
of you ; Dat. 3^'ncn, to you. The same remark applies to 
the corresponding possessive pronouns, 3l}V, 3fy're, 3^r, your ; 

Sb'ver, 3i)'re, 3j)'re$, or m 3t)'ricu\ Die 3t)'nge, bag ^'rigc, 
or &cr 3l?'re, Die 3ft"rc, bag 3ty're, yours. Ex. <g>ic you [tub 
are ^tyt* yo ur ei'flcner own Jfjcrr master. 

In the old German language, the pronouns 3br, you, Qht'er, 
your, were used to address a person in a dignified manner, 
and this mode (which corresponds to the English), is still 
sometimes used in poetry. But in common life this mode of 
addressing persons is rarely used, except in speaking to infe- 
riors in rank, for which purpose, also, the third person singu- 
lar, cr, he, or ftc, she, is sometimes employed. 

§ 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The demonstrative pronouns are those which point out the 
persons or things spoken of. They are declined generally 
like adjectives ; and as most of them are not preceded by the 



60 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK I. 

definite article, they are inflected according to the first de- 
clension. Ex. 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

JV. Die'fnr, fcie'fe, fcie'fes or Mes, this, &c. 

Plural, for the three genders. 

N. fcic'ff/ these. &c. 

So decline the following : 

Masc. Fem. Neut. Plural. 

je'ncr, je'ne, jc'nes, that ; jc'ne, those. 

fel'Hger, fcl'Mge, fVl'fcigeS, fcl lige, the same, 

folder, ford)c, fol'cbc^/ fc-l'clK, such. 

The demonstrative pronouns, like adjectives, are joined to 
substantives with which they must agree in gender, number, 
and case. So decline the following : 

SMc'fer. ^na'fre, m. 2. a., this boy. 
3e'ncs 93TdJ>'cl)en, n. 3. a. a., that girl. 
jje'uev *23ru't>cr, m. 3. a. a., that brother. 
©oi'ctjc £ftad)'vid)t, /. 1. t>., such a report. 
©ol'cftes ^Bct'tCU, n. 3. a., such weather. 

The pronoun fccr'jenigc, he that, is declined like t>cr glt'tC, 
according to the second declension of adjectives. 

Singular. 

3Iasc. Fern. Neut. 

N. fccr'jfnige, Dic'jcnigc, fcas'kniac, he, she, it, or that, &c. 

Plural, for the three genders. 
N. Mc'jenigcn, they or those, &,c. 

So decline : 

Masc. Fem. Neut. Plural. 

DCffd'be, bicfYI'frc, bajfel'bc, DicfeCkn, the same,orhe, 

she, it, — they 
fcerfd'Hge, fciefei'Mge, iHifict'lugc, Mefcrtn^cn, the same, &c. 



PART II. CH. 5.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 61 

So decline the following : 

3)erfet'be *3ttcmn, m. 3. b. e., the same man. 
©cv'jenige *9)?aun, that man. 
SDie'jentgc $]t'grttQ,/. 1. t) ., that virtue. 
SMefel'be ^u'genD, the same virtue. 
SDaS'jenige, *25ud), n. 3. b. e., that book. 
3)a|jel'bc, *S5ud), the same book. 

The demonstrative pronoun fcer, that, is declined in a 
peculiar manner, nearly like the article t>ev, the : 



Masc. Fern. Neut. 

N. t>ev, tie, MS, that. 

G. &cg or fccf'fen, t>cv or fce'ren, tc^ or fcef fen, of that. 

D. fcem, t)ev, t>em, to that. 

A Den, tie, fcas, that. 

Plural, for the three genders. 

N tie, those. 

G. fce'vev or fce'ven, of those. 

D. fce'nen, to those. 

A. tit, those. 



§ 4. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

Relative pronouns relate to some word or phrase going 
before, which word or phrase is called the anteceden . 
They are declined in the following manner. 

3Bel'cl)CV, who, is declined according to the first d 'clension 
of adjectives : 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

N. wl'dtn, roet'clK, roel'cte, who, which, or that, &c. 

Plural, for the three genders. 

N. Wel'ctye, who, which, or that, &c. 
6 



62 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. [pGOK 7. 



The relative pronoun, t>er, Me, &ci$, that, is declined like 
the demonstrative pronoun, fcer, tie, t>ag, that. 

^Ber, who, and IMS, what, as relatives, are used in lL© 
singular only, and are thus declined : 

Masc. % Fern. Neut. 

N. ton, who, whosoever, which, N. IMS, what. 

he who, she who. 
G. H>ef'fen, mf v of whom, of G. roef'fen, *»e§, of wLd'i 

whomsoever, of which, &c. 
i>. rr»em, to whom, to whomso- 2?. «>em, to what. 

ever, &.c. 
J.. r»eu, whom, whomsoever, &c. A. IMS, what. 

Observations, 333' cr and rMS are sometimes relative and 
sometimes interrogative pronouns. 

933 ev, is sometimes Englished by he who, or whoever ; as, 
3Bev t()n fcnnt, debt ifylt, whoever knows him, loves him. 
933aS, is sometimes Englished by that which ; as, 323aS id) 
gcfagt' fya'be, tjt VMtyr, That which, or what, I have said, is 
true. 

The ancient relative fo, which, who, is indeclinable ; ex. 
2>ic greim&'fcbaft fo ifyr tniv beroie'fcu fyalrt/ The friendship 
which you have shown me. 

For the use of the different relative pronouns, see Syntax, 
Book II. Chapter 4. § 1. Obs. 6 and 7. 



§ 5. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The interrogative pronouns are, WW, who? IMS, what? 
ttef'eljer/ who? which? roa$ fur eiu, what sort of? or, imS 
fur, what? 

The interrogative reefcrjer, is declined like the relative n>e('» 
djer. 933er, IMS, are thus declined : 



PART II. CH. 5.] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

Singular and Plural. 



"<b 



Masc. fy Fern. Neut. 

N. mv, who? N. was, what? 

G. weffen, m§, whose? G. boil was or woiwn', of what? 

D. wem, to whom? D. IV \va$ or wojll', to what? 

A. torn, whom? A. was, what? 

<2BaS fur CM, what? or, what sort of? is thus declined ; 

Singular. 
Masc. Fern. Neut. 

N. ro*$ fur ein or * ff ' .,. ( was fur tin or ei'ne*,* 
tl'lW* S ' I Wiiat? or what sort of? 

G. was fur ei'nes, was fur ei'uer, xv&$ fur ei'nes, of what? 
D. ro&$ fiiv ei'ttcm, was fur ei'uer, was fur e i'nem, to what ? 
A. xc&$ fur et'uen, ©as fur ti'nt, was fur etn or ei'nes, 

what? 

Plural, for the three genders. 
N. was fur, what? or, what sort of? 

No genitive. 
D. XD*$ flit, to what ? 
A. was fur, what? 

Instead of waS fltr ein, the synonymous pronoun YOtUi) fin 
is used, and declined like the former ; ex. SHJetcb ti'nt %k}&tl 
what a deed ! ^Bdct) ei'neu SDfrn'fcljen fya'be id) geliebt', what a 
man have I loved ! 



§ 6. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

Indefinite pronouns are so called, because they refer to 
things in an indefinite manner. Some are numeral ; as, ei'ner, 



* 3BaS fur ein is always used before a noun with which it 
agrees; rt»\& fur ei'ner, and wa^ fur Ci'lieS (or cinS), are used 
by themselves, with reference to a preceding noun. Ex. 
Quest £a'beu ©ie t>aS (Semaf'ee gefe't)eu ? Have you seen 
the picture ? ,4ns. 3BaS fur fill <Scm<U't>e ? What picture ? 
or simply, SODaS fltr et'ueS ? Which one? 



64 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. [BOOK I, 

one; fti'mv, no one, &c. ; others distributive; as, je'DCV, 
each, every, &c. 

These pronouns are generally declined like adjectives, in 
the first, the second, or the third declension, according to the 
general rules. 

So decline the following : 



fci'ner, fet'ne, 


6et'ne£, no one or 




none. 


fo I' d)et, fol'dje, 


fo('rt)C$, such. 


ein'&iger, ein'jige, 


ein*}tgf$, only. 


ei'niger, ei'ntge, 


et'ntgc£, some o?* any. 


man' dyer,' tnan'clje, 


man'd^S, many a one. 


at'ler, al'le, 


al'les, all. 


je'oer, je'fcc, 


je'DeS, every or each. 


jeo'roeoer, jcD'roeoe, 


jeb'^cOC^, every. 


jeg'lidjer, jeg'Udje, 


jeg'iidrtk, every. 


ei'ner, ei'ue, 


ei'itf 6, one or some one. 


fold) ei'ner, fold) ei'ue, 


fold) ei'nc£,suchaone. 


ei'ner Don bet'fcen, ei'ue Don bet'fcen, 


ei'ncs Don bet'oen, ei- 




ther. 


f ei'ner Don bet'oen, fei'ncDon bci'teu, 


fri'neS Don bei'oen, 




neither. 


Plural for the three 


g-grcders. 


fei'ne, none. 




fol'd)e, such. 




trtn'jigc, only. 




ci'ntge, some or any. 


man'dje, many. 




&l% all. 





Se'fcer, jel>'n>et>er, jeg'ftdjer, ci'ncr, ei'ner Don bei'oen, and 
fei'ucv Don bei'&en, have no plural. 

The plural, bct'Oe, both, is declined like that of fei'ner. 
The singular of that pronoun is used only in the neuter gen- 
der ; viz. N. bei'fces, both; G. bet'OeS, of both; D. bei'Dem, 
to both ; A. bci'fceS, both. 

Some of these pronouns are declined as adjectives, with fin 
orbct*. Thus, ein je'Der, et'ne je'&e, cin je'OeS, each, is inflected 
according to the third declension, and in the singular number 



PART 11. CH. 5.] SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 65 

only. 2)CV er'ne, t>te ct'nc, &aS ei'ne, is inflected according 
to the second declension, singular and plural. 

So decline : 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

fin an'fcrev, et'ne kn t>?e, em an'Drcs, another, 

ter an'fcve, tue an'fcre, t>a6 an'fcve, the other. 

(in em'jigev, et'ne etn'jige, cin ein'jtctcs, an only one. 

tot ein^ige, Me ein'jtge, t>as? ein'^ge, the only one. 

tfn ei'niger, et'ne ehuge, ein ei'niges, an only one. 

■t»er ei'ntge, Me ei'ntge, i>&$ ei'ntge, the only one. 

tin ftWmHtj* ei'ne jc&'t^cbc, ein je&'njefce^ every. 

tin jeg'IidKr, ei'ne jeg'Ucbe, ein jeg'tid)e£, any, every one. 

The indefinite pronoun fetn, f et'ne, fetn, which is joined to 
substantives, like the conjunctive possessive pronouns, mcin, 
Noilly fcin, &c, is also declined like them. 



§ 7. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 

The substantive pronouns, ^e'mant), some or any body ; 
fftie'mairt, nobody, are used in the singular only, and are 
declined both as adjectives and as nouns, as follows : 

N. je'manfc, somebody. 

G. je'man&S or je'tnant>e6, of somebody. 

D. je'man& or je'manfcem, to somebody. 

A. je'mani) or je'manfcen, somebody. 

N. ntc'manfc, nobody. 

G. nte'man&s or nie'manfceg, of nobody. 

B. nte'mant) or nic'mant>em, to nobody. 
A. nte'ractnfc or nie'tnanfcen, nobody. 

JSe'&cvman, every body, is declined as a noun. 

N. je'fcenncin, every body. 

G. je'&ermcmS, of every body. 

D. je'&evmcm, to every body. 

A. je'fcennan, every body. 

* ^eb'rMfcer is generally used without the article, and is 
then inflected like je'fcer, or hi'ntt, according to the first de- 
clension. 



t>6 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. [BOOK I. 

The substantive pronouns, man, one ; Ct'n?a£, something ; 
and nid)t£, nothing, are indeclinable. 

33Tau, one, we, people, they, &c, like the French pronoun, 
on, is used only in the third person singular ; ex. 5D?an fagt, 
ber ^ficg fei gcen'bigt, people say the war is ended. 



Recapitulatory Exercises on all the Pronouns. 

SSBir ftnb SDTcn'f^cu unb mix ftnb ffatMidj. 

^ho'ven, bie tyx feit), intern' it)v fyoffet, bag tt}r ofy'ne end) 
SDtu'fye ju gc'bcn, gcict>rc' nnb roet'fe roev'ben Bn'net. 

(Solvates fag'te oft ju fet'nen gxam'bcn: 20?ein k'beu i|t 
mii e ntd)t fo fd)d£'bav ale t»ic ^n'genb. 

DJcctn ©cfdjmatf' i|t nidjt bcr bci'niae, unb bein ©cfdjmarf' 
ifl ntdjt bcr mei'nige ; id) ftn'bc 33erguu'gen an (Bctndl'ben an£ 
bev 2Rie'bev(dnbifd)cu ©cfcu'Ce, unb bn, an ©cmal'bcn aus ber 
3talid'nifd)en. 

SXBol^cv' bic'fcv Un'tcvfdjieb ? ba bod) fonjt mci'ne fttei'gimg 
mit bev bci'ntgen beina'fye ganj ftfeercin'fHmnit 

Sin jc'bev fdjopft an$ bcr D.xxd'U fei'ner kt'bcnfdjaften, fein 
©littf o'ber Un'glutf. 

3d) frag'te uad) je'tnanb, fanb tffcer nic'manben ju^au'fe. 

3e'&c6 £anb t)at fci'ne (Sebvau'dje. 

ge giefct gefy'lcv be'ren man fid) nid)t lcid)t krcnfft' nurb, 
unb rocVdje man fovg'fdltig fcevbivgt'. 

ftnb, are. afc, as. 

jUtblid), mortal. bie "Jugenb, virtue. 

%t)t>Y, fool. ©cf dwarf, taste, 

feib, are. finbe Skvgnitgeu an, am pleas- 
inbem ihr boffct, to hope. ed with, 

bag, that. bag (Scmafbe, picture, 
ofyne ^n gcben, without giving, ans, (ow£) of. 

97(111)0, trouble. niebcvldnbifd), Flemish, 
ttevben femict, can become. ©clndc, school. 

gelet)vt, learned. italidmfd), Italian, 

roeife, wise. voot)cr, whence, 

fagte oft, often said. Untcvfctucb, difference, 

jn, to. ba bocf)^ since, 

gmmb, friend. fonjt, otherwise. 

icben, life. SRf tgnng, inclination. 
i\\ uid)t fo fd)d§6av, is not so bctnahe gait* nbeveinjTimmt, 
valuable. coincides almost entirely. 



PART II. CH. 5.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



67 



fd)opft, draws. Saul), country. 

au$, from. I) at, has. 

0ue(k, source. ■ feebraud), custom. 

iei&enfd)aft, passion. &$ gtebt, there are. 
(Blucf otHT Unglucf, good or gefjler, fault, 

ill fortune. Uid)t, easily. 

fragte, inquired. fid) bcroujft XDXXti, becomes con- 

nad), after. scious. 

fant>, found. fovgfalttg, carefully. 

JU Jpaufe, at home. Wl'bivgt, conceals. 



I know him. He knows them. She knows us. You know 
her. They know them. He gives it to them. We give it to 
him. She gives it to me. They give it to us. Tell it to 
him. He told it to them. Take pity on (of) me. He is 
ashamed (shames himself) of thee. We remember (ourselves 
of) you. There are ten 2 of 1 us 1 . There are six 2 of 1 them 1 . 
Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself. I deny it to my- 
self. He was not 2 master 3 of 1 himself 1 . When thy days are 2 
dark, 1 then 3 thy 5 false6 friends 7 depart 4 from 8 thee 9 , but thy 
true friends forsake thee not. 

They gave it not to my friend, but to thine. 

We owe it not to your desert, but to theirs. 

This is not thy lot but mine. I mean this house. 

This is the man (this man is it) of whom I speak. 

Thou must do 2 this, 1 but not 2 leave 3 that 1 (undone). 

This is his own estate. 

He does as those people of the torrid zone, who shoot 5 
arrows 1 at 2 the 3 sun 4 . 

Who is the most estimable among men ? The most vir- 
tuous. 

What (which) man can promise 4 himself 1 constant 2 happi- 
ness 3 ? 

Which season is the pleasantest 1 

know, hn'nt, told, fag'te. 

knows, h'unf. take pity, evbav'met tu$. 

you — know, rVn'net. ashamed, fd)&mt. 

they — know, fctl'ntn. remember, mn'new. 

gives, giebt. there are, C6 ftnt>. 

give, gc'ben. shalt, foll|t. 

tell, jVge. love, lie'beiu 



68 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



[book I. 



neighbor, Stacfe'fcar, m. 3. a. C. 

as, n>ic. 

deny, \>cvfa'ge. 

was, wax. 

not, ntd)t. 

master, Jfperr, w. 2. b. 

when, rcemt. 

day, iag, m. 3. b. b. 

dark, bunf'el. 

are, flub. 

then, Dann. 

depart, roei'djen. 

false, falfcl). 

friend, gfCWlD, m. 3. b. b. 

from, Don. (Dat.) 

but, a'ber. 

true, roat)i\ 

forsake, Dcrlaf'fcit. 

gave, ga'bnt. 

but, fou'bern. 

owe, vcf&iinf'en. 

desert, 33evDtm|V, m. 3. b. b. 

lot, $006, w. 3. b. b. 

mean, mei'ne. 

house, *£auS, rc. 3. b. (. 

man, SDiann, m. 3. b. e. 

is, i|i 

of, DOU. (Daf.) 

speak, ve'be. 



must, muflt. 
this, (^4cc. Neut.) 
do, tf)itn. 
but, a'bev. 

that, {Ace. Neut.) 

not leave, nid)t lap fen. 

own, ei'gen. 

estate, *(Sut, ». 3. b. e. 

does, macljt e£. 

as, rote. 

people, *33otf, w. 3. b. e. 

torrid, fyeig, 

zone, jjo'ne,/. 1. C. 

arrow, spfeii, m. 3. b. b. 

at, ge'gcn. 

sun, ©on'ne,/. 1. c. 

to shoot, ab'fdjiefeiu 

est i m abl e , f cl) d§ ' b ax. 

among, un'tcr. (Dat.) 

man, tier Wltnfd}, m. 2. b. 

virtuous, tu'gen&fyaft. ' 

can, faun. 

himself (Dat.) 

constant, befUn'fcig. 

happiness, CBlittf, w. 3. b. 

promise, fcevfpvecij'Cll. 

season, ^afyr'jett,/. 1. t>. 

pleasant, an'genebm. 



Many persons suffer themselves to 5 be 5 deceived 5 by 1 no- 
body 2 except 3 themselves 4 . 

Apply thyself to virtue ; this will never 2 forsake 3 thee 1 . 

Whoever is 6 not 4 diligent 5 in 1 his 2 youth 3 , will 1 not 6 know 9 
(how) to 7 employ 8 himself 5 in 2 his 3 manhood 4 . 

Who did (has 1 done 3 ) that 2 ? his brother or your sister? 

His sister and mine. 

Which house (do) you 2 mean 1 ? 

What book is this? 

Who will get 3 the 1 prize 2 ? my cousin or his? 

Judges must be 8 just 7 towards 1 every one 2 , even 3 towards 4 
their 5 enemies 6 . 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



VERBS. 



Put these coins again in their places. 
I know no one who is 3 so 1 happy 2 as he. 
(We must give) to every one his own. 



person, 50?enfc&. 

suffer, Utf'ftn. 

by, fcon. (Dat.) 

except, au'fer, 

to be deceived, bctrft'gen. 

apply, bejlci'jlge. 

to, {Gen.) 

virtue, Me 'Sii'gent*,/. 1. &. 

will, tmrfc. 

never, nie. 

forsake, fterUffftt. 

in, tit. (Dat.) 

youth, 3u'gen&,/ 1. 

not, nicbt. 

diligent, flei'jlg. 

is, tjt. 

will, roivfc. 

manhood, SOtoit'neSalter, m. 

3. a. 
to employ, ju bef(f)ttf tigett. 
know, nnf'feri. 
has, t)at. 
that, MS. 
done, getfyau'. 
brother, *l8vu'&ev, m. 3. a. d. 



or, o'fcetr. 

sister, ©cforoef'ter,/. 1. C. 

mean, met'uet. 

what, vms fur ein. 

book, *Hbud), n. 3. b. e. 

will, rMvfc. 

prize, spveiS, m. 3. b. b. 

get, fcatoon'tragcn. 

cousin, "iBet'tev, m. 3. a. C. 

judge, SHicfo'tev, *». 3. a. a. 

must, muffeu. 

towards, ge'gflt. 

even, fclbji (^4cc.) 

enemy, gcint>, m. 3. b. b. 

put, le'get. 

just be, gercdjt' fetn. 

coin, SDTiin'je, /.I.e. 

again, ttne'&er. 

in, auf. (ylcc.) 

place, *spia§, 7i. 3. b. b. 

know, fan'ne. 

happy, glucHicl). 

as, ale. 

his own, M$ fei'nige. 



CHAPTER VI. 



VERBS. 
General Remarks. 

Verbs express the connexion between subjects (nouns), 
and qualities (adjectives or adverbs). The various modes in 
which qualities are connected with subjects, are expressed by 
different kinds of verbs and the different parts of each verb. 

I. Verbs are divided into neuter, active, reflective, and pas- 
sive. Some verbs are defective, as the impersonal verbs. A 
complete verb comprehends, besides the participles, four moods, 



70 VERBS. [BOOK I. 

the infinitive, the indicative, the subjunctive, and the impera- 
tive ; and these principal parts of the verb contain different 
tenses ; with the exception of the imperative, which has only 
the present tense. Each tense contains two numbers, and 
three persons in each number. 

II. Some of the different forms of the verb are original, 
and others supplementary. 

The original forms are the infinitive present of the active or 
neuter verb, and all those parts which are formed from the 
infinitive mood, by altering, increasing, or diminishing it, 
viz. the Present, Imperfect, Imperative, and the Participles. 
Thus from the infinitive lie'ben, to love, is formed the imper- 
fect, id) lieb'te, I loved. 

The supplementary forms are made by joining the past 
participle, or the infinitive mood, to an auxiliary verb ; as, id) 
fya'be geltebt', I have loved; id) rocv'be lie'ben, I shall love. 

III. In their original forms, all German verbs are active or 
neuter ; except the past participle, which, when it stands by 
itself, has (as in English) a. passive meaning ; as geltebt', loved. 
This passive meaning is preserved when the past participle is 
joined to the auxiliary roev'fcen, to become, which in this in- 
stance is Englished to be, and forms the passive voice ; as, id) 
YOtX'M gfltebt', I am loved. But tiie past participle takes an 
active signification when it is joined to the auxiliary fya'ben, to 
have ; as, id) tya'be geliebt', I have loved. 

The indicative and the subjunctive contain two original 
tenses, the present and the imperfect. 

There is no difference between active and neuter verbs 
with respect to the original tenses. 

IV. The verb is inflected by adding certain letters to the 
substance of the verb. The substance of the verb consists of 
those letters which, in the infinitive mood, precede the final 
letters en (or the final letter H, in those which do not end in 
Clt). Thus the substance of the verb lie'ben, to love, is lieb ; 
that of enDei'tent, to enlarge, is errcei'ter ; and that of tt)un, 
to do, is tijU. 

V. The additional letters, by means of which the verb is 
inflected, are joined to the end of the substance of the verb ; 
as, id) licb=e, I love ; bit iuht% thou lovest ; t(() (terete, I 
loved, &c. But in the past participle most verbs have also 
the augment, i. e. the syllable ge, prefixed to the substance of 
the wo°d ; as, lie'ben, to love, past. part, geltebt', loved; fed)'* 
tin, to fight, past. part. gefod)'ten, fought. 



PART II. CH. 6.] VERBS. 



71 



VI. The augment ge is not prefixed, when the verb is com- 
pounded with be, emp, ent, a, VCV, JCV, or ge, which are fre- 
quently prefixed to it to express particular modifications of the 
original meaning of the verb. Thus, the past participle of 
the regular verb, gelo'ben, to vow (derived from lo'bnt, to 
praise), is not gegelobt, but gelobt'. But when the above- 
mentioned syllables are not prefixed by way of composi- 
tion, but are part of the original verb itself, the syllable ge is 
prefixed ; as in be'ten, to pray, past. part, gebe'tet, pray- 
ed ; and in the irregular verb, ge'ben, to give, past. part. 
gege'ln'ii, given. 

VII. All the original forms of the verb which are made of 
the infinitive, are either regular or irregular, or partly regular 
and partly irregular.* This variety of forms, though it is 
found in all parts of the verb, occurs particularly in the form- 
ation of the imperfect tense and the past participle. Upon 
this difference three modes of conjugation are founded, the 
regular, or modern, the irregular, or ancient, and the mixed 
conjugation. 

VIII. A verb is regular, if, in its conjugation, the letters of 
the substantial part remain unchanged, and if, at the same 
time, the imperfect tense, in the first and the third person of 
the singular number, ends in te or ete, and the past participle 
in et, or t; as, (ie'ben, to love, imp. id) (or er) lieb'te, or lie'bete, 
I (or he) loved ; past. part, gelte'bet, or gettebt', loved. 

A verb is irregular, if, in its conjugation, one or St veral of 
the substantial letters of the word are changed, and if, in the 
first and third person singular of the imperfect ti nse, the 
letters te or ete are not added, and the past participle ends in 
en or a ; as, flie'fyen, to flee, id) (or er) jiol), I (or lie) fled, 
geflo'tyeu, or gejloljn', fled. 

A verb is mixed, if, in its conjugation, one or the other of 
the substantial letters is changed, but at the same time the 
imperfect and the past participle are formed in the regular 
way, in te, and t ; as, bving'en, to bring; id) (or ev) bvadj'te, 
I (or he) brought; gebrad)^, brought. 

IX. The substance of all primitive verbs, that is, of all 
those which are not formed by composition or derivation, 
consists of one syllable. 

* This division affects the supplementary forms only in as 
much as most of them are made by joining an auxiliary verb 
io the past participle, which is either regular or irregular. 



72 



REGULAR VERBS. 



[book I. 



§ 1, REGULAR VERBS. 

In every regular verb the additional syllables are conform- 
able to the following table. 

All those verbs, the substance of which consists of more 
than one syllable, are regular. 



Indicative. 

Present. 


Subjunctive. 


1st Per. 


2d Per. 


3d Per. 


1st Per. 


2d Per. 


3d Per. 


Sing. 
Plur. 


C 

en 


ft or eft 
t or ct 


torct 

en 


C 

cn 


eft 

(t 


C 

cn 


Imperfect, 


Sing: 
Plur. 


te or ete iteft or tcefi 
ten or etenl ttt or ctct 


te or ete 
ten or eten 


etc 
eten 


cteft I ete 
etct 1 eten 


Imperative 


Participle. 


Sing* 
Plur. 


— 


e 


c 


Present, en I). 
Past, gc — Ct or t. 


cn 


et or t 


cn 


Infinitive. 
Present, Ctt. 





Observation. The choice between the endings ft and eft, 
t and ct, te and etc, teft and cteft, ten and eten, tet and etet, 
depends on euphony. Thus, in the imperfect tense of the 
verb lo'fcen, to praise, we may use either lob'te, or (o'bete ; 
but in re'fcen, to speak, we must say, id) ve'fcere, I spoke, and 
not vefr'te, because, in pronouncing, this could not be distin- 
guished from the present, id) VC'fce, I speak. 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



REGULAR VERBS. 



73 



Conjugation of the Regular Verb, (te'bcn, to love. 



Infinitive. 
Ik'Ull, to love. 



Participle. 

Present, Ite'bent), loving. 
Past. geltebt', loved. 



Indicative. 



Singular. 



Subjunctive. 



Present. 



Singular. 

id) (ie'be, I love, do love, or id) fie'be, I may love. 

am loving. 
t>U lub\\ or (te'bfft, thou lov- fru lic'bcjt, thou mayst love. 

est, dost love, or art loving, 
er, fie, or es licbt or (te'bet, cr ik'bt, he may love. 

he, she, or it loves, does 

love, or is loving. 

Plural. Plural. 

tt>ir (ie'ben, we love, do love, ttur (ie'ben, we may love. 

or are loving, 

i-ftr licbt or iie'bet, you love, tfytr lie'bct, you may love, 

fie lie'ben, they love. fte lirtmx, they may love. 

Imperfect. 
Singular. Singular, 

id) (teb'te or iii'btU, I loved id) lie'bete, I might love. 

or did love, 
tot fieb'tejt or (ie'betejt, thou feu ne'betejt, thou mightst love. 

lovedst. 
tV litb'tl or Iteb'ete, he loved. er (te'bete, he might love. 

Plural. Plural. 

mv lieb'tm or Ue'beten, we nm* fic'bctcn, we might love 
loved. 

% (teb'tet or He'betet, you ifyr lu'btUt, you might love, 
loved. 

fte Ucb'ten or lu'btttw, they fie fte'beten, they might love, 
loved. 



74 IRREGULAR VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Imperative. 
Singular. 



Ik'bt (Ml), love (thou), 
lu'bt iX, let him love. 



Plural. 

Ite'ben mx, let us love. 

lit'bct or liebt (ifyv), love (yow) or do (you) love. 

lie'ben fie, let them love. 

So conjugate, (o'ben, to praise ; gfolt'ben, to believe. 



$ 53. IRREGULAR VERBS. 

The change of letters in the substantial part of irregular 
verbs commonly affects only the vowels ; and, in this case,, 
the first and the third person of the imperfect indicative end. 
with the final letter of the substantial part ; as, fprtng'en, to 
spring, imperf indie, id) fpi'CUtg/ I sprang; Cf fpi'dilg, he 
sprang ; past part, gcfprung'cn. But sometimes the change 
affects also the consonants ; as, fdjnei'&Ctt/ to cut, imperf. id) 
fcfcnitt ; fciu, to be, pres. id) bin, imperf. id) Wax ; past part. 
geroe'fen.* 

The imperfect subjunctive is formed by adding e to the 
imperfect indicative, and is inflected like the present subjunc- 
tive ; as, fpring'cn, to spring, imperf. indie, id) fprftllg ; imperf 
subj. id) fpr&ng'e, &c. 

When either of the vowels a, 0, or tt, occurs in the imper- 
fect indicative, they are changed into ft, 6, or ft, in the sub- 
junctive ; as, fiie'gCU, to fly ; imperf indie, id) flog ; imperf 
subj. id) flo'ge. 



* The different tenses of the substantive verb, feitt, to be, 
are, in German, as well as in English, composed of three 
distinct verbs, which have ceased to exist, except in those 
tenses. 



PART II. CH. 6.] MIXED VERBS. 75 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verb, ftng'en, to sing. 

Infinitive. Participle. 

Present, ftng'en, to sing. Present, fing'eut), singing. 

Past. gefung'en, sung. 



Indicative. 



Singular. Plural. 

1. ftng'e. ftng'en. 

2 ftng'cfl. ftng'et. 

3. fing'er. ftng'en. 



Singular. Plural. 

1. fang. fang en. 

2. fang'ejt, fang'et. 

3. fang. fang' en. 



Subjunctive. 



Present. 



Singular. 

ftng'e. 

flng''e|t. 

ftng'e. 



Imperfect. 



singular. 



Imperative. 



Singular. 



Plural. 

ftng'en. 
fing'er. 
ftng'en. 



Plural. 



fdng'e. fang-en. 
fdng'eji fang'et. 
fdng'e. fdng'e:;. 



2. ftng'e (fcu). 

3. ftng'e ev. 



Plural. 

ftng'en »u\ 
fing'et (it)v). 
ftng'en fie. 



§ 3. MIXED VERBS. 

The conjugation of the mixed verb is like that of regular 
verbs, with regard to the endings of the imperfect tense and 
the past participle, and it resembles that of the irregular verbs 
as to the change of letters in the substance of the verb. 

Conjugation of the Mixed Verb, benf'en, to think. 
Infinitive. Participle. 

Present, teitf'en, to think. Present. t>en£'ent>, thinking. 

Past. geDacl)t', thought. 



76 IRREGULAR AND MIXED VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 



1. 

2. 
3. 


Singular. 

benFe. 
tenfet 


Plural. Singular. 

fccnf'cn. tenfe. 
fccnf'et. &enf'c|t. 
fcent'en, fcenff'e. 

Imperfect. 


Plural. 

&cuf'en. 
t>eur'et. 


1. 

2. 
3. 


Singular. 

Dacb'tcjt. 
fcadytc. 


Plural. Singular. 

. fcadj'tcn. fcdrfVtc. 
badym. batb/teft. 
badyttn. fcdcfe'te. 

Imperative. 


Plural. 

fcacb'ten 
fedrtyter. 
t>dcl)'ten. 






Singular. Plural. 

1 fccnf'en 

2. fcenf'e (Mi). fcenf'et 

3. bcnf'e cr. ' fcenf'en 


MX. 

fie. 



^4 Zisf of all the Irregular and Mixed Verbs. 

The following list of irregular and mixed verbs exhibits in 
alphabetical order all the anomalous forms of each. Those 
parts of the verb which are not given, are regular, except 
when the sign "&c." is put after the first or second person of 
a tense, to indicate that the other persons of that tense are 
formed in the same irregular way, according to page 75. 

If for the same tense or person, two or more forms are set 
down, the first of them is to be considered as the most usual; 
and when the regular form is also in use, it is inserted in a 
parenthesis. 

This table is complete in regard to simple verbs ; but of 
the compound verbs it contains only such as either occur very 
frequently, or are not easy to be traced to their origin, or differ 
in some respect from the simple verbs from which they are 
derived. (The section on Compound Verbs, containing a list 
of the particles with which simple verbs are most frequently 
compounded, will enable the learner to trace any compound 
verb to the simple one from which it is derived, and by this 
means to find out any irregularity of the former by referring 
to the latter in the following list.) 



PART II. CH. 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



77 



Past 
Participle. 


11 I 1 1 

co -£» i& • sSi 


si « 

cc s& -n# 

^ am 


o 

CO ■ 




SO 

1 




O 


CO ^^> 

X* H-*" X> 


o 
*-■ 

03 

s 


si 
8 
S3 

3 


- co co j» *; ,<^" 

.2 ^ s& -=♦ m O J& J£ 

<~ 5 ■ «~ *- o O 


d d o 
$<$ . 6 

s -r °a ^ 
ij3 «o ,**" Q"- 1 

iff! 


s- 
O 

d 
d o^ d 


1 


^ J £co " o 

§J -si iii 

^ & & % - $ ^ 

<-» <^ 0) ^ - — >> **— >c- < *- 

^^^^ * o d£e^ 




o 

d 


a 

03 

03 




» 3 

^* t"* • 

•t^-J- to . >£> 
•V ^- 03 5* 

S3 . ~ 
~ 2 


" CO 
• s£> 

CO 








-3 s r* 

g .& So 

"i » 8 -e >; 

Bt . "38 2 &3i. 

*^ •>* ^ ^ m "o3 
^ 5* ss s o m 

C CO — ► *^-tl 03 


.2 ^5 
bfi 03 

^ s s 

o 3 8 

** -» v. 

CO «S~X*. 

» ^?9 


43 
O 









7* 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



[book I. 



to 






_ 


«* ~ 


^* s^ 2 ^* 


*- 


^ 




1 ** cH- ^ 


111 


S u ^ 


• — ^2 ? p 


5 




c 










.s» 


BL 


^ ^» .^ 


•C S»» -i. 


«*» t* <** 


Crf «-> <i* <-» 






•S ■ ^o i»a 


sii as o: 


or o; os 


«■ ess o: os 


cr 


«s 




Q 








O 


iO 






&. 










%* 










. . . 


. . . 




t^ 






s 








t-» s 


^ 






Si 

•♦o 

o 
s 
s 


6 6 . o 

<,^ yo .^ i^. 
■^ ;? <^ «*. 


d 


<*s *b ~ 


5 




d 


-t-> 


if) 


■_o — -* j£» -"■ 


- -"^ «s> ^j 


s^j -»il) ^£j 


si> -JU »j <t£ -IJ 




>^> 


o 
















.<P 
































s- 
o 






















!t- 










3 S -^ OS 


d 
83 d • 

OS^ 

o ^ 


6 [ 6 


6 A d « d 

.a! * -8 -3 

&» «-» ^f C^ r* 


o 
S 


g d 




^ 
















«J1^ — ■ *•' ^J 


-£v s£5 — v 


sSi s£) *£> 


■^Cj wS ^iw O J^l 


•St 


>ji* 






*g o^B^g- 


-S-S^f 


-B-B^S 


^^-^•^^ 


•^ 


O ^2- 
























. «* 


. • o 














• • t*" 


• •£- 


• * ?^ 


• 










ss *■» 


«^s 








0) 

I- 


■io 

e 
3 




o u 

2 






• 








1 "s 

^r os 




^ v> 




d 

a" 


d 






£ "l °1 


0) o 

§ 2 


O 


•3 & ^ ^ 


bB 




<i; 


•£? — 1 rr _£j 


'H-o - 


'S u" ^ 


£ 2 S i 


3 


'%* 




HO 


- c c 

"""" £ a ° ® 


.5 c 'c 

as "2 


^ -Q X> 


o2: o 





J2 

2 




« 




. o o 


S o O 


♦» p ** 








^5 


£ 3 gf.S 

£ 3 £*°.S5 -a 


o. s s 
~ £ £ 


**- 7" T* 


J J § P 


Ck 


«> 






^"^^" 




S^S 






& 



PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 



79 



■s. ^* 


s£7^ 


CD 


«ii- 


tt <» 


k <-» 


£2 


<-> 52 


O 


53 


;-» 


<s 52 




;■> 




JZ> .0 


JO 


JO 


vO 










CD CD 


CO 


CD 


CD 



52 

"»-» "»■•> ft* 



ft- 52 » 

52 ft* /=* 



o ? 






o o o 



. .— ft* ft» 



•« it «- ^-"S z. 

-g-^g- jS >o -g" /=> 



P^jr « 



*g"jo*S'*o 



O O 

-3 4 

«>* <-* 



°3 



o 



ft. i* H ~ ««i 'iO 



«■ ^ o^^g-^e 



c *° 

6 



/a ^^ 52 *o o 



o 

3 » 



-~ ^ o*<3 ft*" 
ft* cD^ -<-► 



SSffi 

^JO 22 iQ 



JO >Q ^R iC* *p 



o o o o 



w- <*-^~ li- 
ft- o_g- ft. 



o 

J2 ^«0 ^ 



S £ 3 *» £ 



V^ ft* W Ti w 



ft* ft* ft* 

1-1 






«-cdT^~ 
52 52 ^- c ~ 

ft- A- 



^ & J3 



& o 2 



-r* -?* O .£*" 






ftft 



ft 



Q & 



®e 



(5) 



52 S 



52 a, ti- 



es 

CD O 

is a 

P-, o 

* g 8 

S o^ 
be 2 
o"§2 



j. o 



M 5 52 ■— ^ 



ft* -~ 5S ^j 

<f =.;-* O 
ft* "i^ »ii-'*3 



ifi) a> a)^^ 



80 








IRREGULAR 


VERBS. 




[book i„ 


Past 
rficiple. 


o 


ft* 
*** 




** <3j *» 




52 ft* 
S 


ft* ft* 
^> 


Q 


t^ 


t^* 


e 5- <» 


^M^<£.<£- 


«CV- 


•52- «e- 


ft, 






^ ft* ^ 


ft* ft* ft* ft* 


ft* ft* 


ft* ft* 


ft* 


ft* 


«* <?i 


«"., CT. <3~J <32 


Tj m 


rso «d 








s_ 




j_ 


!U 


j> v ^ s 








** 


ft* 


* ' * O 


• 






•*o 




OS-ss-f 


^jr- 






O 




53 




;_► ft* ^ . t££s*^» 


ft* £l ~"* ftl" *-> 






ft* 


• -^ 


<*-- 


*^- 


■ — *■ ■* — ^ 






o ** 


d d 


>- 










«jj 


^s 


<*3 °3 


v """ d 




; u 






s 






g«3 d 

ftT <5D «J~ 


• d ^ 

£ C ** ** 


ll 

*^ ft* 


d 


-*-> 


QQ 


^> t- 


H ^ 


c-C » «<S 


U=-U— '-t«^'+— 


t£L^_ 


«- >5i- 


o 




J^ ° 


3^ s 


g~*e 


vS? iC ,f? ■*•> 


^C -iJ- 


^3- .G- 








^ <^- 








'-* <^ 


q 








<^» .<-* 






















P- 




O ft* 


6 











s 




og | 


•$£ 










1— 1 


NO 

e 


ft* i 


it -'•*• 



c e « 




^4 


d d 







.C? ° 


°^ -8 5 


*£ ^-B 


^^^•^ 


•^•s - 


^ -e 
























«* 


* g 






*■* ~- ** 

! 2i- "S_> ft* 








t> 


La 






<50-u* -— i?-_ 








ft* 


O 
ft* 




^ 


5 s ^ J *-t* 
ft* -3 ^ 

V- ^* ij, T. 

^^ 1 5i- £ ,£*_ 

IT" ^^ 




'"i 




ty 


' S 


««s ^ ?^ "S" 


* £- 


0* 


^ 

^ 

s 




ft* Jj^ 


ft* 

t ft* 


ft* t* «>* *-> 

c* ^ ft* 
t* rtL rTj'ii- 


• ft* 


Cti- ft* ft* 

-^ «* ^* s 








•5 


SS 


3 ^ 3 S 


. ££ 


S jt> 








/O 


#» 


A |Q A A 


JO 


iO — 






T3 


1 

*d 

fcJQ 


S-, 


O 










a 




<X> 


bfl 




O 




^J 


3 





JO 




O 


-M 






O 







'Si 

* 


* 




^ 

s 


g 


ft* 

A* 

X* 


0) 

« 
«* •*-> 

«5 


O _ O O 
+J O -t-J ** 

ft* *» ft* ft* 


-^ 


i is 






^S_ 


7^ 1* 




,c-:i* s:^ 


if 


«5 C-S 

.SI .Si £ 












« « <3 ft* 










© 


6) 


& ft) 


&0&3&3&0 


«C&D 


80 80 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



81 









e 








♦-» »r* 






$3 


ft*" 


ft» 


«i* 


s 


rs 


si 


t^» r* -^ ^* 


s 


<sj 








»■* 


ft» 


v 


«i» 


^CS-w CD cD 




.«-* 


C— 


*i— 


o 


i?- -r? 


>^» 


-^r* 




w 


«— 


o 






o 


Q 


^^ 


o 


.- « 5 S 




ft* 


5=- 


Cbl 


<£- 


cd 


•£-> 


CD 


^> 


^C M^ CD — 


CSj 


JS 


<-» 




ft» 


ft* 


ft* 


ft* 


Cm 


^ ^, ^ ««. 




■t* 


CD 


CD 




rr 


CD 


CD 


CD 


CD CD CD CD 


CD 


CD 






















• 


o 


o^ " 




r- 


ft* 


J-. 




^O 








z 




O 


CD 


o 








• 




ft* 




2 


.§vS 


S c^ ~ 


.... 




ft* 










*? 




£-g^ 


..... 




*■* . 




s?, 


?J 




cd 


cd.~ 


r* o* St 

A CD' ^ 




-Ut 


CD . 




<-<— 








cd 






"CD 




J-i 








fH 








s_ 




O 






i_ 


o 








O 




6 6 

ft* c^ 


1i 


e 

ft* 


O 


d 




d 
4 


d ^ d 


d 


d 




cr.'-^J 


•^o 


CD 


^ !£. 




~o 


.S V'.*H 


^« 


-"3 
•<-> ft» 


tS-<£L 




<£i 


v — * 


-s~ cr 


^j CD 


CD 


CD' CD* CD ^ 


CD 


— CD 










'O 










^O 


<-> ^TlJ 


u»_ -—*■ 


■*c 


*€? 




cD^@ 


"S^ 


■"S" ^ 'S' ■«> 


"■§ 


CD-P 






















X. 
















^. 




O 






d 










o 




. d 


6 6 
■3«3 


d 


«CJ 


O <"2 


d 


d 
o 


°^ J d ^ 

-pC- ^ CD 
•- *J CD « 


1 1 

*4i 


tec ^ 


*-• ~^~ 


o 


CD 


CD-^J 


•~> 


■ **> 


/=> Id ss J< 




s 




V.\jU 


<££■ 






CD 


CD 


CD CD"CD^ 


CD. 


£ CD 
o 


S?§ 


•^••S" 


■*€T 


*B 


o -Q 


"•S 


^ 


SUS^ 


^3- 


CD'-Sf 


}_ 


;— 






s »."> 


>\ -- — V 








o 


O 






o 


i* 


CD o 


. . 








-*-»ti 






iT- 




■t-t 


• ^-> . . 






5 5? 


cr ,^2 






*£? 


CD^ 




' . §. : -X 1 






ft* »CJ 


*—'■*— 






CD i -— . 
$^ - CD 




CD 
ft* 


4-t 

"cD 




O «- , 


t^,4-T 






rj£. £ ^ 


■«. ** 


' ^** * * 


ft* 




&<£ 


cd't^ 






»Cf ft, -"— 


^s ^.r tj . s=r • • 


>y 




.S^s* 5 ^- 1 ^ 




■€ ai '8 


W JS CD ' « ' 


-il* 




2>fc 


o CI 




££« 


"cD 
































A 












'-* /s 


.o 








iO 


a 


JO 


x-> 






O 






p3 

to 




•T3 

a 


O 
a> „> a 


o 
■♦-> 

xT 


x- 

i 
> 
o 
o 


o "«3 


OS 


a 

N 
0) 

cy 


"3 
a? 

S 




> 


i 

o 
o 




o 

o 


<1J 

O tn 


2 2 

c* ^ 

'ft* ~^» 


CD 
O 


o 
«>* 




o 

ft* 
ft* 


'So 
o 

<-* 


o 


O o O " 
*» 3 bo 

ft* ft* ft* ft* CO 


O 




bo&i) 


& 


& 


© 


© 


© 


© 


£$>$© 


© 


6 



82 








IRREGULAR VERBS. 




[rook I. 


i-2» 






^ 


w 






"£ •& 


s* 


s ** 


«-► ^ 


<»» S .r* 


5 ? 


" •■— ■ 




o~ 




I a 




"cj^tr 


i_ cD 


« 


$£ 




'"cD CD CD 


CD CD 


-£i-^3> 


o 




e* .^, 


«» o- 


<»<-»«»» 


«* «>» 


t^ c 


^ a 


CD CD 


CD CD 


CD CD CD 


CD CD 


CD CD 






















J-i 




HH 










55 


2^ 




o 










*■* 


^- «.» 








• 


• * 




^ 


** S5 




£i-^> 










ip 


CD . . 


* £5 " ' * 

CD <*> . . . 










< — • 




> — f 














d d 


O £? 








•** 

i 
§ 


6 




- ^ d 


o o 2 


o d 

44 


*^ £ «- 

^ ^ CD 


-4-5 

O 


5Q 


CD 


<*CD 


CD ^ CD 
u. w <-► 


CD^CD <33 -- O CD CD 




a* 
E 






._ i. 










9i 
.58 


d 
4 


d d 
44 
i? is- 


u 

~£~C d 




O d 

44 


^4^ 




SJ 


'its 


** <5 


H. 5 -U» 




** «; li 






o 




as=§, 


"•6" ti S ^ 

<^ CD <2C^5 


CD cD 


C5^ B 










>£ o -43 


-S- J3- ^5- cD 


^3-h^ 


sC-^C-^C- 








i_, u> 


<_» '-' w 


v— <^ ^ ^ J 


^^ <-► 








.— . <^* 














Jjj, 


.-b- 




. . . 










g 


"?* 










03 


•15 


CD 


CD 


CD 


. . . 


*H> 

CD • 


sis 


tw 


u 


o 








t> 


•js- . t* 


C3 












<-* 


i - ^ ^* 


£ 


"g 


rfr* 




O 










*N 


.i 


«CS -» 


tL 


* ' * 


sS" * 


^^ CD 


, 


-C 




c» 




"J* 


"cT^cs «^ 




CO 


CD ^5 


*CD 




CD 


•X-^^-J-JS- 




a* 


5 *> 






JO 


SJ =} S 

/-> JQ JZ> 








O 


O Z3 


o 


o 












w • — 












>-, 


o . 

Oh VJ 

3 Is 


CO 

.2 o 

ct3 *- 


03 

1 .1 


aT 






;5S 


•Si 




O 3 


43 •--- « 




bD 

> 2 a 






o 


© 


♦j o 

Oh 

5 s 


^m2 
S s ^ ^ 


^ o 
o -^ 

s ? O- 


o o *-• 






<irf 




2 S| C 


"^ 15 '5 "So 


2"S Sb 


5 ? § 

<^3 






s 


®© 


~© § 


$£)£> 


©0 


<£>♦£><-> 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



83 



cS o 
CD cd 



CD CD 





CD<£- 


S 

s 


o 




sy_ a-» 








i, c* 


o 


§» 


CD CD CD CD 


CD CD 


CD 


CD 



o 



o o 






.3 



CD <» 






££r s 






*& o -g 



^^^^^. 



c o 


O 
^ 


.6 . o 


o 


s&# «^^ 


?? 






■ r> —* s£) «-r-''^!J^~ 


_^^ 



■"S^ ^-•S' , S'' cj " 



•^ o .1 J* §' g tf 



As 



gc s^ 



fS 4» a$ .£* >- 



•g"** 



5 o 



ft, 
S « 

O Q 



ri-g 



O £ £ 



obs:. 



g.s 



s^ <5-«p- 



CD 

c5 



."i- ** *** •-* 



£<5 



S 
g 

o 






84 






IRREGULAR VERBS. 




[book I 


^ 


—* 










Past 
articip 


«* 

O 


^* >^* 


<*t- S S •; 

« .ti .2: tr 




ft* £ 
"ST* /=* 

8"! 


^ 


ft* 


ft* <i* 


ft* «a> t» -t^ 






<X> 


«3 «T> 


<*> <3} «3 <35 


<SD 02 


<X <S5 






it 




t ft* 








53 


^ s 




ft* 








5> 






* * !U 








S 


^3 o 
























to 


d 








. d 




S 

'-lb 
*8 


4 
ft? 


1 J 


4 141 

3 ££§" 


d 
«<s Jo 


4 

ft* 
ft* 

•S 


.03 




,«7> 


.,«-?. .*-> 


»£? -.r* n.rT -.t- 


,«-> ^-> 


JS' 








<-> ^ 




v^ <-» 


• <— 


03 


























Oh 














S 














hH 




d 








d 




S3 
.to 


4 


d 

4 $ 


4 <8"8o8 


d d 
44 


•4 
. .0" 




^ 
^ 


o 

4* 


\Z c* 


!zf -ifi 




• s 






<-> 


.C s£3- 


.,*-^ ^3-^3-^3- 


^rj. ^ 


JS 






V* 




«^ '_» <^ <_ 


<-. <_» 






















S *- 


1- 










rfrfc s_ 


Jo O 


O • • 


. S-i 








„*§. O 




**—' 


O 








*s 


i* *-> 


, — ., 








to 


ft* 


^* «<3 




;2 I» 




■g 


.» 






>— ■* ■— * ^ 






03 


« 


«. ««» 


*-» ■— •* ^» 


«2 ^* 


«,* «* 




03 




JS^ 


ilt^ 


. ft* 


'^f 






s 


£ "S" 


1**.^^ 


^^" *-• " t** 


•^5 








•r a 


<£ e ^5*^^ ~ . . S" 










— ' w vsu* 


^js^s - 2 ~ 


s ^ 








^ 


5* JS 


» • • » 


• >a 








yO 


A JO 


/O iO 


*" — y 














a 














s» 














03 














+J 








03 
0) 
H 
O 


. "3 


.03 T3 

3 S « « 

o° M 
3 

^ S S j; 
<^ «>» i* «rf 


1-> 
13 








O 


wv cd +■> 
^O 03 

O O 


03 03 
^ ^ T3 

c g 

- - 03 
5i -2 m 

««3 


853 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



85 











J-J 






ft- 




<-» >» 




j* 




<*► 




. g* 


S3 ^^ 


53 


vE «> 


c~\«* 




^ 


s 




t <» ^-> 


ftrf 


£-► j£ r- 


."3 "S* 


fe 


r 


* ce^ o 


?- ^Si- 


o 


S v. * 


— - fe> 


g— o 




l o 


S m-^?3- 


"t* k< '*» 




gvS 


sg 


"«> g 
5 <x> 


5 

ft- ft>* 


SS U-U- 

^* <w ft- 


S-^sl 




CO 


CD 


CD CD 


«^D «D <X> 


s» 


CD 




S-, 






^. . 










fe 


O 






o 


S3 






1h 


o 




S3 




v—x 


(O 






O 


ft* 


; 


ca 




s 


g 








5 S 


UC 


c7" 
g 




.§! 








v — <- 


£ 

6 

4 






S3 










O ^ 

^ 6 

3* 






d 




d 

.-8 

o 

«8 £ 


d 

■8 o 


d 






,— * «*«► 




ft- 






CD •. 




• — ► o-> 


•3 


Clri» 

5 S 










563- A* 


«o 

S3 


H ** 


S3 




s 




P-^ 


^-vO- 


cr- 


rip. S3 
<-> 


*~f 


*8i? 




s 




■g-e 


O -Q 


•s 




















S-c 

o 












d 






■«^— ' 




o o 






c 


> ^ 






II 


d 
"^ 

Ci 
g 


g g 


ft. 


r f 

► S3 


■u 


°o V, c£ ^ 

i ^^«.s 

f Shu^-^^^s^_ 


d 

o 

S3 

<3T 


w> ^~ 


Sg 


•e-e 




f ^g 


;€ 




}- 

O -Q 


*& 




















JO 


o 


.**^ w 


^ 












o +-► 


4-» 


e . 




4_» 












'§ 


jjg 


1 

| 


: i 








*I» 


"5 . 








S3 








"5 


ft- 


ft- 




jc 










CJ- 


'alT -all 
JO 




1? s 

s * 

S3 








S3 


1 

o 

S3 
«u 

ft- 


o 

S-H 

CO 
Ctf 

a 
£ 
o 


5.S 

.2=3 <D 

Oh > J4 

co ^ •- 

'"5 a> o 
2 *° *1 

> o J 

| .•§ 


-a 
a, 

.'& 

c 

1 


3 

^> o 

S3 

: s 


03 

£ 

CO 

C 

5 

S3 
ft^ 

ft- 

S3 


« CO 

■♦J .-H 

CO 3-4 

•s « 

•S -« 


2 bc'g 

« c ~> 
. o,^ 

2 O' m ^ 
2 X 

*t -a* 

*t 0) ^ to 

Sr'3 ^ ^0 

?* o. ^ O 

J-» Mh *- *J 

9- <3 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



[book I. 



^ 








-to .a. 


c* 


^s « - -^ « s ^ ♦- 


JS e* 


^ •£ 

^ t 


<-< 




o o 


53 


t-» o 






s; 


^» •> — ^ 


«^ ^ «srf c* c-> ^> o ^* c> d* 


«i» <i* 


«s: 


<5j«:«j<5:<3D CD <5D <3D «5 


<3D CJD 




Si 






• 






d 


O 








q^ d 








.a 

*1»J 




4* J 3 •' $*{■$$ 

«* ^- ^ «^~ <i* °0 


S d 

•3 $ 




& 


ft? wO 


~^s • s*s^ 


<£ £ 






J- 1 - i-* 


«>» <* *— *_» 'r' ~ rr S3 «* 


Ct_ C* 3 








.— .— -— ._* oO *<S *c? - • — 


«0 "'O 




CQ 








t2 






^ ^ .^ *-^ „«o „ 


^e ^e 


co 














-< ^-*» *■< 


Li 


a- 




o 


9 ,■; o 


o 






^ 


*§ . ■ ~t 




1— 1 


sJ 








.ft 


~- ° 


o o . ^ * o o «3 ^7* 


d « 




si 


i; 8 * 


1 -8-t 




^ 


5-* O 


t^^ellffl fs 






^ 




T* T* T* '■'■■?* ** ? ? . ** ft_. 


O O <5^ 




** 










_, J-c 

"g 1 o 




« *S 














ft 




•Xy- .... ... 


^ 








*<s 




0) 






J-> • • • • ... 


fg 


as 

55 








5-» 




^ 




»«-** .... ... 

«£ 

» 










c£ 


^^ 








o 


."Si 








T3 


c .s 




.ft 


a 

03 


to advise 
to rub 
to tear 
;o ride 
to run 

to smell 
to wrestle 
to run, to 
ids) 
,o call 


3 8 *t 




«5 


I 


** •* *> * « ~ ~ ~ s ~ 

s 5 S s H H ^ 5^s 








*S 


<2 <a* «* «^ <>* -«- -~ •— '"— "'^ 


« S <s 






£ 


QwSqq wwQ 8>> 


© © 



PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 



87 






S» «* «* £ S C & 



~ i£ -J* r* ^T ~ % > ~ Ci - 



*^i '"^2 <_* <-. <_» <_» *c. <_» <-. *c? *^J *C ^cJ 



o 



e 6 o ° 



6 o o & 



o o 






•8 .8 



*-»of — > 



^, ~^» oQ v -j ^ 

*S .2: "B -g- .5 






•c *c »— x: ^ «— 






■*- <x> .» v*- '-r- 



*e.e -e 



o o o' o § o o d o d S^ 



o o 

0^ Q^ 



^^Oi.* ^ ■* Ci ""C- 



o > o 5 «» ■ 



£.£. 
-6 -6 






U— CD 



O to 
O O 



O 03 



Oh £ 



^ T3 



o 5 o 



A (S S ^ u ^ o 
.T- Cu.7- 2 ^ S ±* 



©■® © © © 



J2 a) /*- >=> 






^ £-£.£- 



CO T", Efl T- ~< 



® ^S}® ®@ ©© © (S 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



BOOK I. 



Ik EH 



2"S is- yncns 



e s 





53 


u , 


Z&-Z-Z 


<ir »- "S" Oi-^" *- * 


3- t <— '^ <-» <-» 


*-— - Si *ii- «* 


: 


" o '^ «o 8jO <^— «* rT. o « 


— -^, -^ :., -L, 


C* <3. ^« — 


TO) TO) 


s_^ «> — 


TO) CD TO. TO 


TO) 


TO) 




1»» 




<J" 












53 




rto 


*^° 










^ 
















03 




•I? 


"g 










J| 






s. 
















•» "» . • <-— X 












d 
S 3 


o O 
^rr«o 


-S- -^ ^ v s ^9 


o . o d 

•~j _^ -S t* 
"^» "«* <u Jo 


d 

TO 


d 




"«> 


«3 


s s 


Ot. g '^ t* j£ 


•r; rj r; g 


e 


g 




3 








''S'^S'-P^ 






•w 


52 


0£_ 


Oi-Oi- 


o d *X^_ j„ 




Oi- 


^iL 






*ST 


•_> <_» 


^agog.^ ©, 


^-.g^^- 


*Q 


^ 


0) 






























£ 
i— i 




6 
to 


s s 


■^3" ^-^ ■*-* ^ ° 


d ■ o e 

"Tl <^~ •<-► o 
"C. ~£ "Z B 


6 

TO 

a 


d 
o 




L^ 










^£3- 






s 


>y 


•_> <_» 


d d tiL^^v 


t.)^ tj? >'^ >^ 


d- 


0£_ 






*€T 


<-> ~ 


^4 °8 -s -S" o 


^^^-^ 


s* 


•~t 






















•l-k 
















* w> 








,_> 








."s 








'32 
















v> 




W 




. »^ 








*§■ 




.£> 




J-* 










s 


1»i 




. **■ 








Jj. 


















PM 












r3 




S 


















S 








a 








































*»— 








*^— 








JS 








A 












o 


c 






=0 


S3 
O 


2 o 


B 2 
2 o2 


C3 0)1 


0) 

o 

o 


"3 

o 




4 


TO 




S ~ s 
"§ e^ 


^f 5S S ?J 


03 _T 

t- TO) 








:"^ 


s s 


S 2 ^ 


?: ^ ?: s 




& 


1 




*» 


\-» v^ 


-r^ S S , *S 


■"S^" "S^S" 


w 


1 




© 


®® 


© ©® 


©@®© 


® 


© 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



89 



fi 



■s* /a cT" ft* ft* ■ ft* ft* 

C*0 <33 <3D <?J CD 



^53 ft* ft, ft* 

S3 "«-> 53 53 S3 



O^" 



3i J3 "£ 



O ft* 


o 


o 


o o 




<£ fe 


^ 


£ 


3-3 




eg 
n fi 


JO 


ft^ 


.*-> ■£* *~> 


4 


fi w 




<*3 
fi 


-2 s g 


ft* 




o ^L 


o^_ 




fi 



r^^o'J J 



-:»3 



4 ^ 



<Q »-" <- S3 «£ r- j^ 

*— •« "« 52 ~ iS "«. 



•g o 



£~ ~ ~ 



o-e *e 



*A I I i . 

is « f W ^S ^ 

« S 3 3 o ^°c 

fi fi fi fi fi 52 - £ 

.'-' w r^ t^- r^ fi « » 

w r u- w *-.§>— fi 



*-3 



o d o 



*- *> -w ^ ^ * °3 ^ 



— ,W O — 






• ^ ♦_> jO 

^ fi<JL 

















o 
















-♦-* 


s 


js 


ho 










TJ 




•-£ 


C 


cd 








* & 


«3 


cti 


£ 


<r> 








C ;=J 


o 


> 
O 


O 


55 

02 

o 


© 




T3 

0) o 


^■5 -S^ 
■1 .3 «- © -s. 


«>* 
g 

'fi 



ft* 
'fi 

c 

9 


ft* 

'fi 


fi 

® 


W 
O 

ft* 


0* 

O 

-M 

ft* 
ft 


2 o 

*> 71 


Ss^o o2 2 
♦^ - «-*■ "^ ** *t *t 

** ft* ^* l~! 53 53 53 
■«■ -r^ t— ^J t* ft* ft* 

«"j^-> >r <r> **=tr* •« 



90 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



[book I. 



ft, t 












O a* 



•8| 






O 

3-a 



* c «3 £ -8 g «« rf og «8 J 

~ "Sft _> *• o°o ^^ -.- ^ 



*» ^ r «^ ^ 



o . 

2 '-^ 



^2 



« o o 









2 o 



n3 
C 

O 



O o 3 






*-• o erf rr 



g 2 



£ J? 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



91 






*> 2? 



* §£ f S 3b ^ 

« « o .21 "«* o S 

xs- ju :_► j-» j_> iJ z* 

O <i* "£> C^ C-* Cv> ~> 



♦_> J- <*» J_, 



J- 1* ^ I. O 



<3 1*3 <3 



9 6 






og 



,o t* ?_► *^ t* :_► t-» 



<^4 | 



S o 3 S o o o S d* o J 



«<3 vO 


«o 


". -Jll 


,£> 










>» ^ 


s> 




.<-> 


<-> 






d d 




o^ o^ 


O 
*8 


V <3j «3 


■^ 






« o 




sD^ 






5=> 


^e o 


f? 
























O 










^4 C2 








,^ 






0> 


-d 


CJl, to stink 
it, to push 
l)Cn, to stro 
along 
CH, to conte 


<* 




>> 

-^ 
2 


® — i 

> TJ 

O ** 
-^ O 


<*> 

it 

O 


03 
> 


.5 

*S-i 




c 




. 

<3D 


-0 




% £-•- ;f ~ 


*J- 


S# 


x> 3 


«> 


O 

































<i* «*> 




-n 








©$® ® 


w 


W&t 


Wtfi 


^ 




b* 


£ 


R 



92 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



[book I. 






JS ft* St «-» ft* 



2* *3> ft* 'Crf — 

*^» ** S e^ >o o o £ ^ 



«-> ft* 53 
'-* £> J& 



<S3 <X> 



W I I 114^ 



4 



1 "a* 



*> 5» *> 

•6 -S o 



«£2£P 5 






s ^ 



"^ <_ ^ <_. s — ^ •_••_» ^ 



1* ^> fe o -~ 
ft* -O o o r* 5 



■8 "8 



.8 

CD 



^1 



■>-» A T. 



«- ■ =2 1 S-* C 



^~«0 ^^3- 



1 eg 



$ 






* IS 



to 



« ^«^«e^««^ 



*» o ■ .*r 

• . • ft* 

O O O £* 

.p <*8 H? °8 ^ ^€? 



<-* 



2*s s* 

*» 53 






-S.s 



>- 

R* 

S O 

S is 

*: o 



0) 0) 

- 1 o 
o — 



s -e 



13 a; 

cd O 

o ^ 



C 2> 

*0 53 



5*^3- sCf 



St, 
c 

« o 

o 



c* ^* ft* ft* 



£# g» ft ffffffff 






S C*- ft* -^ 



S3 



B 



PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 



93 







t_ ^-^ 














C JJ ti ^ *♦ ** 
.- •- « g o o 










S g 


g 


gegig a 




a a 


s 


g 






^, ^ ^ c. j ^ m 










CD CD 


CD 


cd cd cd cd cd 




CD CD 


CD 


CD 




• 


• • * o » * 
' — *> 
• <>> • 




1- * — V 

O 8 ' 
£> 

I s • 










^ v U. 




s- 






d d 


o 

II 


. 6 ° 
d ^ S °3 d d 




o 
d 

o$ d § 
.** ^ - 


d 


d 


«s »s 


"O *r 


.is .~<<2 » <^'r : ' »ss 




•^ !*-Cb 


MS 


«:5 


g a 


P r 11 * 

** c* 


gas,B,t:g 




S »~ 6 


g 


g 




sp g 


^^^^^ e^ 




V* *"' t-» 


*s 


"■g" 






























6 . 


,0, 


^<3 d 




o 




d 


*3 


d T 


6 6 -^ og ^ 


id 




o 
/a 


3 

£ 


ti — 




fi "£ s £ I g _ 


/£» 


S « o 


cs 


$j 


2 g 


g*a 




^ g g 


g 


g 


•s^s 


.-^fiL ^ ^ ^ o ^ ^ *c 


g g^f sC* 


*e 


<-> 



^ a 



«gg 



e g 



razz 
I? 



g g 
3 to 

Is 



B 



. be P 

S 2 



to yield 
to show 
to turn 


^ S 
o o 


3 o 


02 <D 
^3 


2 O 


«>* s S 
■"ST »^-5* 





** ^ *^ 



O bl)2 

'o 



o o 

^ - 






^g £_ ^^^ 8 "8 8 8 8 - 88 



94 



IRREGULAR VERBS. 



^j 




,_, 


r*» 






*. •> 


5* f- 


"<33 


to ^> 






5S •« 

Oh 




g 


<rio «^Q 


«-io 


C# '— » 


c» 


«: *r> 


CD 






^ — ^ 














•♦J 


o 






e 








s* 








w 

^ 








L.^ 


-*» » 






S 


77 «>* 










d 




.5S 


14 


-3 




« 


o 




S 




<D 




s 

■§ 


#« 


• S 






■ ~ <*=> 


e 


o 


s§ 


«-*= «^o 


r*o 


.a; 




,Q ■ | «-N 


•■S' 






>_» ■«* 


<-» 


5 














a. 








S 








i— i 


QJ 




6 




.g 
e 


ij 














is 




•rj 




^ 








^c «c 


J3- 






^ <_» 
















• 6 £ 








.•3 * 








* *I"£±1 








*T-- «•"> 








* <-> ^ 




S3 


,a 


«-*o S 




■KJ 


«■*=> 




<x> 
m 

■-* 






d 
■3 ' 




S 


<*» 


-t-t . 














«^°^^ 


£5 






•— 


<-> 






a o 








• >=» 






1 — * 








i~~i 


O 






3 


"*■' 






o. 








«*- 








© o 


CD 
O 




u 


cd *^ 

03 






;*o 


• 8 2 

ftfi rt -a 


O 




4 


o o 






^ 


♦j *j 


s"a3 








** D- 






<^ <^» 


«>s 








— o 






Crf -^3 


a ° 






mm 


m 



-a 3 
*£. 

cd cd 

be P 
cd a; 
J- be 



■S<2 

a. a 
.5 o 



» -"a o r 
-o If* a- 

JD •*" ^ a 

>■" C *> . o si 

n3 bC^_ ro 

CD 5 ^ 

■5 S I ^| 

13 © © ^ ™ 

cu -^ _s a) o 
o -^ 

C ^" 
CD — 

s» ~ ^ .** P ^. 

b£^& 

CD 



^ a 



^0 cd 
5^ r 



_5- v 
a > 

J& '3d 



^^TT S 8 



c ^ - cd •» . a ^~ n . 

sn^'^ 8 - 

0) ^'». CD 
T3 O r-. 



ta 



CU CD 

5^ O 



eu 3 
2 3 13 



CU »*>* 



•bb-is -sS 



9 ^ a 

o Tl £ 5 a ^ 13 
£ o - ^ ^» ^ ^5 



b£T3 
3 3 



3 ^£> 



cd 



_C a, ° 3 3 J '*- 

Oj3 5» Bi .3 - ^r 



o^ 



.s * 

1/3 ■- 

■S s 

>2 



«^ 3 O CD 
^ hn •/; 3 



85* §5 



D bfl 

D. 3 



3 ^3 

CD 3 

^ r 

-3 g 

CD o 

i: o 



CD ^»- 

s *: 



-3 h 
CD 5* 

co •*» 

3 -» 

CD 

CD C 

>, 3 

CD •- 

-5 o 



o es t? ^ 



cd a 



j_, j-. Cv 



3 J-* 

CO o 

3^ 

CD 'd 

J- 3 
CD «* 



^ 



of ^ 

3 ** 

.2 CD~ 

+J > 

cd o 

° S 

"Lo ^ 



^3 CD 03 



UJ2 a) o 



O -3 
•— •-. 
_ Cu CD 
* J bC CD > -3 

t+- CD -: 
O ^ « cS 
CD -> 



O P 3 « 



* s 

M O 
03 O 

CD 

O Si 



jSU'feg.s-SS 



a) 



q - o 



.>^a = 



rt !S 



QQ • - ^ 3 CD 



3 ~ 
cd ^> 



^ CD ,• 

-.S3 S * 

3 ^3 co _r 

CD b" -p 

^3 ^ ^ bD 

co 2 '53 

03 -3 -^3 > 

^ cd ** 

a cd _ j? 

1 S'S 



PART II. CH. 6.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



95 



The following verbs, which are similar to each other, are 
to be distinguished. 



©au'gen, to suck, irr. 
©djroim'men, to swim, irr. 

©tttt'eU/ to sink, irr. 

©rnung'en, to spring, irr. 
%K\\\&Z\\, to drink, irr. 



@<Ut'gen, to suckle, reg. 
©cferoem'men, to wash away, 

reg. 
@en£'en, to sink, let down, 

reg. 
©pveng'CU, to sprinkle, reg. 
%vfa\t'm, to give to drink, reg. 



Promiscuous Exercises on the Irregular and Mixed Verbs. 

When the verb to do is an auxiliary to another verb, the 
auxiliary is not expressed in German. Thus the phrases, do 
you know ? or do you not know ? are expressed in German as 
if the English were, know you? or know you not? Wif'fet ifyl* ? 
or n>if fct iljr nidit ? 

The position of the negative ntd)t is immediately after the 
verb, except with the infinitive and the participles, where it 
stands before the verb ; and in questions, where it stands after 
the pronoun. Ex. I am not, id) bin ttifl)t ; are you not ? fetfc 
it)t* nid)t ? not to be, nid)t fcin ; he might not come, cv fthne 
nicl>t. 

Indicative. 



Present. 



I know, 
May I? 
I must not, 
Can I not ? 
Thou fallest, 
Dost thou catch ? 
Thou dost not hold, 
Dost thou not hang? 
You must, 
May he? 
He does not let, 
Does he not sleep? 
She advises, 



roiffen. 

tmv'fen. 

muffen. 

ftn'nen. 

fallen. 

fana/en. 

fyal'ten, 

fy&na/en. 

muf'fem 

mo'gen. 

laf'fen. 

fd)(a'fen, 

ra'ttyen. 



96 



RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



[book 



Does she go I 


fafy'ren. 


She hoes not dig, 


gra'ben. 


Does she not strike 1 


fd)(a'gen. 


It grows, 


road) 'fen. 


Does it see ? 


fe'i)en. 


It does not eat, 


cf'fen. 


Does it not happen ? 


gefd)e'f)en. 


We give, 


gc'ben. 


Do we step ? 


tre'ten. 


We do not forget, 


bevgef'fen. 


You read, 


le'fen. 


Do you measure 1 


meffen. 


You do not hew, 


fyau'en. 


Do you not carry 1 


tra'gen. 


They are, 


feiti. 


Do they remain ? 


b lei' ben. 


They do not seize, 


gvei'fen. 


They do not go, 


ge'tyen. 



Imperfect. 



I might, 


mo 'gen. 


Did I eat? 


()'{nu 


I did not dig, 


gra'ben. 


Did I not step ? 


tve'ten. 


Thou remainedst, 


b lei 'ben. 


Didst thou lend ? 


let'pen. 


Thou didst not avoid, 


met' t>en. 


Didst thou not fight ? 


fed) 'ten. 


He induced, 


beroe'gen. 


Did he heave, or lift? 


fye'ben. 


He did not conceal, 


bev'gen. 


Did he not take ? 


net) 'men. 


He commanded, 


befefy'len. 


Did she speak ? 


fpvecb'en. 


She did not write, 


fd)vei'ben. 


We nominated, 


evnen'nen. 


It bit, 


be iff en. 


Did it glide 1 


glei'ten. 


He did not think, 


Denf'en. 



PART II. CH. 6.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 



97 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 



I may fall, 

I may not be able, 

Thou may st not, 

Thou must, 

He may be willing, 

We may beat, 

They may not bear, 



fal'Ien. 

fon'nen. 

m&'gen. 

ttwffen. 

wol'Un. 

fcljfo'getu 

tvu'geii. 



Imperfect. 



might dig, 



; frea 



He might not Wng, 
Thou mightst Weak, 
Thou mightst not command. 
He might conceal, 
She might not help, 
It might eat, 
He might not, 
We might not lose, 
You might not creep, 
They might not confuse. 
They might not spoil, 



gra'ben. 

bring' en. 

bvecb'en. 

fcefcfy'fen. 

bei-'gnt. 

i?ci'fen. 

ef'jcn. 

mo'gen. 

i)Cf(ie'rcn. 

frie'djen. 

fcenmr'im 

fcevfcev'ben. 



Imperative. 



Read (thou), 

Give, 

Take, 

Do not step, 

Eat, or do you eat, 

Do not forget, 

Let him come, 

Let him not give, 

Let us go, 

Speak, or do you s 

Let them enjoy, 

Do not speak, 

9 



fe'feit. 
ge'ben. 
wfy'men. 
tre'tttu 

ef'fcn. 

fcergef'fen. 

f om'men. 

ge'bcn. 

ge'fyen. 

fprecfc'en. 

geniefen. 

fpi-ecl)'cn. 



98 REFLECTIVE VERBS. [BOOK 2. 





Past Participle. 


Begiln, 


begin'neiL 


Spoken, 


fpvecfe'en. 


Not deceived. 


brtrie'gen. 


Fled, 


fUe'fyen. 


Flowed, 


jite'fen. 


Not sheared, 


fd)c'tm 


Burnt, 


Mxbvtn'iutL 


Recommended, 


empfefy'ftrw 


Brought, 


huiig'en. 


Valued, 


get'ten. 


Given, 


ge'ben. 


Helped, 


fyel'fen. 


Requested, 


bit'tm. 


Called, 


fyei'fen. 



§ 4. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 

Active verbs, when they reflect upon the agent, are called 
reflective verbs. They are formed with the pronouns mid), 
told), (or mtr, til*,) fid), ttnS, end), fid), answering to the En- 
glish pronouns, myself; thyself; himself, herself itself; our- 
selves; yourselves; themselves. They are conjugated like 
active verbs, and are either regular or irregular. 

Conjugation of the Reflective Verb, fid) (ic'ben, to love one's self. 

Infinitive. 

Present. 

fid) Ue'ben, to love one's self. 

Participle, 
fid) (ie'bettl), loving himself, herself, or itself. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) (te'be mid), I love myself. id) lu'bt mid), I may love 

myself. 
*>U (iebft Did), thou lovest thy- bit (ie'bcft bid), thou mays* 
self. love thyself. 



PART II. CH. 6.] REFLECTIVE VERBS. 99 

*r, fie, or e$ lubt fid), he, she, er, fie, or e£ (ie'be fid), he, 
it loves himself, herself, ur she, it may love himself, 
itself. herself, or itself. 

Plural. Plural, 

xoix (te'6en unS, we love our- nm* Ue'Beu unS, we may love 

selves. ourselves. 

ifyx iit'btt cud), you love your- tfjr lie'bet eud), you may love 

selves. yourselves, 

fie (ie'ben fid), they love them- fie lie' ben fid), they may love 

selves. themselves. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) [ieb'te mid), I loved my- id) (te'bete mid), I might love 

self. myself. 

Dn lieb'tej? Did), thou, &c. Dn Ue'beteft Did), thou, &,c. 

Plural. Plural, 

mx Hefc'ten tuts, we loved voix (te'beten im$, we might 

ourselves. love ourselves. 

iljx Iteb'tet end), you, &c. tyc (te'betet and), you, &c. 

Imperative. 

Singular, Plural 

lu'bcn mix nn$, let us love 
ourselves, 
(te'be Did), love thyself. (icbt or lie'bet end), love your- 

selves, 
lie'be et' fid), let him love him- {ie'ben fie fid), let them love 
se lf- themselves. 

Exercises on the Reflective Verbs. 

Indicative. 

Present. 
I am ashamed, fid) fd)a'men, to be ashamed. 

He blames himself, jici) ta'Dcin, to blame one's self. 

We unite together, firf) fcevei'ni.qen, to unite. 

You forget yourselves, fid) fcergef'fen, irr. to forget 

one's self. 



100 REFLECTIVE VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Imperfect. 

We rejoiced, fid) fvcu'ett, to rejoice. 

He betook himself, fid) bcge'ben, irr. to betake 

one's self. 
They heloed themselves, ftcl) fycl'fen, irr. to help one's 

self. 

Imperative. 

Do not offend, fid) fcergc'tycn, irr. to offend, to 

fail in one's duty. 
Grieve not, fid) gr&'mcn, to grieve. 

Do not complain, fid) bcHa'geti, to complain. 

Do not burn yourself, fid) Dcvbven'nen, mix. to burn. 

Be not afraid, fid) fuvd)'teu, to be afraid. 

Observations on the Reflective Verbs. 

1. There are many reflective verbs in German, which are 
not so in English; as, fid) nbat'ltlM, to pity ; fid) fvcu'eit, to 
rejoice ; and many others, as in the above exercises, are em- 
ployed only in the reflective form ; as, 

fid) bcge'ben, to repair to. fid) grtVmen, to be grieved, 

fid) benmdytigen, to get pos- fid) bevitfy'mcn, to boast one's 

session of. self, &c. 

fid) biHnt'm, to thank. 

2. All active verbs, if the sense admits of it, may be used 
as reflective verbs, by the addition of the reflective pronouns ; 
in which case they frequently assume an intransitive meaning ; 
as, fhxdytm, act. to fear ; and fid) ffivdytCU, to fear, or to be 
afraid. Some verbs, however, are employed in both forms ; 
as, 

iv'Vdt, to err, or fid) tr'vcn, to be mistaken. 

jcmt'en, to quarrel, or fid) jaitfctt, to embroil one's self. 

fdjeu'en, to shun, or fid) fcijeu'en, to be shy. 

3. Most reflective verbs take the pronoun in the accusa 
tive; as, id) cvbav'mc mid), I pity; id) bcfin'ue mid), I reflect; 
but some few require the pronoun in the dative ; as, id) ma'fc 
miv ttidjt an, I do not assume ; id) bd'tc mil* ntd)t cm, I do 
not imagine. 



PART II. CH. 6.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 101 

§ 5. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

A verb is called impersonal if, in those tenses which com- 
monly have three persons, it is used, in its proper and peculiar 
sense, only in the third person singular, with the pronoun C£ be- 
fore it. Thus the verb ge'fcen, v. a. irr. to give, which is a com- 
plete verb, has a peculiar meaning when used impersonally ; 
indie, pres. e£ gtcbt, there is; imp erf. eS gab, there was or 
were. Ex. (£g giebt SDiCtt'fdjcn, there are men (literally, it 
gives men). 

Most impersonal verbs, though generally used as such, are 
sometimes employed as complete verbs, particularly in a poetic 
sense. Thus the verbs fcOU'nern, to thunder, b i it' jcrt, to 
lighten, are commonly used as impersonal verbs ; as, e£ 
fcOU'nnrt, it thunders; cS Mtt'jet, it lightens; bet sometimes 
as complete verbs ; as, i>ic J^d'ljcn fcon'min, the heights thun- 
der ; fci'ne 'Ku'gen blifc'tcn, his eyes threw out lightning. 

Impersonal verbs are either intransitive, or active, or re- 
flective, as they are used either by themselves, or with a 
personal, or a reflective pronoun after them. 

I. Conjugation of the Impersonal Intransitive Verb. 

Conjugation of the Regular Impersonal Verb, reg'nen, 
to rain. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

*6 Wg'Mt, it rains. eS rcg'ite, it may rain. 

Imperfect. 
CS tfg'UCtC, it rained. CS VCg'nete, it might rain. 

The following verbs may be conjugated in a similar manner 

fcon'nern, to thunder. Mifjen, to lighten, 

fcvmei'eu, to snow. ffyau'en, to thaw, 

fya'aeiu, or fdjlof'fen, to hail. ta'gen, to dawn. 
9* 



102 TMPERSQNAL VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Conjugation of the Irregular Impersonal Verb, fric'ren, to freeze. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 
eg frier t, it freezes. eg frie're, it may freeze. 

Imperfect. 
eg fror, it froze. eg fr&'re, it might freeze. 

II. Conjugation of the Impersonal Active Verb. 
Conjugation of the Regular Impersonal Verb, dr'gern, to vex. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular 

eg dr'gert mid), or mid) dr'= eg dr'gere mid), or mid) dr'gere, 
gert, I am vexed. I may be vexed. 

eg dr'gert ind), or tuef) dr'gert, eg dr'gere bid), or i>id) dr'gere, 
thou art vexed. thou mayst be vexed. 

eg dr'gert i I7 it , or tfyn dr'gert, eg dr'gere tfyu, or ihn dr'gere, 
he is vexed. he may be vexed. 

Plural. Plural. 

eg dr'gert ung, or ttng dr'gert, eg dr'gere ung, or tmg dr'gere, 

we are vexed. we may be vexed. 

eg dr'gert end), or cud) dr'gert, eg dr'gere end), or cud) dr'gere, 

you are vexed. you may be vexed. 

eg dr'gert fte, or fte dr'gert, eg "dr'gere fte, or fie dr'gere, 

they are vexed. they may be vexed. 

Imperfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

eg dr'gerte mid), or mid) dr'= eg dr'gerte mid), or mid) dr'~ 
gerte, I was vexed, &,c. gerte, I might be vexed, &c. 

The personal pronoun is generally in the accusative, but 
sometimes in the dative case. Thus the verb gefaf'fen, v. n. 
irreg. to please, is used impersonally, with the personal pro- 
noun in the dative case : as, eg gcfdUt' mir, or mir gcfdttt', I 
am pleased, &,c. ; eg gejteC mir, or mir gejkl', I was pleased, &c 



PART II. CH. 6.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 103 

Exercises on the Impersonal Active Verb. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

I am hungry, fyimg'mt, to be hungry. 

Thou art cold, ftie'rett, irr. to freeze. 

We are thirsty, fcur'jUu, to be thirsty. 

They are sleepy, fdtfa'fent, to be sleepy. 

He is pleased, gefaCIen, irr. to please, (Dat.) 

Imperfect. 

It seems to me, tmnf'CU, to seem, (Dat. or 

Ace.) 
We were grieved, gvd'men, to grieve. 

You were grieved, 

They were discomforted, VCVtane'fcn, irr. to discomfort. 

He was displeased, misfal'Icn, irr. to displease, 

(Dat.) 

In all the instances mentioned under II, the personal pro- 
noun in the accusative or dative case is evidently governed 
by the impersonal verb, which is governed by the pronoun C£, 
it, expressed or understood. In other cases, C6 is an expletive 
which does not govern the verb, and is either not translated 
or answers to the English there; ex. c$ fcmtt if)lt nie / tttan&, 
there is no one that knows him ; C6 $\\'§<M fcic Scu'te, people say. 

III. Conjugation of the Impersonal Reflective Verb. 

Conjugation of the Irregular Impersonal Verb twftc'fyftt/ 
to understand. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

t$ fecvjfelit' fid), it is under- c£ fcetfle'fyc fid), it may be 
stood (literally, it under- understood, 
stands itself.) 

Imperfect. 

CS berjiemfc' fid), it was under- C$ ttcvfttn't>e ftel), it might be 
stood. understood. 



104 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Exercises on the Impersonal Reflective Verb. 

Present. 

It is becoming, fid) fdjic'frtt, to be becoming. 

It is not* proper, fid) get)6'reu, to be proper. 

It is evident, fid) crge'ku, irr. to be evident. 

Imperfect. 

It came to pass, fid) flt'gcu, to come to pass. 

It subsided, fid) ge'beil, irr. to subside. 

It was protracted, fid) Derjie'fjcn, irr. to be pro- 

tracted. 



§ 6. COMPOUND VERBS. 

Simple verbs being regular or irregular, their compounds 
are the same. 

Compound verbs are compounded either with separable or 
inseparable particles. 

Those which are compounded with inseparable particles, 
are conjugated like the simple verbs without the additional 
particle ; except in the past participle, in which they do not 
receive the augment ge. Thus the verb ct'fldiCU, to fulfill, is 
conjugated like ffd'lcrt, reg. to fill ; except the past participle, 
which is cvfldlt' (instead of gecrfiittt). 

The separable particles are joined to the verbs in the infini- 
tive and participle, except when the conjunction ju, to, is 
added to the infinitive, which is then put between the particle 
and the verb; as, attf fatten, to detain ; he endeavoured to de- 
tain him, ev fudytc itjix auf ju kjal'tm (or aufjul;a[ten). — In 
the original tenses of the indicative and subjunctive, and in 
the imperative, the separable particles are separated and put 
after the verb ; except when for some reason (to be stated in 
the Syntax) the verb must be put at the end of the sentence. 
Ex. you detain, ifyr. fyat'tct auf ; take care that you do not 
detain me, fe'fyct jit, &afj ifyr mid) mrtjt auffyaltet. 

* The negation is to be put after the reflective pronoun. 



PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. 105 

Conjugation of the Separable Compound (irregular) Verb 
(Uif fyalten, to detain or stop. 

Infinitive. Participle. 

aitflhtlfen, to detain. Present auf l)a(tettfe, detaining. 

Past. auf gel)a(tcn, detained. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) l)ai'U auf, I detain, am id) fyal'te auf, I may detain. 

detaining, or do detain. 
t>U fycUtjv auf, thou detainest. &tt fyaf'tejt auf, thou mayest de- 
tain, 
er, fie, or e£ fyctft auf, he, she, ev, fie, or es fynVu auf, he, 

or it detains. she, or it may detain. 

Plural. • Plural. 

tt>ir fyai'tm auf, we detain. nnt* fjdi'tUX auf, we may de 

tain. 

tyv fyai'ttt auf, you detain. t^V tj&l'Ut auf, you may de- 

tain. 

fte $)4'ten auf, they detain. fte tjaVttn auf, they may de- 

tain. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) t)tc(t auf, I detained, id) fytcl'te auf, I might detain, 

fclt fytei'teji auf, thou detain- fit tjieCtejt auf, thou mightst 

edst. detain. 

Cf fytelt auf, he detained. cr. tftil'tt auf, he might de- 

tain. 

Plural Plural 

Yolv tjtiVttn auf, we detained. rr-tr fyicPtCU auf, we might, &c. 
i'vf fyicI'M auf, you detained. il)V tfitl'ttt auf, you might, &c. 
fie Ijki'tm auf, they detained, fte tjkVtcn auf, they might, 

&c. 



106 



COMPOUND VERBS. 



[book I. 



Imperative. 



Singular 



tyaf'tc (bit) auf, detain (thou). 
tjal'tt Ct* auf, let him detain. 



Plural 

tyaf'tcn tt>iv auf, let us detain. 

fyaf'tet (ifyr) auf, detain (you). 

tyfti'teft fte auf, let them de= 

tain. 



So conjugate : 



aufltcfymcu, irr. to take up. 
roea/gcfcctt, irr. to give away. 
ab'tjoicn, to fetch. 



au^'fprccfectl/ «Vr. to pronounce, 
fcor'fommeu, irr. to come be- 
fore. 
eiu'btiugCU, mix. to bring in. 



Exercises on the Separable Compound Verbs. 
Indicative. 



I take off, 
Thou acceptest, 
It devolves, 

We give up, 
You except, 
They assist, 



I presented, 
Thou rannest off, 
He took in, 
We pursued, 
You sent home, 
They came hither, 



Look (thou) to, 
Keep (you) back, 



Present. 



ab'ncfymcn, irr. to take off. 
an'ttCljmCtt, irr. to accept. 
aui)cim'fatfcn, or fycim'faffcn, 

irr. to devolve, 
auf gebcu, irr. to give up. 
atlS'nefymcn, irr. to except, 
fcet'ftcfyeu, irr. to stand by, to 

assist. 



Imperfect. 



&ar'i*cidjcn, to present. 
t>a\)0U'(aufeu, irr. to run off. 
ettt'neljttten, irr. to take in. 
fovt'fcftcu, to pursue, 
fyeim'fcfcicrcu, to send home, 
{jcrtommcu, irr. to come hith- 
er. 



Imperative. 



ju'fcfoen, irr. to look to 
juvutf'fyaften, irr 
back. 



to 



keep 



PART II. CH. 



Composing, 
Composed, 



COMPOUND VERBS. 107 

Participles. 

jufam'menfegeu, to compose. 



Observations on the Compound Verbs. 

1. The compound verbs generally follow the conjugation of 
the simple verbs, some of which are regular, and others irreg- 
ular ; thus, an'refcen, to address, and bere'fcen, to persuade, 
from ve'fcen, to speak, are regular; atlffeljl'Cibcn, to write 
down, and befcfyret'ben, to describe, from fcfovei'ben, to write, 
are irregular. But fdjaffen, to create, is irregular, and 
fcerfcl)affen, to procure, regular; lofcfy'en, to quench, regular, 
and etlofcfy'en, to become extinct, irregular. 

2. All separable particles have a distinct meaning, when 
taken by themselves, and are therefore easily distinguished 
when used in composition ; as, 



a(\ off, or down, 
an, on, or at. 
anf, up, or upon. 
<\U$, out of. 
bet, at, by, near. 



bat*/ there, 
ein, in, or into. 
fret, free. 
init, with, 
nacl), after. 



Examples. 



Wfe|en, to depose, 
Itn'fpvec^en, to address, 



2htf!U() en, to arise, 
2tu$'fcgen, to expose, 
93ei'|tei)ea, to assist, to stand 
by, 

(Sitt'jcMcfen, to inclose, 
gvei'fpncben, to acquit, 

9tttt'.qef)en, to accompany, 
Sftaclj'fofgen, to succeed, 



from fet'jen, to put, and ab, 
down. 

fprect)'en, to speak, an, 

to. 
jte'fyen, to stand, auf, up. 
fet'jen, to put, ans, out. 
jtc'tjen, to stand, bei, by, 

or near, 
fcblie'fen, to lock, ein, in. 
fpredyen, to speak, frei, 

free, 
o/fyen, to go, mif, with. 
fol'o,en, to follow, nacf), 

after. 



108 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK T. 

■$i\\, thither, or there, and fycr, hither, or here, are oftener 
employed in German than in English. Both express motion 
towards an object ; but fyer, when used in opposition to l)in, 
denotes a motion towards the place where the person who 
speaks actually is, and bin a motion towards another place. 
Thus, fyht'fommen, signifies to get or arrive there, in opposi- 
tion to fyev'fommen, to come hither ; as, %d) Hnn'tc \\id)t 
t)i\\'hmvm\, I could not get there ; &om'mcn ©ie tjW, Come 
here, 

3. The inseparable particles, as their name announces, are 
used only in composition. Of these, the following are the 
principal : 

55c, (1.) in composition with verbs, denotes an expansion of 
the action over an object, or its influence upon it ; as, bcirutd)'; 
fen, to overgrow ; bcjlren'cn, to bestrew ; bcrdtt'dKvn, to be- 
smoke or smoke. By the use of this particle, many neuter 
verbs are changed into active ; as, av'bettcn, to work, ein 
©tucr' J^olj bear'betten, to work on a piece of wood ; rci'ten, 
to ride, ein $Pfev& btvti'tm, to train a horse ; fot'gen, to 
follow, ei'nen iRatt) fcefol'gen, to follow counsel ; fpredj'en, to 
speak, et'lfag befpvedj'ett, to bespeak a thing, &c. 

(2.) In composition with nouns and other parts of speech, 
it denotes a communication of one object or quality to another ; 
as, bejUVcjcln, to wing, or provide with wings, from glu'gcl, a 
wing ; beb&n'Dem, to adorn with ribbons, from -JSanD, ribbon ; 
beau'gen, to give an eye to, from 2i\l'Qt f eye ; belau'bflt, to 
cover with leaves, from laub, leaf; bcrci'cbcni, to enrich, 
from reid), &c. In the application of this particle, there is 
but little difference between the two languages. 

©mp, which occurs only in three verbs, stands instead of 
inbe (tit, in, and the particle be), and signifies that the action, 
which is expressed by the verb, is of an internal nature ; 
as, ftsi'Dcn, to find, cmpjtn'fccn {to find inwardly) to feel ; fattg'en 
for fa'b/cn) to catch, empfang'en, to receive; befel)'[en, to com- 
mand, or commend, empfety'lcit, to recommend. 

(Snt denotes (1.) removal from a place, and nearly corre- 
sponds to the English from, or away; as r entfUe'gcn, to fly 
away; cntfev'nen, to remove; entlaf'fcn, to send away or 
dismiss. 



PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. 109 

(2.) Deprivation; as, entefy'ren, to dishonor ; CHtbin'fcen, to 
unbind ; entfeffeht, to unfetter ; eutfyaup'ten, to behead 
tnttjWUn, to unveil. 

(3.) It sometimes denotes the commencement of an action ; 
as, entbven'nen, to kindle; cntjun'&en, to set on fire; entfdjfd'? 
feat, to fall asleep ; entfptung'en, to spring ; entfte'i;cn, to 
arise. 

Q5t denotes (1.) elevation, in the sense of the particle auf, 
up ; as, evfye'ben, to elevate, or lift up ; evbau'CU, to build up ; 
evjie'fyen, to bring up ; ent>aciyfcn, to grow up. 

(2.) Obtaining by means of exertion, or trouble ; as, cvfrdj'* 
ten, to obtain by fighting ; evfc()mei'rl)cln, to wheedle ; cvjtfcl)^ 
CH, to fish out ; tvax'btitm, to work out ; erfau'fen, to pur- 
chase ; crfui/reil, to learn by experience ; thus, (St* crfbd)t' 
Ct'UCit ©teg, He obtained a victory ; (£r fyat fei'iie G&U\l\l d** 
fefomet'efeeft, He has wheedled himself into his favor, &c. So 
likewise in regard to mental exertions ; as, cvftn'uen, to devise ; 
erfcen^CH, to contrive ; et'JTU'fcen, to invent, &c. 

(3.) Taking out, bringing out, coming out, in the sense of 
the particle cuttf, out ; mvatykn, to elect, or choose out of; 
cvncn'nen, to nominate ; ergic'fen, to flow out ; ertaf'fen, to 
issue; erfcf)6p'fcn, to exhaust; crbrccl)'en, to break open, or 
break out from. 

(4.) A bringing or coming into a condition, which is indi- 
cated by the words with which it is compounded ; as, evrt>et'j 
tCVil, to enlarge, from xtxjt, wide or large ; enr>(tVineit, to 
warm, from YD arm, warm ; crgvau'cit, to grow grey, from grail, 
grey ; CVfyav'ten, to grow hard, from t)Mt, hard ; nbUi'd)m, 
to turn or grow pale, from bind), pale; crbfiit'fceu, to grow 
blind, from Mint), blind ; nMtm, to grow cold, from %U, 
cold ; (Vi'b'ttjnx, to redden or blush, from votty, red ; erav'men, 
■to grow poor, from axxtt, poor; crfla'ren, to explain, or clear 
jp, from ?U\V, clear; crfvie'ven, to freeze, from frie'ven, to 
freeze ; CVJlVuen, to make angry, from gorn, anger ; evjlet's 
ben, to expire, from jtev'bcu, to die, &c. 

®e gives simply an extension or force to the primitive ; as, 
n-ait'cpen, to use, gebtau'erjen, to employ : fccnf'en, to think, 
jeDenf'cn, to think of, or bear in mind ; fne'ven, to freeze, 



110 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK I. 

gefric'rnt, to become frozen ; t>uf &en, to bear, fic() gc^itl^cil, 
to endure, or have patience with ; Uug'CU, to reach, geUug'CU, 
to arrive at, or come to, &,c. 

^cr denotes (1.) removal, answering to the particle away ; 
as, tterja'gen, to drive away ; Devfcfocnt'en, to give away ; fcei*= 
pfLin^CU, to transplant; Dcrfct'jen, to transpose; fomDetfj'ffftt, 
to change ; focrfau'feu, to sell : or away, as implying waste, 
loss, or consumption ; as, fciTtrinf'en, to drink away, to spend 
by drinking ; ttcrfpie'lcn, to game away ; fcetfie'reu, to lose ; 
fccrar'fccitcu, to work up; fccvblu'fyen, to fadeaway; fott'Vau's 
dim, to evaporate ; berfcfjmacb'tett, to pine ; toevblu'ten, to 
bleed to death ; Wrnjcl'fcn, to wither away. 

(2.) Putting out of order, or doing wrong, answering gene- 
rally to mis; as, fccrle'gcn, to mislay ; focvfutj'rcn, to seduce; 
berfcfcm'fcril, to write wrong ; focv&re'ljcu, to pervert ; focvfcU's 
fcbcn, to adulterate ; Vcrfal'jcn, to oversalt ; DCVgcf feu, to for- 
get ; tnu-fclnc'ben, to dislocate; vcnwclylafftgeu, to neglect; 
kcvrccl)'ncn, to miscalculate ; focmtc'fcn, to derange. 

(3.) Putting in the way, obstructing; as, DevbtC'fcn, to 
forbid; berfa'grn, to deny; fccibit'tett, to refuse; \>nXMtyxft\ t 
to prohibit ; fccvfyttt'fccnt, to prevent ; l)crfd){ie'fcn, to lock 
up ; Derbdnv'mcn, to dam up; tHTJte'geht, to seal up; fcetfpn's 
VCll, to bar up or out ; fccvnwit'mt, to wall up, &c. 

(4.) Putting or coming into a condition ; as, fociYif'tClt, to 
grow obsolete, from ait, old ; ttcvtdng'mi, to lengthen, from 
Ultg, long; Dctf&r'jriti to shorten, from ritrj, short; toft at'* 
men, to grow poor, from arm, poor ; Kve'Dchl, to ennoble, from 
e'fccl, noble ; Wrgfr'tmi, to deify, from (£ott, God ; Krtn'lV* 
tern, to fraternize, from 25m'&er, brother, &c. Sometimes it 
adds force to the primitive ; as, fcercfy'rcn, to venerate, from 
ffy'mi, to honor; bcrfpoftm, to mock, from fpot'ten, to jeer; 
DcvladVcn, to deride, from Urfj'eu, to laugh : vCffci'fyeil, to 
grant, from lei'fytll, to lend, &c. 

3d' denotes a thorough separation of the parts; as, jerforedj's 
CU, to break in pieces; jcvfcfomct'tevn, to dash in pieces: 
jerritt'teil, to shake in pieces; jcrjlmi'CU, to dissipate; tft\Ws 
veil, to destroy : gerfcbilfi'&en, to cut to pieces. 

The particles m'tXV, against, and tjin'tW, behind, though 
inseparable in composition, are employed as distinct words. 



PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. Ill 

Verbs compounded with mi£, which answer to the English 
mis and dis, commonly take the augment ge before the partici- 
ple, and the preposition JU before the infinitive ; as, mitfbil's 
Itgett, to disapprove, gemUbit'liget, disapproved, £U mUfcl'fc 
gen, to disapprove ; mtebrau'eben, to misuse, gemis'brauct)t, 
misused, ju miSbraU'eta, to misuse. 

Some few neuter and active verbs drop the participial aug- 
ment ge; as, tmsfat'tcn, to displease, es l)at miv mtsfal'leii, 
it has displeased me: misiti'ttn, to mislead, misUi'tlt, misled; 
misting'en, to fail, e£ i|t mishmg'cn, it has failed ; mi£ra'tt?eu # 
to miscarry, c£ i|t mWV<X't§n\, it has miscarried ; mi$"om 
jtefyen, to misunderstand, man tjat e$ mis'fcerftauben, it has 
been misunderstood. 

4. Some prepositions are both separable and inseparable, 
as, buret), through; Uttt, about; tt'bcr, over; to which may 
be added ttue'ber, again. The first three are separable in 
the intransitive, and inseparable in the transitive sense of the 
verb. Thus, buretybrcelmt, intrans. sep. to break through; 
er bvtet)t buret), he breaks through ; burcfygebroctjen, having 
broken through : but et'lMtf bttrcbbvccCj'Ctt, trans, insep. to 
break through a thing ; er buret) brief) t' ei'ne SO^auer, he breaks 
through a wall ; buvcfobroctyeit, being broken through. Thus, 
ttUl'lailfcn, intrans. sep. to go or run round ; er (aitft UtU, he 
runs round ; um'gelaufen, having run round : but et'tMS UtU- 
Uu'fcn, trans, insep. to run round a thing ; er Uttttauft' tit 
@tabt, he runs round the town ; umlau'fcn, being run round. 
Thus, iVbevfe^en, intrans. sep. to leap or pass over ; er fe$t 
it'ber, he leaps over; iVbergefe^t, having passed over: but 
uberfet'jen, trans, insep. to translate ; er uberfegt' bie at'ten 
©ebrift'jtetler, he translates the ancient authors ; uberfegt', 
translated^ 

SOBie'ber in composition is separable in the proper sense, 
but inseparable in the figurative sense ; as, ttue'berfyoten, prop, 
sep. to fetch back ; iet) tjci'tt t$ wie'ber, I fetched it back : 
but roieberfyo'ten, figur. insep. to repeat; iet) nneberfyot'te tit 
^GDor'te, I repeated the words. 

In the above verbs the accent is laid upon the particle when 
it is separable, but upon the verb when it is inseparable. 



112 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK I. 

5. Verbs compounded with nouns or adverbs are mostly 
inseparable ; but take the augment ge in the participle ; as, 

Infinitive. JPres. Ind. Participle. 

SKatf}'fd)[agen, to consult, id) vatfy'fdjfage. getatfy'fdrtaget. 
Tlnt'wovttn, to answer. id) ant'roorte. geant'roortet. 

So the following ; 

ftrg'roofyncn, to suspect. £>uacffa(bmt, to quack. 

gvobfoc'fen, to exult. Sfta&'brecben, to break on the 
grufy'jKtcfen, to breakfast. wheel, 

gucbs'fdjrodnjen, to fawn. SHecbt'fcvtigcn, to justify, 

jj^an&'fyabett, to handle. Uv'tfyeileu, to judge. 

J^et'vatI)CU/ to marry. Itv'frut&ett, to testify, 

iieb'augchi, to ogle. ^OSeiffagen, to prophesy. 

iteb^ofetti to caress. '■EBett'eifern, to emulate. 

SDTutfy'mafcu, to conjecture. ^iUfal/vcn, to gratify. 

Verbs compounded with food, drop the augment ge ; as, 
Mkn'tni, to finish ; i»tp. id) fcollen'&ete, I finished ; part. VOU 
Ull'bQt, finished : so, DoUbrtUg'CU, to bring about ; fcolljie'fyett/ 
to execute; fcoftjtvec'fen, to accomplish; fcoUfufy'ren, to con- 
summate. / 



List of the principal Particles with which Compound Verbs 
are formed. 

1. The following particles are generally inseparable from 
the verbs. 

after as, af tevre&en, to backbite. 

be beftenf'en/ reflect, consider, 

emp empfang'en, receive, 

eut eutfU'fyen, arise. 

tx erftn'&en, invent, 

ge gefcei'fyen, prosper. 

X)i\\Ux fytutevblei'ben, remain behind. 

mi£ mi6fal'(en, displease, 

fcer fcerjefy'ren, consume, 

fcerab feerab'fotaen, deliver. 

Vernad) fcentcub/laffigen, neglect. 

Detrun fcenm'efyven, dishonor 






PART II. CH. 6.] 

fcofl 

vx 

V* 



COMPOUND VERBS. 



113 



fcoUortttg'ett, 

ur'tfyetfen, 

$x0xw, 



to complete, 
judge, 
destroy. 



% The following are the principal particles, which in cer- 
tain tenses before mentioned (page 104), are generally to be 
separated from the verbs. 



«6 

attf 

fcafcott' 

fcarun'ter 

i>urcl) 

fort 

fyeim 

Ijerafc' 

jerfcei' 

jjernacty 

fyerun'ter 

ijiiw&' 

jj incut/ 

in'aten 

nie'oer 

lUerein' 

Dor 

t>onV6er 

roie'Oer 



an 

aw? 

oafttr' 

fccmn'Oer 

tin 

fttr 

tin 

(jeranf 

fyeronrcl)' 

fyenVber 

fyerbor' 

fyinan' 

fyimVfcer 

mit 

06 

nn'ter 

fcoran' 

fcor&ei' 

P 



anfyeim' 
bet, MM 

oat) or' 
fcajunfctyett 
einfyer' 
Sleicl) 

fyerans' 
herein' 
t>rnm' 

tyinanf 

«adj 
tV6et 

m 

fcorcuts' 

n>eg 

jnroi'oer 



These particles have a meaning of themselves, independ- 
ent of the verbs with which they are connected ; some of 
their meanings may be seen in the following examples ; 



2ib'fc()vci6ett, to copy, from 
%u&tyxt\btn, to extract, 

2fttf 6<tttett, to erect, 
9tacf)'gefyen, to go after, 
£D?if nefymen, to take along 

with, 
3t i e'o erremten, to run down , 

£ev'6ringen, to bring hither 
or here, 



fdjrci'ben, to write, ab, from, 
fdjrei'ben, to write, m$, out 
of, or from. 

bcut'en, to build, auf, up. 
ge'fyen, to go, nadj, after, 
nefy'men, to take, mit, with. 

ren'nen, to run, me'fcer, down, 
bring'en, to bring, \)tx, hither. 



10* 



114 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Qtxtot'bxinwn, to bring fcring'en, to bring, Ijemr', 

forth, forth, 

^in'fyeffen, to forward, f^'fen, to help, fyirt, forth. 

£imY6etiommen, to come fom'men, to come, tyinu'fcer, 

over, over. 

Un'tevftufen, to go to the fmf en, to sink, un'm, under. 

bottom, 

il'btvflitfm, to overflow, jtte'fen, to flow, u'kv, over. 



^ovtommett, to occur, f om'roen, to come, fcov, before. 

SSotrarfgefjen, to go before, ge'fyen, to go, fcovan', before, 

^ovfrei'gefyen, to pass by, ge'fyeu, to go, fcovfcei', by. 

SBeg'ncfymen, to take away, nefy'men, to take, n>eg, away. 

QO&ie'&evfommen, to come fom'mejt, to come, rote'Der, 

again, again. 

^U'beiflcn, to bite eagerly, beiffen, to bite, ju, at. 



§ 7. AUXILIARY VERBS. 

£a'6cn, to have, feitt (fet)n), to be, and roev'fcen, to become, 
are the three most important auxiliary verbs. 

^er'ben, is used as an auxiliary with every verb ; fya'Sen, 
with all the active and most of the neuter verbs ; and fein 
with many neuter verbs. 

These auxiliary verbs are also used as such with one an- 
other, to form the supplementary tenses of each of them ; and 
their supplementary as well as their original tenses are used 
with other verbs. Thus the future of fyd'btxi, id) mt'U tjb'bm, 
I shall have, is a simple supplementary tense, formed by 
joining the present itf) XOtt'bt, to the infinitive fya'fcen; and 
this future of fya'6ett Used with geliebt', loved, the past partici- 
ple of lu'btti, to love, forms a compound supplementary tense, 
the compound future of ik'Un, id) MX'bt gelicbt' tyd'bm, I 
shall have loved. 

By thus joining the auxiliary verbs to others, the following 
supplementary tenses are formed : 

1. The two supplementary past tenses, viz. the perfect and 
the pluperfect. 

2. The two future tenses, viz. the simple and the compound. 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 115 

3. The two conditional tenses, viz. the simple and the 
compound. 

4. All the tenses of the passive voice. 

The perfect is formed by joining the past participle of the 
verb to the present, and the pluperfect by joining the 
same to the imperfect, of the auxiliary fya'fcett, or the auxiliary 
fein ; as, id) fya'be geftebt', I have loved ; id) fyat'te geliebt', 
I had loved ; and id) bitt gerettV, I have travelled ; id) mt 
gereift', I had travelled. (The auxiliary feitt, in all neuter 
verbs, is Englished to have.) 

The simple future is formed of the present indicative or 
subjunctive of tOtX'Htl, joined to the present infinitive of the 
verb ; as, id) WX'U lu'btn, I shall love : and the simple 
conditional is formed of the imperfect subjunctive of mx'btn, 
joined to the present infinitive of the verb ; as, id) wftv'fct 
lie'beit, I should love. The compound future is formed of 
the simple future of fya'bett, or of feitt/ joined to the past 
participle of the verb ; as, tcfj XOiX'U geliebt' fya'bett, I shall 
have loved ; id) MX'U gereift' feitt, I shall have travelled : 
and the compound conditional is formed of the simple con- 
ditional of fya'bett, or of feitt, joined to the past participle of 
the verb ; as, id) ttfa'fce geliebt' fya'bett, I should have loved ; 
id) nmv'be gevetjV feitt, I should have travelled. 

The different tenses of the passive are formed by joining 
the past participle of the verb to the original and the supple- 
mentary tenses of mx'Utl, which then is Englished to be ; 
as, id) wx'U Qtikbt 1 , I am loved ; id) toux'U geliebt', I was 
loved. 

The following paradigms contain the original and the sup- 
plementary tenses of fya'bett, feitt, and mx'Hn. 



Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, £a'bett, to have. 

Infinitive. Participle. 

Pres fya'ktt, to have. p reS . Mbttti, having. 

Perf. gefjabt' l)a'to, to have Past, gebafct', had. 

had. 



116 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Indicative. Subjunctive 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) Od'&f, I have. id) tja'bt, I may have. 

t>U t)a\l, thou hast. fcit fya'kfl, thou may st have, 

er, fit, 1$ f}M, he, she, it has. cr, fie, e$ fya'fce, he, she, it 

may have. 

Plural. Plural. 

mt tjb'Un, we have. tint* fya'bm, we may nave. 

if)V fyabt or tja'btt, you have. itjt tja'Ut, you may have. 
f(e tyx'Utt, they have. fte tjd'bm, they may have. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) tybt'tt, I had. id) tj&t'tt, I might have. 

t>U fyat'tejt, thou hadst. fcU fydt'tejf, thou mightst have. 

et* fjat'tC/ he had. CV* fyat'te, he might have. 

Plural. Plural. 

1MV fyat'tCU, we had. nut fydt'ten, we might have. 

tfyr fyaf tet, you had. if)t fyat'ttt, you might have. 

fie tj&t'ttil, they had. ftc fjk'tm, they might have. 

Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) fyft'be gefyafct', I have had. id) Mk gefyafct', I may have 

had. 

tat tjaft gefyabt', &c. fcu Jd^ff ge^abt', &c. 

Pluperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) fyat'te geljatU', I had had. id) fydt'te getyabt'/ I might 

have had. 

tat tjmtfi gefyabt', &c. fc>u fjfo'Uf ge&a&f , &c. 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 117 

Simple Future. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) raer'&e fya'ben, I shall have, id) roev'be fya'fccn, I shall have. 

t>u wivjt fya'ben, thou wilt &u n>ev^cfl fya'ben, thou wilt 

have. have. 

tx toivb foa'ben, he will have. tx roer'be (ja'bett, he will have. 

Plural. Plural. 

mx n>ei*'ben fya'bcn, we shall nut- roer'fcn fyx'ben, we shall 

have. have. 

iijt roev'bet fyaben, you will ifyv mx'Mt fya'bcn, you will 

have. have. 

fie wv'Un fya'ben, they will fte wer'&en fya'bcn, they will 

have. have. 

Compound Future. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) roer'be gcfyabt' fya'ben, I shall id) roer'be gefyabe' fja'ben, I 

have had. shall have had. 

fcu roirjt gefyabt' J)a'ben, &c. fcu roev'&eft gefyabt' fya'ben, &c. 

(Conditional Tenses.) 
Indicative and Subjunctive. 
Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) nnVbe tya'ben, I should id) witr'be gefyabt' fya'ben, I 
have. should have had. 

bu nnVfcefl fya'ben, thou t>u nnV&eflt gefjabf fya'bett, 

wouldst have. &,c. 

cr nnVbe fya'ben, he would 
have. 

»ir nntt'fcen fya'ben, we should have. 
if)r rouv'fcet fya'ben, you would have, 
fte nnVfreu fya'ben, they would have. 



118 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

fya'6cn toiv, let us have, 
fya'be (bu), have (thou). fyabt or fya'bet (iljr), have 

(you), or do (you) have. 
t)(Cbt it, let him have. fya'bett fte, let them have. 

Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, fya'ben, to have. 

This verb, as well as all others, may be conjugated in four 
forms ; that is, 

Affirmatively, icfj fya'6e, I have. 

Negatively, id) fya'be utcl)t, I have not. 

Interrogatively, fya'be id) ? have I ? 

Negatively and interrogatively, fya'be id) tttd)f ? have I not? 

So likewise through all the tenses, as in the following 
exercise. 

Pres. Lid. Have I ? Have I not ? He has not. Hast 
thou ? She has not. Have we ? We have not. You have 
not. Have they ? They have not. Have they not ? 

Imp. Had I? He had. Had she not? Had we not? 
Had you not ? They had. Had they not ? 

Perf. Have I had ? Hast thou not had ? Has he not 
had 1 Have you not had? She has not had. Have they not 
had ? We have not had ? Have they had ? They have not 
had. 

Pluperfect. I had not had. Had I not had ? Hadst thou 
had ? She has not had. Had he not had ? Had we had ? 
They had not had. They had had. Had they not had? 

Simple Fid. Shall I not have ? Wilt thou have ? I shall 
not have. We shall not have. Will you not have ? You 
will not have. 

Compound Fut. He will have had. They will not have 
had. Will they not have had ? We shall have had. Will 
you not have had ? 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 119 

Simple Cond. Should I have ? Thou wouldst not have. 
Would he not have 1 We should not have. Should we have ? 
Should we not have 1 You would not have. Would you not 
have 1 They would not have. Would they not have 1 

Compound Cond. I should not have had. Would he not 
have had 1 We should not have had. Would you have had 1 
They would not have had. 

Pres. Subj. I may have. I may not have. Thou mayst 
not have. We may have. We may not have. They may 
have. They may not have. 

Imp. Thou mightst not have. Hadst* thou not. Had 
we. Had we not. Had you not. Had they not. They 
might not have. 

Ptrf. Thou mayst not have had. We may not have had. 
You may have had. They may not have had. 

Plup. I might not have had. Thou mightst have had. 
He might have had. He might not have had. We might 
not have had. They might not have had. 

Imper. Have (thou). Let us have. Have (ye). Let 
them not have. 



Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb ©em, (@et)tt), to be. 
Infinitive. Participle. 

Pres. fein, to be. Pres. fet'enb, being. 

Per/, gcroe'feu fein, to have Past, geroe'fen, been, 
been. 



* The phrases beginning with the verb are not interrogative 
in the subjunctive mood, but have the same meaning as when 
preceded by if. 



120 



AUXILIARY VERBS, 



[book I. 



Indicative. 



Singular. 

Ufy 6itt, I am. 
In bt]t, thou art. 

er, fie, e$ ijl, he, she, it is. 

Plural. 

XOXX ftnb, we are. 
tf)t* feib, you are. 
fte ftnt>, they are. 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

Singular. 

id) fet/ I may be. 

Ill fei'ejt, or feiff, thou mayst 

be. 
et* fet, he may be. 

Plural. 

roir fci'en, or fein, we may be. 
tl)l* fet'et, or fetfc, you may be. 
fte fei'en, or fein, they may be. 



Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) war, I was. id) rcct're, I might be. 

tut roavft, or roa'vcft, thou wast, til nw'reft, thou mightst be. 

ei* wa'U, he might be. 

Plural. 

mv rc&'ren, we might be. 
ifyr wd'tret, you might be. 
fte ttw'reit, they might be. 



er war, he was 

Plural. 



XOIY wren, we were. 
itjV WOfttt, you were. 
fte UNI'VCn, they were. 



Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

•id) 6 in geroe'fen, I have been. id) fet gcroc'fcn, I may have 

been. 

t>u Injt gerce'fen, &c Mt fei'ejt gerce'fen, &c. 



Pluperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) »ar gerce'fen, I had been. idj tta're gerce'fen, I might 

have been. 
fcu want geroe'fen, &c. tot rod'reft geroe'fen, &c. 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



121 



Simple Future. 



Singular. 
id) mt'U fe in, I shall be. 
bu wixft feiil/ thou wilt be. 
crnnvD fcin, he will be. 

Plural. 



Singular, 
id) mt'tt feiit, I shall be. 
&u iDef'bejt fcin, thou wilt be. 
ei* mx'ht fcin, he will be. 

Plural. 



wit wt'bm fetn, we shall be. xoit rocr'&en fcin, we shall be. 
tyt mt'M fcin, you will be. ifyr »etr'bet fetn, you will be. 
fie roer'fcen fcin, they will be. fie roer'fccn fcin, they will be. 

Compound Future. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) mt'U gcroe'fen fcin, I shall id) nm-'&e §tm'fm fcin, I shall 

have been. have been, 

fcn mtft gewe'fen fcin, &c. &u »cv'&e|t gcroe'fen fcin, &c. 

(Conditional Tenses.) 
Indicative and Subjunctive. 
Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) ront'fce fcin, I should be. id) un'tv'&e geroe'fen (un, I 

should have been. 
&u n>av't>e|t fcin, &c. fcn wfti-'&ejt geroe'fen fcin, &c. 



Singular. 

fci (bit), be (thou). 
fei Cf, let him be. 



Imperative. 



Plural. 



fci'en, or fcin roir, let us be, 
feto (ifyr), be (you), or do 

(you) be. 
fcin or fci'en f!e, let them be. 



11 



122 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 



Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, ©du, to be. 

Pres. Ind. Art thou? Is he not? We are oot. Are they 
not? They are not. Are you not? You are. Are we 
not ? 

Imp. Was I ? Thou wast not. It was not. She was. 
Were we ? Were we not ? Were you not ? You were not. 
Were they ? 

Perf. I have been. Have I been? I have not been. 
Have I not been? Hast thou been? She has been. Has 
she not been? It has been. He has not been. Have we 
been ? Have you not been ? They have been. They have 
not been. Have they not been ? 

Phip. Had I been ? I had not been. Thou hast been. 
She had not been. Had he not been ? Had he been ? You 
had not been. They had not been. Had they been ? Had 
they not been? We had not been. Had we not been ? 

Simple Fat. I shall not be. Wilt thou not be ? He will 
be. Will she not be ? It will not be. You will be. Will 
you not be ? Shall we be ? We shall not be. They will not 
be. Will they not be ? 

Comp. Fut. Shall I not have been ? Wilt thou not have 
been. He will have been. Will she not have been? It 
will not have been. We shall have been. Shall we not have 
been ? You will not have been. Will they not have been ? 

Simple Cond. Should I be? Wouldst thou not be? It 
would be. Would she not be ? He would not be. We 
should not be. Would you not be? You would not be. 
Would they not be ? They would not be. 

Comp. Cond. I should not have been. Would it not have 
been ? Should we not have been ? We should not have 
been. Would you not have been ? They would not have 
been. 

Pres. Subj. I may not be. Thou mayst be. It may not 
be. He may not be. We may be. You may not be. They 
may not be. 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 123 

Imp. I might not be. She might be. It might not be. 
We might not be. You might be. They might not be. 

Perf. I may not have been. Thou mayst have been. He 
may have been. It may have been. We may not have been. 
You may have been. They may not have been. 

Plup. I might not have been. Thou mightst have been. 
She might not have been. We might have been. You might 
have been. They might not have been. 

Simple Put. 1 shall not be. Thou wilt be. He will not 
be. It will be. We shall not be. You will not be. They 
will not be. 

Comp. Fut. I shall not have been. She will have been. 
We shall not have been. You will not have been. They will 
not have been. 

Impcr. Be (thou). Let him be. Let him not be. Let 
us not be. Be, or do (you) be. Do (you) not be. Let them 
not be. 



Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, QBer'&CU, to become. 

Infinitive. Participle. 

Pres. nw'fcen, to become. Pres. wer'fcenfc, becoming. 

Perf. geroor'&en fein, to have Past, sercov'fcen, become, 
become. 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

Singular. 

ic() Wet'fcC, I may become. 
i>U rocr'&elt, thou mayst be- 
come. 
w, fie, es Nit-fr, he, she, it ev, fie, es tw'De, he, she, it 
becomes. may become. 



Singular. 

id) mv'bC, I become. 
t>U nnrji, thou becomest. 



124 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Plural. Plural. 

tt>it* tter'fcert, we become. Yoix mt'Mn, we may become. 

OjX WU'btt, you become. , tfyr »cv'&Ct, you may become, 

fie ttW'&Ctt/ they become. fie tott'twit they may become. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) XOUX'U, or roavt>, I became, id) nmr'&C, I might become. 

H XOUX'bCft, or nwr&ft, thou &tt n>tir'&e|t, thou mightst be- 

becamest. come. 

er IMiv'&c, or tt\W&, he be- CV nntv'&e, he might become. 

came. 

Plural. Plural. 

fWV MMtr'&ett/ vve became. mx rrnV&en, we might be- 

come. 

\\t jmtv'&et, you became. itjr roftf'&ct, you might be- 

come. 

fie rmtv'fcen, they became. fie ttftr'fcm, they might be- 

come. 

Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) bin gcwov'&en, I have be- id) fet gcn>ov't>en, I may have 

come. become, 

tu bi]\ gcwor'fccn, &c. &n feijt genWfcen, &c. 

Pluperfect, 
Singular. Singular. 

id) wax geroor'Dcn, I had be- id) wa'xt geroov'Den, 1 might 

come. have become. 

&u roa'vejt gcrcov'fcen, &c. tut ro4't*c|t gercov'fcen, &c. 

First Future, 

Singular. Singular. 

id) roer'fce roev'fcen, I shall be- id) mt'te roer'fcen, I shall be- 
come, come. 
in »«(l roev'fcen, &c. tot rocr't>e|t wcv'ben, &c. 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 125 

Second Future. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) mx'U gcrcov'fccn fcin, I id) wx'U gcrcoVbcn fcin, I 

shall have become. shall have become, 

tm mxf geroor'Den fetn, &c t»u nw'Dcjt gcrcor'ocn fcin, &c. 

(Conditional Tenses.) 
Indicative and Subjunctive. 
Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) xolxx'H roer'&en, I should id) nntv'kc gaw'fccn fcin, I 

become. should have become, 

tm wnt'&ejt roct'fccn, &c. t>n roirc'fcci* gcrcov'fccn fcin, 

&c. 

Imperative. 

Singular. Plural. 

WCV'&Ctt Wit, let us become, 
roer'fcc (tot), become (thou). roct'^Ct (if)!*), become (you) or 

do (you) become. 
VDCV'fcC Ct 4 , let him become. ttCV'fccn fie, let them become. 

Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, ^CV'bCU, to become. 

Pres. Ind. Does he become? Does she not become? 
Thou dost not become. Do we become ? Do you not be- 
come ? They do not become. 

Imp. I did not become. Did I not become ? Did we be- 
come ? She became. She did not become. Did we not 
become ? Did you not become ? They did not become. 

Perf. I have become. Have I not become ? Hast thou 
not become ? She has not become. Have we not become ? 
Have you not become ? Have they become ? 
11* 



i 



126 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Plup. I had become. Had I become ? Had I not be- 
come? I had not become. Hadst thou become? He had 
not become. Had she not become ? Had we become ? Had 
you not become? They had become. They had not be- 
come. Had they become ? Had they not become ? 

Simple Fut. Shall I become ? Shall we become ? Wilt 
thou become ? Wilt thou not become ? He will become. 
She will not become. Will you become ? They will not 
become. 

Comp. Fut. I shall have become. Will he have become ? 
Shall we have become? You will not have become. Will 
they have become ? They will not have become. Will they 
not have become ? 

Simple Cond. Should I become ? Wouldst thou become ? 
It would become. Would he not become ? We should not 
become. Would you become ? They would not become. 

Comp. Cond. I should have become. Would it have 

become? Should we have become? We should not have 

become. Would you not have become ? You would have 
become. Would they have become ? 

Pres. Subj. I may not become. She may not become. 
Thou mayst become. He may not become. We may not 
become. They may become. 

Imp. I might become. Thou mightst become. She might 
not become. We might not become. You might become. 
They might not become. 

Perf. I may have become. He may not have become. 
You may have become. They may not have become. 

Plup. Thou mightst have become. She might not have 
become. It might not have become. You might have be- 
come. They might not have become. 

Imper. Become thou. Become (you) not. Let them be- 
come. Let them not become. 



PART 11. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 12^ 

A. Supplementary Tenses of Active and Neuter Verbs. 
1. Supplementary Tenses of a Verb conjugated with ^pa'bett 

Infin. iie'fecil/ to love. 
Pres. id) Ue'be. Imp. id) ihb'tt. Imperat. (te'frc t>U. 

Pres. Part, (ic'kltt). Past Part, geliebt'. 

Infinitive. 

Perfect. 
geftebt' tyl'Un, to have loved. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 

id) tya'be geliebt', I have loved, id) tya'be geltebt', I have loved, 
tot fyaji geliebt', &c. t>u fya'beft geliebt', &c 

Pluperfect. 

id) fyat'te geliebt', I had loved, id) fyat'te geliebt', I had loved, 
tot fyat'teft geftebt', &c. tot fyat'tejt geftebt', &c. 

Simple Future. 

id) t»er'&e tk'Un, I shall love, id) mv'U (te'ben, I shall love. 
t>tt mx\l ik'bm, &c. t>u votx'bift lie'ben, &c. 

Compound Future. 

id) nw'be geliebt' fya'ben, I id) wr'be geliebt' fya'bett, I 

shall have loved. shall have loved, 

tot mvft geliebt' (ja'bett, &c. fcu mv'H\l geliebt' fya'ben, &c. 

Simple Conditional. 

id) wnv'bt lic'ben, I should love. 
tot *wty&efl ae'beu, &c 



128 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



[BOOK 5. 



Compound Conditional. 

idj xoxxx'U stliebt 1 fya'ben, I should have loved. 
Du nutv'&eft getiebt' fya'ben, &c. 



Exercises on Active and Neuter Verbs conjugated with <$a'beu. 



I have hoped, 

Have I been zealous ? 

I have not seen, 

Have I not trembled 1 

Thou hast quaked, 

Thou hast not praised, 

Hast thou not finished 1 

It has thundered, 

Has he not mentioned ? 

Has she inquired 1 

Has she not been penurious? 

We have adorned, 

Have we not slept 1 

Have you not suffered 1 

You have not lived, 

They have not blossomed, 

Had I not starved ? 

Hast thou pined ? 

Thou hast not found, 

It had been worth, 

Had she known, 

He had not stood, 

Had he not sat ? 

It had not frozen, 

We had not dreamed, 

They had been called, 

They had not grown old, 

Had they demanded 1 



I? of fen, to hope, 
et'fevn, to be zealous, 
fe'fyen, irr. to see. 
Jit'teni, to tremble, 
fcc'ben, to quake, 
lo'fceu, to praise. 
en'Deit, to finish, 
fcon'nern, to thunder. 
UWatynm, to mention. 
for'fcfjCtt, to inquire, 
fatten, to be penurious, 
fdnmic'fcn, to adorn, 
febfo'fen, irr. to sleep. 
tet'Oen, irr. to suffer. 

Men, to live, 
bill' I) en, to blossom. 
Darken, to starve. 
fd)mad) / ten, to pine. 
ftn'Den, irr. to find, 
tan'gen, to be worth. 
nnf'jVn, mix. to know, 
fte'fyen, irr. to stand. 
fU'jen, irr. to sit. 
ft'ie'ven, irr. to freeze, 
tr&n'men, to dream, 
fjei'fen, irr. to be called, 
al'tevn, to grow old. 
foment, to demand. 



IAHT II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 129 

2. Supplementary Tenses of a Verb conjugated with ©eitt. 

Infin. SKcifCU, to travel. 
Pres. id) veiTe. Imp. id) m'jfa Imperat. mfe tat. 

Pres. Part, xn'ftlrt. Past Part. geveijV. 

Infinitive. 

Perfect. 

gtt'eijV fcht, to have travelled. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 

id) 6hl gemfV, I have travel- id) fei gevetjV, I have travel- 
led, led. 
fru lujt gereij?', &c. en fii'r j! gereift 7 , &c. 

id) »av gevetjt', I had travel- id) wfcxt gevett?', 1 had travel- 
led, led. 
tat wa'reft gerctjV, &c, tat rc&'vej? gereijl', &c 

Simple Future. 

\d) mv'U tei'fen, I shall travel, id) wcv't'C rei'fen, I shall travel. 
t>u nuvft rei'fen, &c. tat rcer'&ejt vci'fen, &c. 



Compound Future. 

id) wer'fce gevetjt' fern, I shall icfe xon'U gereijt' feiit, I shall 

have travelled. have travelled, 

tat nnrfr gcmft' fein, &c tat tw'&ejl gereijt' feitt, &c. 



130 



AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Simple Conditional. 

id) nniv'&e rei'fen, I should travel. 
t>u nnu:'t>ejT reifen, &c 

Compound Conditional. 

id) fthx'U gereiff fein, I should have travelled. 
fcw mur'&cjl gcmfV fcin, &c. 



■;cs on the Neuter Verbs conjugated with @CIU. 



I have stayed, 

Have I uot stayed 1 

I have not stayed, 

Hast thou run 1 

Thou hast not climbed, 

Thou hast travelled, 

He has stumbled, 

Has he sailed 1 

He is not come, 

Will they not have gone ? 

Has she followed ? 

It will have burst, 

We have proceeded, 

Have we run 'I 

We have not wandered, 

Have we not slidden 1 

You have swum, 

Have you swum ? 

You have not crept, 

Have you not embarked? 

They have ridden, 

Have they ridden ? 
They have not ridden, 
Have they not ridden ? 
I had walked, 
Had I drawn near ? 
We should not have fled, 
Would you have fallen ? 
Thou hadst slipped, 



Mci'fccit/ irr. to stay. 



vcn'ncu, mix. to run. 
fftm'mttt, irr, to climb. 
t'Clfcn, to travel. 
tWpent/ to stumble, 
fc'gefn, to sail, 
fom'mcn, irr. to come. 
a,e't)en, irr. to go. 
fol'gcn, to follow. 
bcv'frClt, irr. to burst, 
fovt'fafyrcn, irr. to proceed, 
lau'fcn, irr. to run. 
roan'tent; to wander. 
gici'tClt, irr. to slide, 
fdjtmm'men, irr. to swim. 

frie'djen, irr. to creep, 
cin'fdjtjfcn, to embark. 
vci'ten, irr. to ride on horse- 
back. 



ge'fyen, irr. to walk, 
tw^et* tfic'fen, to draw near, 
flic'tjcu, irr. to flee. 
fat'U'U, irr. to fall. 

fc&lfip'fen, to slip. 



PART II. CH. 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



131 



Wouldst thou not have sunk? 
Thou hadst not penetrated, 
He had departed, 
Had he not departed ? 
It would have darted, 
Had it not slipped 1 
We had not pressed, 
You had not recovered, 
They had not slunk, 



ftnf'en, irr. to sink. 
brtng'CU, irr. to penetrate. 
fdjci'&CJl, irr. to depart. 

fcfne'fen, irr. to dart, 
fdjfup'fen, to slip. 

fcl'ing'en, irr. to press, 
gcncfcit/ irr. to recover, 
fdjfei'cfeen, irr. to slink. 



3. List of the Neater Verbs conjugated with J&b'bttU 



Regular Verbs. 



dc()^cn, to groan, 
af'tern, to grow old. 
cmg'clu, to angle, 
anf'eni/ to anchor, 
atfy'men, to breathe. 
ftct) bat'gen, to fight, 
be'teit, to pray. 
Ut'Uhl, to beg alms, 
bttn'jeu,. to blink. 
bhVl)CU, to bloom, 
bntm'men, to grumble, 
butr'gen, to bail. 
biVfen, to suffer for. 
fcatt'evn, to last, to endure, 
fcon'ltcni, to thunder. 
fclVjten, to be thirsty, or to 

thirst, 
ci'fevn, to be zealous. 
ei'leu, to hasten, 
et'teni, to suppurate. 
entfiVgen, to renounce, 
er'ben, to inherit, 
faii'fen, to putrefy. 
fttykn, to fail. 
jjec'frll, to stain, 
jlu'cfecn, to curse, 
forfcljcn, to inquire, 
funf'efo, to glimmer. 



gafy'nen, to yawn. 
gau'Mn, to juggle, 
get'jen, to covet, 
fyan'&efn, to trade. 
tjM'xtn, to wait for. 
ij&nttfyk'Vtn, to trade, to bus- 
tle, 
fyaufi'ren, to hawk about, 
fjer'fdjen, to govern, 
fyinf'en, to limp. 
k)QV'd)m, to listen, 
ijtmg'mt, to hunger. 
(Ju-p'fen, to leap, 
ifll'ftW, to cough, 
if'reu, to err. 
jaurl^cn, to shout. 
WUn, to calve. 
f&ttVpfett, to combat. 
fav'gcn/ to be penurious. 
fci'meU/ to shoot out, or bud. 
hr'ren, to coo, or creak, 
f [af fen, to cleave, 
f la'gen, to complain. 
f(at'fc()eu, to clap, to applaud 
Ut'btn, to cleave, or stick. 
fhVgeltt, to refine, 
frtac'f en, to crack. 
ftlWven, to creak. 



132 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



[book I 



tttic'fevtt, to haggle, to act 

niggardly. 
fni'eil/ to kneel. 
MUvn, to be unruly, to roll. 
craven, to crow, 
ftra'men, to trade. 
fraitf'en, to be ill. 
frek'fen, to catch crabs. 
ftric'geU/ to wage war. 
frtdj'en, to laugh. 
fan'fcen, to land. 
Ihv'mtn, to make a noise. 
L\\i'm\, to watch. 
(au'ten, to sound, 
le'fccit/ to live, 
mcmg'efn, to want, 
mei'nett/ to mean. 
ttlUVmcin, to grumble. 
OV'gcItt, to play the hand-organ. 
V<\'fo\i, to be mad. 
I'Ctf ten, to rest, 
rau'cljcn, to smoke, 
ratl'meit/ to remove, 
vau'feften, to rush, 
fa.ltfpeni, to clear the throat, 
recb'neii/ to reckon. 
xcdyttn, to right, to go to law. 
te'&eit/ to speak. 
VCi'fcn, to ripen, 
tei'meit; to rhyme, 
ru'&cvn, to row. 
fdlt'men, to tarry, 
fviu'fcn, to whiz, 
fctja'tien, to hurt, 
fid) fdja'mcn, to be ashamed, 
fdjait'&ent, to shiver, 
fdjev'jen, to joke, 
fcfetm'mcltt/ to mould, 
fdjfac'fett, to swallow. 



fcfjmaety'w'U, to languish. 
fcljraat'jeU/ to smack. 
fcljmdf?'(en, to scold. 
fcljmau'feH, to feast, 
fcbimit'jcn, to soil, to dirty, 
fcftttd'frefo, to bill. 
fdjnav'djen, to snore. 
fd)itat'tcni, to gabble, 
frfjaav'mm, to swarm, 
fdjrmn'fcein, to grow giddy, 
fdjnnt'jen, to sweat. 
fVgchi, to sail, 
feuf jm, to sigh, 
forgen, to care. 
tyit'Un, to play. 
feu'ern, to steer a ship, 
jhifci'ren, to study. 
JKts'men, to storm, 
iluc^en, to butt at. 
fu'&eln, to soil, 
fum'men, to hum. 
fun'Mgcn, to sin. 
tay'pm, to grope. 
tyvo'tltn, to be enthroned, 
to'lvn, to rage. 
th'ncn, to sound. 
ti\U"l}ft£H/ to endeavour. 
ttau'ent, to mourn, 
trimnpfyi'ren, to triumph. 
tl'S'&eltt/ to deal in frippery. 
tt>ad)'en, to wake, or to be 

awake, 
isei'ucn, to cry. 
Yv'-Mfutj'xm, to comply. 
jA'gCil/ to despair, to despond, 
janf'ett/ to quarrel. 
I'w'Un, to aim. 
jot'telit; to stagger. 
jiVneit/ to be angry. 



PART II. CH. 6.] 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



133 



Irregular Verbs. 



fid) kflei'fen, to be studious, 
fed/ten, to fight, 
gefat' leu, to please. 
glei'd)ett, to resemble, 
fet'fen, to scold, 
fting'en, to sound, 
(ei'fcen, to suffer, 
vei'ten, to" ride. 
VUlg'ett, to wrestle, 
fau'fen, to drink hard, 
fcljei'ncn, to appear, 
fdtfa'fen, to sleep. 



fdj nan' b m, to snort, 
fcijm'en, to cry. 
fdwi'gett, to be silent, 
fcfonurn'men, to swim. 

fdjnrin'fcen, to be reduced, td 

dwindle away. 
fd)n)6 / VCU, to swear. 
ftn'HCU, to think, to meditate. 
jtt'jen, to sit. 
ftxti'ttn, to combat, 
fcet'fcrcdj'en, to commit a crime. 



4. List of the Neuter Verbs conjugated with @eitt. 

Regular Verbs. 



(UlS'artett, to degenerate, 
begeg'nen, to meet, 
befyav'ten, to continue. 
crMtU'tJCtt/ to grow blind, 
evgnm'mcn, to grow angry, 
crfal'ten, to grow cold. 
crjtvU'VCU, to be chilled, 
nrjtcut'neit, to be astonished, 
ftot'tcnt, to flit, to flutter. 
gdang'i'U, to get, to attain. 
geiDO^'netl; to be accustomed, 
f Ut' tent/ to climb, 
rei'fen, to travel, 
ren'nen, mix. to run. 
fc'gcfn, to sail, 
fpaji'ven, to take a walk, 
jtof'pmt, to stumble. 



ffr&n'bett/ to strand, 
jtrcm'cfceltt, to trip. 
jfttt'$en, to start, 
tva'ben, to trot, 
fceral'tett, to grow old. 
fcevar'men, to grow poor. 
tovhl\m'VM\\, to grow crooked, 
bertafy'men, to grow lame, 
fcevfau'ent, to grow sour, to 

sour, 
berfhtm'meu, to grow dumb. 
t>ern>e # feit/ to decay. 
'Dtvml'Uxn, to grow wild, 
fcevja'gen, to despond, 
roan'&efn, to walk, 
ttxm'&ent, to wander. 



Irregular Verbs. 



ab'faflett, to fall down, 
ber'jUn, to burst. 
blri'kn, to remain. 
12 



erfne'reit, to freeze to death. 
erfdjctWen, to resound. 
evfdH'ec'fctt, to be terrified. 



134 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 



[book T. 



fftfy'l'Ctt, to nde in a vehicle. 

fallen, to fall, 
ftfc'gen, to fly. 
flie'fyni, to flee. 
jfte'fen, to flow, 
fvic'ven, to freeze, 
aefcei'fyen, to prosper. 

ge'fycu, to go. 
gcncfen, to recover, 
alci'teii, to slide, to slip. 
Htm'men, to climb. 
fom'mcn, to come, 
hied) en, to creep, 
(au'fcn, to run. 
t'Ct'fen, to ride on horseback. 
rilt'ttcn, to leak, to run. 
fdjfei'djett, to sneak. 



fdjret'ten, to stride. 

fc^iDeCfcu/ to swell. 

fcbroim'men, to swim. 

fc()n>tn't>CU, to shrink, to dwin- 
dle. 

flt-'jcit, to sit. 

fpriug'en, to jump. 

jtc'fyen, to stand. 

jlei'^eu, to mount. 

jlcfbcn, to die. 

VCXbtivdmx, to grow pale. 

focdSfriyen, to become extin- 
guished. 

fccrfcbroitt'Den, to disappear. 

roaclyfcn, to grow. 

roei'cfoen, to yield. 

rocr'&en, to become. 



Obs. Those verbs which occur in both lists are sometimes 
conjugated with tja'btll, and sometimes with fcin. (See under 
the next head.) 

5. Of Neuter Verbs conjugated with either Jpci'btn or ©eill, 
according to their signification. 

1. Some take Ija'ktll, to denote the completion of an ac- 
tion or a state, and fein to denote the condition of a thing ; 



T>&$ gfu'er tjat aus'gebvannf, the fire has burnt out. 

2)aS ftamin' ijt auS'odwunt, the chimney is burnt out. 

Sic Rdiykn (a'bett auS'get'ampft, the coals have done smoking. 

3)te gtud)'ttgto ijt anS'gebampft, the damp is evaporated. 

2)ic ©V'De iff gcfvo'fen, the earth is frozen. 

933tt: fya'beit gcfco'ren, we have been frozen. 

QJ3 fjat gcfro'ven, it has frozen. 

2. Verbs expressive of motion take feitt, when the place, 
or the manner of the motion, is referred to ; but take fya'ben, 
when the simple action is designated, or whenever they are 
used as reflective or reciprocal verbs ; as, 

3d) bill ill t>te ©tafet gcdt'ten, I have ridden or rode into the 
city. 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 135 

35i|? i>n gegang'en o'fcet* gevtt'ten ? did you walk or ride? 
3d) bin lang'fam get'it'ten, I have ridden or rode slowly. 
3d) Din t>en gan'jen $ag gerit'ten, I have been riding the whole 

day. 
3d) fya'k l>a6 spferb get'it'ten, I have ridden the horse. 
WlV ftnt> in Die ©tafct geei'Iet, we have hastened into the 

city. 
93311* Ija'bcn mit fret' @ad)'e geei'Ict, we have hastened with the 

affair. 
2)er SSo'gel i|t in t>a$ gelfc gejiat'tevt, the bird has fluttered 

into the field. 
<Sv tynt [ang'e gefiat'tei't, it has been long fluttering. 
2)ie SHei'ter ftnt> fd)Cn aufgefejfcn, the horsemen are already 

seated. 
3d) fya'be Me gan'je 3l<\d)t anf gcfeffen, I have sat up the whole 

night. 
3d) bin in t>as £an£ gegang'en, I have gone into the house. 
3d) tja'bt mid) tmVfce gegang'en, I have tired myself with 

walking. 

3. Some verbs expressive of motion require fein when 
taken in the proper sense, and fya'ben in the figurative sense ; 
as, 

c 2Biv fint) gelcut'fen, we have run. 

£>a$ ga£ fyat gelan'fen, the cask has leaked. 

S)ie ^va'nen fint> gcfloffen, the tears have flowed. 

£>ie SKofy've fyat gefloffen, the pipe has leaked. 

<£v ift ifym gefotgt', he has followed him. 

(£v tyat mei'nen iety'ven gefolgt', he has followed my precepts. 

Set* gctnfc tjt in Die <&tnt>t geMutng'en, the enemy has pene- 
trated into the city. 

£v fyat in mid) getntng'en, he has urged me. 

SBit fint) fort'gcfafyven, we have left or gone on in a vehicle. 

923ir fya'ben fovt'gef&fyven jn av'bciten, we have continued to 
labor. 



136 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I, 

B. Supplementary Tenses of Reflective Verbs. 
©id) lie'fcen, to love one's self. {Seepage 98.) 

Infinitive. 

Perfect. 

ftcjj geliebt' fy&'btn, to have loved one's self. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Perfect. 

id) fya'be mid) geliebt', I have id) fya'be midj $tlUbt', I have 

loved myself. loved myself. 

tot fyaft tict) geftebt', &o. tot fya'bcjf bid) gefiebt', &c. 

Pluperfect. 

idj tyat'U mid) geliefct', I had id) fyat'tt mid) geliebt', 1 had 

loved myself. loved myself. 

M fyat'tejl bid) geliebt', &c. bit Ijat'tej? bid) geUebt', &c. 

Simple Future. 

id) rocr'be mid) Ik'btn, I shall id) roer'&e mid) lit'Un, I shall 

love myself. love myself. 

bit »ir|t bid) fie'fcen, &c. tot rocr'fcejt bidj lic'fcen, &c. 

Compound Future. 

idj rocv'be mid) geliebt' fya'ben, id) roeu'be mid) gcHebt' fya'ben, 
I shall have loved myself. I shall have loved myself. 

tot »ir|t Did) geliebt' (ja'bcn, tot roor'&efl bid) geliebt' fya'ben, 
&c. &c. 



PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 137 

Simple Conditional. 

i$ XOXXX'U mid) lie'ben, I should love myself. 
tot ttmv'bej? tod) iu'htxx, &c. 

Compound Conditional. 

id) ttntr'be mid) gefiebt' tja'btn, I should have loved myself. 
tot unV&efi todj geliebt' fyct'ben, &c 



C. Supplementary Tenses of Impersonal Verbs. 

The supplementary tenses of impersonal verbs are formed 
exactly like those of complete (active or reflective) verbs ; as, 

SHeg'nett, to rain. (See page 101.) 
Indicative, perf. eg fyat get'eg'tKt ; pluperf. eg t)&t'U ge^ 

reg'uet ; simp. fut. eg wivt> veg'tten ; comp. fut. eg nntft ge-- 
reg'net fya'fcen. 

Subjunctive, perf. eg l)a'be gereg'net ; pluperf. eg ^at'^e 
gereg'net ; simp. fut. eg mt'bz reg'nen ; comp. fut. eg mt'tit 
gereg'net ^a'bcn. 

simp. cond. eg rofiv'&e veg'nen ; comp. cond. eg wht'U ge* 
reg'net fya'ben, 

2U''gent, to be vexed. (See page 102.) 
Indicative, perf. eg fyflt mid) ge&V'gevt ; pluperf. eg fyat'te 

mid) ge&r'gert ; simp. fut. eg roivb mid) &r/gern ; comp. fut. 
eg nnvi> mid) ge&r'gevt fyct'ben. 

Subjunctive, perf. eg fya'be mid) ge&r'gert; pluperf. eg 
^« t/f ^ mid) gefa'gett; simp. fut. eg wer'fce mid) dt'gent; comp. 
fut. eg roev'&e mid) gcdf'gett fja'ben. 

simp. cond. eg nnVfce mid) dv'gevtt ; comp. cond. eg wftv'fce 
mid) geav'gevt tya'ben. 



12* 



138 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 

©ic^ fcerflte'^en, to be understood. {See page 103.) 

Indicative, perf. OS fyctf fid) fccvftan'&m ; pluperf. eS 
^at'te fid) fcetjtan'ben ; simp. fut. t$ mvt> fid) fcetjte'fyen; comp. 
fut. es n>ivt> fid) fcetrftan'&en fya'fcen. 

Subjunctive, perf. e£ fya'be ftdj fcetjtan'fcett ; plup. e$ 
fy&t'te fid) kevjJan'fcett ; simp. fut. es rcer'fce fid) kci-jte'beit ; 
comp. fut. es roefoeftdj &erflton'&ett fya'ben. 

simp. cond. es nntv'fce fid) fcevjfe'fyen ; comp. cond. e£ roiiv'&e 
fid) feerlUit'Den fyci'bm. 



D. Supplementary Tenses of Compound Verbs. 

The particle, with which the simple verb is compounded, is 
never separated from it in any of the supplementary tenses.* 
Accordingly there is no difference between separable and 
inseparable compound verbs, with respect to the supplement- 
ary tenses ; they are formed exactly like those of simple verbs. 
Examples : 

ItuffyaUui, to detain. (See page 105.) 

Infinitive, perf. aufgefyaften fya'ben. 

Indicative, perf. id) fya'bc aufgefyalten ; pluperf. id) 
fyat'te aufgefyata; simp. fut. tdj mv'H auffyaften; comp. 
fut. id) rcef fee auf gefyaften fya'bcn. 

Subjunctive, perf. id) fya'be aufgefyaltett; pluperf. id) 
l)dt'te auf gefyaiten ; simp. fut. id) rcct'fre auftycdten; comp. 
fut. id) roev'fee aufgefyaUcn fya'ben. 

simp. cond. id) nntv'fcc auf fatten ; comp. cond. id) roftv'ftt 
aufgefyalten fya'ben. 

35efyal'tett, to retain. 

Infinitive, perf. befyaf'tett fya'bett. 

Indicative, perf. ic^ fya'be befyaften; pluperf. id) fyat'te 



* The reason is obvious ; since all the supplementary tenses 
are formed by joining the auxiliary verb either to the infinitive 
mood or to the past participle ; in neither of which does such 
a separation of the simple verb from the preposition take place. 



PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 139 

befyal'ten; simp. fut. \d) mx'bi befyaCten; comp. fut. id) 
ton'bt befyal'ten fya'ben. 

Subjunctive, perf. id) fya'be befyal'ten ; pluperf. id) fyat'te 
befyaften ; simp. fut. id) xoiv'H befyal'ten; comp. fut. id) 
mx'bt befyal'ten fya'ben. 

simp. cond. id) wux'U befyal'ten; comp. cond. id) rouv'be 
befyal'ten fya'ben. 



§ 8. PASSIVE VERBS. 

The passive voice of active verbs is formed by joining 
the past participle of the verb with the different moods and 
tenses of the auxiliary iKcr'&CU ; with only this difference, 
that the first syllable, ge, of the past participle gettW'fcen, 
is dropt in all its combinations with the verb. Thus we say, 
id) bin geliebt' rcor'fcen, I have been loved, (instead of id) bin 
gettebt gen>ovt>en.) 



Conjugation of the Passive Verb, ©eltebt' WtX'Un, to be loved. 
Infinitive. Participle. 

Pres. geliebt' ttw'ben, to be geliebt', loved 

loved. 
Perf. geliebt' rcov'ben fetn, to 

have been loved. 

Indicative. 

Present. 

Singular. 

id) ttet'&e geliebt', I am loved. 

frit roirft geliebt', thou art loved. 

n, fie, or e$ roitfc gefiebt', he, she, or it is loved. 

Plural. 

»iv mx'tcn geliebt', we are loved. 
tift mv'M geliebt', you are loved, 
fie mx'Hn geliebt', they are loved. 



140 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. 

id) Xttwi'U or roarb geliebt', I was loved. 

fcu rour'fcejt or w>av£>|t geliebt', thou wast loved. 

CV rour'fce or roarfc geliebt', he was loved. 

P/wra/. 

roir rour'fcen geliebt', we were loved, 
ifyt mitf^Ct geliebt', you were loved. 
f(e wur'ben geliebt', they were loved. 

Perfect. 

Singular. 

id) bin geliebt' tt>0t*'t>eit, I have been loved, 
bit bift geliebt' Wptfbqh thou hast been loved, 
er tjt geliebt' roor'fcen, he has been loved. 

Plural 

roir ftnfc geliebt' roor'fcen, we have been loved, 
ifyr feit) geliebt' worsen, you have been loved. 
f(e ffttt) geliebt' roor'fcen, they have been loved. 

Pluperfect. 

Singular. 

id) roar geliebt' roor'fcen, I had been loved 

tm roarjt geliebt' roor'beit/ thou hadst been loved. 

er roar geliebt' roor'fcen, he had been loved. 

Plural. 

roir roa'ren geliebt' roor'fcen, we had been loved, 
ifyr roa'ret geliebt' roor'fcen, you had been loved. 
f(e roa'ren geliebt' roor'fcen, they had been loved. 



TART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 141 

Simple Future. 

Singular. 

id) rcev'fce geliebt' wx'btn, I shall be loved. 
fcu mx\l geliebt' roet'ben, thou wilt be loved, 
et* roixb geliebt' mx'btn, he will be loved. 

Plural. 

xoix rcer'fcen geliebt' wetr'fcen, we shall be loved. 
ifjx rc>ci''t>ct geliebt' wev'fcen, you will be loved, 
fte rocv'fcm geliebt' ttev'fcen, they will be loved. 

Compound Future. 

Singular. 

id) Wx'ttt geltcbt' tt>cv't>en fcin, I shall have been loved. 
fcu nrirjt geliebt' rcor'ben fein, thou wilt have been loved. 
it tDiv& geliebt' wov'teu fcin, he will have been loved. 

Plural. 

nnr tKt'fcen geliebt' n>or't>en fcin, we shall have been loved, 
tfyr twv'bet geltcbt' roov'&en fein, you will have been loved, 
fte n>cv't>en geliebt' worsen fein, they will have been loved. 

Subjunctive. 

Present. 

Singular. 

id) n)ev'&e ge(ie6t', I may be loved. 

fcn wx'bt\\ geliebt', thou mayst be loved. 

tX Wx'H geliebt', he may be loved. 

Plural. 

mir wev'ten geltcbt', we may be loved. 
it)X ttev'bet geltcbt', you may be loved, 
fie tt)ev'fcen geliebt', they may be loved. 



142 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK I 

Imperfect. 

Singular, 

id) rouv'&e geftett', I might be loved. 

fctt tmVbtji geliebt', thou mightst be loved. 

cr Wiiu'&e geUebt 7 , he might be loved. 

Plural. 

t&XX tt)ftr'ben geltebt', we might be loved. 
itft mix'tct Qtiitbt', you might be loved, 
fte nntv'fcen geltebt', they might be loved. 

Perfect. 

Singular. 

id) fet geltebt' WOr'fcen, I may have been loved. 

Mt fetft geltebt' roor'Deit, thou mayst have been loved. 

er fet geltebt' n)0t*'t>ert, he may have been loved. 

Plural. 

mx fet'en gelicfct' wor'bett, we may have been loved. 
it)X fei'et geliebt' roor'Den, you may have been loved, 
fte fei'eit Qdkbt' WW'bm, they may have been loved. 

Pluperfect. 

Singular. 

id) tM're geftefct' WOX'bm, I might have been loved. 

bit ro&Yejt geltebt' worsen, thou mightst have been loved. 

er tc^fe getiebt' worsen, he might have been loved. 

Plural. 

wit* roa'ren geliebt' roov'&ett, we might have been loved. 
il)x wfr'xtt geliebt' XOOX'ten, you might have been loved, 
fte roa'rcn geliebt' roof&cn, they might have been loved. 



PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 143 

Simple Future. 
Singular. 

id) wer'fce geliebt' roev'&en, I shall be loved. 
fcn roer'fcejt geliebt' roev'fcen, thou wilt be loved, 
er mx'bt geliebt' rcer'fcen, he will be loved. 

Plural. 

VOXX roet'fcCtt geliefct' wetr'teit/ we shall be loved. 
xtjx wcr'&et geliebt' worsen, you will be loved. 
f(e roer'&en geliebt' roer'&cn, they will be loved. 

Compound Future. 

Singular. 

id) »«'&* geftefct' n>or'&?tt feitt, I shall have been loved. 
bit roer'fcejt geliebt' rootr'&en fein, thou wilt have been loved, 
ei* wev'fce geliefct' roor'fcfit fein, he will have been loved. 

Plural. 

nm* wcr'bett gefiefct' worsen feitt/ we shall have been loved, 
i(?v rccv'bet geltebt' noov'^en fein, you will have been loved, 
fie wet'fcen geltebt' worsen fein, they will have been loved. 

Simple Conditional. 

Singular. 

itf) nnVbe geftebt' mv'ton, I should be loved, 
tot wftr'beft geUebt' roer'ton, thou wouldst be loved, 
er trnVbe getiebf wv'bm, he would be loved. 

Plural. 

voix ttftr'&ctt gefiebt' tw'ben, we should be loved. 
it)f ttftv'&et geliebt' mx'tm, you would be loved, 
(le rouv'fcen geftebt' roer'fcen, they would be loved. 



144 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK I. 

Compound Conditional. 

Singular. 

tdj tmVfce geficbt' WOV'fcm feilt, I should have been loved. 

&tt teftr'i>efl gefiefct' worsen fern, thou wouldst have been loved. 

CV rout'&e geliebt' worsen feilt, he would have been loved. 

Pfer#7. 

J»ir tmVDcn gelicbt' n>or'&en feilt, we should have been loved. 
ilU' mtV&et geIU6f n>0V'&en fcttt, you would have been loved. 
fiC tmVfcm QilkW worsen fctn, they would have been loved. 

Imperative. 

Singular. 

tott'H (fcu) gcfiebt', be (thou) loved. 
mt'U ejl gelMt' , let him be loved. 

Plural. 

mx'ttn VOXV geficbt', let us be loved. 
Wer'&Ct (U}t) gcttefcf , be (ye or you) loved. 
WCr'&Ctt fiC geliebt', let them be loved. 

Observations. I. The past participle of the verb is pre- 
served throughout the passive voice, whether that participle be 
regularly or irregularly formed. There is, accordingly, no 
difference between regular and irregular verbs in regard to 
the formation and inflection of their passive voice. Thus 
the passive of the irregular verb fe'fyen, to see, is formed in 
the same manner as that of the regular verb lit'btn, to love, 
by joining the past participle gefe'1/Ctt/ seen, to the auxiliary 
verb roev'&en ; as, gefe'fyen wtx'Un, to be seen ; id) mt'H 
gefe'fyen, I am seen; id) bin gefe'fyen ttot'&en, I have been 
seen, &c. 

II. The verb feitt, to be, with the past participle, must not 
be confounded with the passive voice. In the former case 
the past participle is used as an adjective, expressing the actual 
condition of a thing, while the passive voice signifies a state of 



PART Eli CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 145 

being acted upon. Ex. 2)a£ J^atlS i\l ^bdUt 1 , the house is 
built ; ba$ §aii$ roiffc gcbaut 7 , the house is building ; t>d$ 
<Bf fen war auf getragen, the dinner was served up ; M$ (Sf'fett 
n)Ut w &e aufgctragetl/ the dinner was serving up (or being- 
served up). 



j-.^fcises on the Passive Verbs (regular, irregular, and mixed.) 
Indicative. 

Present. 

Am I not praised ? fo'knt, to praise. 

Is it not lost ? verfie'ven, wr. to lose. 

Are they not rubbed ? Xti'htW, for. to rub. 

You are called, UCU'ncn, mix. to call. 

Imperfect. 

Was he not beaten ? fdtfa'gdt, irr. to beat. 

Wo were not taught, tefy'reu, to teach. 

Were you not preferred? fcor'jiefyeu, irr. to prefer. 

They were read, Ic'fcit/ /rr. to read. 

Perfect. 

Thou hast been blamed, ta'txill, to blame. 

He has been bitten, beif'fen, *n% to bite. 

You have not been punished, |U*(i'fett, to punish. 

Have they been loaded ? fo'bftl, irr. to load. 

Pluperfect. 

Had it been measured ? mcf fett, irr. to measure. 

We had been hindered, tfin'Uxn, to hinder. 

They had not been given, $t'bm, irr. to give. 

You had been misunderstood, fccrfen'lttH, mix. to misunder- 
stand. 

Futures. 

I shall be weakened, fcljroddj'ett, to weaken. 

Shall we not be seized ? gret'fen, irr. to seize. 

Will they not be washed 1 XoMynx, irr. to wash. 
13 



US PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK 1. 

You will have been seen, fe'fynt, irr. to see. 

Will they not have been re- belo^UCU, to reward, 
warded 1 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

He may be used, fcrcitt'djen/ to use. 

They may be borne, tm'gett, irr. to bear. 

You may not be sent, fen'&Cit/ mix. to send. 

Imperfect. 

Thou mightst be honored, tifxtn, to honor. 

It might be excused, entfdntl'bigcn, to excuse. 

We might be overtaken, ein1)0len, to overtake. 

They might be written, fcljm'&ett/ irr. to write. 

Perfect. 

They may have been found, ftn't>Clt/ irr. to find. 
It may have been brought, bl'Ulg'Clt/ mix. to bring, 

You may have been chosen, VMfy'lCtt, to choose. 

Pluperfect. 

It might not have been felt, empftU'fcen, irr. to feel. 

We might have been absolved, los'fptedjcit, irr. to absolve. 

Thou mightst have been es- adj'tCU/ to esteem, 
teemed. 

Futures. 

We shall be asked, fva'gett, to ask. 

It will not have been denied, leitg'nen, to deny. 
Thou wilt be justified, redjtfettigen, to justify. 

Conditional Tenses. 

Should I not be shunned 1 mei'fcett, irr. to shun. 

He would not be revenged, rad)'en, reg. fy irr. to revenge. 

Would it not be stolen ? flefy'Iett, irr. to steal. 



PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 147 

Should we not have been fang'en, irr. to catch. 

caught 1 

You would not have been fcet'gCtt/ irr. to hide. 

hidden, 

They would not have been fcevbt'en'nen, mix. to burn. 

burnt, 

Imperative. 

Let them be judged, ficlj'ten, to judge. 

Let it be repeated, nnebei'fyo'len, to repeat. 

Be (thou) not driven, tvei'bett, to drive. 



Promiscuous Exercises. 

^a'cttng evjafylt' Don t>en af'tett.SDettt'fdjen, „ffe glan'ben, tag 
eg ber 4 QiH'fya'benfyett 5 tjimm'fifdjei; 6 SBe'f^ 17 ntd)t 2 an'gemeffen 3 
fei 1 , bte 3 ©St'ter 4 in 5 SBan'be 6 etn 2 ju 1 fdjlie'feu 2 , o'ber fie 3 in 4 
men'fd)enarttger 5 <Se|taft /6 t>av 2 ju 1 jtel'len 2 . ©te fyei'ltgen 
SOBal'bev nnb J^ai'ne nnb mtt SRa'men Don ©6ftent bejetcfe's 
nen 2 fie 1 ba$ gefyeiro'nigDolle ( 2Be'fcn / wefdjes fie uur. in ili's 
bad)t febau'en." 

@te ^etdj'neten fid) ang bnvd) gret'fyeitgltebe nnt) ifcven'e ; Me 
gvau'en roa'ven bet tfy'nen fj&'tjer gead)'tet alg bet ten roett 
gebtt'beteven (Srie'd)en nnb SKo'ment ; bte ©'fyen nntr'ben fyei'* 
lig getyal'ten: nnt) gn'te ©tt'ten gal'ten Ui ity'nro tnefyt* alg 
an'bevroavtg gn'te ©efet'je. 

Enacbar'ftg lad)'te a(g ev faf) roie ©o'fon fid) bemittyte Die 3 
Un'geredmgfett 4 nnb 5 Jpab'fnd)^ fet'nev 7 2Dttt'buva,ev 8 bnvd) 9 
g e f d) v i e' b e n e 10 <S e f e t' j e 11 jn 1 Devtm'ben 2 . Sie'fe fd)ie^ 
nen il)m ben 4 ©ptn'nengeroeben 4 afyn'lid) 3 ^n 1 fetn 2 , tt)e('d)e bag 2 
@d)n>a'd)e 3 nnt> 4 SUet'ne 5 bag 5 fid) 6 in 7 il/nen 8 ftnq'e 6 fe|K- 
tyielten 1 , Don 4 Dm 5 ©tarten 6 nnb 7 ©ro'fen 8 a'bev 1 jertf'fen 3 
nnVben 2 . Savanf foil 2 ©o'lon 1 geant'roovtet fya'ben, bie SOTen'-- 
fd)en fytel'ten i^'re SBun&'mflTe, roenn eg fei'nem 3 Don 4 bet'ben 5 
S^ei'len 6 nufc'Ucfc 2 fei 1 fie 9 $n 7 brec&'en 8 ; tmb er roofle fet'ne 2 
jSefet'je 3 fo 4 jn'tvaglid) 5 fnv 6 fd'ixt 7 SBftv'ger 8 macfc'en 1 , bag eg 
fuv 4 je'ben 5 beffer 3 fetn 2 fol'le 1 fie 11 ivfi fcal'ten 7 , ate 8 nt 9 fiber* 
tte'ten 10 . . 

fol'le n)ag bn fannjt, fo H\m\t *u wag bn rotflft. 



148 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 



[book I. 



erjdfyfen, to relate, 
alt, ancient. 
OCUtfef), German, 
gfaitoen, to believe. 
oaf, that. 

attgetheplt/ becoming. 
(Sttyabmtjtit, dignity, 
fyimtttlifcl), heavenly. 
933efen, being. 
<&0tt, god. 

etufd)ltefen, to inclose. 
2£ant>, wall, 
ooer, or. 

&U$ellett, to represent. 

mcnfdjenarttg, human. 

©cftaft, form. 

fyciltgen, to consecrate. 

933a[D, wood. 

JpftilX/ grove. 

tttit, by. 

Sftame, name. 

6e$eidjncn, to signify. 

ge|eimnipO(I, mysterious. 

fdjattctt, to contemplate. 

Wtr, only. 

ZCnoacljt, devotion. 

auSjcidmat, to distinguish. 

t>UVd), through. 

gfrcifjeittfftcfcc, love of liberty. 

Sfcrttte, faithfulness. 

§r<Ul, woman. 

bet, among. 

acl)tcu, to esteem. 

t)0d), high. 

<lte, than. 

mit, far. 

gclulfcet, cultivated. 

Q^e, marriage. 

fyafren, to hold. 

fycifig, sacred. 

©ttte, custom. 

gclteu, to have effect. 

©cfc§, law. 



attDCrttmrtS, elsewhere. 

fodnn, to laugh. 

af£, when. 

fefyen, to see. 

wit, how. 

ftd) fccmufyen, to exert one's 

self, 
bertreifcett, to expel. 
Ungeredmgr'cif, injustice. 
Jpa6fud)t, avarice. 
£D?ttburger, fellow-citizen, 
fdjmbni, to write, 
fd) etncn, to appear. 
d!)n[id), similar. 
©phmcngcMoefce, cobweb. 

feftfyfdtCU, to arrest. 

fd)^acl), weak. 

He in, small. 

ftd) fangcn, to be caught. 

abcr, but. 

jerrapit/ to tear. 

ft (iff, strong. 

gr06, great. 

Dvirauf, thereupon. 

foil (from foHcn), is said. 

antroortcn, to answer. 

fatten, to keep. 

25uttDUtfj, bond. 

rocmt, when. 

nuglicf), profitable. 

tytii, party. 

bred)cu, to break. 

roolleu, to will. 

tnac()en, to make. 

Jltfraglid), advantageous. 

^itrger, citizen. 

CS folic (from (often), it shall. 

fur, for. 

fiber trcten, to transgress. 

roollen, to will. 

fonnen, to be able. 

fo, thus 



PART II. CH. 6.] PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 149 

It is reported 4 of 1 the 2 Sybarites 3 , that they killed 3 all 1 
(the) cocks 2 , that they might 6 dream 5 out 5 their 1 morning 2 
dreams 2 without 3 disturbance 4 . 

The philosopher Bias being asked, what animal he thought 4 
(for 1 ) the 2 most 3 hurtful 3 , replied, " Of wild creatures, a tyrant ; 
and of tame (ones), a flatterer." 

Praise, like gold and diamonds, owes its value only to its 
scarcity. 

The Tears. 

Hillel was walking in a moonlight night with his disciple 
Sadi, in the gardens of the Mount of Olives. 

Sadi said, " See yonder, that man in the light of the moon, 
what is he about (begins he) ? " 

Hillel answered, " It is Zadoc ; he is sitting by the grave 
of his son weeping (and weeps)." 

" Cannot 9 Zadoc 3 then 2 ," said 4 the 5 young 6 man, 6 " mod- 
erate 10 his 7 grief 8 ? The people call him the just and the wise." 

Hillel replied, " Shall he, on this account, not 3 feel 4 the 1 
pain 2 1 " 

"But," asked Sadi, "what advantage has the wise man 
over the fool ? " 

Then his 2 teacher 3 answered 1 , " Behold, the bitter tear of 
his eye falls to the earth, but his countenance is turned 2 to- 
ward 1 heaven 1 ." 

of, feon. (Dot.) what, roel'djeg. 

the Sybarite,t>er @t;6avi'te,2. a. animal, %\jW, n. 3. b. 6. 

to report, eqdl)'(cn. for, fur. (Accus.) 

that, t>a§. hurtful, fcbafc'Hcl). 

cock, *§^\\, m. 3. b. k to think, fyaf'ten. (Subj.) 

to kill, toD'ten. to reply, ant'mxtnt. 

that, fcamit'. of, tm'tei\ (Dat.) 

morning dream, *5D?0V'gCn- wild, ttnft). 

traum, m. 3. b. 6, creature, ©cfdjtyf , n. 3. b. 6. 

without, ofy'ne. tyrant, Xytim! , m. % b. 

disturbance, ©tS'nmg,/. 1. t>. tame, jafjttt. 

to dream out, aus'traumen. flatterer, ©djmeiciyfer, m. a 
I may, id) faun, mix. (Subj.) a. a. 

philosopher, spijifofopl)', m. praise, *0&, n. 3. b. 

being asked, translate, when like, Xoit. 

he was 2 asked 1 ; when, t>a, gold, @ott>, n. 3. b. 

to ask, fva'gen. and, Wttt>, 
13* 



150 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 



[book I. 



diamond, 3)iamant', m. 3. b. t>. 

to owe, fcerfcanf'en. 

value, ^ertfy, m. 3. b. b. 
only, aft e hi'. 

scarcity, @e('tenfyeit, /. 1. t>. 
tear, Sijjvd'ne,/. 1. C. 

to walk, nxm'&efn. 
in, in. (Dat.) 
moonlight, mon&'fycK. 
night, •Slacfet,/. 1. l\ 
with, mif. (Dat.) 
disciple, ©djlt'Uv, ni. 3. a. a, 
garden, *@ai*'tett, m. 3. a. 0. 
mount of Olives, Ol'bet'g, m. 

3. b. b. 
to say, fa'gett. 
to see, fe'fyen, zVr. 
yonder, t>ovt 
man, *£D?ann, 7w. 3. b. e. 
light, licl)t, n. 3. b. e. 
moon, £D?ont>, m. 3. b. b. 
to be about, begin'nen, irr. 
to answer, ant'W Often, 
to sit, fit'jen, zVr. 
by, an. (Dat.) 
grave, *<Srab, rc. 3. b. e. 
son, *@ol)n, m. 3. b. b. 
to weep, roei'nen. 
(can), to be able, fon'ncn, mix. 
then, Demi, 
to say, fa'gen. 
young man, Sung'ling, m. 3. 

b. b. 



grief, Sirau'er, /. 1. 

not, nic()t. 

to moderate, mafffgen. 

people, *33oIif, n. 3. b. e. 

to call, nen'nen, mix. 

just, gerecbt'. 

wise, voct'fe. 

to reply, entue'oern. 

(shall), to be obliged, fbl'Iett/ 

irr. 
on this account, tH'i'ntm. 
pain, ©cfomerj, m. 3. b. t>. 
to feel, empftn'fcen, irr. 
but, a'bei*. 
to ask, fra'gcn. 
what, n>cf'd)Ci\ (^4cc.) 
advantage, *9Sor'jtlg, m. 3. b. b. 
over, fcor. (Dat.) 
fool, iijor, w. 2. b. 
then, 0(1. 

teacher, ittyut, m. 3. a. a, 
to behold, fe'fyeit, zVr. 
bitter, bit'tei*. 
eye, 2ltt'ge, w. 3. a. c. 
to fall, ftnf'en, irr. 
to the, jrnr. (Z)a£.) 
earth, (Sv'&C,/. 1. C. 
but, a'ber. 
countenance, %\\t'['\$, n. 3. b. 

b. 
toward, (Dat.) 
heaven, t>ev Jjptm'mef, m. 3. a. 

a. 

to turn, jn'roenben, mix. 



CHAPTER VII. 

ADVERBS. 

Every adjective in its simple form, may be used as an ad- 
verb ; as, bte'fev SEKatm tft cfyv'Iirf), this man is honest ; and 
fcie'fev $Kann fyan'frett efyr'(td), this man acts honestly. 



PART II. CH. T.J 



ADVERBS. 



151 



The following are the adverbs which most frequently occur 
in writing and conversation. 

§ 1. DIFFERENT KINDS OF ADVERBS. 

A. Adverbs of Place. 



WO, where? 

roofyer', whence? 

roof; in'/ whither? 

fyter, aflfyiev', here. 

ijU'tjn, hither. 

fca, tort, frafe(6ft', there. 

H'fytX, fcort'tycr, thence. 

i>al)iu, fcovt'tyin, thither. 

Meffeit, t>kf fettS, on this side 

jcn'feit, jen'ffi^/ on the oppo 

site side. 
ir'genbs, iv'geutwo, some 

where, 
nir'gen&tf, 

where. 

an'btvemo, 

elsewhere. 

place. 
an'bCVSroofyiu , to another place, 
allcntfyafbcu, allevroe'gen, or 

allcvot'tClt; everywhere. 

in'nm, fcavut'nen, or fcrin'neu, 
within. 

att'fen, fcrau'feu, without. 

iu'rocn&ig, internally. 

attS'roenMg, externally, out- 
ward. 



niv'gcn&roo, no- 
or au'fccrroavrs, 
from another 



iu'iurftcfc, in'imtjblb, in- 
wardly. 

dtt'fevlid)/ M'ffXtfKlbi out- 
wardly. 

o'fcen, turo'kn, above. 

fcatauf, or fcvaitf, upon it, 
thereon. 

<xb, off, down. 

auf uut> nie'&ev, or auf uni> a6, 
up and down. 

cut UUt) M$, in and out. 

fyttt tmt> tjtt, to and from. 

§W Uttt> t>a (t)0Vt), here and 
there. 

fort, forth. 

i)0nt, before, fronting. 

fyin'ten, behind. 

i)0U roan'nen, whence. 

t)0tt fyin'ueil, from hence. 

nat), uafy'e, near. 

feut, feme, far. 

roett at, far off. 

na tye bet, hard by. 

an'rcefenfc, or ge'gcnwdvttg, 

present, 
ab'rcefenfc, absent. 



B. Adverbs of Time. 



ttantt, when, 
fcann, afcfcann', then, 
nun, jtyt, now. 
fcalt>, soon. 

foglcid)', UUfcevjftg'Ucf), imme- 
diately. 



fefjon, already, 
fntl), early, 
fpat, late, 
je, je'mafc, ever, 
ntc, nie'mate, never. 
ttOcfj, still, yet. 



152 



ADVERBS. 



[book I. 



or 



ti& 



nod) nid)t, not yet. 

btv 5 ti'tm, betimes. 

ai'iqnt, always. 

jnjei'ten, jnroei'fen, 
XVCi'tin, sometimes. 

einft, ein'ttens, once. 

JtCli'Ud), lately, newly. 

lefc'ten*, Icfct'Iicfe, U$t't}iti , 
lastly, lately. 

ein|Vmak, at some times. 

fot'maU, or cremate, for- 
merly. 

ttad)'mal$, or nad^er', after- 
wards. 

nne'oev, nne'&evum, again, 
feitfyer', feit, since. 

tjtll'Uf to day. 



gcf teftt; yesterday, 
kot'gettmt, e'fjegettern, the day 

before yesterday. 
tttit'tagS, at noon, 
fcor'mittagtf, before noon. 
nady'mittagS, afternoon, 
im'mer, always, 
jtcts?, continually, always, 

ever. 

fo e'ben, just now. 

(ang'c, fd>on (ang'e, or (angjt, 

long ago, a long time since, 
fcevldngft', long ago, &c. 
unlang|V, or ofynlangft', not 

long ago. 
bi$t)tx'r hitherto, 
fca'malg, at that time, &c. 



C. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. 



ja, yes. 

tlCitt, no. 

tticljt, not. 

voafyv'lid), truly, verily. 

fm'Itd), )a frei'(id), or ja 

vootjl, yes to be sure, surely, 

yes. 
aftoittgS', entirely, by all 

means. 
gar uid)t, not at all. 
lei'nesroegtf, mit ntdj'fen, by 

no means. 



tam, hardly. 
in &er Sfyat, indeed, 
nnfcfyl'bar, doubtless. 
fd)[cd)tCl*&ingg / / absolutely. 
nnvHtrf), really, 
im'mermefyr, ever, 
nim'mevmcfyr, never. 
gfan6'lidj, credibly. 
i>iefkirf)t' , perhaps, 
fcennutfy'lid), probably. 
Duvd)au6' nidjt, absolutely not. 
mtgfaub'fid), incredibly. 



D. Adverbs of Various Use. 



mctjt, fafl, fdjier, almost. 

beina't^e, nearly. 

genug', genUttg', enough. 

Doll, fcot'ttg, completely. 

obenfyin', superficially. 

fcof'len&S, fully. 

tt)CiU, partly. 

un'gefdljv, or ofyn'gefafyr, about. 



alt, wie, as. 
r»ie, how. 
roanmV, why. 
fca'rum, therefore. 
an'DCVS, otherwise. 
gieicfo'faflS; likewise, 
gfeicfcroie', gfeicfc ale?, like as 
fo, so. 



PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 153 

fcfyr, 9M, very, much. fammt'licf), all together. 

itt, ali'gtt, too. facl)'tC, softly. 

gauj, ganoid), whole, wholly, fon'&erttrf), bcfon'oevg, espe- 

xootjl, gut, well. cially. 

fi 7 M, fd)led)t, ill. frirj, in short. 

W)t, badly. i)attptfad)'[td), chiefly. 

at'fO, thus. Ulit gUiS, on purpose. 

ungemein 7 , uncommonly. kielmefyt' 7 , rather. 

gfeidj, directly, equally. reb'Ucl), sincerely. 

hfccrauS', exceedingly. ved)t, right. 

JUgtftcl)', at the same time. Ull'redjt, wrong. 

^ufam'men, together. ent> 7 Ucl), lastly. 



The following adverbs seem to require some particular 
notice. 

<2Bol;r, SBol, 

is often found, where the English can affix no distinct mean- 
ing to it. It is not, however, a mere expletive ; but serves to 
give to a sentence a peculiar modification. Sometimes the 
expressions, may be, perhaps, probably, about, nearly, indeed, 
may correspond with it. It occurs in questions ; as, £a 7 beit 
@ie wofyf gefyik't 7 , wa$ man fcafoon' fagt? Have you by chance 
heard, what is said of it 1 — and accompanies verbs in an in- 
determinate and conditional construction ; as, 3d) mbd)'tt Wofy( 
le'fcn, I should like to read (if I could). Instead of the adverb 
WO I) I, well, denoting, of a good quality, in a good manner, not 
ill, gut is frequently used ; by which means the confusion, 
that might arise between this signification and the expletive, 
is obviated. For example: 3d) weiS nid)t, wo man &ie 7 fc 
©ad)'en gut fau'fcn t\mi, I know not, where one may buy 
these things well. In this instance, if xootjl were used, it 
would, by the generality of readers, be understood as an ex- 
pletive. When used as an expletive, it is pronounced short, 
and some, in this case, write WOl instead of WOfyl. 

©ev'UC or gent, willingly : comparative, lu'bn, more willing- 
ly : superlative, am HelyjUu, most willingly. 

T3y this adverb, the idea, to like, to be fond of, is expressed ; 
as, tt'mcti gcr'ne tfytltt, to do a thing willingly, to like to do it ; 
Ct'waS gent ef'fen, to eat a thing willingly, that is, to like it; 



154 ADVERBS. [BOOK I. 

tvm$ getm mo'geu, to like a thing. gt'toaz gent fe'fyen, to see 
a thing willingly, to see it with approbation ; hence, to like, to 
approve. (St ifft (ScmtVfe lie'kr ate gfeifet), He likes vegetables 
better than meat ; literally, he eats more willingly, ©te fe'fyen 
C$ am lieb'fteit/ They see it with most pleasure, that is, they like 
it best. The use of iu'hzx, and am ItC&'jtcn, will be readily 
understood from that of gent. 

§i\\ and Jger. 

See page 108. 

combined with prepositions, and followed by the conjunction 
bag/ serves as a substitute for the English participle, united 
with a preposition. Examples : By reading much he became 
learned; Sa'burcl) bag er Die! (a£, xovlx'U n gelefyvt'. From 
talking too much, mischief often comes ; ^av'auS bag man $tt 
t>ief fdjroagt, entftefyt' oft Un'fyeif. Justice consists in giving 
every one his own; (Beredytigfeit tejU^t' ba'rin, bag man 
je'bennan M$ fci'ne gibt 

£>od), 

put after an imperative, has the power of entreating and ex- 
horting, and answers, in general, to the French done, and, 
frequently, to the English pray. Examples : @a'gcu <&ic mil* 
fcocb, Pray tell me- <&tin @ie bod) fo gut, Pray, be so good. 
'■EBaS fag'tc it bod) ? Pray, what did he say 1 <%dav bag bod) 
em idntt/ What a noise that was ! Occasionally it may be ren- 
dered by somehow; as, 3d) faub mid) bod) fcafo roie'&cr, I some- 
how soon found my way again. — In common conversation, it 
is sometimes used for the affirmative ja, when a negative pre- 
cedes. 

besides its affirmative signification, yes, nas an expletive use, 
in which it may be often translated by, indeed, truly, certainly, 
sec, I see, I wonder, forsooth. Examples : @ic f om'men ja fp&t, 
You certainly are come late, or, I wonder you come so late. 



PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 156 

@ic finfc ja redjt gt'06 get»0r'&eit, You, indeed, are grown very 
tall. (5r jteUt fid) ja fefyt* fon'fcerbar. an, He, forsooth ! behaves 
in a very singular manner. — 3a tt)ol){, certainly, yes, certainly. 
3a, combined with a negative, be it with the particle md)t, or 
Hie, or the adjective feitt, may be rendered by the same exple- 
tive terms, pray, certainly, see, &c. ; but frequently it strength- 
ens the expression ; as, ja nid)t, on no account ; ja me, never, 
spoken emphatically. 

Wlit'ttn, 

before the prepositions in and ttn'tct*, signifies in the midst of; 
as, mit'ten in fei'tter SKe'De, in the midst of his discourse ; nut's 
Un nn'tCt* Den gein'&eit/ in the midst of the enemies. 

SRod), 

signifies an addition, where the English use more. SZcd) ein£, 
one thing more ; nod) eitt'mat, once more ; nod) ittl'XMV, still, 
by continuance, constantly. (£y 6tei6t nod) ittl'mer in iOtt'&Olt/ 
He still continues in London. 

A Comparison 

of things equal, is, in English, made by the repetition of as : 
for example, ' as brave as Leonidas.' In German, the first 
particle is rendered by fo, and the second by ate, or nue : fo 
rar/fet* ate Seo'nifcaS. The word than, after the comparative 
more, is expressed by ate. Sometimes the English put but 
after a comparative degree, instead of than : for example, 
" There was nothing farther to be done, but to fight." The 
German ate, must here be retained. QBte is occasionally 
substituted for ate, and then the fo may be omitted ; as, tap's 
fev nue Seo'nt&as. 

The Negative 

nid)t is often used by the Germans, where the English would 
deem it superfluous ; as, Q?6 i\\ xx'bn ei'ttClt SDfo'nat, feitfcem' 
id) ©ie nid)t gefe'fyen fya'be, It is above a month, since 1 have 
(not) seen you. 

In interrogative exclamations, the negative gives emphasis. 

2Bte Diele 93?en'fdjen finfc nidjt in Die'fem ftne'ae um'sefom* 



153 ADVERBS. [-BOOK I. 

men. How man j men have (not) perished in this war ! ^ie 
jMj fcl)icn Cf nid)t, How proud did he (not) appear ! (The 
French also make use of the negative. Quel fa-uit ces horn- 
mes n'auraieiU-ils pas fait, s'ih m'avaient attrape & un tel ban- 
S*W) 

Not a, not any, are, in German, commonly expressed by 
hi\\, none ; as, not a single line, fei'ne cill'jige -Jei'lc. 

Two negatives, in the same sentence, are in general im» 
proper ; although they sometimes occur not only in the lan- 
guage of common life, but also in the best writers. Sometimes, 
indeed, there may appear to be energy in the repetition of 
the negative; but, on the whole, it should be rather considered 
as a species of negligence in composition. 

About, nearly. 

This idea, accompanying numbers, is differently expressed. 
1. By certain adverbs, viz. imm'$)t, et'KM, fajt, un'gef&fyr, 
rt>of}\, (uS. <£$ ftnt) rootjt fct'Ci ^afy've, It is about three years, 
Un'gcffifyr jefyn ^Pfuttt), about ten pounds ; jtt>ei tus fcvei QBocfe 7 * 
Ctt> from two to three weeks. 2. By the use of the preposi- 
tion, an, Ui, ge'gen. lin &ic jroan'jig/ nearly twenty; ki 
(or ge'^cn) fttcr'jig, nearly forty. 



§ 2. OF THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 

Adverbs are either original words, as, j(i, yes ; UCtn, no ; 
«?0/ where ; r»ie, how ; or adjectives used as adverbs ; or 
they are formed from nouns or adjectives, or by composition. 

A. Adverbs derived from Nouns or Adjectives. 

A noun or adjective is formed into an adverb by adding 
either the letter 6 (the ancient characteristic of the genitive 
case for nouns of all declensions) or the syllable lid) to the 
noun or adjective. The additional $ always makes the word 
an adverb, without making it an adjective ; while most of the 
words formed by adding (id) are properly adjectives, which 
may be used also as adverbs. 



PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 157 

1. The following substantives, denoting parts of the natural 
day, are changed into adverbs by an additional 6, 

Substantives. Adverbs. 

bet* %&$, the day ; tag£, or beg 'SagS, in the day- 

time. 

t>ie $Rbd)t, the night; md)t$, or be£ $l<\d)t$, in the 

night. 

bet* SXKov'geu, the morning ; motr'gettS, or be$ ^fftor'genS, in 

the morning. 

bet* 2l'benb, the evening ; a'6enb£, or be£ WbtnM, in the 

evening. 

bev SBov'miftaa,, the forenoon ; foov'mittagtf, or be£ 33or'mit* 

tag£, in the forenoon. 

bet* STacfymittag, the after- nadymittags, or beg 3tacl)'mits 
noon ; tag£, in the afternoon. 

bet* SDtit'tag, the noon ; mit'tagS, or be$ SHit'tagg, at 

noon. 

So, also, some adjectives become adverbs, by means of an 
additional £ ; as, bcveitS', already, from beveit', ready ; ftetS, 
constantly, from \\(t, constant; befon'bet'S, particularly, from 
befon'ber, particular; an'bet'6, otherwise, from an'bet*, other; 
rcc()t$, to the right hand, from veeftt, right; UnH, to the left, 
from linf , left, &c. Numerals become adverbs by the addi- 
tion of en£ or tetlS ; as, ev'jtenS, in the first place, or first; 
jwei'tenS, secondly ; btit'tenS, thirdly, &c. And the following 
words; ktf'tm$, in the best manner ; raei'jleuS, mostly ; tfytp 
en£, by the first opportunity; f)6ciyfUn£/ at the most; u'bxu 
genS, as for the rest. 

2. There are some adverbs formed by the addition of lid), 
which cannot be used as adjectives ; as, fret'Iid), indeed, from 
fret, free ; vocfijx'iid), truly, from XtxxtjX, true ; glttlid), goodly, 
from gut, good. 

B. Compound Adverbs. 

Among compound adverbs, those which are composed of a 
preposition and the adverbs fyier, fyie, here, ba, there, V00, 
where, fyitt, thither, fyetr, hither, deserve a particular notice. 
In these cases, if the preposition begin with a vowel or n, 
an c is often added to the adverbs ba and tt>(\ 
14 



158 ADVERBS [BOOK I. 

1. With fa, t>at\ instead of fret*, tuc'fa', fccrfePbe, 

taUi', by it, with it, thereby. fcanim', for it or that, there- 

t>avau / , on it or that, thereon. fore. 

tarauf , upon it or that, there- fcanu'fccr, against that or it. 

upon. tA^ll', for that or it, thereto. 

fcavattS'/ from thence, it, that. fcattot*', before that or it. 

fcarein', thereinto, into it or baxn'bw, on that account, at 

that it. 

fcavin 7 , therein, in it, within. fcanm'rer, under it or that. 

Damacl)', after it, thereafter. &afuf' / for that, 

fcage'gen, against it or that. fcafcou', of that or it, thereof, 

Damit', with that or it, by it, therefrom. 

therewith. &a}nNfd)'en, between, amidst 

toCbcn, near that or it, next that. 

to it. 



2. With fyicr, or fytC, are compounded the same prepositions 
as above. 

fyteran'/ on this or it, &c. fytevauf, upon this or it, &c. 



3. With wo, WOt, instead of wcl'dw, wa$. 

WOVdlX', on which, whereon. WQ\)0t', before which. 

rcorauf, upon which, where- rDO^u', to which, whereto, 

upon. roonacfy, according to which. 

n>onn', in which, wherein. WOXU'btll, next to which. 

WOixiii', with which, where- l&onV&er, upon which, where- 
with, upon. 

WOfcttvd)', by or through which, roofuv', for which, wherefore. 

TMntttt', for which, why. VDOnm'tcr, under which, among 

tEOge'gnt, against which. which, &,c. 



4. With tjtv and fyin, as adverbs. 

fycrafc', tymab', fyentn'ter, down. ifwM&, out, &c. 
fyerauf, tymauf, up. 



PART II. CH. 8.] PREPOSITIONS. 169 

§ 3. THE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

Adverbs are invariable, except that some admit the degrees 
of comparison, as; 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

gut, or roof;!, beffer, better; am (jum) bef'ten,* best. 

well ; 

lV6eI, ill ; fcbltm'mcr, worse: fcMhnm'flen, worst. 

Did, much ; tttefyr, more ; mei'flen, most. 

W-'nig, little, JDC'niger, less; m'M$m.t least- 
few : 

mVfye, near ; i\a't)W, nearer ; n&cb'jtett, nearest. 

fyod), high ; bb'tjtV, higher ; (;5dj'|ten, highest. 

C'i)c, before ; C'fycr, sooner ; C'tyefUn, soonest. 

gent, readily, Ik'btV, more rea- ...... (ieb'jtCU, most rea- 

or willingly; dily, or rath- dily, or most wil- 

er ; lingly. 

Observation. The syllable un changes adverbs from affirma- 
tive to negative, in the same manner as in, im, or un, in 
English ; as, gfattb'ttcl), credibly ; imgUub'Iid), incredibly ; 
tecbt'ficb, justly; un'wbtlid), unjustly. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

PREPOSITIONS. 
Some prepositions are always separated ; as, 

ItttUtttf'fett, for the sake of; as, itm be$ gw'fcenS widen, for the 

sake of peace. 
fcOlU-Wgen, in the name of; as, fcOU <8md)t$' we'gen, in the 

name of the court. 

Some are separated or not according to the construction ; as, 

\\m-\)iX', round about ; as, 3c() ging ttm ba£ @c()fo§ t)tv, I walk- 
ed about the castle; and %d) ging umfyev', I walked about. 



Or ftttfg (auf bas) SSef'te. 



160 CONJUNCTIONS. [BOOK I, 

tyxtttvtyx', Mntev^vein', behind , as, id) ging fyin'tn i>em 
tfllaw'nt fyet or fcreht, I walked after the man, I followed the 
man; and 3[cfe ging fyintevfyet*', or fyuUCr&vein', I walked be- 
hind. 



ABBREVIATION OF PREPOSITIONS. 

In the familiar or colloquial style, the definite article and 
the preposition are generally contracted into one word ; as, 
am, for an t>em. 

Examples. 



am, 


for an t>em, 


as, am gen'jtcr, at the window. 


ans, 


an i>as, 


an£ iid)t, into the light. 


aufs, 


anf M$, 


attf£ JpatiS, upon the house. 


kirn, 


bei fcem, 


beim 33a'tcr, by the father. 


fcurdjtf, 


tmrd) MS, 


fcltvcl)$ gcil'Cl*, through the 
fire. 


f&rs,. 


fur t>as, 


flirg ©eft), for money. 


im, 


in i>em, 


im Jpirn'mcl, in heaven. 


ins, 


in H$, 


inS QBaf'fer, in the water. 


fcom, 


Don t>cm, 


fcom U'&ef, from evil. 


fcOfS, 


Dot* t>ag, 


fcOfg gctt'jtcr, before the win- 
dow. 


fcovm, 


i>ov tern, 


i)0rm ^fyov, before the door. 


ft'bmn, 


fi'6et* fcem, 


u'berm Seu'er, upon the fire. 


tVbcrs, 


ft'bet* t>as, 


iVbei'S SOteer, beyond the sea. 


im'tenn, 


uti'ter fcem, 


ItU'tCVttt ^op'fc, under the 
head. 


*um, 


ju fcem, 


JUttt 23adj'e, to the rivulet. 


$ur, 


ju Dcr, 


JW Sty're, for the honor. 



Some of these abbreviations occur, not only in the familiar, 
but in every kind of style ; as, am, im, fcom, Jltm, Jilt. 



CHAPTER IX. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

The conjunctions a'6er, and fott'&evtt, which are both Eng- 
lished but, have a distinct meaning and use in German. 



PART II. CH. 10, 11.] INTERJECTIONS. 161 

©ou'DCrtt is used only after a negative, and always expresses 
a contradiction ; as, (£r i\\ nicljt retd), fon'DCrn arm, He is not 
rich, but poor; (£$ frier t nidjt, fon'oern e£ tfyattt, It does not 
freeze, but it thaws. — TJL'btV is used to connect two sen- 
tences, of which the subsequent contains a limitation or mod- 
ification of the antecedent; as, Gsr tft arm, a'ber jufrie't>en, He 
is poor, but contented ; £r fpricl)t fceutfdj, a'ber tticl)t gelau'jtg, 
He speaks German, but not fluently. 



CHAPTER X. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

The following is a list of some of the interjections used in 
German. 

act) ! ah ! at) ! ah ! Wtfff Ottl'men ! welcome ! 

ki'hn ! alas ! fte'fye ! lo ! behold ! 

Of; ! ! oh ! jte'lje H ! behold here ! 

ml} I xot'tji ! woe ! pfui ! fie ! 

ei ! l)ui ! heigh ! [ie'ber ! pray ! 

W0t)Un' ! well then ! 6efylVce <&0tt ! God forbid ! 



t)ilf ©Oft ! God help ! j)o['fo ! f)t ! holla! 

fjilf £tm'mef ! Heaven help ! ft ! jftfl ! hush ! hist ! 
ijdit ! halt ! or stop ! 



CHAPTER XI. 



ADDITIONAL REMARKS, ON THE MODE OF FORMING NEW 
WORDS. 

General Remarks. 

The number of German words has been and may still be 
increased in two ways : 

1. The language admits of being enriched out of its own 
substance. 

a. One part of speech may be used for another. Thus 
the infinitive of the verb fe'ktt, to live, is used as a substan- 
tive, US ti'bm, the life ; and the neuter gender of the adiec- 
14* J 



162 FORMATION OP NEW WORDS. [BOOK 1. 

tive erfya'Den, sublime, may be used as a noun, ba£ (Evfya'fceuc, 
the sublime. 

b. A word may be derived from another; as, giVttg, kind, 
from gut, good. 

c. Several words may be compounded into one ; as, 
©iffcevkvgroeri, silver mine, composed of ©U'ber, silver,' 
33evg, mountain, and c IBcvf, work. 

II. A number 01 foreign words have been introduced into 
the German language, and have become more or less natural- 
ized ; as, SRfltur', nature; ©prapatfyic' (SDftt'gefufyf), sym- 
pathy. 



§ 1. OF THE MOST IMPORTANT MODES OF ENRICHING THE LAN- 
GUAGE FROM WITHIN ITSELF. 

A. Of the Infinitive Mood and Adjectives, used as Nouns. 

Among the various modes in which a word may be changed 
from one part of speech to another, there is none of so much 
practical importance as the use of infinitives and adjectives as 
nouns. 

1. The Germans use the infinitive of every verb as a noun, 
in the same manner as the English do the present participle ; 
as, M€ ftiltyUn, the feeling; fcaS fib'tttl, the hearing; t>a6 
gor'fdjen/ the searching, &c. 

2. An adjective may be used as a noun in each of its three 
genders, and ought then to have a capital letter for its initial. 

a. When the adjective in its masculine or feminine gender 
is used as a noun, it denotes most generally a man or a woman 
of such description as the adjective imports ; as, bet (Slt'te, 
the good man ; bic (Sll'U, the good woman ; em gvom'mev, 
a pious man ; ct'iiC gtoni'me, a pious woman. 

The noun should always be preceded by the definite or in- 
definite article, except in the vocative case ; as, 25ef tw, best 
man ; S5cf te, best woman. 

Sometimes the adjective stands without the noun to which 
it refers, this noun being understood. In this case the adjec- 
tive is not changed into a noun but remains an adjective ; as, 
(£6 giebt jttei'evfei SDleufdjen, gu'te imb fco'jc* SS>te bh'fm 
ge'ben fid) oft bag 2dife()n bet* gtt'ten. There are two sorts of 
men, good and bad. The bad oftentimes give themselves the 
appearance of the good, 



PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 163 

b. When the neuter of the adjective is used as a noun, if it 
is preceded by the definite article, it denotes the whole class 
of things to which the quality expressed by the adjective is 
ascribed; or it designates the quality itself ; as, t>a£ ©cfjo'ttC, 
the beautiful ; ftaS Srfya'bene, the sublime. 

If the neuter adjective, when used as a noun, is not pre- 
ceded by the article, it means any thing having that quality 
which the adjective expresses ; as, ©cfyo'UCS, any thing beau- 
tiful ; $bx'tt&, any thing tender. 

While in English (at least in prose) only a few adjectives 
are used as nouns, the German language allows every adjective 
to be used in that manner ; as, t>a£ $&X'tt, that which is ten- 
der ; M$ t&tCrt'h, that which is strong ; M$ SffcatttV'licfoe, that 
which is natural ; fca£ SCiuijt'licfte, that which is artificial.* 

Sometimes the simple form of the adjective is used instead 
of the neuter ; as, ba£ ®elb im& M$ SHotfy, the yellow and the 
red; or without the article, (Selb Wit) SHotl) f«l& JWet (SH'Ml&'s 
fiU'bctt/ Yellow and red are two primary colors. 

In a few instances the indefinite article is used before the 
simple form or the neuter of the adjective ; as, eitt ^Kotfy, a 
red (color) ; tin SDtefy'metf, something further. 

B. Of the Derivation of Words from Others. 

Among the various modes in which derivative words may be 
formed, we notice two, as particularly important. 

1. In the formation of nouns, by adding to adjectives, nume- 
rals, nouns, or radical syllables of verbs, the syllables, ei (ei;), 
tyit, hit, img, tfyum, fc()aft, nx% ; as, gifclwei', fishery, 
(gifdj'cr, fisherman) ; ^Boltfom'menfyeit, perfection, (fcoHfom'* 
men, perfect) ; <£in'k)Cit, unity, (eilt, one) ; SSie'DCfto, righ- 
teousness, (Me'&et, righteous) ; Sfai'png, inclination, (ftdj 
nei'gen, to incline); SRit'tertfyum, chivalry, (diit'ttX, knight) ; 
^if'fcnfc()aft, science, (roiffen, to know); ian&'fdjaft, land- 
scape, ($ant>, land) ; S3cfovg'nig, apprehension, (befot'gett, to 
apprehend). 

2. The formation of adjectives, by the addition of the syl- 
lables (w, fctm, en, ern, ig, icl)t, ifel), lid), fyaft ; as, tfx'bat, 



* The great advantage that arises from this mode of using 
every adjective as a noun, to designate certain classes of things, 
or certain qualities, is evident, particularly in philosophy. 



164 FORMATION OP NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 

decent, (Q^'re, honor) ; affccitfam, industrious, (ttv'btit, labor) ; 
golden, golden, (©oft), gold) ; jM'nent, of stone, (©teitt, 
stone) ; feu'rig, fiery, (geu'er, fire) ; t(?5'ridjt, foolish, (S^er, 
fool) ; tidytmfd), poetical, (Sidj'fcr, poet) ; fad)'ftfd), Saxon, 
(i>er @iid)'fe, the Saxon); fin'Difd), childish, (Stint), child); 
ftnfc'fid), childlike; romib'lid), oral, (SDttmt), month); fjttf* 
tjaft, hearty, (£trfr heart). 

C. 0/* £/«e Composition of Words. 

A compound word is produced by uniting two or more 
terms into one. Such expressions, therefore, as newspaper, 
seaport, vainglory, belong to this class. 

The rules for composition, which are tacitly acknowledg- 
ed in German, and ought to be uniformly observed, are these 
two : 

Rule I. — The several terms which enter into the composi- 
tion should suggest so many distinct ideas ; and these ought 
to be so perspicuous, that, when combined, they shall render 
the word intelligible at the first glance. 

Rule II. — The prior term of the compound should define 
and limit the other. Hence the first component may be called 
the particular term ; and the second, the general. For ex- 
ample : £D?on&'Itd)t / moonlight ; the general term iid)t, light, 
being defined by the more particular term, 2)?ont>, moon : 
fum'tttCl'fcoff, sorrowful ; the general term fcofl, full, being de- 
fined by the particular term, Sutn'mei*/ sorrow. 

To these two rules of composition, are to be added the fol- 
lowing observations. 

1. In compound substantives, the second component, or 
general term, furnishes the gender ; as, t>a£ 9^atfy'i)ail£, the 
council-house, from bCV 0Utfy, the council, and to$ Qau$, the 
house; fccr 2lr'fceit$(ol)tt, wages for work, from &ie liv'bcit, 
labor, and fccr iot}\\, the reward ; SDten'fdjenliebc, love of man, 
from &CV SDiCllfd), man, and t>ie iti'U, love. 

2. The compound should be neither too long, nor harsh to 
the ear. 

3. Though one of the terms be a compound word, yet, 
when it enters into a new composition, it is supposed to convey 
only a single idea. For example, fc>a$ ©il'bctbcrgttwf, the 
silver mine, consisting of @U'kt*, silver, and SSwg'Wf/ a 



PART II, CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 165 

mine, has for its second terra, a compound word, ^Bet'g'JKVt". 
This may be resolved into 33erg, mountain, and '■ZBet'f 2 , 
work ; yet, the idea which it suggests as a component of 
©tffrevbergwevf, is only one. Consequently, words may be 
twice or oftener compounded, without being disqualified for 
serving in a new composition according to the second rule ; 
care being taken not to make the compound too long. But 
whenever such words are admitted, a hyphen (;) is resorted to, 
in order to break their extended appearance : as, (Sencvcif^cft^ 
JClig'moijUV/ Master General of the Ordnance; Sfteid)6; 
(Sencivil'sgefbmai'fcbad, Field-marshal General of the Empire. 

4. A hyphen is, moreover, employed, when either one or 
both of the components are foreign words ; as, tut 6 §Hcicfti?'= 
Collegium, the council of the Empire ; DaS Criminal' -^ui^t, 
the criminal court of justice ; Dev Justiz'-Mat^, a council, or 
counsellor of justice ; DaS Intelligent -*Blatt, a paper for ad- 
vertisements ; Da6 Intelligent --Comptoir, the advertising of- 
fice; DaS Justiz'- Collegium, the court of justice. The foreign 
words are written either in their own type, as is done in these 
examples, or in the German character; as, ^nteUtgeuj'-UHatC. 
But if the words are not too long, it is rather more usual 
to write them without the hyphen, as one word ; as, 
JJitfefligenj'bfott. 

5. By the process of composition are produced, in the fol- 
lowing manner, 

(1) Substantives. 

a. Both terms being Substantives. Examples : S)ic 2f 6dlfc 
jhmDe, the evening-hour — from Del* It'bettD, the evening, and 
tie ©tun'fce, the hour; Det* 2ty'fel6(Utm, the apple-tree — Dei* 
%y'fd, and Der SSamn; Dev ©onn'tag, Sunday — Die ©ou'ne, 
Dev %ag ; Dev ©Ot'teg&icnjt, divine service — (Sott, God, Dev 
3)tcn|l, the service ; Dev Jpel'Deumtltfy, heroic courage — DCV 
£e(D, the hero, Dev 93?Utfy, courage ; Die £ev'jen$gltte, good- 
ness of heart — DaS Jpevj, Me (SiVte. 

b. The first term being an Adjective. 2)ie (SvOS'ttttttf), mag- 
nanimity — gV0£, great, Dev SDtuti), spirit ; Die ©cljrocv'mutfy, 
heaviness of spirit, melancholy — fdjwr, heavy, Dei* SOttttl),* 
spirit; Die Si'gcnficlJe, self-love — ei'gen, own, and Die ik'bt. 



* It will be noticed, that in these two last examples, there 
is a deviation from the first observation (under Rule II.) rela- 
tive to the gender of compound substantives. 



166 FORMATION CF NEW WORDS. {BOOK I. 

c. A Numeral the first term. £)er SH'ei'fue, the tripod — 
trci, three, ter g«g, the foot; i>a$ SBier'etf, the square — i)ief 
four, tie (Sc'fr,* the corner: tag %$?*&,* the octagon — ac()t, 
eight. 

d. The Pronoun felbjl the first term. £>ag ©elbjl'ttertranen, 
self-confidence — fca£ SBertrau'en ; tie ©elbfl'pntfuug, self- 
examination — Me spnt'fmig ; Dcv ©elbjrbetntg, self-delusion — 
fcetr SSetntg'. 

e. A Verb the first term. g)ev gedtf'botett, the fencing- 
school— fed) 'ten, to fence, fcev SBo'ten, the floor; t>k dint'lwl/ii, 
the riding-school — rei'ten, to ride, tie S3afyn, the course, the 
ground ; tag SBavt'gclt, pay for waiting, for attendance — 
VMV'fiil, to wait, ta£ @ett, money. 

f. _4 Particle the first term, such as ab, an, Cht, &c. 3Me 
2U v rcife, the departure; tie Zia'hmft, the arrival; ter (Sin'* 
gang, the entrance. 

(2) Adjectives. 

a. A Substantive being the first term. ^U'gentreid), rich in 
virtue — tie Sitt'-gfttbj virtue, retch, rich; fraffWl, full of 
strength or power — tie $raft, fccll ; tiS'Hit, cold as ice — 
tag giit, fa-It; golt'aelb, yellow as gold — tag (Sclt, gelb ; 
pccVfcftroarj, black as pitch — tag sped), fcfettat}; got'tegfuvcl); 
tig, pious, fearing God — (Sett, God, and fnrdj'fig (an adjec- 
tive, not usual except in composition) ; fyulfg'betuvfttg, destitute, 
wanting help — tie JpitCfe, betuvftig. 

b. An Adjective the first term. $cici)t'fcrtig, thoughtless, 
flighty; ()eii'biau, light blue; frei'nuflig, voluntary; ai't'Hug, 
wise as an old man. 

c. A Numeral the first term. SH'ei'ecftg, three-cornered, 
triangular; lucr'ecfig, quadrangular, square; jccfjS'fltfig, six- 
footed ; act)t'feitig, having eight sides. 

d. A Particle the first term. Wfy&ltgig, dependent ; d\x'= 
flatlbig, becoming ; iVbevmfttfyig, overbearing, insolent ; ju's 
ftmffig, future; tm'gl&ubig, unbelieving; tin'gevecl)t, unjust. 

e. A Verb the first term, ScnftDlUrfcig, memorable — tenfen, 
to think of, and ITUf'ttg, worthy; fyab'jmtttg, avaricious — 



See note on preceding page. 



VART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 167 

fyft'fcen, to have, and Die @l\d)t, eagei desire ; lie'benStttolf/ 
lovely, amiable — Ue'bctt, to love, rruv'Dig, worthy; Uhm& 
WVtij, praiseworthy — U'bcu to praise, mxtb, deserving. 

(3) Verbs. 

a. A Substantive being the first term. ^ranD'fcba^eu, to 
raise contributions, by the menace of fire — bet S5l*ant>, fire, 
fcfcat'jen, to raise contributions; htjl'VMuDeln, to walk for 
pleasure, to take a walk — Die ku\\> pleasure, nNUl'fceln, to 
walk; Wtt'tiftl'll, to emulate — Die SBet'te, the wager, com- 
petition, ei'fern, to be eager or zealous; roct'tcvlciidjren, to 
lighten without thunder — bctS defter, the weather, the tem- 
pest, kudyttn, to shine; l;anD'i)aben, to handle — tit £aub, 
the hand, fya'bm, to have. 

b. An Adjective the first term. SBotffc'tittg'ftt/ to accomplish 
— Doll, fall, trtng'eti/to bring; fcofljie'tyen, to execute-— jie'fycn, 
to draw. 

c. A Particle the first term. This species of composition 
has been treated of at large, from page 107 to page 114. 

(4) Participles. 

A Substantive being the first term, (a.) The present partici- 
ple : c^r'tteberiD, loving honor, generous — Die <£tyvt, honor, 
Ite'benD, loving; gcfc^gebeuD, legislative — Da<? <25cfe§', the law, 
ge'bcnD, giving ; rMciyfyabenb, having the guard, being on duty, 
as an officer — Die ^acbr'e, the guard, fya'bcnD, having, (b.) The 
past participle: bht'menbch'fatjt, crowned with flowers — Die 
SSlu'm?, the flower, bcfrdttjt 7 , crowned ; fcrmcc'fccDetft, covered 
with snow — Dev @cl)UCe, the snow, bcDctft', covered ; fce'gebo* 
ten, born of the sea — Die @ee, the sea, gfbo'ren, born. 

(5) Particles. 

Compounded with Particles. 33oi ,/ tt)&tt£ / forward, juvficf, 
back; fytttem', into; f)evatt6', out of ; mtffyitt', therefore ; Mtjtt', 
thence ; mmmefyv', now. 

6. The components often remain unaltered ; as, Zy'fdbauttt, 
apple-tree ; itfyr'madjer, watchmaker ; tU'g enDveict), rich in 
virtue : but in many instances, the first term undergoes some 
change, by letters being either added or omitted. 



1g3 formation of new words. [fiook i. 

(1) Letters added. 

Ctt : as, Der. ©Ot'tCg&icnJt, divine service — from ©oft ; 
(Sei'flcSfrraft, power of mind — Det* ©eijt ; Me %0'DegHOtfy, 
agony of death — Dev c £oD. 

0: as, Dag ^im'mcfandjt, the light of heaven — t>ev %\m's 
VHtl ; Dag (£'fe(gof)r, an ass's ear,' the corner of a leaf of a 
book turned down — Del* (E'fff; Dag ftv'beitgfyaug, the work- 
house — Die 2fr'(?ctt; t>cr CSeburtg'tac}, the birth-day — Die 
(BetutVt'; ba^ J^uffg'mtttef, means of assistance, resource — 
tie £urfe. 

US', ens : as, Die gxtC'&enSfeUr, the celebration of peace — ■ 
t>cr grie'De ; Die Jpec'jenggute, goodness of heart — Dag Jpevj, 

The above additional letters mark the genitive case, in the 
first component. 

e : as, Dag Jper'jeletD, affliction of heart — Dag ipet'J ; Det: 
SPfev'&efttS; the horse's foot — Dag $Pfer& ; Dei* ©an'febrafeu, 
the roasted goose — Die (Sang, the goose. 

In some of these examples, the inserted e may be considered 
as the characteristic letter of the plural number. 

11, or en : as, Dag gveu'Deitfejt, the festival of joy, the jubi- 
lee — Die greu'De ; Dag IDradi'eublut, dragon's blood — Der. 
£>vact)'e; Der Jfpet'Demrmtl), heroic courage — Der Sptlb, the 
hero; Dag ipir'tentcben, pastoral life — Der £irt, the herdsman; 
Dei* SSau'mijtoIj, vulgar pride — Dei' SSaU'er, the rustic, the 
clown. 

The additional it, or en, may, in some instances, indicate the 
genitive case, in others the plural number. 

ef: as, Dei* Qu'erhtcfjeil, the omelet — Dag (St, the egg, and 
Dev fttt'cljcn, the cake; Die ^Ml'Derfcforift, ideographic writing 
— Da$ 25ilD, the image, figure, and Die ©d)rift, the writing ; 
Die QOBei'bevlijl, craft of women — Dag QODeib, the woman, and 
Die Sift, cunning. 

The letters er correspond, in these words, with the termina- 
tion of the plural. 



PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 169 

i : this occurs only in two very ancient compounds ; tit 
SRadVftgaU, the nightingale, and ber. SSvau'tigam, the bride- 
groom. 

(2) Letters omitted. 

e, in substantives: as, t>ie Qjltbftfbe, the final syllable — 0(1$ 
Qm'be, the end; tie (Sv'b'folge, the succession — ba$ gv'be, the 
inheritance, bte gol'ge, the act of following or succeeding; 
ber ©onn'tag, Sunday — tie ©onne; ber ftirfdybaum, the 
cherry-tree — tie ^it'fdje. 

eit, in infinitives : as, bet* gedjt'fcoben, the fencing-school — 
fecf)'ten, to fence; bie SKeit'bafyn, the riding-school — rei'teix, to 
ride ; benf ttniubtg, memorable — benf en, to think of, and 
rour'big, worthy; fyab'fudKig, avaricious — tjWbtn, to have. 

These omissions take place because only the radical syllable 
of the first component is employed in composition. 

7. It is not settled by rule when and how these changes in 
the first component are to be made. Analogy and euphony 
alone determine the question. Sometimes a diversity occurs 
in the state of the first component, as it is combined with dif- 
ferent words ; as, fcev SSan'erfyof, the farm, and ber 23a«/= 
evntrieoi, the war of peasants — both from t>et* 23au'er, the 
husbandman, the peasant ; Me (Sfyv'fuvdjt, reverence, and bet* 
(5t)'renr&uber, the reviler — from bte (£t)'ve; bev geu'cvfyerb, the 
hearth, and tie gjcu'evsbumjt, a great fire — from M$ geu'er; 
t<i$ Jpcr'jeteit), affliction of heart, and bte £er'jen$attg|t, anxi- 
ety of heart — from t)(i$ £ev$. But even in regard to the same 
compounds, an uncertainty occasionally prevails: for example, 
be* Qn'ctKnbaum, or bCV (SWbmin, the oak-tree — from bte 
£t'd)e, the oak; (Svb'ffoS, or (Sv'&enfroS, the clod of earth 
— from Die ^v'be. 

8. There are a few instances in which a change of significa- 
tion is produced by the mode of composition ; as, bet* $anb'; 
mann, the husbandman, the peasant, and ber UnbS'mann, the 
compatriot; ^fU'mittef, medicine, and J^cite'mtttel, means o! 
salvation ; gffo'wivtfyfcljafc, agriculture, and §e('bern>irtf;fcl)aft 
rotation in crops. 

15 



170 ' FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 

9. The more ancient compounds cannot always be reduced 
to that analogy, by which the composition of words is now 
regulated. 

10. When it happens that two or more compound words 
occur in a sentence, having the second component the same, 
this component is frequently omitted in the first word, or words, 
and only expressed in the word that is last : as, Spfaf feu-' linfc 
^Bci'bniift, craft of priests and women; $ri(g& tflt&.gri^ 
fccnSjcitcn, times of war and peace ; *3cU 25iti^ nnt> §<i|fctag, 
day of prayer, repentance, and fasting. The hyphen is then 
put after the first word or words. 



§ 2. OF THE INTRODUCTION OF FOREIGN WORDS INTO THE 
GERMAN LANGUAGE. 

The German language is sufficiently copious and produc- 
tive, to furnish native words for any idea that can be expressed 
at all. Moreover, it is so old, that none of the known 
languages of the earth can be considered as its parent ; and 
the radical words as well as the manner of forming new terms, 
are so peculiar, that the German cannot borrow expressions 
from foreign languages without violating its own idiom. This 
being the character of the language, the best German scholars 
have laid down the general rule, that in speaking and writing, 
all those terms which are not of genuine German growth, but 
imported from foreign languages, should be avoided. It was by 
disregarding this principle, that, particularly from the last half 
of the sixteenth, until the last half of the eighteenth century, 
a considerable number of Latin and French terms were intro- 
duced into the language; many of which are still in common 
use. But a sounder taste, and a better knowledge of the native 
riches and powers of the language, have already cleared it of 
many of those heterogeneous ingredients ; and there is reason 
to hope that this purifying principle will by degrees succeed 
in removing all these inconsistencies, without indulging in the 
blind zeal of an over-hasty and extravagant il purism." 

According to this principle, we ought to be directed by the 
following rules. 

I. No foreign word should be used, if the same idea may 
be conveyed by a native term, equally expressive and usual. 
It is improper, for example, to say CjCeufCvcn, instead of entfcl)ul'* 



PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 171 

fcigen, to excuse ; or SDfrfcicament', instead of J^cil'mittef, 
medicine; or Sftatiouafmilij, instead of SailD'lKl)!*, national 
rnilitia. 

2. A genuine German word should be preferred to a for- 
eign one, if the former, although less usual, is equally expres- 
sive, and not yet wholly obsolete. Thus, SBor'fyllt, advanced 
guard, is better than ibant'gatPC ; Sftaclyfylit, rear guard, is 
better than ftvicve'gavDe ; and SDftt'tcltveffcit/ centre of the 
army, is better than Sen'twm. 

3. If we find no word already formed to express a particular 
idea, we should, instead of resorting to foreign languages, 
rather try to form a new word, in the true German style, either 
by derivation, or composition, which have been treated of in 
the preceding section. 

a. By derivation, for example, the words ^olftf'tfyltm, na- 
tionality, toolfg'tfn'unticft, national, and < ^ott'S'tf)umlic(){ ! ett, 
national peculiarity, have lately been formed from the radical 
word ^BoiC, people or nation ; and those words have already, 
in a great measure, displaced the foreign terms, Sftattonalitat', 
national', and 3Utiona^Qsigcntl)ftm'lid)l:eit. 

h. In the way of composition, a foreign word may be ren- 
dered in German, by resolving its meaning into the component 
ideas. 

Take for example the French word courrier, which means a 
messenger who is to proceed with speed. In this instance, 
the more general idea of a messenger is defined by the par- 
ticular idea of speed. Messenger, in German, is £8o'te, and 
speed, Qsi'k; and these two words being put together accord- 
ing to Rule II. of the preceding section, form the word 
^il'botc. This is preferable to Sonricr', which ought not to 
be considered a German word, as it is needlessly borrowed 
from a foreign language. — In the same manner the French 
word diligence, which is frequently used in Germany to denote 
a carriage which is to travel with despatch, may be rendered 
by Qpil'lMgen ; from <2Ba'$en, carriage, and (Si'le, despatch ; 
and this German word has already displaced in a great meas- 
ure the barbarous term SM'ftflcnce. 

But in seeking native for foreign words, we ought, to guard 
against mere literal translations. It is the sense of the foreign 
words which is to be rendered in German, and not the man- 



172 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 

ner in which this sense is expressed in the language to which 
they belong. Thus the French word ailee, which is sometimes 
used in Germany as signifying a walk planted with trees, can- 
not be rendered simply by (Sang, walk ; but by SSaum'gang, 
from (Sang, walk, and 23attm, tree. 

4. The general language which is at present spoken by all 
well-bred persons in Germany, may be recruited, by antiquated 
German words, and by local or provincial expressions. But 
they cannot be considered as parts of the general and living 
language, until good German writers have obtained for them 
the sanction of public opinion. 

a. The word tuv'ncn, to perform gymnastic exercises, is an 
example of an antiquated term, which has been restored to the 
living language. This word, having lately been revived by 
Jahn, is now, with all the derivative and compound words 
which have been formed from it, a legitimate German term. 

b. " Provincial terms," says Jahn, " are the militia, which 
take the field when the standing army of book-words is defeat- 
ed." Thus the Swiss word iaroi'nc, avalanche, has become a 
classical German word. 

5. A number of foreign words which have taken a German 
termination, and of which many derivative and compound 
words have been formed, may now be considered as natural- 
ized ; as, the word Statin*', nature, which has been employed 
in forming the derivative expressions Un'natUV, unnatural 
state ; natltv'lid), natural, SftatitHicljfctt, natural appearance ; 
and the compound words, SRatltv'|tan&, state of nature ; SKta^ 
tUK'Vtd)t, natural right ; and many others. The words, fHCgcl, 
rule, and §ami'(ic, family, are similar instances of naturalized 
words. 

6. There are some expressions, borrowed from foreign 
languages, which may be considered almost in the light of 
proper names, peculiarly and exclusively belonging to the 
objects which they designate. Of this kind are 'XtjU, tea ; 
kaf fee, coffee ; @cf)o£o(a'&e, chocolate ; Sabaf , tobacco. To 
attempt to Germanize such terms would be an absurdity. 

7. There are some foreign terms, which, according to their 
general and permanent signification, might be rendered in 



PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 173 

German, but are nevertheless preserved by good writers, be- 
cause they have a reference to peculiar circumstances and 
times. Thus the native words, ^5otf, people, and ipect, army, 
are in general to be preferred to the foreign terms, Station', 
and 2fvmcc' ; but in the time of Napoleon, the expressions, Die 
gvo'fe 2trmee', the Grand Army, and Me gvo'fe Station', the 
Great Nation, had a special and transitory meaning, for which 
the foreign appellatives were better suited than the true Ger- 
man expressions. 

8. As the process of purifying the language from improper 
mixtures must be a gradual one, it is particularly desirable that 
they should be most carefully avoided in works which are likely 
to be of lasting importance. From works of this character, 
the changes may and will proceed, by degrees, to lighter kinds 
of literature, and conversation ; while a precipitate or pre- 
posterous attempt at purification, which would obstruct the 
natural flow of thought and expression, is as much averse to 
the genius of the language, as those very impurities which it is 
intended to remove. 



15* 



BOOK II. 

SYNTAX. 



AGREEMENT, GOVERNMENT, AND ARRANGEMENT 
OF WORDS. 

The agreement of words consists in their being put in the 
same gender, number, case, and person. 

One word is said to govern another, when, by the power of 
the former, the latter is made to assume a particular form ; for 
example, a certain case in declension, or mood in conjugation. 

The arrangement of words consists in placing them in the 
proper order in which they should succeed each other. 



CHAPTER I. 
THE ARTICLE. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
RULE I. 

The articles em and bei 4 are generally used in German, as 
a and the in English. In German, moreover, they must agree 
with the noun in gender, number, and case, whether the noun 
be preceded by an adjective or not ; as, eitt Sftatttt, a man - r 
ei'nem <m'ten SQton'ne, to a good man ; ei'net tteff ticfjen $vau, 
to an excellent woman : M$ djeu'tt TCn'&eitfen ei'ltetf Qtl'uh'ttn 
^in'fceS, the dear remembrance of a beloved child. 



CH. 1. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 175 

Obs. 1. The article is never placed between the noun and 
its adjective, but always before the adjective ; as, Ctn tyaf ber 
330'gen, half a sheet ; ei'ne tyaf be @tun't>e, half an hour ; tin 
tyat'beS Satyr, half a year ; Me (jci'&en Un'Der, both the coun- 
tries ; DaS gan'je Satyr, all the year ; t>er tyat'be ^ag, half the 
day. 

Obs. 2. In compounds the article agrees with the gender of 
the last word ; as, fccr iie'be$brief, the love letter ; i>te SEet'- 
terfatyne, the weathercock ; M$ @tai)t'tyau6, the town-house. 

Exercises. 

Give me the book. Bring me a pen. Here is a knife. Lend 
him the penknife. He has the ink. Write an answer. I saw 
the friends. 

to give, §e'U\\, irr. penknife, ge'fcermeffer,ra.3.a.a. 

book, SSucl), n. 3. b. e. ink, £>tu'te, /. 1. c. 

to bring, brtna/en. to write, fcljrei'ben. 

pen, ge'fcer, /. 1. C. answer, Znt'YOOVt, f. 1. t>. 

here, tyier. to see, fe'tyen, irr. 

knife, SOtcf'fer, n. 3. a. a. friend, greunfc, m. 3. b. 6. 

to lend, lei'tyen. 

RULE II. 

The article fcer is used in German, though not in English, 
before most nouns in a universal sense, or where a common 
noun is, as it were, personified ; as, M$ ie'bcu, life ; t>a$ "Ui'ttV, 
age ; t>er gruty'(mc|, spring ; i)er ©om'mer, summer ; UV 
S5tcnfc(), man ; t>ie 50Ien'fc()en, men or mankind ; also before 
all common nouns in the oblique cases ; as, fca£ $i\\b bt$ 
^ni'toxZ, the brother's child. 

Also before most adjectives taken substantively; as, M$ 
(Sn'te, good or goodness ; ein (&tUt}pWfy a learned man; bet* 
(BthtjV'tt, the learned. 

RULE III. 

Before proper names the article is generally omitted. 
1. Before the proper names of places, the article is most 
commonly omitted, particularly in the nominative ; as, Jott'&Ott/ 



176 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK II. 

spc'tCVStutrg, Ghll'O'pa, ®ng'lan&. But the following nouns are 
exceptions to this rule : 

fcic ^uvfci', Turkey. fcer £aag, the Hague, 

bie fcombav&ei', Lombardy. £>ie £5d)n>ei$, Switzerland, 

fcie 2fttc'fccr(an&e, the Nether- fc»»e ictoan'te, the Levant, 

lands. i>ie ^Pfalj, the Palatinate. 

Also the Germans say, t>ic @taK ion'&Ott, the city of Lon- 
don ; t>a$ ^S'liigmd) granr'md), the kingdom of France, &c. 

2. The proper names of persons generally take no article in 
the nominative, nor, when they have a change of termination, 
in the oblique cases ; as, (Ei'ccroS §He'Den, Cicero's Orations. 
In the oblique cases, when there is no change of termination, 
the article may be used ; as, 33rji r tU$ td'&cte Den Sa'jai*/ Bru- 
tus killed Ceesar. 

In speaking familiarly of well-known persons, the definite 
article is sometimes used, even in the nominative case ; as, 
fcCl* $CU'(, Charles ; &ic itti'fe, Louisa. 

A proper name when used as a common noun, requires the 
article before it ; as t>cr spia'to fci'ncS 3eit',aftfr-£, the Plato of 
his age. 

Exercises. 

Death itself is not so dreadful. 

Man is rational, man is mortal. 

He has a house in (the) town. 

We are going to (the) church. 

They come from (the) church. 

Neptune was the god of the seas. 

I am going to London. 

I come from Holland. 

Cicero was an excellent orator. 

The temple of Solomon was magnificent. 

Death, $0t>, m. 3. b. b mortal, ftct'Mid). 

itself, fclbjt. house, J$aus, n. 3. b. e. 

not, tticfet. in, in. (Dot.) 

so, fo. town, <&U\\>t, f. 1. i\ 

dreadful, fftreb'tcrlicft. to go, ge'fyen, followed by in. 

man, SJlcnfd), m. 2. b. (Ace.) 

rational, fcrniiinftig. church, £if'd)e, f, 1. C. 



CH. 1. § 1.] 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



177 



to come, fom'mett. 

from, t>on. (Dat.) 
Neptune, SReptMt'. 
was, xtxxx. 

god, (Sott, m. 3. b. e. 
sea, SD^cet*/ n. 3. b. b. 
to go, ge'fyen. 
to, nacl). 



to come, fom'men. 
from, von. 

Cicero, £i'cevo. 
excellent, tteff'ttd). 
orator, SReft'net:, m. 3. a. 0. 
temple, ^em'pel, m. 3. a. 0. 
Solomon, ©a'tomo. 
magnificent, pvacb'tig. 



RULE IV. 

The article is repeated before nouns of different genders ; 
as, t>et* 2*a'tet, Die ffllut'tn UttD M$ SUnt>, the father, mother, 
and child : but before nouns each of which requires the same 
article, it should be put only before the first; as, t)CV SHotf UUt> 
4?ttt, the coat and hat. 

Sometimes, however, the article is repeated before each of 
several nouns of the same gender, for the purpose of express- 
ing the importance of each one of them : for example, when 
different subjects are enumerated in a title, or superscription ; 
as in that of the fable, £)ev gttcl)6 imt> Dev SKa'be, The Fox and 
the Raven. 



Exercises. 

The man, woman, and child are gone out. 

The hare and pigeon. 

The father, mother, son, and daughter are in the country. 

The sheep, cow, and dog. 

I left the book and ruler upon the table. 

Give me the pen and penknife. 

The father and son (do) not 3 resemble 1 each 2 other 2 . 



man, *93?atttt, m. 3. b. e. 
woman, gvau, /. 1. t>. 
child, %\\\X>, n. 3. b. e. 
to go out, aus'gcfyen, irr. 
hare, £a'fe, m. 2. a. 
pigeon, Sau'be, /. 1. c. 
in, cutf. (Dat.) 
country, $anb, n. 3. b. e. 
sheep, @d)af, n. 3. b. b. 
cow, Rut}, f. 1. b. 
dog, JpuuD, m. 3. b. b. 



to leave, faf fett/ irr. 
book, *Bud), n. 3. b. e. 
ruler, iimaV, n. 3. b. b, (Ace.) 
upon, auf. (Dat.) 
table, tifdy, m. 3. b. b. 
pen, ge'&er, /. 1. c. 
penknife,§e'bevmefTev, n. 3. a. 0» 
father, *33a'tCV, m. 3. a. a. 
son, @of)tt, m. 3. b. b. 
to resemble, gfei'c^en. 
each other, fic(). 



178 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK II. 



RULE V. 

In an emphatic manner of speaking, the article is frequent- 
ly omitted where it ought to be used, according to Rule II, 
and Rule IV, particularly in the plural number; as, (Sewr/te 
unt> Un'gerecrjte, 9D?cn'fcl)cn nnt> Xt^e're fan'Den in t>en 3£ei'(en 
tr/r (Brcib, The just and the unjust, men and beasts found their 
grave in the waves. 

RULE VI. 

The article is omitted, whenever the substantive expresses 
a part of a thing, which in English is denoted by the word 
some, (answering to the French du, de la, de /', des) ; as, 
SBring'en ©ie mil* 25vot>, Bring me some bread ; J^a'bett ©ie 
papier/, Sin'te, &c 1 Have you some paper, ink, &c? 

Exercises. 

Have you eaten 2 bread 1 and drunk 2 water 1 ? 
Bring me some wine and water. 
I have bought 3 some 2 silk 2 to-day 1 . 
Give me some paper, ink, and pens. 

bread, SSrofc, n. 3. b. 6. to-day, fyen'te. 

to eat, cf'fcn, irr. silk, ©et'fce, /. 1. 

water, differ, n. 3. a. a. to buy, fanfen. 

to drink, tVtnf'Ctt, irr. to give, ge'ben, irr. 

wine, SBeitt, m. 3. b. 6. paper, papier/, n. 3. b. 6. 

RULE VII. 

In some phrases the article is commonly omitted in German, 
where it is in English either expressed, or has a pronoun put 
in its place; as, llberbving'et* t>ie'fe£, the bearer of this; in 
bef'tci* Or&'nung, in the best order ; fcor (gn'&igung t>c$ @cl)an'- 
fpiclo/ before the conclusion of the drama ; id) ty\'b<l e6 in 
J^an'&en, I have it in my hands ; ic() x)t'bc eg Dor Wgrn, I 
have it before my eyes. — The same peculiarity is to be observ- 
ed in regard to some adjectives and participles ; as, er'jtem, 
the former ; [caterer, the latter ; befag'tcv, the aforesaid ; 
txxoatjix'tn, or gebad)'ter, the abovementioned ; gcnanu'tci*, the 



CH. 1. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 17S 

abovenamed ; foTgcnbCV, the. following : also with respect to 
some proper names \ a^, {.lyi' t> i eH/.-^he-Eig st J^cJ^^.QlB Coin's 
fctcn, the West Indies. ., ,; .? V' V *N ^ **l 

4 4 

§ 2. ARRANGEMENT. . 

The article must be put immediately before the ttoun to 
which it belongs, if the noun is not preceded by other words 
which qualify it; as, eitt 93?attil, a man; t>ie gran, the woman 
If the noun is preceded by other qualifying words, the article 
must be put before them. Thus, if the noun be preceded by 
an adjective, the article must be placed before the adjective , 
as, fcet git'te £Dfoim; and if the adjective is qualified by an ad- 
verb or a participial construction, the article precedes this ; 
as, ei'ne fcfyr. glt'tC grail, a very good woman ; tie (li'leS fiber* 
ttue'gcnfce ik'bt jum SHutym, the all-surpassing love of glory. If 
the adjective, for the sake of emphasis, is put after the noun 
in the way of apposition, the article immediately precedes the 
adjective, or the adverb, or participial construction, by which 
it is qualified ; as, SftatUV', t>ic fyet'lige, sacred nature ; ttn'fct* 
greimD in f$WV0dj \>mni\f tt, our deeply regretted friend; 
^Vteg, t>er San'fcei: fccrfyee'reufce, war which desolates countries. 

Exercises. 

Of the celebrated painter. An ill fed horse. The sea 3 
connecting 2 (the) nations 1 . The 2 most 3 hearty 3 joy 1 . For- 
bearance, (the) never tiring. He was a victim of (the) passion, 
(the) deluding the heart, corrupting the taste, deranging the 
intellect. 

celebrated, fccvftfymt'. never, nic. 

painter, SDTa'Uv, m. 3. a. a. to tire, cnmVfcen. 

ill, )d)Ud)t victim, Cp'fcv, n. 

fed, gefut'tevt. passion, Sei'Dcnfctjaft, /. 

horse, ^)fcrt>, n. 3. a. a. to delude, bctt}6'vcn. 

nation, *33o[f, n. 3. b. e. heart, Jjpevj, n. 

to connect, Devbiu'ten. to corrupt, fcevt>er'6en. 

sea, @ee, / taste, ©efcfomatf', m. 3. b. 

joy, greu'fce, /. to derange,' jcvrirt'ten. 

hearty, f)cr$'(idj. intellect, ©cijc, m. U. b. C. 

forbearance, Jang'mnffy, /. 



180 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 

... y CHAPTER II.. 

NOUNS. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
RULE I. 

Two or more nouns are put in the same case, 

1 . When they are brought together only to show their com- 
mon relation to another object ; as, (3tVtd)'ti§hit, ^ofy^ 
tk)ati$hit tmt> Sr&wrtttigf eit ftnfc> t»te Wtext'maU d'nes Swiften, 
Justice, charity, and piety are the characteristics of a Chris- 
tian. 

2. When they are put together to denote the same object, 
so that one of them either completes or explains* the other ; 
as, fcev 50To'nat £D?ai, the month of May • t>er diatt) fcei'nes 
23nt't>erS, DeS SHecljtS'gelefyvten, the advice of thy brother, the 
lawyer. 

RULE II. 

When one noun is qualified by another, the latter is gener- 
ally put in the genitive case ; as, tie fivtu'ttn t>eir 3ll'$lM>, the 
pleasures of youth ; Die $Ylld)t i>eu (Stfennf ni§ t>e£ ©u'tcn m\t> 
256'fcil/ the fruit of the knowledge of good and evil. 

An exception is made when the noun which qualifies anoth- 
er, denotes the object, of which the other is a part, only in a 
general manner ; especially, if the qualifying noun expresses 
an object which may be measured, weighed, or numbered. In 
such instances the qualifying noun remains in the nominative, 
singular or plural ; as, jefytt (SHeil ^lld) (instead of ^tl'djeS), 
ten yards of cloth ; ein ©tftcf 23t*0t) (instead of 25ro'De6)/ a 
piece of bread ; ein ©lag ^cin (instead of < 2Dci'nC6') / a glass 
of wine ; ein 2)ut'jen& iidytev, a dozen candles. 



* When the preceding is explained by the subsequent noun, 
the latter is said to be in apposition with the former. 



CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 181 

But the genitive is required if the qualifying noun is more 
exactly designated by a pronoun or an adjective ; as, jefylt 
<£('(cn bit'\t$ ^U'djCtf, ten yards of this cloth; jrcei gaf'fev 
gu'ten ^XBci'neS, two casks of good wine. 

Observation. Nouns of the masculine and neuter genders, 
expressing measure, weight, or number, remain, after numerals, 
in the nominative singular ; as, jroan'jig §lt6 (instead of §ft'fe) 
idltg'e, twenty feet in length ; fcrei Boll (instead of %ol'U) Mlt, 
three inches in breadth ; %mi spaav (instead of spaa've) 
©triUll'pfc, three pairs of stockings. Measures of time, as, 
3a^r, year, $ag, day, and names of coins, as, ©clnCIing, shil- 
ling, are excepted. 

RULE III. 

The genitive case is, frequently, supplied by the preposition 
Von, of, with the dative. This is done, 

1. When the article is excluded; as, Oer nSrb'Itcfef %t)tit 
Von Qsng'tanD, the northern part of England ; tie (*H*cu'jen 
VOU §V an f've id), the boundaries of France. 

2. When quality, condition, or proportion, is implied ; as, 
fin 50tann Von 33evftan'oe, a man of sense ; ein %nv Von 
co'lcv 2)cnf nngScivt, a gentleman of a noble character ; cine 
SHei'fc Von jcftn SOTei'lcn, a journey of ten miles; ein @cl)tff 
von jroei Intn'&cvt ^on'nen, a ship of two hundred tons ; erne 
©iim'me von jroan'jig (Bul'&en into fftnf (Svofclj'en, a sum 
of twenty guilders and five groats; ein SDfalttn Von acfjt'jig 
3&tyttn, a man of eighty years. 

3. When the material is mentioned, of which any thing is 
made ; as, et'ne Ut)V Von (Sol'Oe, the same as, ei'nc gol'fccne 
Ufyr, a gold watch ; tin 25eci)'er von ©il'bcr, a silver cup; tin 
@tttt?l Von Cl'fen&ein, an ivory chair. 

4. Before the indefinite article, to denote character; as, 
ein flb'fcfeen Von ei'ncm SDftn'fcfcen, a horrible villain, (literally, 
a horror of a man) ; ein 2(n$bunt> Von ei'ncm e^r'fidjen 
SDfan'ne, a pattern of an honest man. 

5. To prevent an inelegant repetition of the same endings ; 
as, tie Ut'fad)t Von Dent fon'ocrbaren S5etra'gfn Detf SXKan'netf, 
the reason of the singular conduct of the man, — instead of t>ie 
uYfacl)e t>es fon'fcerbaven SSetvagens Des D^an'ncb'. 

16 



182 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK. II. 

Sometimes it is indifferent, whether i)0U be made use of, or 
the genitive case : for example, ton ©cfocin fcOU SKc&'Uct^eit 
I^Vbcu, or ton ©cbcin tot SHet>'(icb{?eit l)a'ben, to have the ap- 
pearance of honesty ; tot nfcvfc'licfoe $i)eil fcon Qihtg'Uni), or, 
tot nov&'licfoe %i)tii ©nci'UufcS, the northern part of England ; 
ci'nci* turn mei'nen gveun'&cn, or ei'ncv met'nei* gmtn'fce, one 
of my friends. But where the genitive is not distinguished by 
the article, or the termination, foon must be employed. Before 
the article it is often superfluous ; as, ton @cl)CtH fcon tot 
<£u'gett6 fya'bctt, to have the show of virtue. 3)er ^u'gent), 
as the genitive case, would be sufficient, without the prepo- 
sition. 

Exercises. 

The friends of right and order are contending against the 
passions and prejudices of the oppressors and the oppressed. 

The town of Schwytz is the capital of the canton of 
Schwytz. 

You confounded John the Baptist with John the Evangelist. 

The merits of the first President of the United States. 

What is the price of a hundred weight of lead ? 

I see a great number of children. 

I want three cords of that wood. 

He gave me a canister of genuine imperial tea. 

I bought ten pounds of meat. 

Natives of Europe displaced the aborigines of America. 

He is a man of high rank and great pretensions, but no 
merit. 

A helmet of steel with ornaments of silver. 

Is he not a model of a good son ? 

friend, gvcunf, m. 3. b. k oppressed, untet'Uutcft'. 

right, SKecvjt, m. 3. b. b. town, glec'fen, m. 3. a. a. 

order, OrD'mmg, /. 1. D. capital, £aupt'ovt, m. 3. b. b. 

to contend, tampfen. canton, Canton', m. 3. b. b. 

against, gc'gen, {Ace.) to confound, tottotdtfdn. 

passion, iet'fcenfcfoaft, /. 1. 1>. John, Soljan'nes. 

and, tint). Baptist, Sau'fer, m. 3. a. a. 

prejudice, ^OV'ltVtfyfU, n. 3. with, mit. (Dat.) 

b. b. Evangelist, SfeangelijV, to. 2. b. 

oppressor, Unttttoht'ht, m. 3. merit, 33evt>icn|t', n. 3. b. b. 

a. a. the first, tot CV'jte. 



CH. 2. § 1.] 



SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 



183 



president, spraflDCUt', m. 2. b. 
united, bcvci'nigt. 
state, ©taat, m. 3. b. t>. 
price, SpveiS, m. 3. b. b. 
hundred weight, Seitt'llCt, m. 

3. a. a. 
lead, 23ici, n. 3. b. b. 
to see, fe'fyen, 
great, $V0S. 

number, 90?ena/C, /. 1. C. 
child, ftino, n. 3. b. e. 
to want, brau'cfeen. 
cord, St (after, /. 1. a. 
wood, £o(£, w. 3. b. c. 
to give, gc'bcn, zrr. 
canister, SMcfc'fe, /. 1- C. 
genuine, acl)t. 
imperial tea, ^ai'fcvtfyee, m. 

3. a. 
to buy, fau'fCH. 
pound, spfunt), rc. 3. b. b. 



meat, gfeifcfo, rc. 3 b. b. 
native, cin'gebotm 
Europe, (Suro'po. 
to displace, fcevovano/en. 
aborigines, Ur'beroofyncr, m. 

3. a. a. 
man, "*90?amt, m. 3. b. e. 
high, t)0d). 
rank, Dtang, m. 3. b. 
pretension, *2Ul'fpvitclj, m. 3. 

b. b. 
but, a'fcct. 

no, fein. 

helmet, £cfm, m. 3. b. b, 

steel, ©tat)!, w. 3. b. b. 

with, mit. (Dat.) 

ornament, gte'vatfy, /. 1. t>. 

silver, ©il'bcv, ra. 3. a. a. 

not, nicbt. 

model, SDtuf'tei*, n. 3. a. a. 

good, out, 

son, ©0*1)11, ?»• 3. b. b. 



The genitive case often occurs, where there is apparently 
no word to govern it. Thus it expresses : 

I. Relation of time. 2)e$ "OTentu?, in the evening ; 0e£ 
"SftoV'genS,* in the morning ; DCS SDttt'ta.qg, at noon ; OeS 
Sflacl)t6,t in the night ; ©onn'abcn&S, on Saturday ; SOton'* 
taa,S, on Monday ; et'neS $a'ge$, one day, on a certain day ; 
fyeu'tigetf 3:a'ge$, this day ■ ein'tnal bcS CQio'uatce, once in a 
month ; toiev'mat De$ l^afy'reS, four times in a year. 



* The same idiom prevails in the Greek language; as, 
oq&qov, early in the morning ; vvxtoq, in the night. 

t Here the article corresponds with the termination, and 
not with the gender, of the substantive ; the addition of g (to 
Start) t, f. 1. b.) being formerly the characteristic of the geni- 
tive singular in all declensions. 



184 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 

2. Relation of place. SDic'fetf Ot'Ug, in this place; gcfjft'* 
Vtgen £l''te6, in or at a proper place ; al'let* Ov'tt, in all places, 
every where. 

3. Way and manner. (Sera'bes (or geva'Den) IBe'ges, 
straightways ; fte'l)ent>en §u'fe$/ immediately ; fcte'fer ©ejtalt', 
in this manner ; fol'gen&et* (&t\H{t','m the following manner ; 
mti'Mt XtyilS, on my part; nn'fent 3:l)eil$, on our part; 
ttiei'neS ^if'fenS, to my knowledge ; mei'neS SSe&itnf'enS/ in 
my opinion; et'niger. SOTa'fen, in some measure; gercif'fer 
SDZa'fen, in a certain degree ; nn'*>ervid)tetet @ad)'e, not hav- 
ing effected one's purpose. Also the following phrases: J£ ting's 
ertf jter'kn, to die of hunger; ei'nes fd)mer£'(id)en ^Cfces 
jfer'bett, to die a painful death ; t)CV ^offming le'ben, to live 
in hope; Det? $VL'txa\m\$ fe'ben, to live with confidence, that 
is, to entertain a confident opinion with regard to a thing. 
With the verb fein : as, ^iHettS feitt, to intend ; in SDtet'nting 
few, to be of an opinion ; DeS %0'M$ fcin, to perish. 

RULE V. 

The accusative case is employed to denote time, both as to 
date and duration. — Date : Den jefyn'tett $ag nael) Der @f()(acl)t, 
the tenth day after the battle ; fo ttat' t$ i>a$ n'\U 3<*fyr, thus 
it was (in) the first year; Den tlttm'tttt Su'li, the ninth of July ; 
fco'vigen Sienf'tag, last Tuesday; Dvet mat Die 2X>od)'e (Ace), 
three times a week. —Duration: id) bill Den gatl'jen iag JU 
Jpan'fe geroe'fen, I have been at home the whole day ; id) roer'- 
De nod) ei'nen 90?o'nat in Der ©taDt bki'bm, I shall remain 
yet a month in town; fcerroeHen @ie ei'nen Ztu'genblicf, stay 
one moment. The adverb tang, long, is frequently subjoined 
to mark the duration ; as, £Cl)lt 3at}'re (ang, for ten years. 

After certain adjectives and verbs, signifying weight, mea- 
sure, extent, age, price, value, such as, groS, great, bveit, broad, 
fd)t»er, heavy, rote'gen, to weigh, fof'ten, to coast, the accusa- 
tive follows, gt'nen gits bint, a foot broad ; ei'nen SKo'naC 
alt, a month old ; e$ roiegt ei'nen 3«tt'ner / it weighs a hundred 
weight. 

Space and motion are indicated by the accusative. (Ei'nen 
tang'en ^eg ge'fyen, to go a long way ; Den S5cvg tjimm'tev 
(cut'fen, to run down the mountain ; ev gel)t ei'nen gtt'tcn 
@el)Vttt, he walks a good pace. 



CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 18£ 

RULE VI. 

The gender is deviated from, when the meaning of the 
word is more regarded, than its grammatical nature. 3)ic'fe$ 
grau'cnjimmer i\\ am fcfc&n'jten, roenn fie fid) nicfct fdnninft,- 
This lady is most handsome when she does not paint herself, 
grait'enjitnmer is of the neuter gender, but the pronoun fte, 
she, is feminine, because this is the gender which the subject 
naturally has. Q;v liebt fciu c 2Bcib Mcfet, fon'fcmi migban'&elt 
fte, He does not love his wife, but treats her ill. c 33Seib is neuter, 
and the feminine fie answers to it. 

RULE VII. 

The English often admits a different number, in the verb, 
from what its subject, according to strict grammar, would 
require; as, "All the company were present;" "The army 
of martyrs praise thee." The German, however, does not 
allow this deviation, but always requires the verb to agree in 
number with its subject; as, Me gatl'je ©cfett'fd)aft War 

On the other hand, in German the singular number is some- 
times used collectively, in reference to more than one subject, 
where in English the plural would be employed. For example : 
jjetytt 93?en'fd)en fya'ben i\)v te'bm em'selmft, Ten persons have 
lost their life ; according to the English, lives. ?&ltt)V &l$ 
fyuu'&crt SSftv'ger fya'bcn ify'vcn Sfta'men imterjeidvnet, More than 
a hundred citizens have subscribed their name, — in English, 
names. 2)ie vo'ttjt, bfau'C, unD gel be gafbe, the red, blue, 
and yellow color, — in English, colors. 3)ie granjo'ftfdje ttttb 
StaUa'uifdje ©pra'dje, the French and Italian language, — in 
English, languages. In these two last examples, the German 
idiom may be accounted for by the figure ellipsis, thus ; t>ie 
ro'tfyc (gar'fce), bfow'e (gav'be), unD gei'be gar'be, the red 
(color), the blue (color), and the yellow color; 2)ic gxcmjS's 
fifebe (©pra'cfte) itnt> Staftft'nifdje ©pra'cfce, The French (lan- 
guage), and Italian language. 

Exercises. 

The people call them time-pleasers, flatterers. We are 
wholly of your opinion. He walks ten miles, twice a day. 
Their faces are turned 3 to 1 (the) East 2 . In the forenoon I am 
16* 



186 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN, [fiOOK II. 

commonly at home, but in the afternoon I 2 ride out. He did 1 
not 2 yield 1 a 2 finger's breadth (a finger broad.) 

people, *33o(f, n. 3. b. c. East, Ottot'gen, m. 3. a. a. 

to call, ncn'nen, mix. to turn, wen'&en, mix. 

time-pleaser, SSJet'terfafynf, /. forenoon, SJor'mittag, m. 3. 

1. c. b. 6. 
flatterer, ©efcmeidj'fcr, m. 3. commonly, gercSfylt'ftd). 

a. rt. at home, ju £attfe. 

wholly, ganj. afternoon, Dtad)'mittag, w. 3. 

opinion, SDtet'ttUttg, /. 1. J>. b. b. 

to walk, ge'fycn, irr. to ride out, au^vetteit, irr. 

mile, SDWfe, /. I.e. to yield, mi'dnn, irr. 

day, $ag, »i. 3. b. fc. not a, frill, 

face, (Softest 7 , n. 3. b. e. finger, gtng'er, m. 3. a. a. 

to, nad). (I?a£. ) broad, bveit. 



§ 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
RULE I. 

The noun, in the nominative case, being the subject of a 
sentence, is generally placed before the verb. 

Note. — The subject is to be distinguished from the object: 
the former governs the verb, and the latter is governed by the 
verb : for instance, T>a ^a'tn ikbt fei'nen @ofytl, The father 
loves his son. Here, t>CV ^a'tCV is the subject, which governs 
the verb, that is to say, the verb must agree with it, in number 
and person ; fei'nen ©ot)ll' is the object, which is governed by 
the verb, because it must, in compliance with the nature of 
the verb, stand in a particular case. 

Exceptions to the first Rule. 

The subject is put after the verb, 

1. In a direct question ; as, <&d)Xnbt &CV STRami ? Hoes the 
man write? ©ctjrcifct, the verb — t>ev attaint, the subject. It 
is the same, when the question begins with an interrogative 
pronoun, or interrogative adverb ; as, <2Ba$ fagt t>et* ^a'tei* ? 
What says the father? SJBri'djCS 23ud) liejt tw @d)lV(er? Which 



GH 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 187 

book does the pupil read ? ^DBaiutm' Ud)t t>er £na'be ? Why 
does the boy laugh ? ^esroe'gen vomit fcie @cl)roef'tev ? What 
does the sister weep for ? 

2. When instead of the subject, some other word or phrase, 
generally for the purpose of emphasis, is placed at the head of 
the sentence ; particularly in the following cases : 

a. When the object is placed at the head of a sentence. 
For instance ; 2)ie'fe$ (Shut 0fllie(t' fret ^u'genfcfyafte, This 
happiness the virtuous man enjoys. 2)ev "itu'genfcfyafte, is 
the subject, which follows after the verb genie|t'; because 
the object, fcie'feS ©(utf, begins the sentence. 

b. When the dative or accusative case of the person stands 
first; as, £>em SCKen'fcrjen ijt t>ae? Mm tfyeu'er, To man life is 
dear; SHc'jVn ^na'ben fyatmein gmmfc bie granjoftfcbe ©pva'dje 
gelefyft', jTo ^'s 6oy my friend taught the French language. 
The sentences here begin with a case of person, and the sub- 
ject is found after the verb. This, and the preceding excep- 
tion, may perhaps be together comprehended in these words, 
viz. When any oblique case of declension begins a sentence, 
the subject must come after the verb. 

c. When an adjective or pronoun, belonging to the subject 
or object, begins the sentence. (&Ut tft fccr ^etn $wav, a'bet* 
attd) tfyeu'ev, The wine indeed is good, but also dear. The 
adjective gut, in this instance, belongs to the subject, and, 
beginning the sentence, displaces the subject, fcer^Betlt. (fhtt 
fin'ixt mein SJa'ter ten QOBetn, &c. My father finds the wine 
good. Here gut belongs to the object, ben QGBetn, and has the 
same influence on the subject. The same is also to be observed 
of the pronoun, when it belongs to the subject or object ; as, 
SOcciu ift t>a£ ipattS, Mine is the house ; mein belongs to t>a£ 
£au$, which is the subject, and is put after the verb. 

d. When the pronoun e£ begins the sentence : for example, 
£S £ cmmt HX @pvecl)'ev, The speaker is coming ; ©6 fa'gen 
fcie tin'tc, People say. 

e. When an infinitive is put at the beginning, either as a 
member of the sentence, or for the sake of emphasis : for 
example, Um SHu'tye 311 genic'fen, muffen tie (Sefet'je erf&flt' 



188 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II, 

gjKr'bClt, In order to enjoy peace, must the laws be fulfilled ; 
Q5et)or'd)en Wol'Un Die icu'tt uid)t, Obey will the people not : — 
tor, the laws must, the people will not. 

f. The participles, with an adverbial power, to express the 
manner of being, acting, or suffering, and participles generally, 
when placed at the beginning of a sentence, cause the subject 
to follow the verb. For instance : QOBei'neub fprad) Der SBa'ter, 
Weeping the father spoke ; ^rau'ernD ging'en Die ©efdfyr'ten ju 
fccm (Scab'mate, Mourning the companions went to the sepul- 
chre. Thus with the past participle ; (Sefiebf nnD an'gebetet 
totik& ^cr £elD fci'nc 9Q?ir burger tint) etl'te in Dae? ©cblacl)t'= 
fe(D, neu'e ior'beni }U errtug'en, Beloved and adored, the 
hero left his fellow citizens and hastened into the field of bat- 
tle, to obtain new laurels. 

g. The subject must come after the verb, when an adverb 
or certain cases of nouns used in an adverbial signification, or 
absolute cases, commence the sentence. 93idD lotttmt Der < 3Btn's 
ter, Soon winter comes ; ©cbnell get)t Die $?it fcafyin', Quickly 
time passes ; ilu'glutf (idjev ^ei'fe traf DaS $00$ fei'nen 93 w'* 
Der, Unfortunately the lot fell upon his brother. 

h. When a preposition, with its case, takes the lead, 5D?it 
freit'Dtger SOiie'ne ging'en Die (Sin'toofyner intern 93cfm'er ent= 
ge'gCU, With a joyful countenance the inhabitants went to meet 
their deliverer. When, however, the preposition, with its 
case, forms an exclamation, it is considered as an interjec- 
tion, and does not move the subject from its place ; as, 95ei 
met'ner (Stj're, Der SXKenfd) ijt uu'fdndDtg, Upon my honor, the 
man is innocent. 

3. The following conjunctions have the same effect, in 
transposing the subject, when they commence the sentence : 
but they may themselves be placed after the verb. 2U')"o, 
signifying, so, thus ; Dafyer', thence, therefore ; Darauf , 
thereupon, then ; Darum', for that reason ; temmtd)', con- 
sequently ; fonarf)', accordingly ; Dann, then ; fceS'fyalb, De£; 
t)vll'ben, for that reason ; Deg'roegen, on that account ; Dee'glei'; 
djen, likewise ; bod), yet, still, (it does not always affect the 
situation of the subject) ; fer'ner, moreover ; foig'ltd), con- 
sequently ; g[etd) / root}( / nevertheless ; iuDeffen, in the mean- 
while ; jefct, now; H\\\\\, scarcely; mitljill', consequently; 
UOd), yet, 'nor; mm, now; tfyeilS, partly; fo, either meaning 



CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 189 

so, or beginning the subsequent member of a sentence ; iVbCt's 
t>icS, aufer&em'/ besides; ft'brigenS, in other respects; M, 
then (which must always precede the verb). — When the con- 
junctions, and), also; UUWbtY, either; J»ar, indeed, are in 
the beginning of the sentence, the subject may be put after 
the verb, by which means a stress falls either upon the sub- 
ject, or the verb ; as, Tilld) ncf MS 35otf , The people even 
exclaimed ; (Sutroe'fcer ik\l t>er £na'be, o'feev cv fd)vetbt, The 
boy either reads or writes ; $YD<XX fdjci'nct t)ie @on'tte, a'bet* 
&c, The sun indeed shines, but, &c. When the emphasis is 
on the subject, it should remain before the verb ; as, 2tue() MS 
SBolf vief, Even the people cried out. — In old and formal lan- 
guage, the subject is sometimes placed after the verb, when 
inxt), and, precedes. Ullt> ty\t 93efUg'ter CVttnc'jen, And the 
defendant has proved. Here SdtUbtfttX, the subject, is after 
the verb. 

4. In quoting, the subject is put after ftt'gcn, or any simi- 
lar verb, when part of the quotation goes before; as, 2)a£ 
<S(utf, fagt t>cr SBei'fe, \\\ fcevv&'ttKVtfcl), Fortune, says the wise 
man, is treacherous. 

5. The subject always follows the verb, in the subsequent 
member of a sentence. 

Note. — The subsequent member of a sentence is that, which 
comes after one beginning with a relative pronoun (such as 
V0<XS, what), or a relative adverb (such as tt>0, where), or a 
conditional, causal, or consecutive conjunction (such as rocttU, 
if; Weil, because; M, when). Examples: ^aS t>cv 33a'tet* 
fagt, tt)Ut fcet* @0t)U, what the father says, the son does. The 
first member of this sentence begins with the relative pronoun, 
W5C16 ; in the second or subsequent member, therefore, the sub- 
ject, t>er @ot)n, stands after the verb, ttywl ¥80 MS TlaS i\l, 
imfam'meln fid) t>ie 'Ut'Ut, Where the carrion is, the eagles are 
collected. Here, the first member commences with the rela- 
tive adverb, roo ; and the subject in the following member, is 
after the verb.* =XBenn MS SBet'tcr gun'jtig Mcibt, fo f ommt 



* Strictly speaking, we ought, in the second, here called 
the subsequent, member, to supply some demonstrative word, 
corresponding to the relative, in the first; namely MS, in 
reference to the preceding tt>bS ; and M, in correspondence 



190 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 

meiu gveunfc in we'nigen ^a'gen, If the weather continues 
favorable, my friend comes (or will come) in a few days. This 
sentence also consists of two members : the first, if the weath- 
er continues favorable ; the second, my friend comes, or will 
come ; in the latter, which is the subsequent member, the sub- 
ject is placed after the verb. So likewise, ^eil Oie Jett fcl)nell 
fccrtU'cicljt', fo benitgt' &er ^Bei'fe je'Den Zlu'genbttcf, Because 
time passes quickly, the wise man turns every moment to ac- 
count. Here are again two members, the antecedent, because 
time passes ; and the subsequent, the wise man turns every 
moment to account. The subject in the latter, of course, 
stands after the verb. 3) a £afar fteb na'tyerfe, entnndj'en Die 
Setn't)?, When Caesar approached (antecedent), the enemy with- 
drew (subsequent). — The subsequent member, after an ante- 
cedent, with a conjunction of the description alluded to, fre- 
quently begins with the particle fo, concerning which it is 
proper to refer to Book II. Ch. 8. § 1. This particle serves 
as a connecting link, between the antecedent and subsequent 
members.* For example : 333a't*e t>er gfag fcbtff bar, (or 
9&mtt bet- gfag fcfeijf bar ro&'re,) fo umv'De t>ev £an'Del blft'= 
fyen, If the river were navigable, trade would nourish. — The 
conjunction fceftO, and also je, when equivalent to fcef'to, con- 
stitute a subsequent member. Ex. %t mefyf 0U fragjt, DeftO 
be'mget n>ev't>e id) ant'tr-OVteit, The more you ask, the less I 
shall answer. — A subsequent member is likewise produced, 
when an infinitive begins the sentence, expressing purpose and 
design. Urn retcl) jn roer'&en, nnterjicfyt' 'fid) ocr SDlcnfcC) oft 
fcen grS'jUn SOtll^'fcligf etten, In order to grow rich, man under- 
goes the greatest hardships. " Man undergoes," &c. is the 
subsequent member, in which the subject must be put after the 
verb. 

In order to lay more stress upon the subject in the subse- 
quent member of the sentence, it is sometimes, by way of 
exception, placed after the verb. Ex. JjpeiT, wd'rcjt Oil fyier 



with tt)0. The subsequent member may, perhaps, in every 
instance, be said to depend upon connecting words, which are 
understood. 

* Such a link between the antecedent and subsequent 
members, may always be supposed ; and if not expressed, it is 
understood. 



CH. 2. § Q.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 191 

gewc'fen, mem SSnt'fcer wfc'rc nidjt geftor'ben, Sir, if thou hadst 
been here, my brother would not have died. 

6. The last instance, in which the verb precedes the 
subject, is where the conjunction roenn, if, is to be supplied ; 
as, 3B4're mein SSa'tct* fyicr gerce'fcn, fo xok'xt M$ Un'glutf 
llicijt gefcfte'fyeu, Had my father been here, the misfortune 
would not have happened. ^B&'VC mcin ^ii'Ux fyier geroc'JM/ 
stands for, roemt mein 33a'tci* t?icv geroe'fen roa've, if my father 
had been here; and the subject, as appears, is after the 
verb. 

Exercises. 

The enemy approached the suburbs. 
(Do) you 2 see 1 this temple? 
Why did our teacher change his plan ? 
This measure nobody can excuse. 
The courageous, God assists. 
Short was his life, but eternal are his deeds. 
The command was given. 
They never saw him weep. 
The Spartan died composed and smiling. 
Man commonly believes. 
Without altercation, they divided the prize. 
We therefore determined to stay. 
The papers indeed mention it, but I do not believe it. 
Not every thing which glistens, is gold, says the proverb. 
Because he saw it in others, he imitated it. 
If you had not walked so slowly, you would have overtak- 
en us. 

enemy, §eint>, m. I can, id) fatttt, mix. 

to approach, nci'fyen. (Dat.) to excuse, etttfc()ufbigen. 

suburb, *2*ov'tUt>t, /. 1. b. courageous, UUt'tfyig. 

to see, fe'fyen, irr. to assist, fyef'fen, irr. (Dat.) 

temple, Sem'pel, m. 3. a. a. God, (SotU * 

why, ttantttV. short, ftivj. 

to change, dn'&eni. life, $e'ben. 

teacher, UtyvtX, m. 3. a. a, but, a'ber. 

plan, spfon, m. 3. b. b. eternal, e'roig. 

measure, SKaS'l-ege!, f. deed, $t)at, f. 1. D. 

nobody, nie'mant). command, 23efef?C, m. 



192 



SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 



[book II. 



to be given, et'ge'fyen, irr. 
to weep, wei'nen. 
they, man. 
never, nif. 
composed, gefafft'. 
smiling, Idcfyelttfc. 
to die, jhT'bcn, irr. 

the Spartan, tci' ©parta'ner. 

commonly, gerootynlid). 
to believe, giait'ben. 
man, DCf SDlenfd}. 
without, ot/ne. 
altercation, ©tvei'tigfeit. 
to divide, tt)(i'U\h 
prize, sprei^, m. 3. b. b. 
therefore, fcafyev'. 
to determine, befdjfte'fen, irr. 
to stay, Mei'ben. 
paper, Bei'tung, f. 1. t>. 



to mention, evwdfy'nen. 

indeed, $n?at\ 

but, a'ber. 

to believe, gfatl'bnt. 

not, ntd)t. 

every thing, al'leS. 

to glisten, gfdn^en. 

gold, (Soib, 

to say, fa'gen. 

proverb, @pnd)'n>0l*t, rc. 

because, nml. 

in, t>0U. 

others, an'fcete. 

to imitate, nadj'madjen. (See 

Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. F.) 
slowly, lang'fam. 
to walk, gCfyen, irr. (with fctlt.) 
to overtake, urifyolm. 



RULE II. 

The Substantive, being the object, is generally put after the 
verb : for example, %d) lie'be mei'ttCtt 33a'tCV, I love my father; 
tnei'nen SJa'ter is the object. 

Exceptions : 

1. When a stress is laid upon the object, it may be placed 
at the beginning of the sentence ; as, 3)en joiner' lefc id) mit 
SBergmVgCU unt) SSenmn'&mtng, Homer I read with pleasure 
and admiration. 

2. In certain cases the verb is removed to the end of the 
sentence ; * then the object naturally comes before it. 

RULE III. 

The Substantive in the Genitive case, not being the object,f 



* See Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. 

t The genitive may be the object, viz. when it is governed 
by the verb. See Book II. Ch. 5. § 1. F. Rule n. 



CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 193 

generally stands after the word by which it is governed ; as, 
in ©otyn mei'neg gueun'teg, the son of my friend. 

But it is found, 

1. Before the substantive that governs it, when it bears an 
emphasis. £>eg 33a'terg ©e'gen ban'et ten ftin'tevn £au*fer, 
a'bn ter SOTut'ter g(ucl) reiffet fte nie'ter, A father's blessing 
builds houses for the children, but a mother's curse pulls them 
down. 

When the noun in the genitive precedes the governing 
word, the latter loses its article ; for example, teg Se'beng 
gfmt'tc, life's joy; for, t>ie gren'te teg Se'beng, the joy of life. 
It may happen that the governing word, though put after the 
genitive, keeps the article ; but then the genitive is deprived 
of it; as, ^olt'g tie 93?eng'e, a multitude of people ; giren'te 
tie §ul'(c, abundance of joy. This, however, is not to be 
extended beyond the phrases established by custom. 

The position of the genitive, before the governing word, 
should be easy and unaffected ; otherwise it is better to leave 
that case in its natural place. Thus two, or more, genitive 
cases, when transposed, produce a heavy and unharmonious 
sound, as in this example ; teg gVO'fen spfyilofo'pfyen ftant 
ie'bert ; better thus, tag ie'ben teg grofen spfyilofo'pljen £ant, 
the life of the great philosopher Kant. And it is worse, 
when of two genitives, before a third word, one governs the 
other ; as, teg fto'lligg tet* granf 'en ftvo'mtng, instead of tie 
tfrft'lUUlfl teg fto'lUgg ter gvanf en, the coronation of the king 
of the Franks. 

2. Before adjectives ; as, teg "Skrbvecrj'ettg fduil'tig, guilty 
of the crime ; teg io'betf ttHtt'tig, worthy of the praise ; tet* 
©Of'ge nn'roevtfy, undeserving of the care. 

3. Before some prepositions.* 

RULE IV. 

The Dative has its place commonlv after the verb, and if 
there be an accusative case besides, it generally depends on 

* See Book II. Ch. 7. § 2. 
17 



194 SYNTAX OP THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 

emphasis or euphony whether the dative- or accusative is to be 
put first. The emphasis is generally on the last word. Ex. 
(Et $ibt tern SDtan'nc fcatf 23ud), He gives the book to the man, 
or Q?r $ibt DaS 23ucl) fccm tBtm'nt. 

When it is to be marked with peculiar emphasis, it should 
be moved from its place, and stand before the verb : as, £)em 
£Dt<Ul'ttf Qibt Cf fca$ 35ucl). If the object be a monosyllable, or 
a short word, and the dative case consist of more syllables, the 
former should be put first, because a long word commonly 
finishes the sentence better than a short one ; for example, <Ev 
fag'tc fcic£ Um 35a'ter, He told this to the father. 



Two accusatives are sometimes used after the same verb, 
one expressing a person, and the other a thing. The former 
is then placed in the same manner as the dative, according to 
the preceding rule. Examples : 3d) ncn'ne t>CU SDlann gvcunb, 
I call the man friend ; 3d) fyei'fc ci'neit fol'd)CU SOtami ei'nett 
Jjpd'&cn, I call such a man a hero; Ct UtjU fcCU ©empvo'niuS 
tie SKecij'cnfttUlt/ He teaches Sempronius arithmetic. 

When the subject, the object, and the case of person meet 
together, either before or after the verb, they commonly follow 
in this order : subject, case of person, object. For example, 
before the verb ; 2) a fcer. gefb'tyew t>em §cin y De ten gvie'fcen 
au'gcbotcn fyat, Since the general has offered peace to the ene- 
my. After the verb ; 2(uf Me'fe SBei'fe Deifdjaff 5 te Cd'fav fti'- 
ncn gvetm'tcn t&tnutft fyUung unt> benafym' fei'nen geiiVben al'it 
Jpofpnuug JUV SR.&d)'C, In this manner Caesar procured satisfac- 
tion for his friends, and deprived his enenues of all hope of 
revenge. 

RULE VI. 

The Dative and Accusative cases stand before the adjec- 
tives,* by which they are governed. f 

RULE VII. 

The Vocative case may be put either before or after the 
verb, at the option of the speaker. 

* See Book II. Ch. 3. § 1. Rule v. — 2 and 3. 
t Compare Book II. Ch. 3. § 2. Rule n. 



CH. 3. § 1.] SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. 195 

Exercises. 

Give me the book. Such men I like. The fruits of the 
earth. Love's labor is in vain. He is tired of life. 

He mentioned it to me afterward, but to her he entrusted 
it first. 

When they had told me every thing, I 3 appointed 1 them a 
time of meeting. 

to give, ge'beit, irr. to mention, evroafy'ttCU. 

book, *25ucf), n. 3. b. C. afterwards, fpd'tei'^tli. 

such, fol'cljer-e-es. but, a'fcer. 

man, *SD?amt, 3. [\ C. to entrust, toertvau'CU. 

to like, (ie'ben. first, juevjt'. 

fruit, *gntf()t, /. 1. b. when, nacfe&cm'. 

earth, (Sr'De, f. every thing, &l'h& 

love, itc'fce; /. to tell, fa'gen. 

labor, SDUVlje, /. to appoint, bcftim'meu. 

in vain, umfonjt', time, $tit, f. 1. fc. 

life, k'imx, n. 3. a. meeting, jjufam'ttteufttttft, /. 1. 

tired, u'berfcntfftg. (Gen.) 



CHAPTER III. 
ADJECTIVES. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
RULE I. 

Every adjective may be used, not only as such, to qualify a 
noun, as, Mc fyo'fye UI'me, the high elm ; but also as an adverb, 
to qualify either a verb, or another adjective; as, SDtc'je spflan'ge 
tt>ac()ft tang'fam, This plant grows slowly ; cin gvun&'lid) gcle^t*'* 
Uv SXttann, a thoroughly learned man. 

RULE II. 

Every adjective when used in its declinable form must agree 
with its substantive in gender, number, and case. 



196 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK II. 

This rule applies to the adjective not only in its first, or 
positive, state, but also in the degrees of comparison. The 
substantive is sometimes understood, yet the agreement re- 
mains : for example, t>er gu'te SDtaun, un& fcer bo'fe (20Tann 
understood), the good man, and the bad (man) ; ten £tt>6lf ten 
Mc'fcs' Stto'nateS, the twelfth of this month ($ag, day, under- 
stood) ; *8cf'fci*e Wttn'\d)txi, tytflidtftt un& trcu'eve t)a'6e id) 
Itir'gcnDS gcfuil'&cn, Better men, more hearty and faithful ones, 
I have nowhere found. 

RULE III. 

Every adjective must be used in its declinable form, when- 
ever it is in its natural position, i. e. immediately before the 
substantive which it qualifies. The substantive itself may be 
either expressed or understood. Examples : bcr tap'fere 5D?ann, 
the brave man; tint CO'tfye SKo'fe, a red rose ; Me fuci'cit Uttt> 
gu'teit t&llVQtt, the free and good citizens ; £r ttifltit' ti'Ut 
Znt'Yooxt, a'ber md)t ei'ue gcncty'migcuDc, fon'tent et'ne a(yfd)la? 
geit&C (lint'roovt understood), He received an answer, yet not a 
permitting but a refusing one. 

In all other cases the adjective is used in its simple, inde- 
clinable form ; as, lit 95ttr'ger, gut lint) fret, the citizens, 
good and free ; £>ev SDfamt iff tap'fcr, Ths man is brave ; 2)ie 
gritdj'te roer'fccn t*cif. The fruits become ripe; ©ie roefyf'tctt ftd) 
tap'fet', They defended themselves bravely. 

RULE IV. 

Cardinal numbers are generally not declined, except till, 
ti'nt, tin, or Ct'ner, Ct'ne, ei'neS, one, and the other cardinal 
numbers when they do not stand before nouns but take the 
place of nouns; as, (£v fa I) ft mtt bier Spfcf'&en, He drives with 
four horses ; <Ev fdt)f t mit fcie'r en, He drives with four. Sin, 
ei'lte, ein, is used when it precedes a noun; as, 3d) fattfte tin 
SpftUlfc iUffttt, I bought one pound of sugar : ei'liet, Ct'ite, 
ei'ne^, is used when it takes the place of a noun ; as, ^d) 
faufte UUf ci'UCS (or etn6), I bought only one. 

RULE V. 

Some adjectives govern cases. 

1. The following adjectives, most of which are in English 



CH. 3. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 197 

followed by of, govern the genitive ; befcurf tig, in want of; 
ben6'tlugt, in need of; beroup', conscious, (with the reciprocal 
dative, and the genitive of the object ; as, 3d) tun mil' t>CV ©aclye 
Uic()t beroufft', I am not conscious of that thing) ; etn'geDCilf, 
mindful ; fd'fytg, capable of, (it is also joined with the prepo- 
sition $u) ; fvofy, glad, satisfied, (also with the prep, ll'htt, and 
the accusative) ; geroaljt*', informed of, aware of, (also with the 
accusative : it generally occurs with the verb WCl'DCit, to be- 
come ; as, (£r nvifD t>er. ©efal^f' [genitive], or, t)ie (Sefafyv' [ac- 
cusative], gntxifyl*', He perceived the danger) ; gntxiv'ttg, ex- 
pecting ; gcit>t(3', certain ; gerocfynt', accustomed to, (also with 
the accusative) ; fttn'&tg, skilled in, experienced in ; (0£, free 
from, rid of; mdcr/tig, in possession of; miVoe, tired of; quirt, 
rid of; fatt, tired of; fcbut'Dig, guilty ; tfyetl'fyaft, partaking of; 
iVberturujftg, tired with ; fceifcciclytig, suspected ; fcerluf tig, 
having forfeited or lost; \>oll, full of, (also with Von) ;* wertfy, 
worth, deserving ; ttnVfctg, worthy ; and the negatives corres- 
ponding to these adjectives, as, un'rourfcig, un'ritufctg, tUl'- 
benntjft, uu'gemolntt, nn'fd^ig, &c. 

2. The following adjectives, most of which are in English 
followed by to, govern the dative case ; dtyn'Itcl), like, re- 
sembling ; an'gcmeffen, adapted, suitable ; au'geuefym, agree- 
able ; bcfamit', known to ; bcquem', convenient ; bang'c, anx- 
ious, fearful, (as, SOttf iff bang'e, I am fearful) ; bcfcl)tt)ei w ltd), 
troublesome : Dten'Ud), serviceable ; furcl) t'bat, formidable ; 
gefyoffam, obedient ; gcmaf}', suited to ; getmt', faithful ; 
geroo'gen, inclined to, favorable; g(ekl), like; nci'tyc, near ; 
VenMUDt', related to ; n5'tfug, necessary ; nty'lid), useful : 
(fhaVUify, hurtful ; ju'ttdgltd), conducive, useful ; and others^ 
signifying advantage, or disadvantage. — In many instances, 
the above adjectives take after them prepositions governing 
their appropriate cases ; such as, fur, for ; ge'gcn, towards, 
against ; ju, to, &,c. 

3. Those which imply measure, weight, age, value, gen- 
erally with a numeral preceding, require the accusative, and 
are put after the noun in their simple (indeclinable) form. Of 



* Sometimes the substantive, dependent on fcofl, remains 
undeclined after it; as, \)oll %Jlntt), instead of SDht'tfycg, full 
of courage. 

17* 



198 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK II, 

this kind are fang, long; bvtlt, broad; fyocf), high; tief, deep; 
gt'OS, great ; fcforoer, heavy ; aft, old ; WVtt), worth ; fdjwf Dig, 
indebted, owing. For example : jefyn §n£ fang, ten feet long; 
tftobif spfuuD fairer, weighing twelve pounds; fimfjig Satyr 
aft, fifty years old; fcvei Jfya'fev ttevtfy, worth three dollars; 
(£t* i|t fcief ©eft) fcfjuf'fcig, He owes a great deal of money, tang-, 
joined in this manner to words denoting time, expresses dura- 
tion : as, jct)n 3tfftt fang, for ten years ; et'ne $iit fang, for a 
time. 

Observations. (1.) The cardinal numbers, and the words 
bief, much or many, and roe'ntg, little or few, govern the 
genitive ; and are always put after it. They are frequently 
combined with the personal pronouns ; as, nn'fct* Jtt)6ff, 
twelve of us ; en'er jroan'jig, twenty of you ; ifyy'er fcrei'ftg, 
thirty of them: un'fev \>U'U, many of us; ify'ver m'xiige,few of 
them. 

(2.) The word all, in English, commonly has the definite 
article after it; as, all the world. — 21(1, in German, is com- 
monly without the article ; as, af'fe ^eff, all the world ; at'; 
Ie£ (SclD, all the money. There is only one construction in 
which this word requires the article, namely, before possessive 
pronouns, when used substantively ; as, al'fe tue SEftei'nigen, 
all my friends ; af fcS t>a£ Un'fl'tge, all we possess. The article 
may also stand before adjectives, which are employed as sub- 
stantives ; as, af'fe Me (Slt'tcn, all the good people; af'feS l>a£ 
256'fe, all the evil. Otherwise it is not necessary, except when 
a relative follows, nor even then always ; as, al'fe &ie nacf)'* 
tfyeitigen gof'gen, wd'<bt fcarans' entjtan'ben, all the disadvan- 
tageous consequences, which arose from it. The truth is that 
in the instances first adduced, the article should not be con- 
sidered as belonging to af'fe, but to the possessive pronouns. 
— 'Zffl sometimes follows the word to which it belongs : for 
example, t>ie 35ei'fpiefe af'fe, all the examples; tue ^fyva'nen 
af'fe, all the tears; fcon t>en ft'Brigen al'len, of all the rest; 
fcie'fe* at'leS, all this, for af'fes Die'feS ; t>as af'les, for a We* 
fea£, all that. It is always put after the personal and relative 
pronouns; as, roil* af'fe, all of us; fie af'fe, all of them; Die 
kn'tt roel'dje af'fe juge'gen rca'ten, the people who all were 
present. 



CH. 3. § 2.] SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE, 199 

Exercises. 

After Alfred the Great, succeeded his son, Edward the 
elder. 

The Romans, brave in war, and wise in their legislation. 

Ten dollars Saxon money are eighteen florins Rhenish. 

Although conscious 3 of 1 his 1 guilt 2 , he 5 was 4 incapable of 
remorse. 

It is pleasant to the eye, but dangerous to the soul. 

Three good leagues off. 

He pleased all of us. 

They are stirring (stir themselves) by thousands. 

after, mc(). (Dat.) Rhenish, Sftfyei'mfdj. 

great, groS. although, ttueroofyl'. 

to succeed, foPgCtt. guilt, @d)u(t>, f. 1. t>. 

son, ©ot)n, m. 3. b. 6. conscious, knmff"t'. 

old, *aft. incapable, Mt'f&fyig. 

the Roman, t>et* 9>t6'mei\ remorse, tfitu't, f. 1. 

brave, tap'fev. pleasant, CM'genefym. 

in, im. (Dat.) but, a'bev. 

war, ^Vteg, m. 3. b. b. dangerous, gefftfyr'lid). 

wise, wei'fe. good, gut. 

in, in. (Dat.) league, ©tUtt'fce, /. 1. C. 
legislation, (Sefe^'gebUttg, /. ofT, wit. 

1. t>. to please, gefal'len, irr. (Dat.) 

dollar, %^'kx, m. 3. a. a. to stir, fid) ritfy'ven. 

Saxon, @ad)'ftfd). by, jtt. (Dat.) 
florin, (Blii Utl, m. 3. a. a. 

§ 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
RULE I. 

The place of the adjective is before the substantive; as, 
fcev fdyS'ne 'Sag, the fine day. 

Except : 

• 1. When it is joined to a proper name, as a title of distinc- 
tion; as, SCarl bev itufy'ne, Charles the Bold; 2Uej:an'&er Ut 
(Svo'fe, Alexander the Great. 



200 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK II. 

2. When it is connected with the substantive by a verb ; in 
this case the adjective is put after the verb ; as, 3)cr £Dlann i\l 
gut ; or before it with an emphasis, (Silt i\\ i>cr £D?fUW. 

3. When the adjective stands as it were in apposition to 
the noun ; for example, t>ct* <*?e(t>, mdcfo'ttg im gcl'fce lint) 
W>ei'fe im SHa'tfye, the hero, powerful in the field, and wise in 
the council. This stands for roel'cbei* ttldcfc'tig im geffce, tmt> 
ttet'fe im ^Ha'tljC ift, who is powerful in the field, and wise in 
the council. 

4. Adjectives derived from names of places and countries 
are, in certain phrases, put after substantives ; as, jefrn spfimD 
(Sng'ttfcl), ten pounds English; jroan'jig SSKar? Su'kcttfcl), 
twenty marks of Lubeck ; |)Ml'bevt §U$ SHfyeiu'laniufd), one 
hundred feet Rhenish. 

RULE II. 

The numerals are placed before other adjectives, preced- 
ing a substantive ; as, £»VCt gtt'te, cf)V'ltc()e SDten'fdjen, three 
good, honest men. 

When cardinal and ordinal numbers meet before a substan- 
tive, it depends on the emphasis, which of them is to be put 
first : whether, for instance, it be, frte fcl'Ct ec'jten, the three 
first; or, t>te Cf'ftett t>vei, the first three. This applies also to 
the words, fete an'fccvn, the others, Die fcg'ten, the last, and 
generally to adjectives in the superlative degree, which may 
be put either before or after the cardinals. Examples, fcte 
fcvet le^'ten, or, Die Ufytm Dvei, the three last: tic Diet* an': 
fcevn, or, t>ie m'tottn Sier, the other four ; bie fedjs tef'tcu, 
or, Die bef'ten fecl)6, the six best; Die jctm febon'jkn, or, t>ic 
fc&Sn'jten £et)tt, the ten finest. It is to be noticed that the 
emphasis, in these instances, falls upon the word, which is 
put last. — The words al'le, all; man'cfje, several; tnc'ie, 
many ; je'fcer, each, stand before both the numerals, and the 
adjectives. 

RULE III. 

Adjectives usually follow the cases they govern ; as, fcie'fer 
(Ety've ttur'Dig, worthy of this honor ; U$ SScvbvccb'entf fcW&ig/ 
guilty of the crime ; t>cm SBa'tCV dfyn'Ucrj, like the father ; $et)tt 
<SWen fang, ten yards long ; fevei gu$ frveit, three feet broad ; 



CH. 4. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 201 

fed)6 spfuttt) fdjroer, weighing six pounds. They are likewise 
frequently put after, when they are connected with nouns that 
are governed by prepositions ; as, (£g i\\ juv Untevfyctl'tUUg fefyt* 
nug'ficl), It is very useful for entertainment ; ©elbjt^ufne&trttfyeit 
if? jur ©lucffe'Itgfeit nuentbefyr'ltd), Self-content is indispensa- 
bly necessary to happiness. 

Exercises. 

An old man, as vigorous and active as a youth. , 

Their attacks were violent, but calm was his reply. 

Six beautiful, spirited horses. 

The three most dangerous. 

Many honest men. 

Tired of the confusion. Recollecting his menaces. 

old, alt. reply, Tlnt'VDQVt, f. 

as, e'benfo. beautiful, fd)6n. 

vigorous, fr&f tig. spirited, feu'rig. 

active, tjjd'tig. horse, SJtog, n. 3. b. b. 

as, al6. dangerous, gcfdfyv'Itd). 

youth, Snng'fittg, m. honest, efyv'Ud). 

attack, Tlu'griff, m. 3. b. 0. confusion, ^Berww'rung, /. 

violent, fycf tig. tired, u'bevMutfftg. 

but, a'ber. menace, Scooting, /. 1. &, 

calm, gelaf fen. recollecting, ein'ge&enf , 



CHAPTER IV. 

PRONOUNS. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
RULE I. 

Pronouns agree with the substantives to which they are 
prefixed, in gender, number, and case; and the relative cor- 
responds with the antecedent substantive to which it belongs, 
in gender and number, the case depending upon other cir- 
cumstances ; as, (Slcut'bct m\$, eu'ren gmm'fcen, De'rett liuf - 
ric()tigfeit ifyr fount, Believe us, your friends, whose sincerity 
you know. Here, the genitive fce'ren, whose, depends upon 
Slufricljttg'feit, sincerity. 



202 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. 

The personal pronouns are not combined with substantives, 
as the others are, but only bear a reference to them, and, in 
that reference, they agree with them in number, and the third 
also in gender; as, 3d) mil tud) UUO ifym glcicl) wot; I, (literally, 
I will to you and to him equally well), I am equally a friend 
to you and to him. This is likewise to be observed of pronouns 
demonstrative and interrogative, when they stand by them- 
selves ; and the connexion between the relative, and its ante- 
cedent, is of a similar description ; as, QSel'cfyev Don Oei'Ocit 
tjat e£ gefagt' ? Which one of the two has said it? 2)Cf'jenige, 
Wtt'dyn oil* gegcmVbcv fi|t, The one who sits opposite to you. 

Observations. — 1. Speaking of any inanimate object, the 
English use the neuter of the pronoun of the third person, it, 
all such objects being considered as of the neuter gender ; 
the Germans, having three distinct genders, even for lifeless 
things, apply the pronouns accordingly. J^ict* ijt em ntU'Ci* 
£ltt, Here is a new hat; <£v i\\ fcfyv fettt, (He) It is very fine; 
4^0 l)ci'ben @ie itylt gefviuft' ? Where did you buy (him) it? §Ut 
is of the masculine gender ; therefore, the masculine pronoun 
appertains to it. So, ^te gef&Ut' 3>l)'nett Oiefe 3£tt'tmmg ? 
How do you like this weather? ©ie i\l fefyr UU'angenefym, 
(She) It is very unpleasant. The personal pronoun is in the 
feminine gender, on account of the substantive. 2)a£ spferD 
ge()t t*cc()t gut, a'kt* ee? ijt JU fyit'jtg, The horse goes very well, 
but it is too fiery. The neuter, e£, it, is used because OaS 
spfevO is of that gender. 

2. The personal, or reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in the 
dative case, with the definite article after it, frequently supplies 
the office of a possessive pronoun ; as, <Sv roiuf'te ifym Ittit Oct* 
JFJcittO, He beckoned to him with his hand; 3d) tya'be mil* OciS 
Skill imttritt, I have sprained my leg; £r ijat ftcft OClt £alg 
ab'gefrtmittcn, He has cut his throat; @ie mad)'en fief; Oas 
ie'beu fau'ev, They embitter each other's life. 

3. A demonstrative pronoun or an equivalent adjective, is 
sometimes preferred to the pronoun of the third person, espe- 
cially in the oblique cases, for the sake both of distinction, and 
of sound. When a nearer object is alluded to, OtC'fev, or Oer 
(e^'tcre, the latter, is used ; when a distant one, je'ner, or Oct* 
CV'fkve, the former ; or the whole sentence is changed. Exam- 
ples : hit'fe roav bet Kmii'iu auf S3efuc()', ate fie Oic Sttacfc'vicfct 



CH. 4, § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 203 

Cffyielt', Louisa was on a visit to Caroline, when she received 
the news. In this case, fte may refer either to Louisa, or to 
Caroline ; and therefore, if we mean the former, it is better to 
use je'ne; and if the latter, Diefe; instead of the ambiguous 
fie. 2)ie 0ta(t)'ftft)t, tic er tfym jeig'te, roav \cin ^tvtn'btn, The 
indulgence he showed him was his ruin. If in this instance 
we mean the ruin of the person to whom the indulgence was 
shown, it would be better, instead of fcilt 33evfcei w ben, to say 
&aS SSer&er'ben fcc£ kfy'tnen, the ruin of the latter ; but if we 
refer to the one who showed indulgence, we say, t>a£ ^ScvfcCV'* 
ben £>e6 ev'jteiren, the ruin of the former. 

SDevfel'be is sometimes substituted for a personal pronoun ; 
as, 'JBemi man tic ©afj'auflofung noc() mefyr tr&i$f , fo bw 
tun'\ht titflVbt, or fie, If we heat the solution of salt still 
more, it evaporates.* 

4. The genitive case of the demonstrative pronoun, ttV, 
fcie, MS, viz. fcef'fttt, fcc'ren, t»cf fen, in the singular, and t>e'm 
or fce'ven, in the plural, is put instead of the possessive, to 
avoid confusion ; for example, gi'cero ii($ tk %)lit"on\d)\r>Qz 
renen &es ©atili'na in teffen ipan'fe ergrei'fen, Cicero ordered 
the accomplices of Catiline to be seized in his (Catiline's) 
house. Here fceffen stands for feinem, and prevents, at once, 
all misconception ; but fei'nem, his, might be referred to Cic- 
ero. £>et* Son'fuf roanfc'te ftc() an ten @enat', mil er anf &ef'« 
fen 9D?nt() tvatt'te, The consul applied to the senate, because 
he trusted to its (the senate's) courage. If it were fet'nen, 
his, (@enaf being of the masculine gender,) it would be un- 
certain, whether the courage of the consul, or that of the sen- 
ate, was intended. 

5. It has been observed, already, that the neuter of the pro- 
noun of the third person often begins a sentence, in connexion 



* In the ceremonial style which is used in speaking of per- 
sons of high rank, the pronouns fciefei'ben, tyoeb'Diefffben, 
f^cl^'Dtefetben, and atferf?6c()tl't>iefel ben, with the verb in the 
plural after them, are used instead of the personal pronouns. 
The words f)0Cl), high ; fyoel)|t, highest ; and a[Uv^bd)\Y f 
highest of all, with which fciefefben is compounded, mark 
the degree of nobility belonging to the person addressed, or 
spoken of. 



204 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. 

with a noun of a different gender and number ; for example, 
Q?6 ijt cilt SDfrum, It is a man ; £6 i\\ Ct'nc $V&U, It is a woman. 
(£g here corresponds with a masculine, aud a feminine. 
However, the English language admits the same mode of ex- 
pression in these instances. The peculiarity of the German 
appears in the following ; Q£$ fino inc'le 3Q?CU'fd)en ca, There 
are many people ; £s rttft &ei* ^BiX'tn, The father is calling ; 
(£6 tom'men ieil'te, People are coming. This frequently 
answers to the English there ; as, There is a quarrel in the 
house ; (£$ i\t cilt ©trcit im Jpatt'fc ; There is a doubt among 
the learned, £$ iff cilt $m\'fi[ m'ttt DClt ©dcfyv'tClt. Some- 
times this way of opening a sentence is calculated to give it 
more effect, than if the subject itself were placed at the be- 
ginning ; for the attention of the hearer is excited by the ex- 
pectation of the word which is to follow. It is, therefore, often 
used with the subjunctive mood, to convey a forcible senti- 
ment : for example, (£6 Ic'bc t>aS 93a'tcrlailD ! (Long) live (the) 
our country ! (£$ fom'mc mtf ft'i'ucv nt tnVfyc ! Let no one come 
too near me ! The neuters of the demonstrative pronouns are 
used in a similar manner; as, 2)ic$ (instead of DtC'fcS) ijt rrtcilt 
gfCUltb, This is my friend ; ^Ic'ltCS tttcilt gctltD, That is my 
enemy ; 2)a6 ftnt> ©oltnVtCtt, Those are soldiers. 

6. In regard to the manner, in which the two relative pro- 
nouns, rocl'djct* and fccv, are used, it may here be remarked, 
that the genitive of In is, in general, preferred to that of 
rocl'cfocr ; as, S)cr SDtann, l>cf fen id) flc&ad)'te, The man I 
mentioned ; 3)ic <Styvc, fce'rcn Cf fo WUf'&ig i|l, The honor of 
which he is so deserving; £>tc SMu'ncr, oc'veit ^CfMcn'jic fo 
gt'OS ftnt>, Those men, whose merits are so great. — 3)er must 
be made use of, when a vocative case precedes ; as, '<£)tt, 
Dct DU ctl'fcS mit SBeiS'fycit $tx;mi'tt# 4 O Thou, who governest 
all things with wisdom. The repetition of the personal pro- 
noun, which, in such instances, is necessary, after the rela- 
tive t>cr, gives force to the sentence. — The particle a(6 is 
sometimes found before roel'clKV, as a mere expletive; 2)te 
grcm'ocn, ate n>cfd)c cvjt rtivj'licl) fyicv an'gefommcn fino, The 
strangers, who have but lately arrived here. Now and then 
it may have an explanatory force, similar to the Latin quippe 
qui. but, generally speaking, it is superfluous and improper. 

7. The relative pronoun wcfcftcr, iDcl'cfcc, rod'djcS, (or cer, 
t>ie, 0(16,) is used in preference to the relative pronoun mv t 



CH. 4. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 205 

V0\\$, if tlie object to which it relates is a distinct one ; but if 
it is vague or only vaguely referred to, the relative pronoun 
tt>er, VoaS, should be used. Examples : D'er Stttamt, wcl'cfeer (or 
MT) Me'fe c £i)at gctfjcin' if at, the man who has done this deed: 
3fcl) -n>ci$ nid)t rocv Me'fe ityat gettyan' fyat, I know not who has 
done this deed; Qn'ner von bet'ben mug e$ getftan' fya'ben, a'bn 
id) roeiS uicfot, roeCdjer, one of the two must have done it, but 
I know not which ; %{'k$, roaS id) fat;, geftel' mil*, All (that) I 
saw pleased me; aVh Me ©D'lcu, rccl'cbe fitr Me c 333a^r / i?eit 
gejior'bcn flub, all the excellent (persons) who have died for 
the truth. 

The choice between the two interrogative pronouns, Wcl'dlW, 
\T>d'd)i, roel'cbcS, and W(V, wa$, depends, in the same manner, 
on the distinctness or indistinctness of the object. Examples : 
Jfpier (tub Met ©cmcM'M ; loet'cbes gefauY Mi* am bef'ten ? Here 
are three pictures; which do you like best? 9[£a6 mdnfl Ml? 
What do you mean 1 ^on rocm ve'Mjl Ml ? Of whom do you 
SDeak 1 

8. The Relative Pronoun is, in English, sometimes omitted, 
and understood : in German it must always be expressed ; as, 
The man I love, 2>en SOTaim, Den (or n>c('ct)CU) id) Ite'be. With 
and) or and) tm'tncr, following, it signifies whoever, whosoever, 
whatever, whatsoever ; as, QBev and) feet SCftann feiu mag, 
Whoever may be the man ; ^aS and) ittl'mei* Me §ot'ge feill 
mag, Whatever may be the consequence. 

9. The Dative Singular of the Pronouns of the frsi and 
second person, mil*, Ml", is, in familiar language, often inserted, 
merely as an expletive : 2)u bi\l mil* ein fd)6'uer (Scfcl'fe, Thou 
art a fine fellow ; 3d) lo'be mir Mn SHl/ein'roein, I give the 
preference to Rhenish wine ; 2)a£ mag Ml* ei'ne gvcu'&c geroe'; 
fen fein ! That must have been a (great) joy ! The plural is 
also thus found, especially in the second person : 33a6 wav 
end) ei'ne *uft \ That was a pleasure ! DaS roar end) ein geft ! 
That was a festivity ! Or, in speaking to a person with whom 
we are not familiar, £>a$ wax 3^'nen ein gf|t ! That was a fes- 
tivity ! The third person likewise is to be met with in another 
connexion ; as, Sin ftranf'Cl*, Ml* ifym jtavb', One of his pa- 
tients who died : here the personal ifym, to him, represents, in 
fact, the possessive his. 

10. The Possessive Pronoun is, sometimes, put after the 
genitive case; as, Deo? ^a'tei'S ((in Snt\:r, the father's Ms 

18 



206 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. 

brother ; t>t$ fttta'fcen fei'ne SDtut'tet., the boy's his mother ; 
Set* gratt ityv Rinti, the woman's Aer child, instead of the 
father's brother, the boy's mother, the woman's child. In these 
cases the addition of fetn, fet'ne, itft, is in most cases useless 
and inelegant, and ought to be avoided. 

When, in English, an individual object of possession is to 
be indicated, out of a greater number of the same kind, the 
possessive pronoun absolute, with of before it, is placed after 
the substantive ; as, a friend of mine, a servant of yours, an 
acquaintance of ours, a book of his. In German this must be 
differently expressed ; as, gin greimfc kOH mir, a friend of 
me, or (Si'ner fcon mei'nen gmtnfcen, one of my friends : G5in 
25c&ien'tev bon uns, a servant of us, or Qn'net Don un'fevn 25e« 
oien'tcn, one of our servants ; &i'ni?$ i)on fei'nen SSii'cfemi, 
one of his books ; or (Si'ner mei'nei greun'&e ; £i'uer un'fnn 
95e&ien'ten ; (Si'ne* mei'nev 25iVcl)ev. 

11. The Demonstrative ttefcr, iue'fe, Die'feS, may relate to 
what is past, present, or future. SDie'fe 9Tad)t may signify this 
night, that is to say, the night which is now present, or which 
is to come, and also last night. 

12. The substantive pronouns Ct'ttxtS, something, and nid)t$, 
nothing, are sometimes used by themselves ; as, @ic6 itynt 
it/WdS, Give him something ; ©teb ifyttt ntc()tt>, Give him noth- 
ing. Qst'rcaS is also used adjectively before nouns ; as, U'wa$ 
S5vol>/ some bread ; and adverbially before adjectives and ad- 
verbs ; as, (Ev befano' ftct) in ei'ner et'roas mifj'Udjen ia'gf , He 
found himself in a somewhat uneasy situation ; (£r 6emmmt' 
fldj Wwa$ Wltn'&cvlict), He conducts (himself) somewhat 
strangely. 9Iid)tS, never occurs as an adjective except before 
an adjective in the neuter gender being used as a substantive ; 
as, £6 \\\ nicbts $Bafft& an Die'fem ©erftcfe'te, There is no 
truth (liter ally nothing true) in this report. 

13. (St'nige, and et'fidje, some, joined with numerals, denote 
an undetermined excess of the number mentioned ; as, et'nige 
or tt'UAn JtMn'jig ^Pfunb, some twenty pounds, that is, twenty 
odd pounds. When prefixed to a hundred, or a higher number, 
they intimate a repetition of the same ; as, ei'nige fynn'Devt 
aHen'fcfeai, some hundreds of men ; et1irt)e tan'fenfc %t)titt, 
some thousands of dollars. 



CH. 4. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 207 

14. lii'U, in familiar language, signifies, sometimes, that a 
thing is consumed, finished, that nothing of it is left ; as, 2)et 
^Betn i|t af'le, The wine is finished (all gone) ; 2)ie Svfc'beeven 
ftllfc (ii'U, The strawberries are eaten. 

Exercises. 

She, the youngest of the three sisters whom we saw 2 yes- 
terday 1 , deserves all the praise that was 5 bestowed 4 on 1 the 1 
two 2 others. 3 

Here are the portraits ; which of them (do) you 2 like 1 best? 

The man who does 3 his 1 duty 2 , despises the dangers which 
surround 2 him 1 . 

This painting is better than that which you have 7 honored 6 
with 1 such 3 a 2 rich 4 frame 5 . 

Which of the two suppositions appears to you most probable, 
this or that ? 

How (do) you 2 find 1 this pen ? It is not sufficiently 2 pointed 1 . 

He told him that his bills of exchange had 2 arrived 1 . 

After they had 4 found 3 the 1 place 2 , they 6 searched 5 it 
thoroughly. 

Is this or that one the gentleman you mentioned ? It is 
neither of the two. 

It is a difficult task. 

These are his own words. 

This is the man whose works we all so much admire. 

Is he a relation of yours 1 He is not a relation, but a friend 
of mine. 

Last night I 2 dreamt 1 I was walking through fifty odd rooms 
which contained 4 some 1 millions 2 of 3 books 3 . 

Whatever be 4 the 1 cause 2 of 3 it 3 , I shall know 4 it 1 this 2 
night 3 . 

young, jung. portrait, 25ilt>'nifi, ». 3. b. i\ 

sister, ©d)roeftev, /. 1. C. I like, mtV gefdtft' (from ge= 

yesterday, gef'tent. fallen, to please). 

to see, fe'fycn, irr. best, am 6ef'ten. 

to deserve, fcevfcie'nen. man, SDfann, m. 3. b. e. 

praise, *ob, n. 3. b. duty, SPflicfet, /. 1. t>. 

on, Bat. to do, tfylllt, irr. 

the other, t>CV ait'beve. to despise, t>erad)'tcn. 

to bestow, ertfyei'len. danger, ©efaljv', /. 1. fc. 

here, fyiev. to surround, nmving'en. 



208 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 



[book II. 



painting, (ScmM'U, n. 3. a. a. 

better, beffer. 

than, a(6. 

with, mit. {Dot.) 

such, fofd)er-c-e£. 

rich, foft'frar. 

frame, SHat/mcn, m. 3. a. a. 

to honor, becfy'l'Cll. 

supposition, SSoraMS'fefcltng, 

/ 1. *>■ 

to appear, [d)ti'\\m. 

most, am mei'jten. 

probable, roa^v'fdHUuftdj. 

or, o'Dcr. 

how, mir. 

to find, ftn'ocn, irr. 

pen, ge'fcer, /. 1. c. 

not, md)t. 

pointed, fptg. 

sufficiently, gcnug'. 

to tell, fa'gcn. (Dat.) 

that, pag. 

bill of exchange, < 2Bed)'fe[ / w. 

3. a. a. 
to arrive, an'f omtttCtt, irr. (with 

fctn.) 
after, ncidjocm'. 



place, spfag, m. 3. b. 6. 

to search, tuvdjfu'cl)en. 

thoroughly, grnno'ttd). 

gentleman, Jfjerv, m. 2. b, 

to mention, cvrottfy'uen. {Gen.) 

none, fei'ncr. 

of, toon. (Dat.) 

the two, oei'PC. 

difficult, fd)rote'rig. 

task, Hv'btit, f. 1. p. 

own, ei'gcner-c-etf. 

word, < 2Bort / n. 3. b. 6. 

work, SBcvf, w. 3. b. 6. 

much, fefyr. 

to admire, 6en>Utt'pmt. 

relation, 33ent>aup'tCl\ 

but, a'bcr. 

night, SRacfrt, /. 1. 6. 

I dream, traumt mil*. 

to be walking, ge'fjcn, err. 

through, ouvcl). 

room, *®cmad)' / n. 3. b. e. 

book, *23nd), n. 3. b. e. 

to contain, cnltjal'tett, err. 

cause, Uv'fadjc, /. I.e. 

of it, oafeon'. 

to know, crfafj'rcn. 



$ %. ARRANGEMENT. 

The Pronoun either stands in the room of a substantive, 
or is connected with it in the character of an adjective ; 
and has accordingly either the position of the one or the 
other. 

Therefore, when used substantively, it may serve as the 
subject, or as the object, in a sentence, and is placed accord- 
ingly. The personal pronouns never occur otherwise than as 
substantives ; and the demonstrative pronouns occasionally 
assume this character. When the latter are employed as ad- 
jectives, they occupy the place of the article, and go before 
any other word, that may be joined with the substantive ; as, 
2)ic'fC PVCl flll'ten h'U'te, These three good people ; 3e'ne feicr 
rr'ftftt tap'fent SOttm'nev, Those four first brave men. The 



CH. 4. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 209 

word all, however, may precede them. — In 3$a'tet* lUt'fer, our 
father, which is the beginning of the Lord's Prayer, it might 
seem, as if the possessive were put after the substantive, 58a'? 
tet* ; but Utt'fer, is there the genitive plural of the pronoun of 
the first person, in imitation of the Greek. 

The personal pronoun, in the accusative case, is commonly 
put before the dative ; as, (Et 0,ibt eg mil', He gives it to me ; — 
eg, the accusative case, before the dative mi?. ©clHC'fe fte 
ifyttt, Send them to him; — fte, them, preceding ifym, to him.* 
The dative is found before the object ; as, (2>ib mi? eg ; but not 
so frequently as after it ; and then it is often contracted in 
familiar language ; as, mil* eg, into mi?g, i>t? eg, into M?g. 

Farther, the personal pronoun, in the dative, or accusative, 
is sometimes placed before the subject, when the verb is at 
the end of the sentence. 333enn ttlir M$ dMutf gun'fHg i|t, If 
fortune is propitious to me ; VBril l>tcl) fcettt ^a'tei* litbt, Be- 
cause thy father loves thee. 

The relative pronoun has its place, naturally, at the begin- 
ning of that part of the sentence, to which it belongs. The 
word all may sometimes stand before it. 

Exercises. 

Those last free Romans. 

They refused it to him. Grant him his request. 

As long as misfortune persecuted him. 

the last, t>e? lefj'te. request, ©efttcf)', n. 3. b. fc. 

free, fret. as long as, fo (ano/e a(g. 

Roman, dih'XMV, m. 3. a. a. misfortune, M$ Un'ajucf. 

to refuse, mi'$m\. to persecute, fcei'fbrgen. 
to grant, cjeroafyam 



* Book II. Ch. 2. § 2. Rule iv. 



18* 



210 SYNTAX OP THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

CHAPTER V. 
VERBS. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 

A. Persons and Numbers. 

RULE I. 

The verb must agree with its subject in number and per- 
son : as, -IBit* lit'btn tfyn rote n lint? getiefct' fyat, We love him 
as he has loved us. 

Observations. — 1. When the verb belongs to two or more 
substantives of the singular number, it is commonly put in 
the plural ; as, iu'bz, Jpafs tint) (St'jh'fucljt finfc fyef ttgc ki'tm- 
fcfeafteil, Love, hatred, and jealousy, are violent passions. 
Sometimes, the verb stands in the singular after two or more 
substantives : for example, SDcovD ltnt> 33errou'|hmg fyer'fd)efc 
ittt Uu'De, Murder and destruction reign in the land. It is a 
sort of elliptical form, which should be thus supplied, SD?0Vt> 
fyer'fd)et tm kn'fce, unl> ^evnnt'jtung fyer'fd)et im kn'fce. 

2. When the subjects are of different persons, the first per- 
son is preferred to the second ; and the second to the third : 
consequently, the verb will be in the first person plural, when 
one of the su hjects is of the first person, and in the second, if 
there is a second and no first person : for example, 2) it/ beitt 
SSvu'fcct* uu& id) rooi'kn fpqie'ven ge'fynt/ You, your brother, 
and I will take a walk. 933oNcil is in the first person plural, 
because one of the subjects (bit, fccin 23vu'fcer tint) id)) happens 
to be in the first person, namely, id). 2)11, fccitl s ,25m'Der, UUt) 
fcei'ne ©d)rcef'tcr fcib fytu'U etn'gefafcen roor'i>en, You, your 
brother, and your sister, have been invited to-day. @eit>, is 
the second person of the verb, on account of tut, the second 
person, which takes the lead in the absence of the first. 

3. The verb is put in the plural number, with a subject fa 
the singular, in titles of address ; as, (Slt've Qfycetafr' pb'bm 
befob'lcn, Your excellency has ordered ; Qjtt've SDftljejtat' (or 
abbreviated (£n>. SDfatjejUt) gevu'fyctt, Your Majesty is graciously/ 



CH. 6. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 21 . 

pleased ; 3f)'l*C (or, according to an antiquated form, !Jf)'V0) 
(Sna'fcen bemev'{?eit, Your Lordship observes. In the above, 
fya'ben, gem'fyen, bemerten, are in the plural number. Per- 
sons of title, or rank, are sometimes spoken of in this form, 
even when absent ; as, 3)cr £eu* 25avon' ftnt) fyiet* gette'fcn, 
My Lord Baron has been here. Bat persons of good taste 
always say, 2)er £evv 33 won' ijl tjiev geroe'fen. 



The personal pronouns are generally to be expressed. 

Observations. — 1. The imperative mood takes no pronoun 
in the second person, except for the sake of emphasis and dis- 
tinction. But the third person singular and plural, and the first 
person plural, cannot be used without the pronoun. See the 
Conjugation of Verbs. 

2. When two or more verbs, of the same person, come to- 
gether, one pronoun (or substantive) may serve for them all : 
for example, 3d) (e'fe HttD fcforci'be, I read and write ; (£r fam 
ju mir, gtng a'bet bait) rote'&er weg, He came to me, but soon 
went away again ; <2Bir fya'ben 3ty've Qsin'fatumg erfyaPten, 
fcant'cn fftt 3fy're (SiVte, im& roev'fcen mt$ tag ^cvgmYgen mac()'= 
CH, @te £lt befu'cften, We have received your invitation, thank 
you for your kindness, and will do ourselves the pleasure of 
calling upon you ; 3)ev geint) Um, tint) fcevfyeev'te Das *cmt>, 
The enemy came, and desolated the country. 

3. The pronoun of the first person is sometimes omitted 
in antiquated and formal language, particularly in addressing 
persons of superior rank ; as, Sn've ©na'&m faim fyiermit' 
Verficfo'mt, I can herewith assure your Lordship ; 2)e't*0 
©cljrei'ben ()ci'be erfyaftcn, I have received your letter. This 
notion seems to have sprung from an imaginary kind of rev- 
erence, by which he that spoke, or wrote, was too modest to 
mention his own person, at the same time with the person 
spoken to. But this awkward form of affected modesty is 
going out of use. 

4. In familiar language, and in poetry, the pronouns of 
the first and the second person are sometimes omitted ; as, 
23tn (instead of id) bin) fo gcmj fcevfoffen fyier, I am so entirely 



212 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



[book II. 



forsaken here ; 23i|l (instead of Mjt fcu) mix $\\t? Are you 
kindly disposed toward me 1 



Exercises. 



riches, and extreme poverty, beget ambition 
and undermine the freedom and order of so- 



Exorbitant 
and servility, 
ciety. 

Your father, you, and I, have accepted 3 the 1 invitation 2 . 

You and her youngest brother were classmates. 

Urge me no further. 

Stand thou at his right hand, and let him stand 4 at 1 his 2 
left 3 . 

Let us go 2 hence 1 . 

Be so kind as to hand me that book. 



exorbitant, u'kevmafflg. 
riches, {Plural of) *S)teid)'= 

ttjum, n. 3. b. e. 
extreme, du'fev|tev-e-e^. 
poverty, 2Cr'mutfy, /. 
to beget, erjcu'gen. 
ambition, Sfyr'geij, m. 3. b. 
servility, UtUct'tfya'ttigfeit, /. 
to undermine, tmtevgra'ben. 
freedom, gm'fyeit, /. 
order, £>rt>'mtrtg, /. 
society, ©efefl'fcfeaft, /. 
father, 33a'tet\ 
invitation, (StnlatMttg, /. 
to accept, CM'nttjmttl, irr. 
young, *jung. 
brother, 25vu'fret. 
class-mate, ©crjuf'fmmfc, m. 

3. b. b. 



to urge, trdng'en. 

no, nid)t. 

further, mi'ttX. 

to stand, fkttypJL 

at, ju. (Dot.) 

the right hand, Die SKectVte, (an 

adjective used as a noun, 

Jgtanfc, hand, being under- 1 

stood.) 
to let, faf'fen. 
the left hand, Die tfttf'e, (an 

adjective used as a noun), 
to go, ge'fyen. 
hence, iron fjttt'ttCtt. 
so, fo. 

kind, gtVtig. 
as to, unt>. 

to hand, ret'CTjCn. (Imperat.) 
book, *a5ttd), n. 3. b. e. 



B. Tenses. 

1. To signify past time, the German language has one ab- 
solute tense, the Perfect ; and two relative tenses, the Imper- 
fect and the Pluperfect. 

The Perfect tense is commonly employed to express an 
action past, without any particular reference to other events ; 



CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OP THE VERB. 213 

as, (St t)M fid) gefccffevt, He has become better, !Die @d)iffe 
t>on Sn'fcien ftnfc an'gcfommcn, The vessels from India have 
arrived. 

The two relative tenses are used to denote an event in 
reference to another. 

The Pluperfect indicates an event in its relation to another 
successive event ; as, 3d) roar fawn an'gcfommen (pluperfect),, 
ate fcer ^vteg ei'tlat't' unu*'t>e, I had scarcely arrived when war 
was declared. 

The Imperfect designates an event in its relation to another, 
which is either past, or cotemporary, or correlative (i. e. con- 
nected by the relation of cause and effect.) Accordingly, 
with respect to past events, we cannot say, 3d) Wat frlUttt 
an'o.cfommen, ate tn £ricg ttHatt' worsen ift (perfect^, but 
we must say, evff&ft' ttutf'fce. — If those two events, my arrival, 
and the declaration of war, are to be represented as contem- 
poraneous, we ought to say, 3$ H\w geva'fce an, ate tit ^rieg 
CVrldrt' ttHtr'&C, I just arrived when war was declared. Cor- 
relative events also are to be expressed in the same manner ; 
as, £>a id) fet'ne ©eftn'nnng fann'te, (xan'te id) ifym nidjt, As I 
knew his character, I did not trust him. Sometimes the 
choice of the perfect or imperfect depends on euphony. 

2. In the historical style, the present tense is frequently 
substituted for the imperfect, to enliven the representation. 
This is sometimes done in English, but more seldom than in 
German. 

3. The present tense is occasionally applied to a future 
action. 3d) rci'fe mor'gcn ab, I (shall) set off to-morrow ; 3tt 
fcvci < 2Bocb / en fe'tyen @ic mid) roie'ter fyier, In three weeks' time 
you (will) see me here again ; 3d) fom'me g(eid) roie'&cr, I 
(shall) come back immediately. 

4. The imperfect subjunctive is frequently used for the 
simple conditional ; as, 3d) ttmnfdyte, (t fdjrie'be mil*, (in- 
stead of, (Si- tmV&e mil* fdjvei'fcen,)' I wish he would write to 
me. 

5. The pluperfect subjunctive is frequently used instead of 
the compound conditional ; as, <2£emi CV an'gff ommett rod've, 
fo t)htu man mil* es ofj'ne $mi'fci gefcfttie'ben (instead of 
©o rouv'&e man mir cs ofy'ne $mi'fci gefd)vie'ben (?a'kn,) If 



214 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK It 

he had arrived, they would without doubt have written it 
to me. 

6. The perfect is often used for the compound future ; as, 
©obcdo' id) fei'nen ©eg'nn* gef)6rt' fya'fce (instead of gefy6rt' t)a'= 
6cn roev'De), roer'De id) mei'nen ©ntfcfjfag' faf'fen, As soon as I 
have heard (shall have heard) his adversary, I shall form my 
resolution. 

7. In quoting, the verb of the sentence quoted is generally 
put in the present, perfect, or future, though the imperfect or 
pluperfect should precede. Ex. 3d) toevftdj'ette ifyttt t>ag ec ftc() 
XX'XZ, I assured him that he was mistaken ; ©ie fag'te ifyttt 
fcoraus', n mx'tt fid) nid)t gfficf lidj fhtyltri, She foretold him 
that he would not feel happy; St* befyaup'tete, (X fei fratt? 
getDC'fcu, He asserted he had been sick. 

Exercises. 

He has begun 4 his 1 great 2 work 3 , but not 2 yet 1 finished. 

He had packed 4 all 1 his 2 things 3 , and was about to depart, 
when he received 3 this 1 news 2 . 

Had you learned 3 our 1 language 2 before you came 4 to 1 this 2 
country 3 ? 

When he saw 5 the 1 consequences 2 of 3 his 3 conduct 4 , he 
repented (was he penitent), and endeavoured to repair (to 8 
make 9 good 7 ) the 1 injury 2 which 3 he 4 had 6 done 5 . 

When he arrived, she 2 had 1 already died. 

As their whole business was 4 carried 3 on 3 upon 1 credit 3 , 
(so) they 7 must 5 fail when the political affairs of the country 
were changed. 

If he had 3 known 2 it 1 , he 5 would 4 have 4 come 8 with 6 me 7 . 

When I shall 4 have 4 learned 3 his 1 decision 2 , I 6 will 5 com- 
municate 9 it 7 to 8 you 8 . 

great, 0,ro£. to pack, pac'fen. 

work, SBerf, n. 3. b. b. about, im 23egrif fe. 

to begin, begin'nen, irr. to depart, ab ju m'jm. 

but, a'ber. when, ate. 

yet, nod). news, 9fiad)'rid)t, /. 

to finish, cn'fcigett. to receive, ertjal'ten, irr. 

all, al'te. language, ©pra'dje, /. 

thing, ©acfe'e, /,U. to learn, erler'nen. 



CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 215 

before, e'fye. business, @efd)aft', n. 

to, in. (Ace.) upon, auf. 

country, Sanb, n 3. b. e. credit, £veott', m. 3. b. 

to come, bttVmen, irr. to carry on, ftlfy'l'Ctt. 

consequence, gol'ge, /. 1. C. so, fo. 

conduct, 25etra'gen, w. 3. a. I must, id) mug, wmz. 

to see, fe'bm, *m to fail, jafyhtnfdfyig roet'ben. 

to repent, VCU'ig IDCt'ben. political, of fentltd). 

to endeavour, fid) kmtVfyen. affair, Wgelegenfyeit, /. 1. 0. 

injury, ©d)a't>en, m. 3. a. a. to be changed, fid) anient. 

to do, tfyitn, irr. if, roenn. 

to repair, gut mctdj'en. to know, » if fen, mix. 

to arrive, an'fangett. with, mtt. (Datf.) 

already, beveitg'. when, fobalt)'. 

to die, pt'bm, irr. (with fein). decision, £lttfd)ei't>Uttg, /. 

as, ba. to learn, evfa^ven, irr. 

whole, ganj. to communicate, mit'tfyeilett. 

C. Moods. 
The Indicative and Imperative require no elucidation. 

RULE I. 

The Subjunctive is to be used ; 1. When a state of uncer- 
tainty is implied. It is, therefore, to be found after some 
conjunctions, which convey that idea. Such are in many cases 
tteutt, if; afc roemt, as if; 06, whether ; bamtt', in order that ; 
bag, that. But the subjunctive mood must not be supposed to 
be governed by those conjunctions. It solely depends upon the 
uncertainty, or doubtfulness, with which the action of the 
verb is conceived. Thus the subjunctive occurs after ba§, 
when any one of these verbs precedes : btt'ten, to beg ; 
ra'tfyeu, to advise; evmafy'nen, to exhort; befov'gett, to ap- 
prehend ; ffttdyten, to fear ; fdjei'nen, to appear, to seem ; 
bebing'en, to make conditions ; ttnm'fdjeu, to wish ; rooi'Utl, 
to desire ; Jtoei'fetn, to doubt, &,c. For, when we beg, advise, 
exhort, apprehend, fear, wish, desire, that a thing may be done, 
a degree of uncertainty exists, as to the event. This is 
farther manifest from the verb fci'gen, to say, and similar 
ones ; as, atlt'XOCXUn, to answer ; bttjMiy'ttri, to maintain, 
&c. When that which is said or maintained, remains, in our 
opinion, liable to doubt, the subjunctive should follow after 



216 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II, 

&«§: for example, 50Tan fagt mil*/ Dag e£ geDon'nert ^a'6e, 
They tell me that there has been thunder ; fin'fer grcuufc be- 
fcaup'tet, Dag Dies cin frud)t'bave$ 3afyr fein rocr'De, Our friend 
maintains that this will be a fruitful year. When, on the other 
hand, the idea is considered as positive, and unquestionable, the 
indicative must be made use of; for instance, when a person 
speaks of himself; as, ^d) befyaitp'te, Daft e£ roafyr i|t, I main- 
tain that it is true. Here the subjunctive would be wrong, 
because the notion is strongly affirmative. If what a person 
maintains be not certain in his own conception, he should 
look for another expression, such as, id) glait'be, id) Denfe, I 
believe, I think. 3d) n>ei$, $a§ cv Das (SclD befcm'mcn fyat, 
I know that he has received the money ; the indicative, for 
the same reason. — The conjunction, ttmttt, does not require 
the subjunctive mood after it, except when the sentence to 
which it belongs is connected with one that contains a 
conditional future ; as, 3>d) mftt'toC e£ tfyittt, ttJemt e£ mogltd) 
Ibfr'n, I should do it, if it were possible. Here rsa're, the 
verb belonging to XDtnn, is in the subjunctive mood, because 
the preceding sentence contains a conditional future, I should 
do it. It is evident, that the subjunctive rests upon the 
opinion that is formed of the certainty or uncertainty in 
the action of the verb. It is a natural consequence of this, 
that, in some circumstances, it may be questioned, whether 
the indicative or the subjunctive be more proper; the de- 
cision will be according to the point of view, in which the 
sentence is contemplated. 

2. The subjunctive mood is used when roctttt or Dag is to be 
supplied, in the following cases. 

a. The subjunctive must be used at the beginning of a 
sentence when the conjunction ttentt, if, is to be supplied be- 
fore the imperfect or pluperfect tense; as in the following, 
tt&'ve id) an 3ty'rer ©telle, were I in your place, instead of 
ttcnn id) an Sty'm ©teWe ro&'re, if I were in your place : 
t)dt'te ev Die Qdwt'lt De6 SvS'fuS, had he the treasures of 
Croesus, for roenn er Die ©d)dt'je De$ (Ero'fus tyat'te, if he had 
the treasures of Croesus. — But when the conjunction roeim is 
to be understood before the present tense, it must be in the 
indicative mood. Examples ; S5ifl Du vetd), fo gib Diet; bt|t tat 
arm, fo gib tain SBe'nigeS ger'ne, If thou art rich, give much ; 
if thou art poor, give thy little cheerfully. £S'W|t tal n>a$ 



CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 217 

bo'feS, H$ (Vv'gC nid)t nad), If thou nearest any thing bad, do 
not repeat it. 

6. The subjunctive is generally used when &a§ is to be sup- 
plied ; as, (£r glanbt, c$ fet nid)t mog'ftd), He thinks (that) it is 
not possible ; SDlan fagt, fcer ftai'fct* fya'be gtie'Den gemadjt', 
They say (that) the Emperor has made peace. 

3. It frequently has a potential signification, expressing, 
either a wish ; as, 3)cr ^im'mcl ge'be CS, May heaven grant it ; 
(Sett bttjll'tQ, God forbid ; — or a permission, and concession ; 
as, (£v ge'fye roofyttt' Cf roof'fe, Let him go where he pleases : — 
or a supposition ; as, (Eg ro&'re bcffer, roenn toil* 3^1'Cn SHatf) 
befofgt' l)ftt'ten, It would be better if we had followed your 
advice ; 2)ic grcmjo'fcu fyat'ten tu ©d)(ad)t nicfet gcroon'nen, 
»enn fie nid)t et'ne fo gro'fc iHcrmad)t an Uu'tnx gefyabt' fy&t'* 
ten, The French would not have gained the battle, if they had 
not had such superior numbers : — or surprise, or wonder ; as, 
Jp&t'te td)» tod) nid)t geglaubtM I should not have thought it! 



The Infinitive Mood occurs either without the preposition 
Jit, or with it. 

a. Without JU. 

1. When it stands by itself and unconnected, for example, 
in a vocabulary ; as, Be'betl, to love ; fe'fycn, to see. 

2. When it is in the room of a substantive, either as the 
subject, or as the object ; as, 33ei'fpt*ed)'cn mtt> crflil'fen ftllD 
JWfi \)cvfd)ie'&enc ©adj'en, To promise and to fulfill are two 
different things ; £>at> nen'ite id) fed)'ten, That I call to fight, or 
fighting ; c ,£)ae; fyei'fe id) grau'fam tocrfalj'ven, That I call to act 
cruelly, or acting cruelly. 

3. When for the purpose of laying peculiar stress on the 
simple action or condition expressed by the verb, the infinitive 
is used without an auxiliary ; as, 3d) ttici'netf SSut'DcvS Stm's 
fcev nidjt erfcu'nen? 3d) fie nidjt ericn'nen? I not recognise 
the children of my brother? I not recognise them? 

4. After the verbs ffcn'nett to be able; mS'gctt, to like: 

19 



218 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

faf fen, to permit, or cause ; &itr'fen, to be permitted ; fof'teu, 
to be obliged ; Woden, to will ; mftf'feu, to be forced ; and 
n>er't>en, when it is the auxiliary to the future tense: as, %d) 
MOtx'bt ft'tt'gen, I shall ask; and similar verbs. 

5. After the verbs, bei'fen, to bid ; fyel'fett, to help ; (efy'VClt, 
to teach; ler'nen, to learn; fyo'ven, to hear; fe'tyen, to see; 
fasten, to feel. For example : 3<t fyieS ifyll ge'ljen, I bid him 
go ; (£r IjUjt mil* fd)m'ben, He helps me to write, that is, he 
assists me in writing ; £)er ^a'tn UtfVt ta$ &tnt> le'fen, The 
father teaches the child to read ; 333tr ler'nen tan'jen, We learn 
to dance ; %&) fyo're fie ftltg'eti, I hear them sing ; 3<t fe'fye ibrt 
fom'men, I see him come or coming; Si* fitfyl'te fein fdhlt ga!)'- 
ven, He felt his blood boil or boiling. — After some of these 
verbs, the English more commonly use the participle ; but the 
Germans constantly employ the infinitive, iefy'ren and ler'nen 
sometimes admit £U before the infinitive that follows them. 

6. Some verbs are joined to an infinitive, without jit, in 
particular phrases. These are : 

SBUi'btn, to remain — with the infinitive, it signifies con- 
tinuance of locality; as, (£r Meibt lie'gen, He continues lying; 
<£r Meibt ftt'jen, He continues sitting, he keeps his seat, he does 
not move from his seat ; St' bletbt jtC'fyen, He continues stand- 
ing. It is used in the same manner with jtec'fen, to stick fast ; 
fyang'en, to hang ; hli'tn, to kneel ; Ht'bm, to adhere, to stick. 

Safy'ren, to go in a carriage, with fpajte'ren; as, 3d) fafy're 
fpflJW'rcn, I drive out for exercise, for an airing. 

§tn'beu, to find, is occasionally followed by the infinitive, 
where the English put the participle. (£r fanD fie fd) la'feu, 
He found them sleeping or asleep ; 3d) fanfc M$ 23ud) ailf 
l>em ^tfdye lie'gen, I found the book lying upon the table. 
The participle might here be used, even in German. 

(Se'fyen, to go ; as, 3d) ge'fye fpajie'ren, I take a walk ; (£r 
ge()t fd)(a'fen, He goes to bed, (literally, he goes to sleep) ; and 
with some other verbs. 

J^a'beit/ to have, in these and similar phrases ; (£r tydt gnt 
vei'fen, It is easy for him to travel ; ©ie fya'ben gnt fpred)'en, You 
may well say so; 3£ir fya'ben OclD ftttf $in'fen jU^en, We have 
money out on interest. 

©id) le'gen, to lay one's self down, with fd)(a'fen, to sleep; 
as, 3<t) Ie 7 ge mid) fcfefo'fen, I lay myself down to sleep. 



CH. 5. § !•] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 219 

SCftiUT/en, when it signifies to cause, or occasion ; as, (£r 
mad)t mid) Ud)'en, He makes me laugh ; €l* raacljt mid) mi'xwx, 
He makes me cry. 

SKei'ten, to ride on horseback, with fpajie'ven ; as, 3d) rei'te 
fpajie'rcit/ I take a ride. 

ityim, to do, with nidjts (tU, after it ; as, 2)te gran tfynt 
nid)t£ alg janf'Clt, The woman does nothing but quarrel ; 2)ct 4 
SD?amt ttyut nid)t$ al£ fdjel'ten, The man does nothing but 
scold. 

b. With jit. 

1. After substantives and adjectives, when in English either 
to, with the infinitive, or of, with the participle, is used : for 
example, after a substantive, iu\\ JU frne'len, an inclination 
to play; fca£ ^evgiuVgen @ie ju fe'fyen, the pleasure of seeing 
you ; fcei* 3£unfd) gelobt' ju roev'fcen, the wish of being 
praised : — after an adjective, 3d) roar frot) mei'ucn gxennt) rote'; 
fcer ju fe'fyen, I was happy to see my friend again ; mu'fce JU 
Jte'fyen, tired of standing ; nen'gtertg JU » if fen, curious to 
know ; begte'rtg £it erfafy'ren, anxious to be informed. 

2. After verbs, when purpose or design is intimated. 3d) 
fling jn bem 93kr/ne, itym He @act)'e t>ov'$u|M(ctt nub mic ifym 
DanVber Jtt fpved)'cn, I went to the man, to represent the thing 
to him, and to converse with him about it. And here the par- 
ticle um is frequently joined with £U, which expresses design 
still more distinctly ; as, tu'fat tU llv'hrit, tint gltlcf'ltd) £lt 
fun, Love labor (in order) to be happy. 

3. After the following verbs and others of a similar signifi- 
cation : an'fangen, to begin ; aitf 1} even, to cease ; befefy'feit, to 
command; bitten, to beg; ttmax'tCM, to expect; tyoffen, to 
hope; fVtvcb'ten, to fear; fcro'fyen, to threaten; pfle'gen, to be 
wont ; befyaitp'ten, to maintain ; cvfen'nen, to acknowledge, 
with the infinitive in the perfect tense; as, Sr erf emit' , fid) 
getrrt' $u tya'beu, He acknowledges himself to have been mis- 
taken : befeu'nen, to confess, with the infinitive perfect; as, 
£r befennt', Us ©elt> erfyat'ten jn fya'ben, He confesses having 
received the money : fdjci'nen, to appear, to seem ; rofm'f djen, 
to wish ; fcevlang'en, to desire ; ermang'dn, to fail ; erlan'ben, 
to permit ; geftat'ten, to allow ; fcertue'nen, to deserve ; roa'gen, 
to venture ; fya'ben, to have ; as, 3d) tja'be 3i)'nen tt'ms jn fa'-- 



220 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

$en, I have something to tell you : fein, to be ; as, (Sg i\} ju 
fuxdyttn, It is to be feared; roif'fen, to know how; as, St* tsetS 
CS $U ma'ci)en, He knows how to do it; and these verbs; ty&U 
fen, mit'jen, from'mcu, when they signify to be of use, to an- 
swer a purpose. 

4. The prepositions 0t)'ne, without, and ftatt or anfUft', in- 
stead of, require ju before the infinitive. The English con- 
strue these with the participle ; as, ofy'ttC ju imf'feu, without 
knowing, (French, sans savoir) ; \latt JU fcbfa'fttl* instead of 
sleeping ; auflatt' JU fdjm'bcn, instead of writing. 

In English, the infinitive, with to, is put after some verbs, 
where the Germans prefer the conjunction tuxft, with the in- 
dicative or subjunctive : for example, I" knew him to be the 
man, %d) muff' it, &a|j er t>cv SD?ann war ; They thought me to he 
mistaken, ©IC fcadVteit, Pag id) mid) iv'retC ; He believed it true, 
(5r gfaub'tc, fcilg eS HHtfyt* n>a't*e. — The infinitive with to, is also 
employed by the English, after such words as, when, where, 
how, which, what, whose, whom, when certain verbs, such as, 
to know, to tell, to be told, and the like, precede. For 
example, You know how to icrite it ; I will tell you what to do ; 
Teach me ichat to say. In German, the indicative or subjunc- 
tive of some helping verb, such as, \xi\lf\, foil, must, ought, 
shall, is to be made use of; as, @ie HHffen, il>ic @te eg fd)Vei'= 
ken muf'fen, You know how you must write it ; 3d) n?i([ 3t)'s 
nen fa'geu, n>a£ @te tfyun muffni, I will tell you what you must 
do ; ieVvcn @ie mid), reag id) fa'gen foil, Teach me what I 
shall say.* 

The Infinitive, with £U, is used, where the English employ 
the participle, with a preposition, such as of, from, and others. 
For example, &a$ 33ergmVgcu ei'ncn gueunD yix fe'fyeu, the 
pleasure of seeing a friend. 

Observations. — 1. The Infinitive of the active voice, after 
certain verbs seems to have a passive signification, while in 



* In a sentence like this, He knows how to make it, if the ob- 
ject is to express the simple fact that he can make it (no matter 
how), we say, in German, (£r roeiS eg ju macb'cn ; but if the 
manner be the prominent object, we say, (£t* rcei£ n?ie cr. f$ 

madj'cn foil (or rnug), 



CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 221 

fact this peculiarity arises from the omission of the immediate 
object of these verbs. la§ tl)tt m'feit, Let him call ; may also 
signify, Let him be called, in which cage it stands for $aj$ je'= 
manfcen itjXX Vlt'fen, Let some one call him. The same remark 
applies to other similar expressions ; as, Set' SHid)'ter fytet? itjXl 
tun'DCU, The judge ordered him to bind, also to be bound ; QODti* 
fa'fycn ItjXX fd)(a'gCil, We saw him beating, also beaten. In 
phrases like these, 2)ie'fct Um'jUuts X\l Jtt evroa'gen, literally, 
this circumstance is to consider, for, to be considered, the 
infinitive is used as a noun ; as, SMe'fer timpani) ift jum (or jit 
t>em) SlttnVgeu, This circumstance is for considering, i. e. worth 
considering or to be considered. But in the use of this con- 
struction, care must be taken to avoid ambiguity. 

2. The Infinitive of the verbs fcitr'fen, foi'Uxx, Uxx'xX(XX f mo'* 
gen, faff en, uutffen, xoot'len, fyo'ren, fe'fyen, is substituted for 
the Past Participle, when an infinitive precedes. 3d) fya'be 
CS ntd)t tfynn Ditr'fen (for getmvft'), I was not allowed to do it: 
2)u fy&t'tejt fom'men fol'Ien (for gcfollt'), You ought to have 
come; £r fyat ciu £aus bau'en laf'fen (for geiaffen), He 
has caused a house to be built; %d) t/ft'be xtjXX an'fyoven muf'fen 
(for gcmu|ft'), I have been obliged to listen to him ; Qat'UXX 
tviv aue'geben wol'lcn (for geroouV), Had we been inclined to 
go out ; 3d) fya'be xx)xx rti'teh fe'fyen (for gcfe'ljen), I have 
seen him ride. — icfy'reit, to teach, and Ut'nttl, to learn, like- 
wise allow the use of this infinitive; though the past par- 
ticiple is, at present, more frequently employed ; as, (£r tyat 
mid) fcfjm'ben lefy'ven, or gelefyvt', He has taught me to write; 
3d) tja'bt bet xijxxx jetdj'nen In'xxtxx, or gelcnit', I have learnt of 
him to draw. 



RULE III. 

The participle, besides its connexion with the verb, is, in 
Syntax, liable to the rules of the adjective. 

There are some participles, which may be said to represent 
pronouns, having a demonstrative signification. Of this de- 
scription are : befagt', aforesaid ; geDad)t', nrotynt', aforemen- 
tioned ; genamtt', aforenamed; fol'genfc, the following. 

The Present Participle, with £U, to, before it, and used as 
an adjective, expresses futurity, with the implied notion of 
necessity or possibility ; as, mx foi'g'fdUtg m Wvmei'&en&et 
19* 



222 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

ttm / jlftUt> / a circumstance carefully to be avoided ; cin U\d)t 
$tt fccrmei'&en&Cl' ttm'ftan&, a circumstance that may easily be 
avoided. 

The Past Participle of certain Verbs, is united with the 
verb irom'mcn, to come, in an active signification, to express 
the manner of coming ; as, £r fcttttttt gevit'ten, He comes rid- 
ing on horseback ; Sr tommt gcgcing'eu, He comes walking ; 
(5r fottlttlt gefrtfy'ten, He comes riding in a carriage." 

The past participle is combined in a particular way, with the 
verbs root'Icu, fyci'ben, and roif'fcn ; as, 3d) rooll'te ©ie gcfragt' 
fya'ben, I would have you asked, that is, I should wish to ask you. 
SMe'feS ^evlu'ectyen n>ot'(cu nnr geal)ii't>et vmffen, We would 
know this crime punished, that is, we wish to have it punished. 

Cases Absolute. The accusative case joined to past parti- 
ciples is taken absolutely. Examples : t>a6 ©cficfct' Had) Often 
gefefyrf , his face being turned to the east ; ten 55 fief it ad) Dent 
SSa'tei'IanDe geroen'Det, his looks being turned towards his 
country ; cue llu'gcn nacl) fcem J^im'mel gerid)'tet, his eyes being 
directed towards heaven ; fcie'fen UnVftanb fooraus'gefcgt, this 
circumstance being supposed ; t>en (£err>inn' afc'gewbnet, the 
gain being deducted ; Diet? auS'genommen, this being excepted. 

Sometimes the past participle is substituted for the impera- 
tive mood ; as, sjto'fen ftuf sen 3£eg gejfrcut', un& ties JpatmS 
Vergcffen ! Strew roses on the path, and forget sorrow ! 2)te 
©til' be aufgerdttmt ! Clear the room ! in which examples 
geftveut', fcevgeffen, and auf gerawnt, are past participles. 

Exercises. 

I asked you if you had 3 been 2 there 1 . 

They praise us that we might 4 return 3 the 1 compliment 2 . 

I always 2 thought 1 that he would 3 please 2 you. 1 . 

Promise me that you will 3 follow 2 him 1 , if he sets 4 you 1 the 2 
example 3 . 

If you had 3 known 2 him 1 ; you could not 4 have 6 asked 5 such 2 
a 1 question 3 . 

Are you satisfied 1 then let us go. 

(May) wisdom be your guide. 

Had I not 3 told 4 it 1 to 2 them 2 , they would have 3 no 1 guilt 2 . 

To come, to see, and to conquer, were almost simultaneous act&» 

I saw him paint, and you heard him sing. 

She does nothing but weep and lament. 



CH. 5. § 1.] 



SYNTAX OP THE VERB. 



OO f l 



It avails nothing to 9 say 3 it 1 , if we (do) not venture to 2 do 3 
it 1 , without waiting 3 any 1 longer 2 . 

I know not how to tell her, without hurting 3 her 1 feelings 2 . 

You have wished to 3 see 4 it 1 accomplished 2 ; it is now no 
more to be altered. 

Rise up, and move 3 your 1 hands 2 . 



to ask, fva'gctt. 

if, ob. 

there, fca. 

to praise, (o'bett. 

that, fcamit'. 

compliment, ftv'tigr'ett, /. 

to return, enme'&ern. 

I may, id) mag, mix. 

to think, fccur"ert/ mix. 

always, iuVmcr. 

that, t>a|3. 

to please, gefat'ldt, irr. 

to promise, Devfpi'ecVeit, irr. 

(Dat.) 
to follow, fol'gen. (Dat.) 
I will, id) mil, mix. 
example, 33ei'fpicf/ n. 3. b. b. 
to set, gc'ben, irr. 
to know, fen'tltil/ mix. 
I can, id) farm, mix. 
to ask such a question, ei'ttC 

fo('d)e §t*a'ge tyim, irr. 
satisfied, bcfrie'tugt. 
to let, (aff eit. 
to go, ge'fyen. 
wisdom, < 23Bei6'^eit / /. 
guide, (Selet'tevin, /. 
to tell, fa'gen. 
no guilt, fei'ue ©cbu(b. 
to come, fom'men. 
to see, fe'ben. 



to conquer, fte'gcn. 
almost, beiua'fye. 
simultaneous, gletd)'jeitig. 
act, Jpaufclung, /. 1. t>. 
to paint, ma'Ien. 

to hear, t)6'l*en. 

to sing, flng'cn. 

nothing, uid)t£. 

but, al& 

to weep, wei'nen. 

to lament, rla'gcn. 

to avail, jrom'men. 

to venture, roa'gen. 

without, oty'ne. 

any, ii-'gent). 

long, (ang. 

to wait, rr>av'teit. 

to know, nnf'fett, mix. 

how, roie. 

feelings, ©efttfyP, n. 3. b. b. 

to hurt, tocvtct'jen. 

to wish, roun'fd)en. 

to accomplish, fcolibring'ett/m^. 

now, nun. 

more, metjr. 

to alter, dn'bCVU. 

to rise up, dltf jte^CU, irr. 

your, def. art. 

hand, *4?aut>, /. 1. b. 

to move, re'geru 



D. The Passive Voice. 

The passive voice of neuter verbs is employed impersonally, 
as in Latin, when the subject of the verb is to be expressed in 



224 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

an indeterminate manner. Ex. £6 nnrfc gefau'fht, They run 
(Lat. curritur) ; <£$ XOWK'Xrt getanjt', There was dancing (Lat. 
saltabatur). 

E. The Auxiliaries. 

When the same auxiliary belongs to more than one verb, 
it need be only once employed ; as, ^d) fyft'fce C£ gcl^Oft 7 Ultt) 
gefe'fyen, I have heard and seen it ; \B$iv kja'btn gefrljrie'ben, 
gclc'fetl/ tint) gcfprocr/cu, We have written, read, and talked. It 
would encumber the sentence, to express the auxiliary more 
than once in these examples. The English language co- 
incides in this with the German. But the latter has a peculiarity, 
which is not found in most other tongues : namely, that in the 
perfect and pluperfect tenses the auxiliaries fya'bnt and fctlt, 
when placed at the end of a sentence, may be omitted. For 
example: ?D?ein greimfc §at mil* gcfagt', fcaft a* Sfy'ren 95rief 
gele'feil, My friend has told me, that he has read your letter. 
After gelc'fCU/ the auxiliary tj&'bt, is to be understood. It 
would be quite as well, if it were expressed, though sometimes 
the omission has a good effect, by preventing the monotonous 
repetition of the same auxiliary word. The auxiliary wct'DCtl/ 
though at the end of the sentence, can never be left out. 

Exercises. 

The trial is finished, and the sentance is passed. 

He would have 10 been 9 taken 3 to 1 account 2 and 4 judged 8 
by 5 our 6 law 7 , if he had 9 not 2 judged 4 him 1 self 3 and 5 abdica- 
ted 8 his 6 power 7 . 

As soon as he had 10 arranged 3 his 1 affairs 2 , and 4 taken 9 
leave 8 of 5 his 6 friends 7 , he 12 departed 11 . 

trial, SRecfet'jlreit, m. to abdicate, nie'&cvlegen. 

to finish, en'fcen. as soon as, fo ba(fc a(6. 

sentence, Ur'tfyetf, n. affair, 2ht'gelegent;eit,/. 1. &. 

to pass, fallen. to arrange, bericlj'tigen. 

to take to account, JUV from, fcon. (Dat.) 

SKeciyenfctaft jie'^en, irr. his friends, Die ©ci'nigen. 

by, naet). (Dat.) leave, 2Uvfct)tet>, m. 3. b. 6. 

law, ©ffcfc', n. 3. b. b. to take, nef)'men, irr. 

to judge, ridj'ten. to depart, ab'vetfen. 
power, SDIacljt/ /. 



CH 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 225 

F. The Verb governing Cases. 

RULE I. 

The Nominative case, as the object, is required, 

1. By the following verbs: feitt, to be ; roct'fccn, to become; 
fcfei'beu, to remain ; fyct'fen, to be called, to bear a name ; 
fdjci'nen, to seem. Examples : gvicfc'vid) rcar cin gro'fer 
Scl&'fycrr, Frederic was a great general; 50Tcin 95ni'&cr i\l 
©o(Dat' geroor'fcen, My brother has become a soldier: (£v blctbt 
Ctn Ifyer, «?tc Ct* im'mci* mdv, He remains a silly man, as he 
always was ; 3)te'fcr SDTenfd) tyetjt t)ev O'fccvjte, This man is call- 
ed the colonel ; SS fcfjeint cin gu'tcr *P(an, It seems a good 
plan. The nouns, after the verbs, are here in the nomina- 
tive case. 

2. By the passive voice of such verbs, as, in the active, 
govern a double accusative : for example, ncn'ncn, to call, to 
name — (£v nnvfc cm efyv'lufyer SOtan genannt', He is called an 
honest man ; fyet'fen, to call, to name ; tatl'fcn, to christen — 
£>a£ Stint) i|t Jjpein'rid) gctauft' roov'&en, The child has been 
christened Henry ; (J^etn'rtd), is here the nominative case ;) 
fcljcl'tcn, to abuse — (Ev roira cin 33etvu'gev gefdjol'tcn, He is 
abused as a cheat ; fdjim'pfciX/ to insult by opprobrious ap- 
pellations — (£r roarfc cine Sutcm'me gefdumpft', He was insulted 
as a coward. Some verbs occur, in English, with two accu- 
satives in the active, and two nominatives (namely, one as 
the subject before, and the other as the object after the verb) 
in the passive voice ; where, in German, the second accusative 
is construed with a preposition. Such are the verbs, to ap- 
point, to choose, to declare, and the like : for example, Q;r tjt Jlim 
2)oc'tor gcmacljt' roor'fcen, He has been made a doctor ; £v ijt 
jinn 9ticf)'ter cvnannt' roov'&cn, He has been appointed judge ; 
£r nutv'De fur et'ncn ©pig'frufcen erfldrf, He was declared a 
thief. Here the prepositions ju and fur, are required, while in 
English the nominative case is sufficient. Sometimes the verb 
Utytcn, to teach, is joined with a double accusative, in the 
active voice ; as, je'man&cn SDTltjlf' lefy'VCtt, to teach a person 
musick. The dative also is used with the verb (cfy'fCU — ci'ncm 
ct'roatf tclyvcu, to teach something to a person. 

3. The reflective verbs are followed by a nominative, after 



226 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

Clfc, or rote, as : for example, Sr bctt&gt' ftcl) cite cin red)t'; 
fdjajfener 5D?ann, He conducts himself as an honest man ; (£r 
jcidj'nct fid) a[g cin gti'tcr ©ol&at' CMS, He distinguishes him- 
self as a good soldier. But it must be observed, that this 
nominative case is not governed by the reflective verb. The 
phrase is elliptical, and at full length, would be, <Er bctrctgt' 
ftcl), ate cin recljt'fdjaffimer SDlanu fid) bctvdgt', He conducts 
himself, as an honest man conducts himself; (Er £Ctd)'net ftcl) 
<ut£, ate ciu gn'ter ©oloaf fid) ane'jcicbnct, He distinguishes 
himself, as a good soldier distinguishes himself. The same 
takes place after verbs which are not reflective; as, 2)cr &U(l'bc 
fd)retbt rote cin 9)?ami, The boy writes as a man ; for £>er 
^mi'be fd)vcibt, vou cin SDlamt fd)retbt, The boy writes as a 
man writes. If the case be referred to the reflective verb, it 
must be the accusative : for example, St* jcigt fid) ate ei'UMt 
tltdj'tigen gel&'fyevftt, He shows himself an able general. 

Exercises. 

Although he seems 7 to 5 be 6 a 1 man 2 of 3 talent 4 , he 9 will 8 
never become 3 an 1 artist 2 , but remain 3 a 1 bungler 2 . 

He was at first called 4 a 1 great 2 man 3 , but afterward insult- 
ed 3 (as) a 1 villain 2 . 

By the mark (ivhicli) they put 4 upon 1 this 2 pawn 3 , they 5 
made 5 him a knight. 

He first 3 conducted 1 himself 2 toward others as an unprin- 
cipled man, and then 2 treated 1 himself 3 as his bitterest 
enemy. 

although, obgleid)' villain, ^erbwb'er, m. 

talent, 7ln'l*$t, f> C. to insult, fdjeftflt, irr. 

to seem, fd)ci'nen. by, Dltrd). (Ace.) 

never nie'mate. mark, SDlerf JCldjen, n. 3. a. 0* 

artist, ftlinft'ler, m. upon, an. (pat.) 

to become, iDCt'Oen. pawn, SSati'cr, m. 3. a. C. 

but, fon'oern. to put, an'brtncjen, mix. 

bungler, ©tftm'per, m. to make, mad)'cn. 

to remain, Met'ben. knight, @pnng/er. 

at first, jnerjt'. to conduct one's self, ftcl) be- 

great, grog. tra'gen, irr. 

to call, nen'nen, mix. &rst, juerft'. 

afterward, nad)'()ei\ toward, gc'gcn. (Ace.) 



CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 227 

others, an'&ere. then, fcann. 

unprincipled, geroiffimfo*. bitter, bit'ter. 

to treat, befyan'fceln. enemy, geinfc, m. 3. b. b. 

RULE II. 

The Genitive case is governed, 

1. By verbs which in English are generally followed by the 
preposition of; as, cut'Hagen, to accuse of; befcusfetl, to be 
in need of, (sometimes construed with the accusative case) ; 
befd)nl'Dtgen, to accuse of, to charge with ; bcvan'ben, to rob ; 
ubcffye'bcn, to disburden ; ttniv'Digen, to deign, to think worthy 
of. The thing that we are accused of, in need of, charged 
with, robbed of, freed from, thought worthy of, is put in the 
genitive case, and the person in the accusative : for example, 
je'manfccn DeS 9ft?or'pe6 an'flagen, to accuse a person of mur- 
der; je'man&en fcer 33ervatfyem' befdntl'Digen, to charge a 
person with treachery ; je'manoen fei'nes 33enn6'gen$ berau'- 
ben, to rob a person of his fortune; jc'man&CU t)CV* 93?lY(je 
ftberfye'ben, to free a person from trouble; je'manfcen gro'fet* 
<£t)'xt ttmv'&igen, to think a person worthy of great honor. 

2. The following take the genitive case of the thing, and 
the accusative of the person : but they may also be placed in 
some other construction ; geroafy'ren, to grant ; entbld'jnt, to 
strip ; cntfof fen, to dismiss ; entlci'fcen, to disburden ; eittfe'- 
fcigen, to free from, to acquit, to disencumber ; entfet'jen, to 
displace ; ubei-fitty'ren or nbevwei'fen, to convict ; fibeqen'gen, 
to convince : toerficl)'em, to assure ; t>evroet'fen, to banish. For 
example : je'manfcen (ei'netf "SBun'fdJetf gcroafy'ven, to grant to 
a person his wish, that which he wishes : ei'nen SDtamt fei'neS 
%\x\'U$ entfet'jen, to discharge a man from his office; fid) 
ei'nev iajt entle'Digen, to disencumber one's self of a burden; 
fceit ©djul'Mgen fei'nes 33erbrecfe'en$ ftbevffify'ven, to convict a 
guilty person of his crime ; 3d.) toetrjWcve fcid) mei'iur greimfc'* 
fd)aft, I assure thee of my friendship. Those beginning with 
ent and n'betr, may be construed with the preposition fcon, and 
the dative ; as, je'manfcen fcon fet'nev Saft eutfa'&cn, to free a 
person from his burden ; je'manfcen ton fei'nem SMen'ff e entfaf; 
fen, to dismiss a person from his office; je'man&CU \>0l\ fei'nem 
Stv'tfyume ftbefjen'gen, to convince a person of his error. 
<Sero&fy'ren, and tevftd)'evn, are more frequently joined with 



228 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

the dative of the person, and the accusative of the thing ; as, 
3d) gero&ty're t>it* fcei'ne 35it'te, I grant (to) yoa your request ; 
3d) V>Cl'ftcl)'cvc CS Div, I assure (it to) you. 33evftd)'mt is like- 
wise combined with the preposition toon ; as, 3d) bin toon t>et* 
©ad)'e toerjid)'crt, I am assured of the thing. — 23e(ct/rcn, has 
the genitive of the thing, in the expression, jc'm Allien Ct'llCS 
beffcru bikiyven, to inform a person of what is better, to set 
him right. But commonly toon is made use of — £r t)dt mid) 
toon bev ©ady'c befefyrt'. 

3. Several reflective verbs are construed with the genitive 
case of the thing. Such are, fid) an'mafcn, to claim ; as, fid) 
ei'UCi? %i'tti$ an'ltltlfen, to claim a title (more frequently with 
the accusative, fid) ei'ncn %i'ui an'mafcn); fid) (ei'nct* @ad)'c) 
an'nci)mcn, to interest one's self in a thing ; fid) bc&cnff'ett, 
to consider ; fid) bcftn'ncn, to think upon ; fid) bebic'ttCU, to 
make use of; flct) bege'ben, to resign, to give up ; fid) bemad)^ 
tigen, fid) bemct'flcnt, to make one's self master of a thing, to 
gain possession of it; fid) ClUfyai'ten, to abstain ; fid) cntfd)UV= 
gen, to get rid of a thing; fid) Cttffin'HCU, to recollect; fid) 
CtKxv'mCll, to have mercy, to have compassion ; fid) CViil'nevn, 
to remember ; fid) mrety'ren, to resist; fid) freu'eu, to rejoice 
in, to enjoy ; fid) gctro'jtcn, to hope for with confidence ; fid) 
Vttfy'meU/ to boast of; fid) fcl)d'mcn, to be ashamed ; fid) Utte* 
fang'Cll, UUtevwin'&cn, to venture on, to undertake ; fid) toevfe' s 
fyen, to be aware of; fid) roci'gmi, to refuse.* Also some im- 
personate; as, (££ vent or gemit' mid), I repent; SDticl) janVmcvt, 
1 pity, .am sorry for ; &$ tocrlangt' mid), I desire ; Qss? toCllefmt' 
fid) (Da SDlu'fye,) It is worth (the trouble). Many of these 
verbs also admit other cases and prepositions. 

4. The verbs fctlt, to be, and roev'ben, to become, have the 
genitive case after them, in some phrases ; as, bet* SDtfci'ltung 
feitt, to be of opinion ; ^btfienS fcin, to purpose ; £an'&cl$ 
Ct'nig tocr'&Ctl, to agree upon a bargain. 

5. The following govern either the genitive, or the accusa- 



* The reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in most of these 
verbs, is in the accusative case : au'mafcn has it in the dative 
when it is construed with the accusative of the thing : as, 3$ 
ttW'fc mil* bie$ an, This I pretend to. 



CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OP THE VERB. 229 

tive, the former being more usual with some of them, and the 
latter with others ; ad)'ten, to mind, to care about ; bctmr'feu, 
to want; bcgefy'ven, to desire ; eutbcfy'ven, to want, to be with- 
out ; cvrodfy'nen, to mention ; gcniefen, to enjoy ; pjle'gen/ to 
foster, to take care of; fdj.O'ttCtl/ to spare ; fpot'ten, to mock ; 
fcevgeffen, to forget ; mux' ten, to attend to, to take care of; as, 
fei'ncS 7JLm'tc$ rmir'ten, to attend to one's office. — (Se&eufcii/ 
to remember, to think of, has the genitive after it, and some- 
times the preposition an with the accusative. 

The combination of the genitive case with verbs was for- 
merly more frequent, than it is at the present day. It is found 
in old writings after many verbs, which now take other cases, 
or are followed by the prepositions. For instance, to express 
a part of a thing, the mere genitive was put, where a preposi- 
tion is now more commonly employed ; as, 3$ fceg 25l*o't>e6, Eat 
of the bread ; £vtlt£'e t>e£ QBci'neS, Drink of the wine; Otimm 
i)CS (25etm'De£, Take of the corn. In modern language it 
would commonly be, 3$ koit fcem 23ro'&e, %vint't DOll Dcm 
QGBci'ne, 

Exercises. 

He is charged 3 (with) (the 1 ) ingratitude 2 and accused 3 of 
(the 1 ) slander 2 , and no one takes pity on him, to 4 free 5 him 1 
(from) his 2 imprisonment 3 . 

Deprived 4 of 1 his 1 former 2 friends 3 , he 6 finds 5 no lawyer 
who will 4 engage 3 in 3 his 1 cause 2 . 

While I mention 7 his 1 good 2 deeds 3 in 4 which 4 we 5 rejoice 6 , 
I 9 am 8 not willing to 7 spare 8 his 1 errors 2 of 3 which 3 he 4 is 6 
convicted 5 . 

I (do) not 2 recollect 1 the circumstances which you men- 
tioned. 

Give up the power which you have 2 assumed 1 . 

We (do). not 4 want 1 your 2 services 3 . 

ingratitude, t>ie Utt'tattffcftts to free, entfe'&igcn. 

frit/ /• former, efy'mafia,. 

to charge, DCfctntf'&ifleit. to deprive, bttm'btn. 

slander, ^ctfaum'lmna,, /. to find, fm'&cn. 

to accuse, an'ftdgen. a lawyer, tin SKecfjts'aelebrtet:. 

no one, nie'manfc. ^ cause, ©acfe't, / 

to take pity, fldj t:hcit'mttu to engage in, ffd) tfn'Sttbmetl, 
imprisonment, £aft, f. irr. 

20 



230 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

I will, id) n>ttl/ mix. to recollect, fid) rrhi'ncrn. 

while, n?aty'vcnb. circumstance, *Um'j}ant>, m. 
deed, %^<xt, f. 1. t>. 3. b. K 

to rejoice, fid) frcu'en. to mention, acbenfen, mix. 

to mention, eurpafy'uen. to give up, fid) bege'ben, irr. 

to be willing, ^OBU'IcnS fctn. power, (Scwalf, f. 

error, ^ertr'ntng, f. 1 b. to assume, fid) an'raafcn. 

to be convicted, ftbevnne'fen to want, bcbitv'fcn. 

fctn. service, 2Mcn|V, m. 3. b. l\ 
to spare, fdjc'ncn. 



The Dative case is used, 

1. After transitive verbs, which, at the same time, govern 
the accusative. The accusative is then called the case of 
the thing, and the dative the case of the person : for exam- 
ple, (Se'bcn ©tc fccm SDtan'ne baS 2htd), Give the book to the 
man. 2>cm SDTcin'nc is the dative case of the person, and 
$<X$ Slid), the accusative of the thing. — The following tran- 
sitives take the dative of the person ; ge'ben, to give ; net}'; 
men, to take from a person ; fa'gen, to say, to tell ; er^dty '(en, 
to tell, to relate; ant'ttortcn, to answer; bring'en, to bring; 
bcfcb'Icil, to command; bejafy'tcn, to pay; Hftcn, to cost; 
bie'trn, to offer; bov'gen, to lend; (et'fycn, to lend; gfan'ben, 
to believe; gen'nen, not to envy, not to grudge; fla'gen, to 
complain of, to state in the form of complaint ; lic'fcrn, to 
furnish ; (ct'ftcn, to show, to render, as, Sicil'jte Ici'jten, to 
render services; cvlaffen, to remit; ttWit'btVll, to return, to 
give in turn, to reply ; gebtc'tfn, to command : gclo'ben, to 
vow : erku'ben, to permit ; gcjtat'tcn, to allow ; nnbenra'tben, 
to dissuade from : also verbs compounded with ab ; as, ab'bittcn, 
to beg pardon, ci'ncm ci'ncn get)'lei* ab'bittcn, to beg pardon 
of a person for a fault ; ab'fovbent, to demand from ; ab^roing; 
en, to force from: ab'ratfycu, to dissuade; ab'fd)fagen, to re- 
fuse ; at'fpvccbcn, to give sentence against a person, to deny, 
ei'ncm et'roas ab'fprecbcn; ab'frtufen, to buy of: some verbs with 
an; as, an'bitttn, to offer ; m'tatytn, to advise; an'bcntcn, to 
signify ; tw'bidjten, to attribute falsely ; an^cigen, to an- 
nounce : and others : some with bet; as, bei'bringen, to impart; 
bci'Icoen, to attribute ; bct'tttcffcn, to impute : some with cnt ; 
cntretf fen, to snatch away ; cntjio'fyen, to take away, &c. : 



CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERS. 231 

some with n>i'&CV; as, tttttwra'tfycn, to dissuade. To these may 
be added the reflective verbs, fid) au'mafcn, to claim, to pre- 
tend to ; fid) etu'lulfccn, to fancy, to imagine : as, 3fe() ma'fe mil* 
fcen %1'tti an, I pretend to the title ; 3d) luC&e-tniv fccn Urn'- 
ftauD eiu, I imagine the circumstance. After fid) au'mafen, 
the genitive of the thing may be put, instead of the accusative 
(Rule II. 3.), and then the person is put in the accusative; as, 
3d) ma'fe mid) &es Xi'ttlti am 

2. After intransitive verbs ; as, an'fyangert, to adhere to ; 
an'Uegcn, to apply to, to solicit; gefyo'rcu, and au'gcfyovert, to 
belong to; begeg'nen, to meet, to happen to; befom'men, to 
agree with, said of things that refer to health, sometimes 
also used in a figurative sense ; befeor'jtefycU/ to impend ; 
bei'faUeil/ to agree with a person in opinion ; bci'f OtmtKtt, to 
come near, to get at; bci'pjlidjtctt, to coincide with in opinion; 
bei'ftcfyen, to assist ; banfen, to thank , bie'nen, to serve ; M'o' s 
t}t\\, to threaten ; eutflte'fycn, entge'fyen, to escape ; entfpved)'en, 
to answer to, to correspond to ; and other compounds with 
cut; chi'faHeu, to occur to the thoughts, or the memory; 
etn'gefyen, to enter the 'mind, to be understood; ein'r'omntcn, 
to enter the thoughts, to enter the mind; etu'U'itdKCU, to be 
evident, to appear; fol'gcn, to follow; fvotj'imx, to do ser- 
vice without pzy ; gcbilfy'rcn, to be due ; gcbct'fyett, to suc- 
ceed, to prosper; gefyov'dicn, to obey; gcfat'lcn, to please; 
gcva'tfycu, $e{iHg'en, to succeed ; g(ei'd)Cn, to be like ; gC£te'= 
men, to become, to befit ; fyel'fCtt, to help ; IttU'jen, to be use- 
ful, to be of use; eb'IicgCU, (ci'nei* ©ad)'e), to apply one's 
self to a thing — also (as an impersonal) to be incumbent 
upon ; uiiterlic'gen, to be overcome, to yield ; fdja'bcu, to 
hurt; fdjei'nen, to seem; fcbmct'cfccln, to flatter; jtClt'cni, to 
check, to restrain ; tvot'jcn, to bid defiance ; rocty'ren, to 
check ; roct'eben, auS'roeidjen, to give way, to yield ; fid) wi-- 
fcevfct'jeu, to oppose, to resist: nnfcerfte'r/en, to resist; idol's 
iDOllen, to wish well ; ju'fallcn, to fall to ; ju'fySvcn, to listen 
to, to hear ; ju'gcfy&rcn, to belong to ; ju'foutttten, to become, 
to be suitable, to belong to, to be due ; ju'rc&Cll, to speak to, 
to exhort: and other compounds with $u : also these imper- 
sonals ; (££ al/net, or afyu'Det mir, I have a misgiving, I fore- 
see ; $;$ belicbt', It pleases ; <£g gfbticbf, It is wanting ; (Ss grant 
mif, I am fearful ; Q?s traumt mil', I dream ; (£s fd)ci'ncf mir, 
or <£<$ format mil* X>0V, It seems to me ; Q?S fd)n?iu'fceit mil*, I 



232 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

am giddy; (£g fdjait'&cvt mil', I shudder ; (£6 fccrfdjfdgf tttir 
ttidj)t£/ It makes no difference to me. 

3. After some verbs which may also be properly used with 
the accusative: au'fommcn, to come upon — SCXlir, or mid), 
fommt guveljt ait, Fear comes upon me; SDTir, or ttticfc, t>attd)t, 
It seems to me (the accusative is more usual); tBliv, or mid), 
t'Uit, I loathe. J^ci'fctt/ to bid, to desire, occurs with the da- 
tive of the person, and the accusative of the thing — QBtX I) at 
fcit fcaS gefyct'fcit ? Who desired you to do that ? but the person 
may also be put in the accusative, 333ct* bat Mel) Das? gcfyei'fcn ? 
The same may be said of Utj'vtn, to teach, which either is 
followed by two accusatives, one of the thing, and the other 
of the person ; or by the dative of the person and the accu- 
sative of the thing. 

Observation. The dative expresses advantage, or disad- 
vantage, and answers to the English prepositions to and for ; 
as, 2)ir fdjei'net tue ©on'nc, For thee the sun shines; 2Mr 
laciycn tie jgefftr, To thee the fields smile; 3)tf fallen Die 
SQBttt'&C, To thee (against thee) the wirfcls, howl. 

Exercises. 

I did for him every thing (which) he commanded 2 me 1 . 

I told him so. I advised him to 3 resist 4 their 1 flattery 2 , and 
dissuaded him from 4 lending 5 them 1 any 2 thing 3 . 

(Do) not 3 refuse 1 them 2 what they demand 2 from 1 you 1 , if 
it belongs 2 to 1 them 1 . 

You can 1 not 3 get 5 at 4 him 2 , as long as she defends 2 him 1 . 

You will meet with (t* will meet you) what you have 2 de- 
served 1 ; it will do 3 you 1 good 2 . 

I apply myself to this business, although it is not incumbent 
upon me. 

It seemed to me as if all that he related 2 to 1 you 1 , was aimed 
at me. 

I fancied it to myself, although I shuddered 4 at 1 the 2 
thought. 3 

to do, (ct'ltcn. so, t>a£, (dem. pron.) 

every thing, al'lcS. to advise, ta'ttyllj irr. 

to command, bcfcfy'fcn, irr. flattery, ©cljmcicOcfci', /. 1. k 

to tell, fa'aen. to resist, roifctfCfycn. 



CH. 5. 



§••] 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



233 



to dissuade, ab'ratfycn, irr. 
any thing, ir/genb Ct'iMS, 
to lend, IC-i'^CU. 

to refuse, Krnxu'gcnt. 

to demand, afc'f o2)Cvn » 

if, roenn. 

to belong, ge^O'im 

I can, id) t'vimi, mix. 

to get at, bci'fommcn. 

as long as, fo tang &l$, 

fol-ang'. 
to defend, focrtfyci'fcigen. 
I meet, cs begcg'net mit\ 
to deserve. tKV&U'nen. 



to do good, wofyf befom'men. 

to apply one's self, ob'ltcgen. 
business, (5cfd)aft', n. 3. b. 6. 
although, men? o 1)1"'. 
to be incumbent, eb'licgClt. 
(SeeBookII.Ch.5.§2.F.) 
to seem, fdjet'ncn, irr. 
as if, cd$ ob. 
to relate, n$tyUll. 
to be aimed at, gel'ten, irr. 
to fancy, cin'lufoen. 
at, Dot*. (Dat.) 
thought, (Sc&aufe, m. 3. c. c 
I shudder, mil* fdjau'&ert. 



RULE IV. 

The Accusative is governed by active verbs ; as, 3d) Ite'fcc 
tnein ^a'teriant), J love my country. 

Neuter verbs also may sometimes be used actively, and gov- 
ern an accusative ; as, gt'itflt gll'tCll £ampf fattt'pfm, To fight 
a good fight ; where Mm'pfctt, is joined with the accusative, 
though it is generally used without any case. 

There are verbs' 'that .^fce a double accusative; as, fyei'feit, 
to call ; ncn'ncn, to name; fthd'ttn, to abuse; fdnm'pfen, to call 
by an opprobrious name. For example : 3d) fyet'fe (or ncn'ltC) 
tt)n ci'ncn £cl'fcen,"'I call him a hero ; (£r fd)a(t (or frtnmpf'te) 
tint ei'ncn SSctuYgev, He called him a cheat. To which may 
be added fht'gcu, to ask, as, (St'ncn et'ttntg fra'gcn/To ask a per- 
son something ; but here it is as well to make use of a pre- 
position ; as, (Si'ncn tun et'tMS fra'gen, To ask a person about 
something. Of tityvttl, to teach, and fyci'fCU, to command, 
which sometimes have a double accusative, mention has al- 
ready been made (Rule in. 3.) 

Exercises. 

He lived a hero's life, and died a hero's death. 
He calls himself a self-taught (man), but others denominate 
him a bold empiric. 

to live, fc'foCtt. to d:2 : \WbCft, irr. 

hero's life, £if OCluikn, n. 3. hero's death, jjp-; , l'fccntO&, m. 3.. 
a. a. b. b. 

20* 



234 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK. II 

to call, nen'nen. to denominate, fyei'fen. 

self-taught, felfcj^gelefytt. bold, bevroe'gcn. 

but, ci'6ct. empiric, (Smpi'tif tt m. 3. a. a, 
others, an'tcve. 



§ 2. ARRANGEMENT. 

A. Indicative Mood. 

The Indicative Mood generally stands after the subject, and 
before the object. 

Except, 

1. Those instances, mentioned in Book II. Ch. 2. § 2. Rules 
i. and ii. 

2. When the verb must be at the end, that is to say, not 
only after the subject, but also after the object, and all words 
connected with it. This is necessary, 

(1.) When the member of the sentence, to which the verb 
belongs, commences with a relative pronoun, as, t>fV/ XD?l'd)W f 
XMV, \o&$ ; or a relative adverb, as, tXlbcv', from whence ; 
Datum', for what ; nwum', wtgfyaib' or xt>e$k)a['bm, w$roe'$tn e 
for which reason, for which, wherefore ; * t)0it Wdn'XUtl, from 
whence ; tt)0, where ; and the compounds of V00, as, WO'oon', 
rocfyev/, roomit', roorcutS', &c Examples : X)ei* ©d)rift'fte([et* 
i\\ ju fdjat'jen, wel'cfeer Die 25efov'&ei-ung l>et* 933a^v / ^eit junt 
gwcc'fe t)at, That writer is to be esteemed, who has the pro- 
motion of truth for his object. %d) hn'xu ei'nen SDtamt, t>er 
ftd) mit 5Hcd)t mei'nen §rntnt> nennt, I know a man who justly 
calls himself my friend. ¥8nt Mm iafter lint) Mf fen SHet'jeil 
folgt, betei'tet ftd) ci'ne fd)tueirj'fid)e SKeu'e, He who follows vice 
and its charms, prepares for himself a painful repentance. 

* The signification of these words as relatives, must be dis- 
tinguished from the other meanings which they bear, either as 
adverbs or conjunctions. £HVfyev, thence, therefore ; Da'ruttt, 
for that reason, therefore ; rcavum', tt>e$tt>e'gen, why, for what 
reason, cause the subject to be placed after the verb. 



CH. 5 *£ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 235 

The verb, in the foregoing examples, is at the end of that 
member of the sentence, to which the relative pronouns, 
roel'cber, t>ev, von, belong. It is thus with the adverbs alluded 
to : for instance, 3)er Cxt, roo id) tjtn'tt mei'nen gveuno fal), 
The place where to-day I saw my friend. QOBofyin' man t>a£ 
Zu'W nur roen'bet, evbltcr't' man nicbtS ate (Henb, Wherever 
one turns one's eye, one perceives nothing but misery. The 
verbs fat}, and roeu'bet, are put last, in consequence of tt)0, and 
wofyin'. 

(2) The verb is put at the end, after interrogatives 
(whether pronouns, adverbs, or conjunctions), when they 
form indirect questions. Examples : (Sr. frdgt mid), roer 0U f - 
fen SXftor'gCtt bei 3^'ncn ydm, He asks me who was with you 
this morning. SBtffcn ©ie, wi'&)t$ S3uel) cr fyett'te in bem 
(Sainton tag ? Do you know what book he read to-day in the 
garden? ©a'gcn ©ie tnir, voas fur ci'ncn ©nmb er fur fetn 
'Ztlte'btetbeu au'gibt, Tell me what ground he alleges for his 
staying out. 333a*, roefcber, roaS fin* etn, interrogative pro- 
nouns, serve here to form indirect questions,* and the verb 
stands last. %d) faun t\id)t fa'gcu, rote e£ ftel) ju'gefragen [?af, I 
cannot tell how it has happened ; %d) moclj'te HMf'fttt, Ob VtC'Ie 
tiu'te bet jct'jtgev fyeiffer xXBit'tevung auf bem gxl'&e fan von'= 
ben, I should like to know, whether, during the present hot 
weather, many people will be in the field. QOBte, and ob, 
constitute indirect questions, and the verb is at the end. 

(3) After conditional, causal, and consecutive conjunc- 
tions. These are : ate, ba, berov', e'fye, big, bafent'; bamit' (in 
order that) ; baft, auf bag, (in order that) ; fafte, tm gal'te, (in 
case that); gletcbrote' ; infcem' (since, because); nadj&em'; 
nun (when it signifies since, after — Sftnn eS etn'mat gefdje'fynt 
ijl, Since it once has been done); ob, obfdjon', obgleid)', ob- 
irobf', feit, and feitoem' ; ftn'temat (since, whereas) ; fo 
(when it means, if) ; fo baiD, or fo balb ate ; fo tang'e or fo 
tang'e ate ; fo roett, or fo roett ate ; rodfy'renb, rodfy'renb ba$; 

* It is probably understood by the reader, what is meant 
by indirect questions : but there will remain no doubt, if we 
change some of the foregoing into direct questions, to show 
the difference, viz. ^rr roar bet 3^'nen ? Who was with you* 
^el'cbe* Sbuty (a* fr ? What book did he read ? 



236 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II 

rocif ; man, wcnngfeid)', roemtfdjon' ; nue, nucroofyf, roo* 

fent', VDO nicfjt. To these is to be added the comparative 
conjunction )t, which, beginning the prior member, removes 
the verb to the end. Example : 711$ er ben 2illf lltfyr ill bet* 
©tabt bemevf'te, When he perceived the tumult in the 
city ; 35 e & o r' id) t>?n 3Balt> erretcfjt' t) a V t e, Before I had 
reached the wood : b i g bie ©on'ne Die evftarv'ten Seller anf ? 
[ofen ID i V b, till the sun shall loosen the congealed fields ; 3) d 
bev ©efanD'te in ion'bon an'fam, When the ambassador ar- 
rived in London ; %<> lang'er bev ^luijt'ler bte'fc (Se'genjtanbe 
betvad)'tcte, bef'to mcfyv benmn'bertc er fte, The more the 
artist contemplated these objects, the more he admired them. 

By the force of the aforesaid conjunctions, the verb is put 
at the end of the member of the sentence to which it be- 
longs, and sometimes even after a subordinate member, con- 
nected with it. For example : Set id) ben SDTann, rr>e('cl)er fo 
t'td get>ad)t', efy've Wlb lie'be, Since I honor and love the 
man, who has thought so nobly. In this, the principal mem- 
ber is, bit id) t)en Sttamt cb'rc tint) tic'bc, with which is con- 
nected a subordinate or secondary member, tvel'cber fo c'bel 
gebadH', and the verb of the former is placed after this. It 
need not necessarily be so ; for the sentence might also. run 
thus, S\i id) ben SOlaim el/re unb lie'be, *»efd)er fo c'bel ge- 
Md)t'. It depends upon euphony and perspicuity, whether the 
one or the other is to be preferred. 

The same principles apply to the infinitive, with the preposi- 
tion ju. The verb, influenced by the above conjunctions, may 
be put after the infinitive ; as, 3£ctl id) mid) nid)t Jit janf'eit 
U>ftn'fd)(, Because I do not like to quarrel ; or before it, SBctf 
id) nid)t roim'fdje, mid) jn janf'cn. When the infinitive, with 
£lt, has other words belonging to it, for instance, cases of de- 
clension which it governs, it is preferable, on account of the 
extent which it then assumes, to place it with its dependent 
words after the verb, lest the sentence should become heavy 
and intricate. Ex. 2) a id) nnmfdVte, aClemet'nc^adyenfobaib' 
ate moalid) in ©icbj'crfyeit £it bving'cn, As I wished to bring 
all my things in safety, as soon as possible ; here the sentence 
would be rendered heavy by placing the verb miltfd)'tt, after 
the infinitive bt'illg'ai. 

The infinitive,' without the preposition jit, is immediately 
governed by the verb, as much as a case of declension ; and 
the verb, under these circumstances, must stand after it ; as, 
'ilvvu.i u' Hi te'jVn Will, If- he will read the book; 



CH. 5. $ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 237 

where it would be less natural to let the infinitive follow after 
the verb, as, ^emt CV roill M$ 25ltd) le'fcu. 

Exercises. 

Whoever has a good conscience. He who understands it 
The color with which the wall is covered. 
Do you know what is meant by it ? 
Nobody knows whom he aims at. 
As soon as we had recovered ourselves. 
Unless all this be a delusion. 

The more he saw of the country, so much the more he 
disliked the thought of returning. 

He is safe if he will follow my advice. 

whoever, wet' nut. to recover one's self, ftct) Ct< 

good, gut. fyo'len. 

conscience, (Seroiffcn, n. 3. a. unless, roofent' nicfjt. 

he who, roet\ delusion, iau'fcfjimg, /. 

to understand, fcevftCljen. the more, je mtt)V. 

color, gar'be, /. of, fcon. (Dat.) 

with which, roomit'. country, 4ant>, n. 3. b. e. 

wall, 3Bant>, /. to see, fe'fyen, irr. 

to cover, uberjie'fyett, irr. so much the more, fcef to tttefyr. 

to know, rotffen, mix. I dislike, mil* mi$f&llt' r irr. 

by it, Damit'. thought, ©coauf'e, m. 3. c. C. 

to mean, mei'nen. to return, jurficf'feijrcn. 

nobody, ntc'mauo. safe, ft'cfeer. 

at, auf. (Ace.) advice, tflatt), m. 3. b. 

to aim, ab'jielcn. to follow, fol'gen. {Dat.) 

as soon as, jo ball) Clfa. 

B. Subjunctive Mood. 

The Subjunctive Mood, as to position, is subject to the 
same rules, as the indicative. When it denotes a wish, or 
surprise, it often begins the sentence ; as, ©C'bc C6 ocr £im'= 
trtel! May Heaven grant it! 93?6cVte bit ©Oll'ne fcoct) fclKt'nm! 
Oh, that the sun would shine ! J^at'te ic()^ oocl) nic()t gccUauot', 
I should not have thought it ! This is always the case when 
the conditional conjunction, roemt, if, is omitted : < 2Bd'l*C id) 
t)m gewc'ffn, Had I been here ; for 3&CMI id) fyter gcroe'fett 
tta'xt, If I had been here. 



238 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 

C. Imperative Mood. 

The Imperative precedes the personal pronoun, which is 
the subject. So'bc Stt, praise thou ; lo'be it, let him praise ; 
fo'bttt fit, let them praise. 

D. Infinitive Mood. 

The Infinitive comes after the object, and the other words 
of a sentence, except the indicative and subjunctive, when 
these, for reasons assigned before, are put last. Examples : 

Q;v roftnf djt tue iatei-nifcfce ©pra'dje grunb'Ud) ^u ik'ntn, He 

wishes to learn the Latin language accurately ; SDfa'fet SDiami 
hxnn (Sng'lifd), giranjo'fifd), 2)eutfd), unfc t)erfd)ie'Denc au'&cre 
©pva'cfjeu bon (Suvo'pa I'C'ben, This man can speak English, 
French, German, and several other tongues of Europe, in 1 - 
JtCJl and re'fcen are infinitives. 

This rule affects the future tense, because it is com- 
posed of an infinitive and the third auxiliary. The infini- 
tive, here, is placed in the same manner, as in the exam- 
ples above stated, that is to say, after the object and other 
words ; as, 3»d> roer'De roor'gen tie (Se'genD befe'fycn, I shall 
to-morrow take a view of the country. SScfe'fym is the in- 
finitive, belonging to the auxiliary XDtt'lt, with which it 
constitutes the future tense ; but this connexion does not al- 
ter its position in the sentence. — When the future in the in- 
dicative or subjunctive mood must be placed at the end, on 
account of some preceding word, which requires that colloca- 
tion, the infinitive that is used in forming the future must be 
put before the auxiliary ; as, 93?CM glaubt, Daft DCf ftaVfer 
mit Den graujo'fen gxie'&cn madden mx'bt, It is thought that 
the Emperor will make peace with the French. Here the 
infinitive madyen, is before the auxiliary roei'De. When the 
future tense of the passive voice stands in this predicament, 
the auxiliary verb, in the indicative or subjunctive, is often 
put before the infinitive, which is done to prevent, by means 
of the intervening participle, the immediate repetition of 
rocv'ben : for example, 3d) erroav'te, Dag bcvfdne'bene ©acb'cn 
nacft uu'fenrt Jpau'fe rcet'Den gefeadjt' vbev'Den, I expect, that 
several things will be brought to our house. 

Sometimes two infinitives stand together, one of which 
governs the other ; then the governing one should be put 



CH. 5. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 239 

after that which is governed ; as, (£v ttofl'te fie nid)t ()evein'= 
fomracn (affnt, He would not let them come in. Here lap - 
fen, the governing infinitive, is preceded by the other, fyevcilt's 
fomtttCU; which is governed. But this rule is not always ob- 
served, as the following example proves ; (St* fyat ifyn fdjott 
tnel)l' al£ jcfyn'mat muf'fen tjb'VtXl, He has been obliged more 
than ten times to hear him — instead of fyo'ven mitffen, which 
is also used. 

The infinitive is found, now and then, at the very begin- 
ning of a sentence, and in that position bears a strong em- 
phasis ; as, SCom'men will id) jroav, Come, indeed, I will; a'bet* 
fcfem'ben fcarf id) nid)t, but write, I must not. 

The infinitive may be employed, in a substantive capacity, 
as the subject or object ; and is then placed accordingly. 

E. Participles. 

RULE I. 

When the participle, either present or past, is used as an 
adjective, it has its position accordingly. It precedes the 
noun, and follows the case it governs; as, t>te al'tcS bele'benfce 
©Olt'ite, the all-animating sun ; t>ct* *00ttt 251i§ getVOffeitC 
55(iUttl/ the tree struck by lightning. 



The participle, when it stands in apposition, is put after 
the words with which it is connected ; as, fcaS 35 ltd)/ t)0lt 
fcem ajft'tft gefcljvie'bM, the book written by the father ; £>et* 
at'te SelD'^cvr, roe'&er ta-o'fyenb nod) fdnnei'dxlno, fon'&ern 
m'r/ig befelyleiit), jtiU'te ten ^ufntfyv, The old general, neither 
threatening nor flattering, but calmly commanding, quelled 
the sedition. 

RULE III. 

When combined with the auxiliary verbs, the past participle 
has its place after the object and other words ; and is, there- 
fore, generally found towards the end of the sentence, gr. iff 
in ion'Dsn geWfcn, He has been in London — - ift gcroe'fdt, the 
participle ga&e'ffit at the end. 3d) fyft'be fycu'tc M$ Slid) ge* 
lefen, I have read the book to-day — fya'be gelc'fen. ©V UUV& 



240 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



[book If. 



mxt 9ied)t tin gro'fei* 50?ann genannt', He is justly called a 
great man. If the auxiliary, by the power of some pronoun or 
conjunction, be removed to the end, the past participle 
stands before it ; as, 2)ie Xljafun, roel'efee fcon Dent SMcb'm* gc« 
fdjil'fccrt 'it'CV'Dcn, The deeds which are depicted by the poet : 
the auxiliary wrr'Deit; at the end, because of the pronoun 
M>Cl'd)C ; the participle, gefdjil'&CVt, before it. %d) tt>ei£ e$, 
votii id) Sen SD?ann felbjt gcfe'fycn fya'be, I know it, because I 
have seen the man myself: the conjunction wtil, removes the 
verb ijiX'bt to the end, and the participle gcfe'fyen, precedes it. 
— When the past participle and the infinitive of an auxiliary 
verb come together, the participle is placed before the infini- 
tive ; as, gclc'fen fya'ben, to have read; gelicbt' aer'&cn, to 
be loved. Should it so happen, that the participle, the infin- 
itive, and the verb definite, that is to say, either the indica- 
tive or subjunctive, meet together at the end of a sentence, 
the arrangement may either be thus, participle, infinitive, 
indicative or subjunctive, 9tari)&cm' id) &a$ 33 ltd) gcfc'fcn £}&'= 
ben roer'&e, After I shall have read the book ; or the verb 
definite, may be put before the participle and infinitive, 

SRaelj&em' id) bag SEjucft aer'ftc gefe'fen (ja'beit. 

Examples. 

The lame courier. A much-promising commencement 
Three roasted apples. Let us all, hoping (for) the best, and 
prepared for the worst, persevere in our undertaking. They 
have accomplished their task. The plant which is describ- 
ed by Linnaeus, is not the same. Before the clock shall have 
ceased striking. 



to be lame, fyinf'CU. 

courier, 350'te, m. 2. a. 

much, \)ic(. 

to promise, feerfpredj'cn. 

commencement, Ztn'fflttg/ m 

to roast, xb'\\n\. 

apple *2ty'fcl, m. 3. a. a. 

let us, Utf'fU imS. 

the best, fcas 5Bef'te. 

to hope, i/Q?f:n. 

for, auf. (Ace.) 

the worst, Mi ©ctyimm'fte. 



to prepare, faf'fen. 

in, in. {Dot.) 

undertaking, Untewefy'mCtt, n. 

3. a. 
to persevere, bcf}(ll*'Vttt. 

task, Tiixf gabe, /, 

to accomplish, Vofleit'fcen. 
plant, spftan'je. 
by, ton. 

to describe, bt{d)ttibcn, irr. 
the same, (fcer, tit, MS) XlM* 
ItcH 



CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 241 

before, e'fye* t0 cease striking, (tUS'fcljfa? 

clock, ©focte, /. gen, irr. 

F. Compound Verbs. 

Separable compound verbs have the particle separated 
from the verb, when this is at the end of the sentence ; 
and require it to be placed after the object and other 
words, including even a relative or intermediate member 
of the sentence. 3d) nefy'me 3fyv ©rfcfeenf mit £>anf havMt 
an, I receive your present with gratitude ; verb ait'ltetyttKH, to 
receive — the particle an, at the end. @ie ftt'men in Ztn'fe- 
fyung bic'fer &<\d)'t bait ufremn', They soon agreed with respect 
to this matter ; verb ubevein'fommcn. SHcfy'men @te t>a$ 
33nd) mit, Take the book with you; verb mit'nefymcn. (Sr 
fat 4 fcie'fe 33cge'bcni)eitcu, roel'dje nun ntd)t meijr $u au'fcent 
ftnt>, i)Ol*au0', He foresaw these events which are now no more 
to be altered. But the particle is generally put at the end of 
the first part of a sentence if the latter part is merely con- 
nected with it by a preposition ; as, Si* fill) toovaug', &afj fcte'fe 
25egebenbciten erfol'gen rmVfcen, He foresaw that these events 
would follow. In this sentence the particle toorau.3'/ before, 
cannot stand after nwv'&en. When the verb, in consequence 
of a pronoun, or a conjunction, is brought to the end of the 
sentence, the particle is not separated from it ; as, 2)a id) ^tjt 
<8efd)enf' mit 2>an?'fcar?ett au'nefyme, As I received your 
present with gratitude. The verb CM'nefyme stands last, on 
account of the conjunction fca, and remains, for this reason, 
united with the particle. 

The infinitive mood, and the past participle have their place 
after the object, and at or near the end of the sentence; 
therefore the particle is not separated, except by ju, in the 
infinitive, and by ge, in the past participle; as, mit £U 
nefymen, nut'gcnommen. j3u, however, does not always ac- 
company the infinitive. From what has been said, it ap- 
pears, that the separation principally occurs in the indicative, 
subjunctive, and imperative moods. 

Exercises. 

May it serve to your advantage. 
Praise him. 

He tries to find the philosopher's stone. 
21 



242 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 



[BOOK II. 



I shall now go to rest. 
They hope that the war will be prolonged. 
He predicts that one after the other will be arrested. 
Why should we not 2 bid 4 him 1 go 3 . 
He 3 indeed 4 can 2 not 5 flatter 1 , but he wishes to console. 
Give up this plan ! Could I foreknow this 1 They have 
sent off the girl. He continued to urge him eagerly. 



to, JU. (Dat.) 

advantage, SJov'tfyeil, m. 3. 

b. b. 
to serve, fcie'nett. 
to praise, (o'bcn. 
to try, ftdj bemu'fyen. 
the philosopher's stone, ttt 

©tcin Dev SIBci'fem 
to find, jtn'&en. 
to rest, jut SKtt'fye. 
to go, fid) bege'bert. 

to hope, jjof fCtt. 

that, &a§. 

war, ^vteg, m. 

to be prolonged, ftdj in t>ic 

Ung'e jte'fyen. 
to predict, koraitg'fagen. 
after, itad). (Dat.) 
to arrest, fcevtyaf ten. 



why, roavum'. 

I shall, id) fed, mix. 

not, nid)t. 

to go, ge'fyen. 

to bid, bet'fen. 

to flatter, fdjmei'djeln. 

I can, id) Hmx, mix. 

indeed, fm'lid). 

but, after. 

to wish, rmm'fdjctt. 

to console, txb'\Un» 

to give up, aufgeben, irr, 

plan, spian. 

to foreknow, fcorauS'lMfleiU 

to send off, fovt'fd)itfen. 

girl, %yiaVd)m, n. 3. a. a. 

to continue, foytfafyten, «Vr. 

eagerly, fyefttg. 

to urge, ju'fe^en. (Dotf.) 



CHAPTER VI. 
ADVERBS. 

ARRANGEMENT. 



RULE I. 



An adverb joined to an adjective, must always stand before 
it; as, fefyf gut, very good ; nicfet fd)(ed)t, not bad. 



CH. 6.1 SYNTAX OP THE ADVERB. 243 



RULE II. 

When the adverb belongs to the verb, it is put after the 
verb (unless the verb be at the end of the sentence, Book II. 
Ch. 5. § 2. A.) and, in general, also after the object. <&V bt* 
tjan'bdt ben (Se'genftanb fcortreff'fid), He treats the subject 
excellently ; fcOVtreff' ltd) is the adverb. Such adverbs, how- 
er, as denote time, (for example, oft, often ; fyau'ftg, fre- 
quently ; Ijcu'tC, to-day; gefteni, yesterday, and the like,) are 
commonly placed immediately after the verb, and before the 
object. Besides the adverb cannot, with propriety, be placed 
after the infinitive, or past participle. Moreover, unless the 
verb be at the end, the adverb cannot stand between the sub- 
ject and the verb. 

RULE III. 

For the sake of emphasis, the adverb may be removed from 
its place towards the beginning of the sentence ; as, 3d) fya'be 
fyen'te &a$ 35ud) gele'feil, 1 have to-day read the book ; which 
makes the notion of tyeu'te, to-day, more perceptible than, 3»dj 
J)a'be bag )3\id) fyen'fe gele'fen. This seems to be the reason 
why adverbs implying time, are commonly placed before the 
object : namely, they are thus rendered more distinct. But 
to make the emphasis so evident that it cannot be mistaken, 
the adverb should be put at the beginning ; J^eu'tC fya'fce id) bag 
Sdag'fjom gefe'tyen, To-day I have seen the rhinoceros. In this 
remark are not included the interrogative adverbs, such as, 
HUe, how; roanil, when; voavum', why; rceSrrje'ant, wherefore; 
X00, where; which, as they can be placed nowhere but in 
the beginning, derive no particular distinction from that po- 
sition. 

There are adverbs that in no place seem to be susceptible 
of an emphasis, viz. those which express chance, probabili- 
ty, and similar vague and undefined ideas — t)icllcicl)t', per- 
haps ; fccvmuttytid), probably ; roafyf'fdmnKd), very likely ; 
and others. As no difference arises, in the purport of the 
sentence, from their situation, they may be put any where, 
even between the subject and the verb, where no other ad- 
verb is permitted to stand. SMe'fer SDTann feietfeidjt' rmvb eg 
imffen. This man perhaps will know it; ©eitt 25ru'&ei* fcev- 
mutfy'ltd) fyat ifym tag gefdnue'ben, His brother probably has 



244 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. [BOOK II. 

written that to him. If they have any effect when thus 
transposed, it may be, that they rather give force to the 
subject. 

The negative, nifl)t, not, has its station commonly after the 
object; as, £»cv Qttann tt)Ut fei'ne ^>(iicl)t niclyf, The man does 
not do his duty. Here the action of the verb is accompanied 
by the negative. If it is to be particularly referred to the 
subject, or object, or any other word, it must be put before 
such word. Sfttcbt SKeid^tfyum, fon'feew ^ufrie'benfyeit mad)t 
Me Sften'fdjCJl g(ucr'ltd), Not wealth, but contentment makes 
men happy. In this instance, the negative is applied to the 
subject, and stands before it. iajft UU6 ltid)t fccn 33crht|V ce$ 
©dnffes, fon'omi t>en %ot> fo bk'kv treff'lic()cr @ee'Ieute 
fceffci'gCtt, Do not let us lament the loss of the ship, but the 
death of so many fine seamen. The negative before the 
object. 

Exercises. 

A very just comparison. He experienced quite a different 
treatment. She sang this air beautifully. They wore their 
best dresses yesterday. It is by no means decided. In 1 or- 
der 1 to 11 ex 10 tricate 12 himself 2 as 3 soon 4 as 5 possible 6 from 7 
his 8 embarrassment 9 . He will depart to-morrow. They will 
probably resort to this measure. He has not received your 
letter. Do not trouble yourselves about the past, but think of 
the future. 

very, fefyr. to decide, etttfdjci'&ett, irr. 

just, vicfo'ttg. in order, um. 
comparison, ^Bergteid)', m. as soon as, fo bafo afc. 

b. b. possible, mog'Ud). 

to experience, crfafy'vcn, irr. from, aa$. (Dat.) 

quite, ganj. embarrassment, S&erfe'genfyeit, 
different, Dcvfdjte'&ett. /. 

treatment, SSebcinb'fang, /. to extricate, fycrautf'jiefyciu 

to sing, ftng'cil, irr. to-morrow, mov'gcu. 

air, li'VU, f. to depart, ab'VCtfcu. 

beautifully, fd)6n. probably, n>al)v'fd)etnttd>. 

to wear, tiw'gcn, irr. to, JU. [Dat.) 

yesterday, gcftCVU. measure, ®ft<X£'Xt§Zl, f. 

dress, ftUffc, n. 3. b. e. to resort, gvei'fen. 

by no means, hi'nt$W§& letter, s 25vicf, m. 3. b. b. 



CH. 7. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 245 

to receive, erfyaf'tett, irr. the past, MS ^evsattg'ene. 

to trouble one's self, fid) k= but, a'bct\ 

fum'mevn. to think of, bebenf'en. (Ace.) 

about, um. (Ace.) the future, MS gu'tunftige. 



CHAPTER VII. 
PREPOSITIONS. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 

When the same preposition belongs to more than one noun, 
it need be only once expressed ; as, 33on mei'ltem ^Ba'tn, mil 1 ? 
item 23vu't>ci* nnb mei'nev ©djroef'ter, From my father, my 
brother, and my sister. 

Some prepositions govern a genitive, some a dative, some 
either a genitive or dative, some an accusative, and some 
either a dative or an accusative. 

1. Prepositions governing the Genitive. 

mtftatt', instead ; as, anfUtt' t>cS ^(i'ttvS, instead of the father, 
©tatt is sometimes separated from an, as, ail ^in'DeS jtatf , 
instead of a child ; in which case, this last word may also 
be considered as a substantive, and written with a capital 
letter, <&U\tt, place. 

(I)a(b) is only used in compounds : particularly, ait'fct'fyafb, 
out of; as, au'fevfyalb t>e$ Jjpau'feev out of doors; tn'nevfyafb, 
in, within ; as, in'lievtyalb bm'er. ^a'ge, within three days ; 
O'bevtyalb, above; as, o'bevfyalb t>ev <&U\M, above the town ; 
un'tevfyaib, below ; as, ini'tcvfyalb bet' ©tabt, below the 
town. 

tyat'ben, or fyal'Oer. (when the noun has no article or pronoun 
before it), on account of, for the sake of; as, bc£ grie'beilS 
fyal'ben, for the sake of the peace ; Zi'UXS fyarbet*, on ac- 
count of age; bei'nev iafter tyat'beil, on account of your 
vices. £al'ben is often joined with the genitive of the per- 
sonal pronouns, id), I, fcu, thou, XOXX, we, &c, gen. ttici'ner, 
of me, tci'neV/ of thee, unfcf, of us, &c. ; in which case the 
£nal v of these genitives is either changed into t, or a t is 
21* 



246 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [bOOK II, 

added ; as, mei'nctfyatbcn, for my sake ; fcet'liCtfyalben, for 
thy sake; fet'ncttyalben, for his or its sake; im'fcrtljufben/ 
for our sake ; eu'fetfyalbcn, for your sake ; ity'vettyalbcn, for 
her or their sake. It is also joined with t>C§, of that, and 
tt>cg, of what or which ; as, fcefj'tyafb, on account of that ; 
M)CJ3'l)alb/ on account of which or what. 

tieffettS, on this side of; as, Dief'f eitS M gluffe^, on this 
side of the river. 

jCH'fCitg, beyond, on the other side ; as, jcn'feittf fceg (Sftn'gtf, 
on the other side of the Ganges. 

haft, by virtue of; as, fraft mci'ncS 2dn'te6, by virtue of my 
office. 

font, according to, conformably ; as, (illtt &e$ O'bvigFeitlidjCtt 
S3efct)lS', according to the command of the government. 

tttit'teift or bermiftefyi, by, by means of; as, mtt'tdfl or fcev* 
mtt'tcljl fcci'nctf 23ct'jtaut>C£, by means of your assistance. 

tttt'gcad)tct or ot)lt'gead)tCt, notwithstanding, sometimes pre- 
cedes and sometimes follows the noun ; as, un'gcadjtct alter 
«$iu'&cnu|fc, notwithstanding all impediments ; fci'uctS §lei'* 
fc£ Utt'geacl) tet, notwithstanding his industry. 

lUt'rccit or otm'roeit, not far from ; as, usi'ttfit bl$ 2)ov'fe$/ not 
far from the village. 

fcevmo'gc, by reason or virtue of, by dint of, by means of; as, 
fcenno'ge fet'ncr CBcbiivf, by reason of his birth ; t>erm6'ge 
Dct* IfblUlg, by dint of practice; WVttlo'ge be$ $ki'\t$, by 
means of diligence. 

Wty'ttnt, during; as, n?at)'ren& MX $lit, during the time; 
n?dl)'vcilD fccS tfrie'geS, during the war. 

roe'gen, on account of, because of. It may stand before or 
after the noun ; 3d) tfyftt c$ mei'nc* 33a'tcr$ n>e'gett/ 1 did it 
because of or on account of my father ; IDC'gCtt fci'uetf 
glei'fcS, on account of his diligence. 2Bc'geit is often 
joined with the genitive of pronouns, like fyafben; as, mei'* 
ttCtrocgcn, for my sake ; t>e£'n>egen on account of that; tteg'- 
tDCgcu, on account of which or what, &c. 

2. Prepositions governing the Dative. 

<Ut6, out of; as, cuts t>cm 33ct'te, out of bed. 

(Ut'fav out of, without, besides ; as, (Ut'fev Ol'&'tttmg, out of or 

without order ; au'fer t>ei* ©ta&t, out of the city or town ; 

mi'fev fcem £au'fe, out of the house; au'fer xtxit, beside* 

me. 



CH. 7. § I.j SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. S47 

Ui, by, near; as, bet t»em £au'ff/ near the house; 6ei fcer 

■$<xni, by the hand, 
etltge'gen, against, towards ; as, fcem SOBtn'&C entge'gen, against 

theNvind; QODiv raol'len mi'fenn greun'fce entge'gen ge'fyen, 
We will go to meet our friend. 

gegenft'ber, opposite to ; as, t>em ^au'fe gegemVbec, opposite to 
the house. It may be separated ; as, ge'gen mit Xl'btX, op- 
posite to me. 

mit, with ; as, mit t>em ^a'tcr, with the father. 

nad), 1. after, behind ; 2. to or towards, with names of 
places, and verbs expressing motion ; 3. according to, fol- 
lowing ; as, wad) mil*, after or behind me ; 353ann ge'fyeK 
@te wad) ber @tat»c? When do you go to town ? fei'nct* (Se* 
htVt' wad), according to his birth ; fcem ©tto'me wad), fol- 
lowing the stream. 

neb|t or fammt, together with ; as, neb|t or fammt t>em 35a'ter, 

together with the father, 
fett, since ; as, fett ttV $tit, since the time. 
*00n, from, of, by ; as, fcOU mil*, from me, of me ; %)a$ G5efctcf)t' 

tft \)0n itym, That poem is by him. 
t>0r, before ; as, DOl* mil*, before me. 
$W, to, at, by, on, in ; as, JU mif, to me ; £tt iOtt'&Ott, at or in 

London ; jtt J?au'fe, at home ; ju c 2Baffev / by water ; ju 

ian'fce, on land ; ju §ttfe, on foot. 
$wnad)|t', next to ; as, (Si: fag mil* JUUad)|V, He sat next to 

me. 
Jtmu'fcer, contrary to, against ; as, mil* $Uttn'i>er, against me. 

3. Prepositions governing the Accusative. 

fcttvct), through ; as, tmrd) t>ew "SBaffc, through the wood ; fcuvdj 
t>td), through you. 

fur, for ; as, fur mid), for me ; flit* t>eu Spi'dS, for the price. 

gc'gcn, against, opposite ; as, ge'gew ben c 2BinD / against the 
wind ; gc'gcn mid), against me or towards me. 

gen (contraction of gc'gcn), towards, is applied to few objects ; 
as, gen ^im'twf, towards heaven. It is also used as a nau- 
tical phrase ; as, SftOl'fc gcrt £>|t, north by east. 

fon'beV I without ; as, ofy'we or fow'&CV mid), without me. 

um, about ; as, tint t>te ©tact, about the city ; wm mid), about me. 
nu'fcev, against, in opposition to ; as, ttH'fcev Wttd), eud), itjn, ftf, 
t#, fte, against me, you, him, her, it, them. 



248 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [BOOK II. 

4. Prepositions governing the Genitive, or Dative; and the 
Genitive, or Accusative. 

JUfol'ge, according to, before the substantive, with the gen- 
itive : as, Jtlfot'gC Sfy'reS SSefcljfe', according to your com- 
mand : but after the substantive with the dative ; as, 3fy'vem 
^ 95efd}I' Jlifol'ge, according to your command. 

IctngS, along, generally with the dative, sometimes with the 
genitive^; as, IdltOS fccm "^Be'ge, along the way ; and some- 
times, Icings £>e£ '^Be'gCS, along the way. 

Ofy'nc, without, generally with the accusative ; as, ofj'nt mid)/ 
without me ; but in some phrases, after the substantive, with 
the genitive ; as, groeifcfc ofy'ne, without doubt. 

5. Prepositions governing the Dative, or Accusative.* 

an, at, in, on, with the dative ; as, an ei'ncm Ov'te, in or at a 

place ; as, <£v ift an al'len £>r'tcn, He is at or in every place : 

but, an, to, with the accusative : as, Sr ge'fyct an al'le Ox'tt, 

He goes to every place, 
anf, in, upon, with the dative ; as, £)a$ 33 ltd) Itegt auf fccnt 

%tfd)'t, The book lies upon the table : but, auf, into, on, with 

the accusative ; as, ie'ge t>a$ 25 ltd) auf ten %i\d), Lay the 

book on the table, 
fyin'ter, behind, with the dative ; as, Sf ift fyin'ter mil', He is 

behind me : but with the accusative, in St* ficllt fid) fytn'tet 

mid), He places himself behind me. 
ill, in, with the dative ; as, St' tjt in fccm ^im'mctr, He is in the 

room : in, into, with the accusative ; as, St* gH)et in t>a$ 

sJittt'mcr, He goes into the room, 
ne'ben, next to, with the dative; as, St* roofmt ne'6en mct'nem 

J£>au'fc, He lives next to my house : but with the accusative, 
in (2r Jte'fyet ne'ben mctn £au£, He moves next to my house, 
i. e. He moves into the house next to mine, 
lt'bcr, above, with the dative ; as, St* roofynt h'btt mir, He lives 
over or above me : but tVbct', over, with the accusative, in 
<5l* fpt'ing'ct u'fcfV mtdj, He jumps over me. 

* If they signify motion or rest in a place, the dative is 
used ; but when motion to a place is expressed, the accusative 
is used. 



CH. 7. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 249 

IM'ter, among, under, below, with the dative ; as, (£r i|t Xin'ttV 
cen im'Un, He is among the people ; £r ijt un'tCV tttif, He is 
below me ; <£$ liegt im'ter oem $t'fd)e, It lies under the 
table : but with the accusative, in (£r ge'fyet im'ter tit Uu'tt, 
He goes among the people ; (£r piit fid) un'tcr mid), He 
places himself below me ; 3d) n>Ct*'fe e$ im'ter t>en £ifd), I 
throw it under the table. 

fcor, before, with the dative ; as, 33or t>er 3^t Before the 
time ; 33 or mil* lUllb cin 35aum, Before me stood a tree : 
but with the accusative, in (£r get)t t)0r Ote S^fir, He goes 
before the door ; (£r trttt i)0r fcen SHic^'tet*/ He steps before 
the judge. 

jnrif d)'en, between, with the dative ; as, £r giltg £toifd)'en Otr 
UUD mir, He walked between you and me: but with the 
accusative, in (5r orong'te ftd) jroifcf)'en oid) uno mid), He 
forced himself between you and me. 



§ 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
RULE I. 

The preposition always continues with the case, and is 
usually prefixed to it. 

J^afben, fyal'ber, entge'gen, junu'&cr, are constantly put after 
their cases. Surd), nad), gegenft'ber, uit'gead)tet, roe'gen, ju, 
jufofge, sometimes before, and sometimes after. See § 1. 

RULE II. 

The preposition together with its case may be looked upon 
in the position of words, as an adverb ; accordingly, its place 
is after the object. 3d) t)<Cbt em ' ett SSrief au£ £)eutfd)'kno 
(vt)<xi'U\\, I have received a letter from Germany. 

RULE III. 

The preposition with its case may be put before the object, 
for the purpose of emphasis : 3d) fya'be (UtS 2)etttfd)'(anD et'tten 
SSrtcf crfyal'ten — here the words &u$ 2)eutfd)'lant> acquire 
energy from their position. But the stress is most forcible, 
when the preposition is placed at the beginning of the sen- 
tence : 7Lu$ 2) c it tfd) '(.an t> I) a' be id) ei'nen 23rief evfyaCten, From 
Germany I have received a letter. 



250 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [BOOK II. 

RULE IV. 

It cannot be inserted between the subject and the verb, un- 
less it belongs exclusively to the former ; as, 2)et* SDfoutl ttlit 
fcem btau'en SHocte fyat es getfyan', The man with a blue coat 
(that is wearing a blue coat) has done it. ^c'nci* ttlit fcettt 
SVgert fyat Die Xtjat begaug'en, That one with the sword (that 
is, he who has the sword) has committed the deed. It is not 
said, that the first has done it with the blue coat, or that the 
second has committed the deed with the sword ; this would be 
a false construction. But, from the collocation of the words, 
it is to be understood, that the one, who wears a blue coat, 
is charged with a certain deed, and the other, who has a 
sword, has committed the deed. Therefore, if the prepo- 
sition, with its case, is not exclusively referred to the subject, 
it cannot be put, where we see it in the examples adduced. 

RULE V. 

If an adverb and preposition meet in the same member of 
a sentence, the adverb should come before the preposition, 
especially, when the former consists only of one or two syl- 
lables ; for example, €u fc(n*eibt gut ttlit fcic'fef fft'bw, He 
writes well with this pen ; 3£ir ge'fycn tjm'tt auf fete 3agt>, We 
go a hunting to-day ; @ie rct'fetm ei'lig tmvet) ion'&Ott, They 
passed hastily through London ; Si* ttUi'b ttlDV'gen £U mil* font's 
men, He will come to me to-morrow. The adverbs gut, fyeu'tC, 
ei'tig, tttov'geil, here stand before the preposition. 

Exercises. 

Since this event. Contrary to my wishes. Opposite our 
garden. I have searched after this circumstance in all (the) 
records. That gentleman with the solemn air has made the 
remark. They were soon put to flight. 

since, feit. (Dot.) to search after, liad)'fotfcC)ett. 

event, Sretg'tufc n. 3. b. b. gentleman, Jpevr, m. 

wish, *9£unfc(), m. 3. b. b. solemn air, 2faitS'miene, /. 

contrary, jltnn'&er. remark, S3emev'hllig, /. 

opposite, gegemVber. to make, madj'en. 

garden, *©av'ten, m. 3. a. a. soon, baft>. 

circumstance, *Um'fltcm&, m. to put to flight, ill Die gfac&t 

3. b. b. fcl)(a'geu, irr. 

record, Ux'UwU, f. 



CH. 8. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 251 

CHAPTER VIII. 
CONJUNCTIONS. 

§ 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 

The Conjunction fo 

is employed to connect a sentence when the prior member of 
it begins with a consecutive, causal, or conditional conjunc- 
tion. £)a roir in ocr J*?aupt'fad)e ei'nig fine, fo laf'fet un£ 
nidjt u'bcv KUi'nigtettcn untf entjnm'en, As we agree in the 
essentials, let us not quarrel about trifles. 933cmt man fid) \\\ 
ocn QQBif'fmfdjaften aus'jetdmen trill, fo mug man un'untev* 
bvod)Cnen §UtS beftt'jcn, If a person would distinguish himself 
in the sciences, he must possess unceasing industry. ©0 is not 
always required after the consecutive and causal conjunc- 
tions, such as to, when ; <xi$, as ; rote, as ; roetl, because : but 
it is rarely left out after the conditional conjunctions, such as, 
rcenn, if; obfd)on', obgleid)', roennfd)on, roenngleid)', although. 
When the conditional is not given in the prior member, but 
understood, it is common to make use of fo in the subsequent 
member ; as, J^at'te id) to$ geroufft', fo rod've id) ttidjt gefom'* 
men, Had I known that, I should not have come ; which stands 
for, SXBenn id) l>aS geroujjY l)fo'tt, If I had known that; — there- 
fore fo must be inserted, in the following member. It is to be 
recommended after consecutive and causal conjunctions, when 
the antecedent member is of some length, or consists of several 
parts, ©o is also found after the verb in the imperative mood, 
but no conjunction ; as, SSevtvau'e tfym, fo rotto er tic fyel'fen, 
Trust in him, and he will help thee. 

©0 is used when obgleid)'/ obfd)On', or a similar word, 
meaning though, although, precedes : ood), yet, or a synony- 
mous conjunction, generally follows. Ob tx gleid) jting \)\, fo 
tyxt ex t>od) tne'le (Svfaty'vung, Although he is young, he has 
nevertheless great experience. 



252 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. [BOOK If. 

§ 2. ARRANGEMENT. 



RULE I. 



The conjunction is, in general, placed at the beginning of 
the sentence, and before the subjeat. 

RULE II. 

1. The following conjunctions join words and sentence? 
without changing the position of the verb. 

unt>, and ; as, gcu'er, htft, (Sv'fre, ttnt> Stopfer ffnt> Die Met* 
©(emen'te, Fire, air, earth, and water are the four elements; 
IBix gc'fyen unt> ve'&en mit einan'ttr, We walk and talk with 
one another. 

aud.), also, too ; as, ^ir flttt) fvof), UUD fte aud), We are glad, 
and they too ; 3d) glau'be e£ (aid), I think so too ; Jpa'ben 
©te aud) gefyort ? Have you heard also ? 

a'bev, allein', fon'&crn, but ; as, 933tr ftnt> betntbt', a'ber 
Utd)t enttttu'ttytget, We are afflicted, but not dismayed ; QOBtr 
pfo'gro, attein' (a'ber) nie'mauD (mt'woxUt, We ask, but 
nobody answers ; 923tr tjb'tttt ntd)t£ (Su'te^, a'bet aud) ntd)tS 
23o'feS, We hear no g° od > but nothing bad : 9fftd)t er, fon'&ent 
id), Not he, but I ; 3d) r/a'be e$ nid)t nur gefe'fyen, fon'Devn 
aud) gefyoi't', I have not only seen it, but heard it also. 

tod), jct>od)', but, nevertheless, although, yet; as, ©te ferofr'ttft 
it)tn, bod) CV blteb jtaufc^aft, They threatened him, but he 
remained constant ; St* blet'bet bod) meitt grcutlfc, He remains 
nevertheless my friend ; £r gejUt'tete e£, jefcod)' (Dod)) UU'= 
gente, He granted it, although reluctantly. 

fccuu, for, because ; as, ©te roif'fen e£, fcenn id) fag'te e$ ify'ttCn, 
They know it, for or because I told (it to) them. 

ent'rcefrer, either, o'fcer, or ; as, (Sut'roeDer fte fiui> (or ftnt> fie) 
fai'fcbc greun'&e, o'Der ojfenba're gein'&e, Either they are 
false friends, or open enemies. 

»e'Dcr, neither, nod), nor ; as, ©te ftUO m'btX fyuug'dg nod) 
Dltr'jtig, They are neither hungry nor thirsty. 

}vmx, however, indeed ; as, ©ie tya'ben es jroar, a'ber nid)t mit 
di(d)t, They have it indeed, but not with justise. 

2. The conjunctions, d'btV, but, and attcb, also, may stand 
any where in the sentence. At the beginning, li'Ux WW 



CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 253 

fSnt'bev roei'gevt fid), But my brother declines it. After another 
conjunction, 2)a a'ber meiu 23vu't>er fid) roei'gcrt. After an 
adverb, Stun a'ber befteljlt' C6 Me ^hlg^Ctt, But now prudence 
commands it ; or after a preposition with its case, SOttt fcie'feu 
km'ttn a'bcr Unn id) nid)ts an'fangen, But with these people I 
can do nothing- And it makes no alteration in the influence 
of other words upon the constitution of the sentence. Those 
for instance, which bring the subject after the verb, retain the 
same power, though a'ber be inserted after them ; as appears 
from the preceding examples. It may also be placed after the 
subject, £>ie gravtjo'fen a'ber tj&'imt ten Q;ng'(anrjerit ben ^ricg 
wUavt'. After the object, £>ie granjo'fen tya'beu fceu £ng'* 
laufcern t>eu Kricg a'ber itUaXt'. When not in the beginning 
of the sentence, it commonly gives energy to the word that 
precedes it. The personal pronouns are, generally, put be- 
fore it, when the verb has quitted its original place ; as, 2)a CI* 
a'ber. Uid)t f ommt, But since he does not come ; 2)a$ roun'fcfjm 
ttur a'bcv nicl)t, But this we do not wish ; 2)a6 ©elt> *oer{ving'c 
id) a'ber, But the money I demand. — What has been remarked 
of a'ber, may be applied to aud) ; though perhaps we should 
say, that aucl) has nearly, but not quite the same license of po- 
sition. Moreover, when cutd) is placed at the beginning of a 
sentence, the subject may be placed after the verb ; which 
would be wrong after a'ber. Ex. 21 ltd) glaubt fein 33a'ter, His 
father also believes; or TJLud) fein 33a' ter glaubt, Also his father 
believes. 

RULE III. 

The following conjunctions, when taken relatively, require 
the verb to be placed at the end of the sentence ; but their 
use will be best understood by examples, as they are not al- 
ways used as relatives. 

ate, t as, when, than, like, but. fcemnad)', fin'temaf, whereas, 

bebor/, before. e'fye, before. 

bi$, till. fatfg or im §afl, in case. 

i>a, when. tn fo fern, in so much, if. 

fca, infcem', as, since, whilst. ttad)t>em', after, after that. 

t>a£, that. mil, fctrocU', because. 

<Wf bag, Damtt', in order that, ob, whether. 



t % H has sometimes a comparative signification. 
22 



254 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



[book II. 



aU 06, as if. nneroofyl 7 , 

Mnn, if, when. obrooijf, 

tt)0, fo, if. obglcict)', ]> though, although, 

roofent', fofent', oafet-n', if. obfdjon', 

n>o nid)t, if not. rcemtgtcicv/, J 
tm'gcacl)tet, or ofyn'gead)tet, 
notwithstanding. 

3, The following conjunctions require the verb to be placed 
at the end of the sentence, if used relatively ; but otherwise 
the verb is put before the nominative. 



oafycr/, hence. 
ttffialb', or ~) 
Oeffyal'bcn, therefore, 

oefroe'gen, [> for which 
Uttt Ufivoiikn, | reason, 
oantm', J 



Ifcofyer', whence. 
roef^alb 7 or 1 

mifyal'bm, 

urn weffnullen, 
roanmV, 



wherefore, 
for which 
reason. 



4. The following conjunctions require certain others after 
them, which frequently cause the nominative to be placed 
after the verb. 



tnt'tioebcv , either, requires 
roe'oev, neither, 
votii, because, 


o'oer, or. 
jtoct), nor. 
fo. 


fca, when, 


fo. 


je, the, 

forcofyr, as well, ) 

(06(1(0', as soon, J 


je, or oefto, the. 
afc, as. 
'a'btt, <xM\\' t but. 

OOrf), Oen'norf), or jeoocl/, how- 


jwav, indeed, 


ever, yet. 
$Uid)'tt>of)l, yet, for all that, 
notwithstanding. 




fytttge'gen, on the contrary. 
nid)t$ oefto m'ni&V, never- 
theless. 


aemt, if, 


"fo.* 



* Observe, the word fo is sometimes a conjunction, some- 
times an adverb, and sometimes is used as a relative pronoun* 
Examples. 1. As a conjunction ; @0 i*t* ixt'bit, bit tud) Ut'bttXr 



CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



255 



wit, gleicl)ttue', as, 
fo, so, 
nid)t, not, 



3ticl)t alicin', ) otonl 

md)t mtv, J Ji 

obaletd)', 

o6fd)on', 

cbwotji', 

wmn fd)on, 

toenn and), 

mtvoobi', J 



requires fo. 

fo. 

fon'oent, but. 
( fon'oern, but. 
\ fon'oent and), but also. 



although, 



fo, so. 

fo — t>0d) f fcen'ttOd), however, 
nevertheless. 

fo'nidtfs oefto roe'niger, nev- 
ertheless. 



As the application of conjunctions may be better learned 
by examples than by rules, the following sentences are sub- 
joined to exemplify their use. 



711$ wit ju %'bmb gegeffen 
tjdt'un, (fo) gino/en wit fpo^ 
|ie'ren. 

@o vttt) ate ei'ne SKo'fe. 

@r iff after ate id). 

£r fyan'oeft ate em red)*'; 
fcl)afener 20?ann. 

211$ tt oen 2tuf vufyr in t>er 
<gtat>t kmevfte. 

G* tjt jwav mettt geinfr nid)t, 
a'fcer. ood) auci) nidjt mein 

%ti id) in Son'oon antam. 

SSi€ t>ie ©on'ne Die Effort's 
ten gel'oei* auf (Sfen nnvo. 

£>a feet* S5o'te in Son'oon 
an'fam, 

33om 33?oi;'gen 6is pm 
OTenD. 



When we had supped, we 
took a walk : or having sup- 
ped, &c. 

As red as a rose. 

He is older than I. 

He acts like an honest man. 

When he perceived the tu- 
mult in the city. 

He is not my enemy in- 
deed, but yet he is not my 
friend. 

When I arrived in London. 

Till the sun shall loosen the 
congealed fields. 

When the messenger arrived 
in London. 

From morning till evening. 



If you love (those) who love you. 2. As an adverb ; &$ ijt fo, 
wit id) gefagt' tja'bt, It is so, as I said ; SBie fo ? How so ? 3. As 
a relative pronoun ; £)as 23ttd), fo (roel'djes) id) gefriuft' fya'fre, 
The book which I have bought. 






256 



SYNTAX OP THE CONJUNCTION. 



[BOOK II, 



Set idj fcen attaint, wl'djaf 

fo e'bel gefyan'oett, cfy're uno 
lie'fce ; or, 

3) a id) ben attaint e^'re im& f 
lie'cc, roel'rijcr fo e'oel gefyan'* 
belt fjat. 

t 3Beitn er bas S5ud) fe'fett 
will. 

^d) faf) e£; oa'fyei roei* id) 
eg. 

SBoljcr' nriffen fie e$ ? 

Si* nntjfte e$ nid)t, ba'vum 
Ija'be id) eg ifym gefagt'. 

55e*oof' id) Den QOBalfc cv- 
retdjt' fyat'te. 

2(te tct bie'fen Sttor'gen an 
Dent gender jtanD, (&a*| faf) 
id) t>ie ©ofoa'ten in t>ie ©tafct 
fom'men. 

intern' or mil id) an bent 
geit'jtcv ganfy fafy id), &c. 
2£ie id) an bent gen'jtev 

5)a id) an bem gen'jter 
ffanb, &c. 
SBterootjP er fe^t frattf if, 

fo ift bod) nod) Jpof'uung 
•oovfyan'bcn, ba£ et roie'bev auf- 
fommen roer-fce, (or roirb.) 

3>cfj foermacfyc biv nid)t <xU 
Urn' mem £au$, fon'betn aud) 
J^a'be uub (gut. 

3d) evrccxv'tetc 3#re W- 
fttttft uid)t, befto gr&'fer i|t 
mei'ne gmt'be. 

3e vu'biger bas le'&eit i|t, 
befto gcfd)icf'tei if e$ jum 
Sdactybenfcn. 

Gmt'roeber bif t>u tod, o'bet* 
Du roivft cs vKi'ben. 



Since I honor and love the 
man, who acted so nobly. 

If he will read the book. 

I saw it ; thence, or for that 
reason, 1 know it. 

Whence do they know it 1 

He did not know it, there- 
fore I have told (it) him. 

Before I had reached the 
wood. 

When, or as, I stood at the 
window this morning-, or stand- 
ing at the window this morn- 
ing, I saw the soldiers coming 
into town. 

Whilst I was standing at the 
window, I saw, &,c. 

As I happened to stand, or 
as I stood at the window, &c. 

When, or since, I stood at 
the window, &c. 

Although he is very ill, yet 
there is room to hope that he 
will recover. 

I leave to thee not only my 
house, but also my goods and 
chattels. 

I did not expect your arri- 
val, the greater therefore is 
my joy. 

The more quiet life is, the 
more fit it is for reflection. 

Either thou art mad, or thou 
wilt become so. 



* 3)a, in such cases, is frequently omitted and understood, 



CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 



257 



(5r fdjen'et roe'fcet* (Bott nod) 
SDten'fdjen, rce'fcer £ot> nod) 
*e'ben. 

£6 ifyvgleidj gefefyvt' fett>,fo 
gtefct eg fcod) (or gieidj'roofyf) 
nodj ine(, M$ it)v ntd)t roif'fet. 

£>b fie g(cid) vud) finfc, fo 
fiht'nen fte ood) ntd)t at'Ien 
tiu'tcn fyef'fen. 

Obwtjl' eg nnmog'tidj fd)ien, 
nicl)tg Def'to rce'nigev fcevfndj'-' 
ten nm* eg. 

Snoem' tc( fcafcon' fptadj. 

06 er gleid) mein defter ij£ 
fo fommt er t>od) nid)t jn mil*. 

G*r |)at e^ entme'&er getfyan', 
o'oer Witt) eg nod) tfynn. 

@ie tyatmtr nn'red)tgetfyan', 
fcen'nod) will id) i|v fcerge'ben. 

@o (eidtf'gfanfctg er i\\, fo 
tren'fog ift er. 

@o fang'e er fid) in t>en 
©d)t*anf en oer 33efd)ei't>enfyett 
fjult, war id) fein anfvid)tig= 
jter grettnfc. 

£b er g(eid) aft t|t, fo fyat 
er t)ocl) ten fcoWtgen (Sebrand)' 
fei'ner ©ei'ftesh'dfte. 

Sin £tnt> mnfj ntd)tnnrfcen 
SBa'tev, fon'fcern and) t>ie SOTnt'-- 
ter efy'ren. 

©obalfc' (alg) eg iuer gefd)fa'= 
gen t^at. 

Sdac()t)cm' air Ztl'feg roofyl 
wnterfndjt' fyat'ten. 

<&'i)t t)ie ©loc'te ang'gefd)la= 
gen fyat. 

3e mefyr id) trinf'e, t>ef to 
mefyr t?a(?e id) £>urft. 

3e (ar/ger, ;e Ik'ber. 
22* 



He fears neither God nor 
men, neither death nor life. 

Although you are learned, 
yet there is still much that you 
do not know. 

Although they are rich, yet 
they cannot help every body. 

Although it seemed impos- 
sible, we nevertheless at- 
tempted it. 

Whilst I was speaking of 
it. 

Although he is my cousin, 
yet he does not come to (see) 
me. 

Either he has done it, or he 
will do it yet. 

She has done me wrong, yet 
I will forgive her. 

He is equally credulous and 
treacherous. 

Whilst he kept himself 
within the bounds of modesty, 
I was his most sincere friend. 

Although he is old, he still 
has the perfect use of his men- 
tal faculties. 

A child must not only hon- 
or his father, but also his 
mother. 

As soon as it has struck 
four. 

After having well examined 
every thing. 

Before the clock has done 
striking. 

The more I drink, the more 
thirsty I am. 

The longer, the dearer. 



358 SYNTAX OP THE CONJUNCTION. [BOOK II, 



RULE III. 

Some conjunctions, when at the beginning, cause the subject 
to be placed after the verb. They are t>ct, then ; fcatyer', there- 
fore ; Dawi, fcarauf, then ; fcantm', for that reason ; fcemuadj', 
fo(g'ftd), consequently ; fceu'nod), jefcod)', nevertheless ; nun, 
je£t, now ; fo, therefore ; fytnge'gen, on the contrary ; iu&ef'fen, 
meanwhile ; inglei'clKU, likewise ; faitm, hardly ; mitt} in', 
therefore ; nod), nor ; liberties', iVbvtgenS, besides. 3) a t'attt 
t)CV SOtamt, Then came the man; SDfttty in' UTtftd) &etn SSw'&ei', 
Consequently your brother mistakes. Excepting to, all of them 
may likewise be put after the verb ; as, 2)CI* SDftutn gUttbt 
fcatyev', The man thinks therefore ; %d) jwei'flc jefcod)', I doubt 
however, ger'ner, fofg'Ud), fyinge'gen, inbef'fen, inglei'djen, 
\lbtXbW$ r , n'bfigentf, may even stand between the subject and 
the verb : 2)ei' 33>etfaf'ftt fev'nev betyaup'tet, The author more- 
over maintains, 2U'J0/ therefore ; bod), but ; enttt>e't>ei*, either; 
tne'fcer, neither ; JltHlV, indeed ; are to be added to the forego- 
ing : for when they begin a sentence, they may, like these, 
bring the subject after the verb, though it is not necessary. It 
is right to say, 2tt'fo ^ ev SBvn'&er fy&t gefdme'ben, The brother 
then has written; and, 2U'fO fyat fcet* SSro'&er gefd)Vte y 6en. 
Likewise thus : £>er 25rn'ber fyat at'fo gefdjrie'ben, and 2)etr 
95ni'&ei* al'fo t]at gefdjrie'ben. By this transposition, the force 
of the sentence may be varied, which is no small advantage in 
composition. The word ndm'Ud), namely, which should be 
considered as a conjunction, may be included among those 
last mentioned : but when at the beginning of a sentence, it 
never causes the subject to be put after the verb. 

Exercises. 

If you do not go immediately. Then we rejoiced. She 
nevertheless forgave him. Consequently his assertion rests on 
a wrong conclusion. Namely, the question arises, whether we 
shall remain or not. But the Tyrolese were not discouraged. 
This supposition also may easily be refuted. 

if, wenn. to rejoice, ftd) fveu'en. 

immediately, fogfetdj'. nevertheless, Klt'liod). 

to go, ge'ljen, irr. to forgive, fcerge y bett, irr., 

then, to. consequently, fcemnadjV 



CH. 9.] 



SYNTAX OF THE INTERJECTION. 



259 



to rest, beru'fyen. 

assertion, ^etyaitp'tMtg, /. 
upon, cutf. (Dat.) 
wrong, falfct). 

conclusion, @cb(u§, m. 3. b. 
namely, nam'lid). 
question, §V(l'ge, f* 

to arise, ent jte'l) en. 

whether, ob. 

to remain, blei'ben. 



or, o'fcer. 
but, a'ber. 

Tyrolese, %X)K0'Ux, m. 3. a. 0. 
discouraged, entmu'tfyigt. 
b. supposition, 33ei e mu'tt)ung, /. 
also, audj. 
may be, fdjft ftd) (literally, 

suffers itself.) 
easily, (eictot. 
to refute, XDXtttW^ttU 



CHAPTER IX. 



INTERJECTIONS. 

The interjection stands quite by itself; it neither governs 
nor is governed by any other part of speech. Therefore, 
the nominative and vocative, being independent cases, that is, 
such as are not governed by a preceding word, are most proper 
after interjections, lid) ! id) Utt'glftcf licfeer SDtenfd), Ah me ! 
unhappy mortal ! Si! bet* @dja({? ! Ah! the rogue! 0\ tt>a£ 
fur tin ©djeu'fal ! O ! what a horrible object ! lid) ! (ie'ber 
gtremrt ! Ah! beloved friend! 0! tfyeu'ev jtei* 33a'ter, OI 
dearest father ! 

The genitive case is found after interjections : for example, 
%d) ! t>eS £'[ertt>e$, Ah ! the misery ! ! fcCt' greu'fce, Oh ! what 
joy ! IXd) ! t>e£ Utt'txittf batClt, Ah ! the ungrateful wretch ! spfiti ! 
free? fdjam'fofen 50?en'fd)Cn ! Fie ! what a shameless man ! 

The dative of advantage, or disadvantage, occurs after 
certain terms, that may be called interjections, though they 
are not strictly of that description; as, ^OBofyt ifyttt! Happy 
him ! — <28ot)l t>em 9J?en'fd)en, Happy the man ! — SBcfy mil 4 1 
Woe is me ! 

The position of the interjection is arbitrary ; it may be 
placed wherever it presents itself, according to the emotion of 
the speaker or writer. 



BOOK III. 



PROSODY. 



Prosody, containing the principles of syllabic division, 
quantity, accent, and verse, may be considered as the syntax 
of phonology, i. e. the doctrine of the sounds of the language, 
the elements of which form the first part of this grammar. 
See Book I. Part I. Ch. 4. 



CHAPTER I. 

DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES.* 

" In the German language the division of words into sylla- 
bles is not founded upon derivation, but on pronunciation ; we 
therefore follow the principle, Divide as you speak." t 

1. The letters cl), fd), pfy, and tt), when they form simple 
consonants, can never be disconnected on account of any 
alteration of the word in which they occur ; as, %ud), cloth, 
%VL'-d)l$ (not Suc-'fyeS) ; ^taufcfc, exchange, tau-fctjCtt, to ex- 
change, (not tawfcrfjen,) ; sptyilofopfy, philosopher, spfytlofiKpfyen, 
philosopers; Sftati), counsellor, SHrt-'tfJC/ counsellors. 

2. The consonant n before g or £ is not to be pronounced 
separately, although a vowel should follow the g or f ; 
because the combination of n with g or f affects the pronun- 
ciation of both letters, by giving them a nasal sound. Thus 
the true sound of the verbs ftng'^en, to sing, and tant'tn, to 
thank, would be spoiled by separating them in this manner, 
fin-gen, t>an~frn. 

* The mode of dividing words into syllables would not have 
been ranked among the parts of prosody, if this division were 
not founded altogether on principles of elocution. 

f Heinsius's German Grammar. 



CH. 2.] QUANTITY. 261 

3. A word compounded of several words is divided ac- 
cording to the words of which it consists. Thus ^Bevfjtatt, 
workshop, is divided < 20Berfc|Utt; fcofafcCU, to perfect, feoflsen&en. 

4. A long vowel or a diphthong, followed by a simple or 
compound consonant, is pronounced with this consonant, if it 
terminates the word ; as, gtum, green ; ttteift, most : hut if a 
vowel with or without other letters is added to its end, the 
consonant, which before terminated the word, becomes the 
initial of the additional syllable ; as, gnYuev, greener ; SD?ei'« 
fter, master. 

5. If a short vowel is followed by a double consonant and a 
vowel, the two consonants of which the double one consists, are 
commonly separated in pronunciation and spelling, the first of 
them being joined with the preceding vowel, and the second 
with the subsequent vowel ; as, ©dnf^fe, vessels ; U&tUttX, 
weather. 

6. A short vowel, followed by one or more consonants and a 
vowel, is commonly joined in pronunciation with the consonant 
by which it is followed ; as, ^ody-e, week ; 35ufd)*e, bushes ; 
fdjersjen, to jest ; gender, window. 

Observation. Many German authors divide words into 
syllables according to derivation, without regarding their pro- 
nunciation ; and others divide partly according to the former 
and partly according to the latter. We have in this grammar 
endeavoured to divide every word conformably to its true pro- 
nunciation, — taking together for each syllable so many letters 
as are necessary to produce each of the component sounds of 
the word. 

& 



CHAPTER II. 



QUANTITY. 

The quantity of a syllable consists in the duration of its 
sound. The principal difference between the ancient Greek 
and Latin languages and the German as well as other modern 
languages, in respect to quantity, consists in two things. 
First, there are in the ancient languages but two different 



26*2 QUANTITY. [BOOK III. 

times of duration by which the quantity of syllables is deter- 
mined. They are either long or short ; and there is but one 
kind of length and of shortness, the time of two short sylla- 
bles being equal to one long syllable.* In German there is a 
great variety of longer or shorter syllables : thus in the word 
QGBofy'mmgen, habitations, the syllable ^Bok) is longer than 
UMlg, which surpasses in length the final syllable en. 

The German also differs from the ancient languages in its 
not recognising the principle of position, that is, the effect of 
the meeting of two consonants, by which in the ancient lan- 
guages the preceding syllable is rendered long. For although 
the concurrence of consonants has some influence upon quantity 
in German, yet this influence consists in nothing else than 
the natural effect of several consonants upon pronunciation. 
They lengthen a syllable by obstructing its utterance. Thus 
cin (indef. art.) is shorter than einS, one thing, and this is 
shorter than etnft, once. 

To facilitate the comprehension of quantity in German, 
three different times of duration have been adopted by 
prosodists, the long, the short, and the middle time, which are 
signified by these three signs, -, o, and o.f One long syllable 
is accounted equal to two short ones : while those of middle 
length are in themselves shorter than the former, and longer 
than the latter ; but may sometimes be used as long, and some- 
times as short syllables. 

1. The following syllables are long: all monosyllabic nouns, 
adjectives, and verbs (if they are not used as auxiliaries) ; 
moreover, the radical syllable of every word, and those sylla- 
bles which have the accent ; | as, 93301't, word ; gut, good ; 
fetn (fetjn), to exist; (£rfreu'(ict)eveS, something more pleasant, 
(Mt'tt) Often, to answer. 



* Although there were syllables which were sometimes pro- 
nounced long and sometimes short (ancipites) , yet they did not 
form a medium between long and short, but were pronounced 
either long or short. 

t This sign (u) is here used to signify the middle time, as 
well as the doubtful, i. e. either short or long. 

| The nature of this case will be explained in the next 
chapter. 



CH, 3.] ACCENT. 263 

2. The following syllables are short : the inseparable parti- 
cles belonging to compound verbs, as, be, cut, Cttip, CV, ge, t)Cl*, 
jev, (pages 108 — 110); the unaccented ending of words, as 
e, fee, tc, c(, em, en, er, eg, et ; the definite article, and some 
adjective and adverbial endings, as, C11, Ug, lid), and ifd). 
Examples, berci'ten, to prepare; Slie'fT, depth; (et*) Ik'btt, 
(he) loves; iv'fcett, earthen; roafyr'lid), truly; wei'btfd), ef- 
feminate. 

3. The following syllables are of middle length: mono- 
syllabic pronouns, numerals, prepositions, conjunctions ; some 
adverbs, interjections, and auxiliaries which consist of one syl- 
lable ; the substantive endings, enfc, tmg, kin, nig, fcl)aff, fyeif, 
feit, (see page 20) ; and the adjective, adverbial, and participial 
endings, bar, fam, ent, icl)t, ifdjt, ent>, e(t, ert, erjt; as, 
id), I; Drei, three; fur, for; tt>emt, if; UUtt, now; 0! O!; 
(er) t)Kt (geltebf), (he) has (loved); SSaunVleitt, little tree ; 
gefyav'uifdjt, clad in armour ; ju t o6r'ber|t, first. 

Observation. It should be remembered, that this classifica- 
tion of syllables according to their length is only an approxima- 
tion to a correct representation of their quantity, which in 
many cases depends on other circumstances besides those 
before mentioned ; such as the sense of the words, the meeting 
of certain letters, and other things, which cannot be taught by 
rules, but must be acquired by induction, as one becomes 
familiar with the nature of the language. 



CHAPTER III. 



Accent consists in laying upon a particular syllable of 
a word, or upon a certain part of a sentence, a greater stress 
than upon the rest. Accordingly there are two kinds of ac- 
cent, that which is laid upon a particular syllable, and that 
which belongs to a certain part of a sentence. In this sen- 
tence, 2Me @rie'd)en roaten ffeg'reid), The Greeks were victo- 
rious, the accent is to be placed on G5rie'd)en, the Greeks, 
if the intention of the writer is to exclude the idea that 
the enemies of the Greeks were victorious ; but it must be 



^64 ACCENT. [BOOK III 

laid upon ftcg'vetdj, victorious, if he meant to assert that the 
Greeks were not defeated, but gained the victory.* This rule 
applies of course, as well to words of one, as of several syl- 
lables. 

In order to determine which of several syllables of a word 
has the accent, we must, according to the above principle, 
examine which of them is the most important. The rela- 
tive importance of each syllable, on which the place of the 
accent depends, is determined by the following rule. The 
greatest stress, and consequently the accent, lies generally on 
the radical syllable of the word, unless, it be compounded 
with another word which implies a negation or limitation of 
the radical word. In this case the word which is joined as a 
limitation takes the principal accent; and the radical syllable 
of the main word retains only a secondary accent. Thus the 
words ge'frett, to give ; ©cfeU'fctaft, company ; and most other 
words, have only one accent, viz. on the radical syllable of 
each of them (gcb, fell). But in the words aufge'bcn, to give 
up, 0lei'fegefe(rfct)aft, company for travelling, the original 
words are essentially modified by the additions (Utf, SRn'ft ; 
these therefore take the principal accent, while only a secon- 
dary stress remains on the radical word. In speaking, the 
principal accent is generally expressed by the falling and the 
secondary accent by the rising inflection of the voice ; in 
writing, the former is marked by the sign ('), and the latter by 
the sign ('), after the last letter of the accented syllable. 

It is to be observed that the accent is not moved from the 
radical syllable of a word on account of the addition of a 
syllable which either has no meaning by itself, or, at least, by 
being joined to another word, takes entirely the nature of those 
particles which have no meaning except in connexion with 
other words. This inseparable connexion makes them to be 
considered as parts of the radical word, rather than as limi- 
tations of its original meaning. Thus, with respect to com- 
pound verbs, the inseparable particles, b? f $£, Hit, &c (pages 
108 — HO), do not alter the place of the accent; while all the 



* Accordingly the question, which of several words in a 
sentence is to have the accent, cannot be determined by the 
part of speech to which each of these words belongs, but only 
by the degree of importance which the meaning of the sen- 
tence assigns to each of them. 



CH. 



ACCENT. 265 



separable particles, as an, on, ab, off, attJ?, out, produce that 
effect. Examples : fet'jen, to place ; fccvfet'jen, to displace ; 
(ib'fef jen ; to depose ; ge'fyen, to go ; ttbeige'fyen (inseparable), 
to pass over without noticing; ubcvge'tyen (separable), to go 
over to a different party. Those words, however, which are 
compounded with nn, form exceptions ; because this negative 
particle does not occur by itself, and nevertheless produces so 
great an alteration of the sense that it generally takes the 
principal accent ; as, fvcitnD'lid), friendly ; nn'fvennblid), un- 
friendly ; gall, case; Un'fall, accident. The verb ant'roov'ten, 
to answer, composed of the ancient verb tttOV'ten, to represent 
in words, and the inseparable ant, forms a similar exception. 
In some instances the sense of the sentence and euphony 
alone can decide which of two syllables ought to have the 
principal, and which the secondary accent ; whether, for ex- 
ample, we ought to pronounce ttofl'fenimcn, or fcoU'fom'men, 
perfect; nn'entbefyv ltd), or nricntbefyr'ltd), indispensable. 
Sometimes even an unaccented syllable may be marked by a 
particular oratorial accent ; as in this phrase, ^ic'lc fya'ben 
mn Die'fe Sfy're fid) be'roov'ben, a'bn tfei'iu? fyat fie ev'roov'* 
ben, Many have aspired to this honor, but no one has obtain- 
ed it. 

Foreign words, which are Germanized by omitting the end- 
ings CS, 06, U6, UtS, 0, a, &c, have the accent commonly on 
the final syllable ; as, 2(d) ill' (Achilles); Otymp' (Olympus); 
goufulat' (consulates) ; SSivgif (Virgilius) ; Zlpoli' (Apollo) ; 
SDtplom' (diploma). 

Observation. Accent must not be confounded with quan- 
tity. The latter consists in the duration of the sound of a 
syllable; while the accent marks the degree of emphasis em- 
ployed in pronouncing certain syllables or words. If the ac- 
cent is on a long syllable, it has no influence upon its quanti- 
ty. But when it happens to fall on a short syllable, the 
accent does not actually make the syllable a long one, yet it 
produces a similar effect on its pronunciation ; & that'is, the 
rapid and emphatic manner in which the accented syllable is 
uttered, is followed by a pause preceding the pronunciation of 
the unaccented syllables ; and this pause, together with the 
accented syllable, equals the time of a long syllable, according 
to the above principles of quantity. Examples: SDUtt'ter) 
mother; QOBaf'j'er, water. 
23 



S66 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III 



CHAPTER IV. 

GERMAN VERSE. 

The German verse rests on a double foundation, Rhythm, 
or harmonious measure ; and Consonance, or agreement of 
sounds, which is exemplified principally in rhyme. In the 
ancient Greek and Latin poetry, rhythm alone constituted the 
verse. For although we find rhyme sometimes employed 
(intentionally, as it seems), it must be considered as an 
incidental play upon certain sounds, rather than as an element 
of versification. In German, as in other modern languages, 
the principle still prevails, that there may be verses without 
rhyme, but none without rhythm. Nevertheless it is certain, 
that in some verses the rhythm, and in others the rhyme (oi 
some other kind of consonance), determines the character of 
the verse. 



5-1. O/ Rhythm. 

The German language is capable of imitating all the an- 
cient Greek and Roman metres ; accordingly all the classical 
poetry of the ancients, even the choruses of the dramatic 
poets, have been translated into German verses of the same 
kind. But, in indigenous German versification, a freer use 
has been, and may be made of the rhythmical powers of the 
language, for adapting the measure entirely to the meaning 
of the words, without confining the poet to other rules than 
that measurement of time to which the composer of music is 
likewise subjected. 

1. The ancient Metres. In using the ancient metres for 
German poetry, the above principles of quantity ought to be 
observed. The accent has no direct influence in this kind of 
versification ; except so far as it coincides with the principles 
of quantity, and preserves euphony in general. 

Each foot of the ancient metres may be rendered in Ger* 
man either by one or by more words. It will be sufficient U 
give here examples of all the feet of two and of three syl- 
lables. 



CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 267 

a. Feet of two syllables. 

Spondee, - - $U\\\Vmtt, work of art. 
Pyrrhich'ius, «j u ®t}btetlt',* Sybarite. 
Trochee, - o al'le, all. 
■ Iambus, o - ©eroaft', force. 

b. Feet of three syllables. 

Molossus, gefDfyaupt'mamt, commander. 

Trib'rachys, o u u $cbciWtci?,* blessed. 

Antibacchi'us, --u <£m'XOot)im, inhabitant. 

Bacchi'us, u-- ©ewaft'ttyat, violence. 

Amphim'acer, -u- U'bergaug, transaction. 
Amphib'rachys, u - v (Scfitfy'le, feelings. 

Dac'tylus, -uu ^an'&cvcr, traveller. 

An'apaest, \> u - Siamattt', diamond. 

The following specimens will be sufficient to illustrate the 
use of ancient metres in German. 

Hexameter and Pentameter. 

— v~o J — u - u I — , ti~ U J — u~"u j — u~u j — u 
— u~~ u I — v~~ u I — J -uu I — w I — 

fyibyiid) evfcfcofl' ©cWadjt'ruf ; taifo fdjmet'ferreit aHe $vom* 

SHafd) roie bcv f (an<j in t>er iuft, fcftrm'ten t»ic §eiu't)c mr 

an. 

Suddenly sounded the battle cry ; wildly clanged all the 

trumpets, 
Quick as the clangor in the air, we rushed against the enemy. 

* As every word of more than one syllable has one of these 
long, the pyrrhichius and tribrachys can be formed only by 
monosyllables, or by the initial or final syllables of words of 
more than two syllables Thus in the above examples the two 
first syllables of ©tjbarit' form the pyrrhichius, and the three 
first syllables of QCbctlCtci? form the tribrachys. 



268 



VERSIFICATION. 

The Sapphic Stanza** 



[book III. 



u 


-- 


— o u 


— u 


u 


— 


— u u 


— \J 


u 





— \J \j 


— V 






— u u 


— u 



Itn'fer Sag'roerf en'fret fcer ftil'k ©a&'fcat, 
OBie t>c^ Wlit'ta^ (Slut Me erfefyn'te 9Xottt>'nacl)t. 
©trebt unD fyofft ! Ms en&'lidj t>es eW'gen ©onn'tags 
aftov'gen empov'jteigt. 

Our daily labor the still sabbath terminates, as the desired 
moonlight night (terminates) the heat of noonday. Strive, and 
hope ! till finally the morning of the eternal Sunday rises. 

Observation. It is an important principle particularly in 
ancient metres, that the natural division of every verse into 
words, should correspond in some measure with its division 
into feet, and the general character of the verse. Thus, a too 
frequent repetition of the amphibrachys spoils the character of 
the hexameter ; as, 

Siefc'ltcl) evton'ten Me gfo'teu, e£ fdjroeFten Me Sanger im 

Sfrei'fe. 
Sweetly sounded the flutes, the dancers moved in a circle. 

This verse might be mended in this manner ; 

£>ovt tSnt gto'temmtftf, t>ort fclwing'm fidj ^an'jet im tfrei'fe. 



There sounds the music of flutes, 
in a circle. 



there the dancers move 



2. The Gey^man Rhythm. The metres which are not bor- 
rowed from the Greeks, but originally German, are on the 



* The Sapphic stanza is here divided according to the sim- 
ple mode of the old grammarians ; because we think it prefera- 
ble to that of Ausonius. We also think that the uniform caesura 
after the first syllable of the third foot, as we find it in the 
odes of Horace, cannot be considered as an improvement on 
the original metrical construction which prevails in the poeti~ 
cal remains of Sappho. 



CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 269 

whole founded upon the same principles of quantity, and may 
generally be analyzed into feet, like the ancient metres. But 
these principles of quantity and metrical division are modified 
by accent, euphony, and the sentiment that is to be expressed : 
so that frequently the character of the verse cannot be deter- 
mined by each of its parts, but only by the whole of a poetical 
composition. Accordingly in native German poetry we find 
many deviations from the above stated common rules of quan- 
tity which ought strictly to be adhered to in imitating the an- 
cient metres. Thus, a short syllable may be used for a long one 
particularly when it ends in a vowel, or in a liquid consonant ; 
as in the Iambic measure of Burger's Lenore. 



<2Bie fcon'nerten fcie SSrfttf'en ! 
How the bridges thunder ! 

On the other hand, long syllables may be used for short ones, 
particularly when, from the sense they express, they are com- 
paratively of little importance in the sentence in which they 
occur. Thus in Schiller's Maria Stuart, Mary says, — 

3)ort legt etn gifcfc'er t>en SKacfc'en an ; 
Siefes e'lenfce ga^'jcug fonn'te mid) ref ten ! 

There a fisher fastens his boat to the shore ; 
This miserable vessel might rescue me ! 

Here the first as well as the second syllable of tie'feS is used 
as short, so that this word together with the first syllable of 
C'knte forms an anapaest, and all the emphasis falls on e'fenfce 
(even such a miserable skiff as this, &c.) 

But in most cases of this kind it cannot be said strictly, 
that short syllables are used as long ones, or long syllables as 
short ones. A good reader will take care, that the measure 
which would be disturbed by pronouncing a certain syllable 
according to its natural quantity, be restored by an appropriate 
pause, or by protracting or shortening the subsequent or pre- 
ceding words, so as to restore the general character of the 
verse. 

The most common measure is the Iambic, frequently in- 
terspersed with the spondee or anapaest, or a pyrrhichius used 
as an iambus. The spondee and the anapaest occur among 
23* & 



270 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK 111. 

the iambuses not only in the odd places, as in the Greek tri- 
meter, but in every place. Examples, 

Qcint, %)<i\\t Diefeit fmmfc'Ctd) gtuVnen 23au'men ! 

(©d)Ulet\) 
O thanks, thanks to these friendly green trees ! 

u u — 

3a, in ber gcr'ne fitfylt fid) Die SDTadjt 
SOBenn pet ftel) rtflicft [ie'bett. (<S6tfye.) 

Yes, at a great distance the power is felt, when two love 
each other truly. 

Sometimes the iambic measure is interrupted by a trochee, 

for the sake of greater emphasis. 

£ann id) bod) fur mid) fefl$ ntd)t fptedj'cn, ofy'ne eucfc 

— o 

©d)rccr &u fcevHa'gen. (@d)tf(et\) 

I indeed cannot speak for myself without accusing you 
grievously. 

Next to the iambic, the trochaic measure is most frequent ; 
oftentimes mixed with spondees and dactyls ; 

— — — u o 

SMe n>cit tte'fcct tin frcuVfceS iieb 
%U tfyr etg'ues fyo'ren. (©Stfye.) 

Who like to hear the song of another, rather than their 
own. 

The amphibrachys also not unfrequently constitutes the 
character of the verse, 

&$ bon'nent Die £&'fjen, e£ jit'tcvt bev ©teg, 

Stidjt gvau'et t>em ©djftt'jen auf fc&ttin&'ttdjem SBeg. 

The heights thunder, the bridge trembles, the hunter is not 
afraid on the dizzy path. 

Other verses derive their character from the dactyle, the 
anapaest, or other measures. Besides there is a great number 
of mixed verses ; in some of them a regular change of cer- 



CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 271 

tain feet is observed, while others, like the hymns of Pindar 
and the choruses of the Greek drama, vary according to the 
sentiment of the poet. 

Most of the regular verses and stanzas, are the same in 
German and in English ; particularly in modern German poetry, 
since the bold and high-wrought versification of the twelfth 
and thirteenth centuries has given way to simpler measures. 

We will add a specimen of poetry, the rhythm of which is 
not determined by any certain measure, but by the sense ol 
the words alone. It is taken from Schiller's Maria Stuart 
When the queen after a long and close imprisonment had ob- 
tained permission to walk in the park near the castle, she 
says to Lady Kennedy, her nurse, who vainly endeavoured to 
follow the quick step of the queen, — 

fog mid) Der nen'en gvei'fyeit genie'fen, 

fog mid) etn S?int> fein, fci eg mit ! 

Unt> auf Dem guVnen ^ep'pid) Dei* ^Bie'fen 

spnt'fen ben Uidytm, gcjtiVgelten ©djritt, 

25 in id) t>em ftn'itevn (Sefang'nig entjtie'gen, 

£dft fie mid) uid)t met)r, Die tran'rige @ruft? 

fog mid) in boWen, in Dnr'fttgen 3iVgen 

%t\nftn Die frei'e, Die tyimm'Iifdje hift. 

O £>anf, 3)anf oie'fen frennD'(id) gnVnen 93dn'men, 

2>ie met'iiet? fter'fers fDtan'ern mir Devjtec'fen ! 

3d) mil mid) fret unt> gdufltd) trdn'men, 

933ariim' ans mei'nem fiVfen xB3at?n mid) mc'hn ? 

Umfdngt' mid) uid)t Der roei'te £im'mefefd)oo$ ? 

2)ie 23(ic'fe, frei nnb fef'feflos, 

grge'fycn fid) in nn'gemetfuen sftdn'men. 

Sort, mo Die gran'en SKe'belberge ra'gen, 

gdngt -mei'nes SKei'djes ©rdn'je an ; 

Unb Die'fe 2Bof fen, Die nad) SDtit'tag ja'gen, 

©ie fn'cljen granf'veidjs fer'nen D'cean. 

£i'(enDe Soften ! ©eg'(er Dcr Ktfte ! 
^53cv mit did) roan'berte, mit end) fdjiff ' te ! 
©ru'fet mir freiuiD'lid) mein Su'genbtanb ! 
3d) bin gefang en, id) bin in 25an't>en, 
lid), id) fyab' lei'nen an'bern (SefanD'ten ! 
grei in Ktften ijt en're 35ai?n, 
3(?v feifc nid)t Diefer £6'nigin tut'tertfyan. 



272 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III. 

Let me enjoy the new freedom, 
Let me be a child, be one with me ! 
And on the green carpet of the meadows 
[Let me) try the light, winged step. 
Am I arisen from the dark prison, 
Does the sad vault no longer hold me 1 
Let me in full and thirsty draughts 
Drink in the free, the heavenly air. 

thanks, thanks to these friendly green trees, 
Which conceal from me the walls of my dungeon ! 

1 will dream myself free and happy ; 
Why wake me from my sweet delusion 1 

Does not the wide canopy of heaven surround me 1 

My looks, free and unconfined, 

Wander over immense spaces. 

There, where the grey, misty mountains rise, 

The boundary of my kingdom commences ; 

And these clouds which hasten towards the south, 

Seek the distant ocean of France. 

Hastening clouds, sailors of the air, 

Would that I could wander and sail with you ! 

Salute for me friendly the land of my youth ! 

I am imprisoned, I am in fetters, 

Alas, I have no other messenger ! 

Free in the air is your path, 

You are not subject to this queen. 

The first three lines consist of alternate dactyles and tro- 
chees. From the fourth line the emphasis rises, as Mary con- 
trasts her present freedom with her late imprisonment ; and 
the metre hastens on in dactyls, to the eighth verse. In the 
ninth verse the feeling of gratitude changes the measure 
into the iambic, which continues to the nineteenth. From 
the twentieth verse her desire of deliverance from captivity 
in England, awakened by the sight of the distant mountains 
of Scotland, and the clouds flying towards France, changes 
the metre again into that of the first three lines, which de- 
scribe her delight in her deliverance from her dungeon. 
The alternate dactyles and trochees sometimes terminate 
with a supernumerary (cat.alectic) syllaole, as ttttt, ©ct)vitt/ 
©ruft, htft. 



CH. 4. § 2.] VERSIFICATION. 273 



§ 2. Of Consonance. 

Under the word consonance we comprehend three princi- 
pal resemblances between successive sounds of the language, 
viz. rhyme, assonance, and alliteration. 

1. Rhyme consists in the identity of certain vowels and 
consonants. This resemblance may exist between one, 
or two, or three syllables occurring in different words ; as, 
©c^tlt), shield, and 95ilt>, image; ti'hzw, life, and gt'ben, to 
give; min'uigltct)/ lovely, and in'ttigUd), intimately. 

In a rhyme of more than one syllable the last may some- 
times consist of a monosyllabic word ; as, 

©ei'nen SOlei'fler 
kUbt unt> prei|t et\ 

He loves and praises his master. 

The rhyming syllables ought to be of the same quantity ; and 
in rhymes of several syllables the principal emphasis should 
be on the first. Therefore we cannot make jtcr&'lid), mor- 
tal, rhyme with erMtd)', imperfect of Ct*6(ci'd)en, to grow pale ; 
but we may make it rhyme with Ctblid), hereditary. 

The rhyme is commonly found at the end, but sometimes 
(particularly in ancient German poetry) also in the course of 
the verse ; as, 

2Iu$ sflacfet erroacfct' 
2>et Oon'nc spvacfct. 

Out of the night awakes the splendor of the sun. 

In a monosyllabic rhyme the beginning of the rhyming 
syllables should not be the same, unless the two words ex- 
press quite a different meaning. In rhymes of more than 
one syllable this remark applies to the first of those syllables. 
— Thus we cannot make mefy'VCU, to augment, rhyme with 
fcmnefy'ven, to augment : but it is allowable to say, 

3e't>er cb'Ie SOtenfd) bet-clj're 

Ste'fen SOtdr'tym ber tyflidn imb O^'re ! 

Let every noble man revere this martyr of duty and honor. 



£74 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III. 

We must notice here two kinds of impure rhymes which 
occur even in the works of the best poets. They consist in 
making to rhyme together vowels or consonants of a similar 
but not the same sound. With respect to vowels, we remark 
as being made to rhyme together, e, a, and o ; i and u ; ei and 
CU ; as, ©e^Ctt, blessing, tt&'gen, to weigh, and mo'gen, to be 
able ; $eint>, enemy, and gxeitttt), friend. In regard to con- 
sonants, the sounds of t> and t are particularly liable to be 
confounded ; as, thus gtl'fceV/ fields, and "Sel'tetr, palfrey. 

2. Assonance consists in the rhyming of the vowels alone, 
and consequently differs from the full rhyme by the dis- 
crepancy between the consonants ; as, milt)/ mild, and ^Ut&/ 
child ; ixz'bz, love, and grie'&e, peace. 

Since assonance does not so evidently combine several 
verses as rhyme, it is commonly oftentimes repeated, so that 
frequently the same assonance connects a whole poem. — As- 
sonance is not so frequently used as rhyme. 

3. Alliteration consists in the repetition of certain conso- 
nants particularly at the beginning of words. It is most com- 
mon that the same consonant which begins the first verse, is 
repeated in the course of the same, and then at the beginning 
pf the next verse. Example, 

SBofyl in &e$ SBat'fces 
<2BU'i>eftcr Sin'famfeit 
£6rt' id) Den ^arfentlattg, 
QbxV id) U\\ JJM&'ruf. 

Indeed in the wildest solitude of the forest I heard the 
sound of the harps, I heard the call of the heroes. 

Alliteration, which was common in the old Scandinavian 
poetry, is now rarer than the two other kinds of consonance. 



APPENDIX, 



I. 

As an exercise in reading and translating for beginners, we 
add here a passage of the New Testament, from the German 
version of Leander Van Esz. 



acts ix. 1 — 28. 

l. @au'lu£ fdjnanfc'te nod) ^att) nnb SD?orb nri'ber i>ie 
3ftng'er be$ £errn, ging %u sent Merpriefter. 

% Unb lies fid) fcon ttnn 93ott'mac6t$briefe nad) 2)ama$'ftt$ 
an Die ©nnago'gen ge'ben, haft wl'dw er SDUn'ner nnb 
graven, Die er ate Endanger bie'fer Jefy're fan'De, gebnn'Den 
nad) Sern'falem fitfy'ven fSnn'te. 

3. 2Uif Die'fer SRei'fe, fc()on na'fye bei ©ama^'ftts, umtfrafjftc 
tint p(6§'(td) ein Sid)t font ^im'mef. 

4. 6-v jtel anf t»ie Sr'be, nnb fyov'te ei'ne ©ttm'me, fcie $n tlnn 
fprad) : @anl, ©ant, rcarnm' DerfotgjV bn mid) ? 

5. grfprad): £err! wet- M|t tm? ©er £evr fag'te: 3d) 
Inn 3e'fn$, Den bit Derfol'gefl. ®$ roirb bir fdjroer roer'ben, 
roi'ber ben ©tadyel aneTjnfdtfagen. 

6. i&t'ternb nnb angjl'tooU foracfc er ; £err, n>a$ nnlltt bu, 
fcaficftt&unfoU? 

7. 2)er £err anfroortete itnn : ©te'fye anf, nnb ge'fye in bie 
©tabt, Da nnrb bir gefagt' roer'ben, wag t>u ttfun fotf|r. 25e= 
jtnrjt' jtan'ben fei'ne SKei'fegefafyrten ba; benn fie fyoYten jroar 
i>it ©ttm'me, fa'fyen a'kr SRie'manb. 

8. ©an'Ins jtanb von ber ^r'be anf, fonn'te a'ber, ba er bie 
2lngen of'nete, STie'tnanb fe'tyen. £>a nafy'roen fte i(nt an ber 
£anb, nnb lei' wen tfyn nad) ©amas'ftts.. 

9. £>rei Sa'ge lang fafy er md)t, nnb nabm rce'ber ©peife 
nod) Sranf jn fid). 

10. Stun war ju 3)ama$'ftts ein Sfmg'ev, Sda'mentf 2foani'* 
a$; $n bem fprad) ber £m in ei'ner £rfd)ei'nnng : 2(nani'a$! 
£r fprad) : £evr, t)m bin id). 



276 APPENDIX. 

11. SD'afag'tt hu £err ju iftm: @eft y nuberjug'fidj in bit 
fo'gcnanntc gera'De ©tra'fe unD evfttn'Dige Did) in 3u'DaS <&au's 
fe nacl) et'nem ©att'lug Don Slar'fus ; Denn e'fcen jejt bc'tet Die'* 
fer SDTann, 

12, UnD ft at in ei'ner ©rfcftehumg ei'nen SD?ann, tfta'mcns 
2diaiu'as, ju fid) fterein'fommen gefc'^en, Der iftm oie Jpan'De 
aafiegt, mn iftn roie'Der fe'ftenD ju madyeu. 

is. ^nani'as crroic'Derte 3ftm: £m*, es fta'beu mir ^ie'fe 
t)on Die fern SDtan'nc eqaftlt', roie t»ie{ 236'feS er Dei'uen <&ei'lt» 
gcu ju ieru'falcm ju'goffigt ; 

14. Uni> and) ftier ftat a* Don t)en Merpriejtern ^olftnadjt, 
'itt'Ic in 35an'Dc ju le'gen, Die Dci'nen Sta'men au'rufeti. 

15. 2)er £crr fprad) ju iftm: (Se'fte nttr ft tit ; e'ben Die'fer 
i\\ mil* cin atts'erlefeneg SEDeff jcug, mid) unter J^ei'bcn, Dor 
Sto'nigcn nut) ben Stin'Dern Sfracte befrmnt' ju mad)'en. 

16. 2)enn id) roer'Dc iftm jet-gcn, n>ie»icl' er fur mei'ncn 9ft a'* 
men lei'Dcn foil. 

17. 2tnant'as ging af'fo tjin, Urn in Dag £aus, feg'te iftm 
tie ipan'oe auf nnD fag'fe : SBnt'Dcr ©aid ! Der £crr, (3e'fu$, 
tier Mr auf Dent '3£e'gc, ben Du fa'mejt, erfd)ien') tyat mid) ge- 
fauDt', Damtt' Du roie'Der fe'ftenb unD Doll De£ ftet'Itgen (Set'ftetf 
roer'Dcjt. 

18. ©egteicft' roar's, rote roenn ©dntp'pen Don fci'nen 2fu's 
gen fie'leu; er ftmn'te roie'Der fe'ftcn, jtaub auf nnD Uc^ fid) 
tau'fcn. 

19. £>ann ag er, nnD jldrr'te fid) roie'Der. $lcd) ei'nige ta'ge 
Mtcb er bci Den ^ung'ern jn 2)amaS v ftu> ; 

20. UnD fogleid)' pre'otgte er 3c'fum in Den ©mtago'gen, Dag 
cr Der ©oft it ©ot'tes fei. 

21. IXi'U, Dtc tftn ftov'tcn, erttann'tcn nnD fpra'd)en: 3jt er 
eS uid)t, Der jtt 3\ru'fa(em Dcrtii'gni rooU'te Die, roc('d)e je'nen 
Sfta'meit an'rufen '( 3 a gera'De ba'ruin if r er ftiefter' gfc'fom'men, 
nm )k in ^crftaft' jit neft'men, unD an Die O'bcrpncfler ju fiber* 
iie'fent. 

22. ©an'hi^ geroann' iuDeffen im'mer meftr an ^raft, fo Daj.j 
er Die 3'u'Den, Die ]u SXvmae'ftii? rooftn'teu, ganj in ^Bevroir'ruug 
fej'te, iiiDem er jtanD'ftaft bcftauv'cete : Dte'fcr t|t Sftrtf'rug. 

^3. Si'ne gerau'me $cit nad)fter' ijki'mx Die ^u'Deu $i<\tb 
gufam'meu, iftn urn jttbringcn. 

24. Zi'ber ift'rc Ulacfe'iUUungeri rour'Den Dem ©auhig be- 
tuvat'. Snjroifdi'en fttclt man tag nnD €dad)t Die ^fto're be- 
fc^t', um iftn ju toD'teu. 

25. 2)a naft'mcn iftn Die 3ftWer ^^ SlactW nnD firfen tl;u 
in ct'nem Kov'b; mi v.; ^^>u a ^.iwb'. 



APPENDIX. 277 

26, 2) a er Ijicrauf nad) Scvu'falem fam, fmt'te ev fid) an Die 
^ang'et an'jufcbliefen ; a' bet* al'Ie fiircb'tetcn ifyn, gtanb'ten 
nid^r, Daft er eiii ^ung'ev fei. 

sr. 3>a uafym fid) SSai-'uabas fet'ner an, fitfyv'tc tfyn jn Den 
2lpof'teln unD erjdfjl'te ity'nen, n>ie cv anf fci'ner SHci'fc Den 
jpeim gcfe'tyen nnD Dag Die'fet* $u i'cjin gere'Det, nub rote firei's 
uiurtjrig cr ju SamaS'fm? fur Den Stamen 3c'fu fieij erfldrt' 
r/a'be. 

2. . 33on Dcr. 3'cit <m jranD cv |n 3cnt'fafcm in jjettrau'tjrm 
Itm'gange inic ity'ucu unD fccrfrut'toigtc fm'mutfyig ten SRa'men 
^c'j'u, Def Jpcvrn. 



II. 



FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 



©c'jl** Ocfpvdd)'. .F/fttf Dialogue. 

(Bu'tcn Sttov'a.en, ntcin £crr, or 

4?frfc SI. (i. e. the family Good morning, Sir, or Mr N 
name), grail 91, or Madame., Madam or Sirs. N. Mi<4 n' 
mem gran'lein, or 3toug'* 

_ fft SH. or Mademoiselle. 

®n'teu Jacv, meat £ert, K. Good day, Sir, Slq 

gutcnJt'l>cuK Good evening 

^tc3Urf)t. Goodnight. ° 

SBic beftn Den ©ie fttf ? How do>ou do ? 

gefcr »oW, ub Danf'e ^p'nen. Very well, I thank v 

3ct) ()orfe ©ie ftnD U>o^L J hope! you 

mtMvwljl. Notary we, 

f Jl UMg ' e Uid)t *" * feve not se ™ Von for a loner 

-y>> ^ time ^ 

^0 fdtD @ie gcroe'feu t Where'have you been ? 

24 J 



ou! 
ou. 



278 APPENDIX. 

3d) inn ttt spariS' geiuc'fen. I have been in Paris. 

<33ie fccftn'&et ftcf) 3l)r £crr How does your brother do * 

fdvwm ? 

&V i]\ Jtem'lid) tt>of)f. He is tolerably well. 

3d) glau'k, CV beftn't)Ct fid) I believe he is well. 

n>of?J. 

£u bcfant)' ftcl) gef tent 2t'ben&$ He was well last night. 

^ie beftu't)Cn fid) 3tyr JpCVt* How are your father and 

SSa'ter imfc 3j)'re grau mother? 

Wlut'ttv ? 

SDtei'ne SDtut'ter bejtn'Det fid) My mother is not well. 

nidjt roofyl. 

©ie befanD' ftct) geftem fntfy She was ill yesterday morn- 

nid)t rcofyl. ing. 

£>a£ tl}Ut mit (eit>. I am sorry for it. 



3»ci'te$ ©efpvdcfe'. Second Dialogue. 

3Batf*fil>ielf<p? J What o clock is it ? 

(£s ift cin itfyv. It is one o'clock. 

Q*S ijl JTO&ff Uf)i\ It is twelve o'clock. 

If '!» ?' l;f£f "*? 5W / If - ht is a quarter past twelve. 
Ss i|J cm 35itr tcl auf cuts, fir 

(Es itt balb fin Ubr. ) T • , lr . . , 

e« i|t balb dug. J It .s half past twelve. 

£s tjt Dret ^iev'tct auf einS. It wants a quarter of one. 

(£0 ijt cin ^Sicr'tel auf c-vet. It is a quarter past two. 

Q?6 i|t jroan'jig 93tinu'ten nad) It is twenty minutes past two. 

S(5 i\\ jwan'jig SOlimt'tcn foot It is twenty minutes to eight. 

ad)t. 
3Bte toicl iff e$ auf jet)tt ? How much does it want often ? 

&$ febft jetyn SDttnu'tcn ju" 

£s ifl funf jig amnu'ten auf ^ wants ten minutes of ten . 

je|u. 
(£$ ijl jefyn SDltnu'tcu toot 

J^tt. 

OODann ftnt> @te getom'men ? When did you come 1 



APPENDIX. 



279 



3d) fom un'gefdfyv urn bier 

Q;g fd)tug c'ben fte'ben t%. 
<Oat egfdjon gefd)la'gen? 
€g n?ivt> ball) ad)t fd)la'gen. 
2Bie bid fd)lagt eg jefct ? 
gg mug auf fceu ©ciblag neun 

fetu. 
Sag i|t 3t)'ve 3eit ju fnit^ 

jh'tcfen, md)t roafyv ? 



I came about four o'clock. 

It just struck seven o'clock. 
Has it already struck ? 
It will soon strike eight. 
What does it strike now? 
It must be about striking nine. 

That is your time for break- 
fasting, is it not? 



Srtt'te* (Sefprad)'. 

©ptred)'eu ©ie £>eutfd), mem 

£ en: ? 
3ft) fprccfc'e eg eiu roe'nig. 
3d) toefjle^e eg bef'fet* a(g id) 

«g fpred)'eu fanu. 
©precfc'en t£>ie mit mil*. 
SSerftc'fyen @ie mid) ? 
©pved)'en ©ie mit ifym, (t()i\) 
^a'be id) ridj'tig aug'gefpvod); 

en? 
<£5ie fpved)'en febv gut ©eutfdj. 
©int> ©ie in 2>eutfd)'(ant> ge- 

we'jen ? 
Sftein, nie'malg. 
9GBte lang'e fya'bcn ©ie ge- 

fernf ? 
gunf Stto'nate. 
2)ag ijt nuv ei'ne fur'j? Beit ; 

id) nmn'fcete mid), Dag ©ie 

fd)on fo gut fpred)'en. 
SSerjte'tyen ©ie m$ ©ie (e'= 

fen? 
3d) verjte'fye mefyv atg id) re'-- 

ben fann. 
QBie nen'nen ©ie Sag auf 

©eutfefr ? 
*apfen ©ie ung Seutfd) fprecfe'* 

en. 



Third Dialogue, 

Do you speak German, Sir ? 

I speak it a little 

I understand it better than I 

can speak it. 
Speak with me. 
Do you understand me? 
Speak with him, (her). 
Did I pronounce right ? 

You speak German very well. 
Have you been in Germany ? 

No, never. 

How long have you been 
learning? 

Five months. 

This is but a short time ; I 
wonder you speak so well 
already. 

Do you understand what you 
read? 

I understand more than I can 
speak. 

What do you call that in Ger- 
man ? 

Let us speak German. 



280 



APPENDIX. 



Sag ift tin gn'teg s Ditt'tel eg 

ju fer'nen. 
%ytit rocm fprcdj'en ©ie ? 
<2Bas fa'gen ©ie ? 
^DBo^on' fpt*ed)'en @ie ? 
©predy'en @ie jit miv ? 
©prcd)'en @ie einrce'nig ton's 

tcr. 



That is a good way to learn 

it. 
With whom do you speak 1 
What do you say 1 
Of what do you speak 1 
Do you speak to me 1 
Speak a little louder. 



25iet w teg ©efprad)'. 

<2Bas ift eg fur SBct'tci- ? 
gg tft fd)en jfebo'ttcg) SBet'ter. 
@djeint t>te ©on'nc ? 
3a, mem £m, unt> eg tjl fc(;r 

warm. 
Sag ( 2Bct / tct- ift Dm gan'jeu 

c £ag fd)on gcroefen. 
QBie tjl Dag defter ? 
(£g ift nid)t ju warm nub ni# 

Sag c 333et / tcr l)at ftd) gedu'- 

fceit. 
(£g tjt fc l)i* roiu'&ig. 
Sie aBof'fcit fino fcr;v Dicf. 
3d) fftrd/te nut: rca-'oen SHe'= 

gen 6efom'men. 
(£g vie'felt, eg nnri> reg'uen. 
£g n>ir& balt> reg'uen. 
G;g fangt an ju reg'uen, fc&nei's 

en. 
£g i|r fd)fed)'teg (fd)lcd)t) 

3Beftcr. 
£g tjl fdjmut'jig. 
(£g tjt troc'fen, nag, veg'nid)t, 

jmvmtfd), rcin'big, Devon'* 

t>crlid)eg defter. 
Sag SBet'ter ftart fid) auf. 
Sie'fer SKe'geu tr>it*b bait) fcor* 

u'ber fein. 
3Bir roev'fceti Son'ner fya'ben. 
Ser Son'ner rode. 



Fourth Dialogue. 

What kind of weather is it? 

It is fine weather. 

Does the sun shine 1 

Yes, Sir, and it is very warm. 

The weather has been fine the 

whole day. 
How is the weather ? 
It is neither too warm nor too 

cold. 
The weather has changed. 

It is very windy. 

The clouds are very thick. 

I fear we shall have rain. 

It drizzles, it will rain. 

It will soon rain. 

It begins to rain, to snow. 

It is bad weather. 

It is dirty (weather). 
It is dry, wet, rainy, stormy, 
windy, changeable weather. 

The weather clears up. 
This rain will soon be over. 

We shall have some thunder. 
The thunder roars. 



APPENDIX. 



281 



gnnf te$ ©cfprdd)'. 

3Bo ge'fyen ©te fyin ? 

3d) ge'fye nad) Son'Don. 

<£r gefyt nad) 2)eutfdy(ant>. 

^IBo reofynt er jcgt ? 

(£r roofynt in t>ev @tat)t £an= 

no'Der. 
£r ge(;t Dnrd) (it&er) grant"* 

reid) nad) Der ©d)roei$. 

£r i|t in (ju) STea'yef, SKom, 

SBten gcwe'fen. 
COTei'nc ©djroef'ter ijt in (jn) 

SKom geroefen. 
SDftin SBrn'Der war in tfmjter* 

Dam' gcroe'fen. 
3d) ge'fye anf Das $anD. 
2Bo f om'mcn ©ie fyer ? 
3d) f om'tne Don Dem San'De. 
3d) fom'me Don (an$) Der 

©taDt. 
3d) fom'me ans (Don) Der 

©tra'fe. 
3Btr fom'mcn Don Der 236r'fe. 
3d) ge'fye nad) £an'fe. 
3c() fom'me ans (Don) Der 

£ir'd)e. 
©ie ge^t in i>ie £ir'dje. 
£r gefyt nad) Jpan'fe. 
3d) fom'me ans Dem jSim'mer. 
©ie fftmmt ans Der ©tit'be. 
3rf) gc'l}e in Die ftam'mer, in 

Die ftucfc'e, in Den £effer, 

©ie ftnD in Der ftam'mer, in 
Der fffccb'e, in Dem teller, 
in Dem £o'fe, k. 



Ff//A Dialogue. 

Where are you going 1 

I am going to London. 

He is going to Germany. 

Where does he live now? 

He lives in the town of Hano- 
ver. 

He is going through (by the 
way of) France to Switzer- 
land. 

He has been in (at) Naples, 
Rome, Vienna. 

My sister has been at Rome. 

My brother had been in Am- 
sterdam. 
I am going to the country. 
Where do you come from 1 
I come from the country. 
I come from (out of) the city. 

I come out of (from) the 

street. 
We come from 'Change. 
I am going home. 
I come from church. 

She is going to church. 

He is going home. 

I come out of the room. 

She comes out of the parlour. 

I am going into the chamber, 

into the kitchen, into the 

cellar, &c. 
They are in the chamber, in 

the kitchen, in the cellar, 

in the yard, &,c. 



III. 



GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS. 



ue. 



Zntw. . . . 
2C.S. . . . 
2lufL .... 
EuSg. . . . , 
ausg. . . . 

55 

£. Sap., or £ap. 
3) 



D. 



i>. i. . . 
fcergf. . . 
£i>. . . 
(Sxt*. . . 
f. or folg. 
f. . . . 
gr. . . 
geb. . . 
gejt. . . 
@r. , . 

^.@. . 
i?t\ £rn. . 

3.e. . 

I . . . 

50T. or SDtaj. 
SKfcr. . . 
9T. ©. . 
31.*.. . 



2CttttO e^ijti, . . 


in the year of our 




Lord. 


ZCntroort, . . . 


. answer. 


Mm lament, 


Old Testament. 


mtflage, . . . 


. edition. 


2(u$ga6e, . . . 


edition. 


ausgenommen, . 


. except. 


23ud), 23ani>, . 


book, volume. 


(Eapitel, or £apitel, 


chapter. 


doctor, . . . 


. Doctor. 


H$ fyeijf, . . 


that means. 


t>ag t|t, . . . 


. i. e., viz. 


fcergfeidjen, . . 


of this kind. 


©bangelium, . . 


. Gospel. 


£ttetr, . . . 


your. 


folgent>, (sing.) . 
folgeufce, {jplur.) 


i the following. 


grau, .... 


. Lady, wife. 


geboren, . . . . 


born. 


gcjtotben, . . . 


. died. 


©vofcfcen, . . 


a coin in Germany, 




(groat.) 


tycitige @c()vift, . 


. Holy Scriptures. 


£crr, £enm, . . 


Mr., Sir, Sirs, Messrs. 


3efu$ £f;njhtf, . 


. Jesus Christ. 


lies, 


read. 


3DTajc|Ut, . . . 


. Majesty. 


SDtanufcnpt, . . 


Manuscript. 


9Tad)fd)vift, • . 


. Postscript. 


9teue$ lament, 


New Testament. 



APPENDIX. 



283 



efc. . 
SHec. . 
SRt&fc. 
<g>. . . 

©. or f. 

@r. . 
^?ltr.. . 
it. a. m. 
u. D. g. 
u.f.f. 
u. f. m. 
w. f, ID. 
2J. . 
i>. . . 
3. . . 
|.& 



cm, .... 

SHecenfent, . . . 

©cite, . . . . 
fie^e, .... 
©etne SKajejUt, . 
@anct, . . . 
Xfaln, . . . . 
uno an&ere mefyr, 
unt> fcerg(eicl)en, 
uno fo fort or fenter, 
unt> fo met;?, 
unt> fo wetter, 
SZSerS, . . . . 
fcon, .... 
3cife, . . . . 
jum 25eifpiel, 
jum £rempef, . 



or. 

reviewer, critic. 

rixdollar. 

page (of a book). 

see, vide. 

His Majesty. 

Saint. 

dollar. 

&c., farther. 

and the like. 

&c. 



verse, 
of, from, 
line. 

for example. 



CAMBRIDGE: 
CHARLES FOLSOM, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY. 









MONS. BUGARD'S 
PRACTICAL TRANSLATOR, 



TO STUDENTS AND TEACHERS OF THE 
FRENCH LANGUAGE. 

French Practical Translator ; or, easy method of learning to translate 
French into English. Containing t. a treatise on French pronuncia- 
tion; ii. the. general principles for the use of the parts of speech, and 
directions for finding them in any dictionary ; in. a collection of in- 
teresting exercises, the difficulties of which are calculated gradually 
to increase with the knowledge of students ; iv. a vocabulary of the 
different words used in the exercises. Second Edition. 1837. 

This is the" title of a book intended to teach how to 
translate French into English, the plan of which is en- 
tirely new, and calculated to promote the improvement 
of those who use it, more than any that has been offered 
to the public. With it students can at Jirst commence 
the translation of the exercises it contains, after having 
merely read the French Grammar, which they practically 
learn in translating, without being obliged to commit it 
to memory. 

The rapid sale of its first edition shows evidently that 
the want of such a book must have been felt, and that it 
ha3 proved to be very acceptable, as may be seen from 
the following recommendations, which we respectfully 
present to the public with its second edition. 



OF THE NEW PRACTICAL TRANSLATOR. 



Sir, 



Boston, May 5, 1835. 



I have examined the sheets you put into my hands, and am happy to say, that I 
think your work will be found, both by teachers and pupils, a valuable auxiliary 
in the acquisition of the French language. The manner in which you have 
obviated the principal difficulties in the first lessons, and the general plan of the 
work, make it a very useful first book for those who are old enough to study with 
some degree of judgment and discrimination. 

Very respectfully, yours, T. B. HAYWARD. 

Mons. Bugard. 



RECOMMENDATIONS. 



Temple-place, May 6, 1835. 
Dear Sir, 

I have examined the sheets of the New Practical Translator., and believe that 
the work will be very useful as an introduction to the translating French into 
English, as it affords an easy explanation of most of the difficulties that are apt to 
embarrass beginners. 

Yours, respectfully, GEO. B. EMERSON. 

Mons. Bugard. 



Boston, May 8th, 1835. 
Dear Sir, 

I have long felt the want of a " First Book" for beginners in the French Lan- 
guage, upon the progressive principles which you have adopted, and shall show 
how sincere I am in this recommendation of your undertaking, by the immediate 
introduction of the " New Practical Translator" into my school. 

Respectfully yours, GEORGE FOWLE, 

Teacher of the Boys' Monitorial School. 



Mons. Bustard. 



Sir, 



Boston, May 8th, 1835. 



T have looked over the sheets of your " New Practical Translator," and am 
much pleased both with the plan of the work, and with the style of its execution. 
It must form a valuable accession to the means already within the reach of the 
young for acquiring a knowledge of the French Language ; and, if it finds with 
the public that measure of favour which it merits, I am satisfied that you will 
have no cause to complain that your labours, in this department of instruction, 
have not been well received or well rewarded. 

V*ry respectfully, yrs. JOHN PIERPONT. 

Mons. Bugard. 

Boston, May 11, 1835. 
Dear Sir, 
I have examined attentively the plan of your « New Practical Translator," and, 
to some extent, the mode in svhich the plan has been executed. The work appears 
to me to be well adapted to promote the improvement of those who are commenc- 
ing the study of the French Language. The real difficulties, in the progress of 
the student, he is furnished with the means of overcoming, while such as will 
yield to moderate industry, he is judiciously left to surmount by his own efforts. 



Very respectfully, your friend, 
Mons. B. F. Bugard. 



E. A. ANDREWS. 



Brown University, May 11th, 1835. 
I have examined, with care, « The New Practical Translator," by Mr. Bugard 
The plan and execution of the author appear to me judicous, and I am acquainted 
Uh no elementary work, so well adapted for —-«^^2R5 f 
Fiench language. ^ ^ ^ ^ . ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ 



RECOMMENDATIONS. 



Dear Sir, 



May 13th, 1835. 



I have examined with much pleasure the sheets of the French Practical Trans- 
lator, which you were kind enough to send me. As far as I am able to judge, I 
should think it would be found a very useful auxiliary to the French instructer. I 
concur fully in the opinion of the work, expressed by Mr. T. B. Hay ward. 

Very respectfully, your obdt. servant, F. P. LEVERETT. 

Mons. B. F. Bugard. 



Mons. B. F. Bugard, 
Sir — It gives me much pleasure to express the high opinion I entertain of the 
"New French Practical Translator," as an introduction to the study of the French 
language. The plan of it is very judicious. While those difficulties are removed 
which perplex and discourage young learners, it demands sufficient exercise of the 
pupil's own powers to keep alive the interest arising from the consciousness of 
successful effort. 

Very respectfully, yours, JOS. HALE ABBOT. 

Mount Vernon Street, Oct 20, 1835. 



Mr De^r Sir, School for Moral Discipline, Oct. 28th, 1835. 

T should be happy if I could from my own knowledge give you a recommenda- 
tion of your book, the Practical Translator. But, from my own little knowledge 
and from the most thorough information I can obtain, I am satisfied that we have 
no so valuable book of its kind for the study of the French language, and have 
therefore introduced it into my school. 

I am, dear sir, very respectfully, your friend, E. M. P. WELLS. 

Mons. B. F. Bugard. 



Dear Sir, Jamaica Plain, Nov. 21st, 1835. 

1 have examined with much pleasure the new French Practical Translator, 
which you were so kind as to send me. I consider it a very valuable book for be- 
ginners, as it removes many difficulties, which have heretofore embarrassed them. 
I shall immediately introduce it into my school. 

Very respectfully yours, STEPHEN M. WELD. 

Mons. B. F. Bugard. 



Salem Classical School. 
Mons. B. F. Bugard, Salem) Dec . 5 th, 1835. 

^ Dear Sir,— It gives me great pleasure to add my testimonial in favour of your 
« New Practical Translator," to the many you have already received. I have 
used the work with a great many pupils in this institution, and find it a very ex- 
cellent and interesting manual. It is of great service in removing the difficulties 
wh.ch beginners encounter at the commencement of their French Studies I wish 
you much success in introducing it into our Schools and Academies. 

Truly yr . friend, H. K. OLIVER. 



RECOMMENDATIONS. 



Fiom the Professor of Languages at Washington College, Connecticut. 
Dear Sir, Washington Colleoe, Hartford, Dec. 3], 1835. 

lam not sufficiently acquainted with French to speak with much confidence, but 
so far as I can judge, The New Practical Translator is a work conceived, as to its 
plan, with great ingenuity and judgement, and executed with ability and scholarship. 
— r put it in the hands of the Rev. Dr. S. F. Jarvis, an accomplished scholar in 
the modern languages and Professor of Oriental Literature in our College. He 
speaks of it with decided approbation. 
I am, dear sir, very truly, 

Your friend and obedient servant, 

WM. M. HOLLAND. 
Mons. B. F. Bugard. 



Boston, January 2d, 1837. 
It is with great pleasure that I express the high opinion I entertain of the 
French Practical Translator, of Mons. B. F. Bugard. Since [ have taught the 
French language, which is fifteen years, I can say that I never found a book so well 
calculated to promote the improvement of students. The plan of it is new and 
very judicious, since it presents the difficulties of translation in a gradual order, 
and teaches how to overcome them by the application of the rules of the French 
grammar, to which references are frequently given, thus requiring from the scholar 
that exercise of his powers, without which nothing can be impressed upon the 
mind. The French pieces it contains are not only acceptable, but even very highly 
interesting to young and grown persons of either sex. The advantages it presents 
in all respects, even in that of economy, are not to be found in any other work; 
and in recommending it to schools, academies and colleges, I think I confer a 
greater favour to their pupils and teachers than to its author. 

J. A- PEJLLETIER, 
Professor of the French Language. 



Cambridge, Harvard University, 16th January, 1837. 
Dear Sir, 

I have examined attentively the second edition of the " French Practical Transla- 
tor,'' and I have been extremely pleased with the judicious arrangement of the 
work. The admirable plan, too, which you have adopted, — saving the learner, at 
first, much of that time, which he is generally made to waste in the disagreeable and 
most uninteresting of all studies — grammar, — must, finally, leave him with a more 
thorough knowledge of French, than is commonly attained in the usual way. 
The book shows, evidently, to be the result of great labour and long experience in 
teaching; and it cannot fail, in my opinion, to prove a valuable auxiliary in the 
acquisition of that language. 

Your obedient servant, PIETRO BACHT, 

Instructer in Harvard University. 
Mom. B. F. Bugard. 



